Home
Teldat bintec W1002n
Contents
1. Fig 214 Monitoring gt WLAN gt Client Links Values in the Client Links list Field Description Client Link Description Shows the name of the client link AP MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the client link partner Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the cli ent link in question is active Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm Shows the received signal strength in dBm Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this client link in Mbps Client Link Details You can use the P icon to open an overview of further details of the client links WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links ClientLinks Client Management PTOS Automatic Refresh Interval foo Seconds Apply p AP MAC Address Up Time Signal dBm RSSM1 RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm SNR dB Data Rate mbps Od 20h 42m 59s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rate Tx Packets Rx Packets 802 11a b g 54 0 0 48 0 0 36 0 0 24 0 0 18 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 9 0 0 6 0 0 5 5 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 802 11n 144 4 0 0 139 0 0 115 6 0 0 86 7 0 0 72 2 0 0 65 0 0 57 8 0 0 43 3 0 0 28 9 0 0 21 7 0 0 14 4 0 0 T2 0 0 Total 0 0 Back Fig 215 Monitoring gt WLAN gt Client Links gt Values in the Client Links list Field Description AP MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the client link partner Uptime Shows
2. Fig 192 External Reporting gt Syslog gt Syslog Servers gt New The menu External Reporting gt Syslog gt Syslog Servers gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description IP Address Enter the IP address of the host to which syslog messages are passed Level Select the priority of the syslog messages that are to be sent to the host Possible values e Emergency highest priority e Alert O Ceijed el O iaa e Warning e Notice e Information default value bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH Field Description e Debug lowest priority Syslog messages are only sent to the host if they have a higher or identical priority to that indicated i e at syslog level Debug all messages generated are forwarded to the host Facility Enter the syslog facility on the host This is only required if the Log Host is a Unix computer Possible values loca10 7 The default value is 1o0ca10 Timestamp Select the format of the time stamp in the syslog Possible values e None default value No system time indicated e Time System time without date e Date amp Time System time with date Protocol Select the protocol for the transfer of syslog messages Note that the syslog server must support the protocol Possible values e UDP default value TCP Type of Messages Select the message type Possible values e System a
3. Dropdown menus Full Autonegotiation E Full Autonegotiation x Full Autonegotiation v Click the arrow to open the list Select the required option using 5 Access and configuration Teldat GmbH the mouse Internal lists e g Remote IP Address Netmask 255 255 255 0 m Add Click ada gt A new list entry is created Enter the correspond ing data If list input fields remain empty these are not saved when you confirm with OK Delete the entries by clicking the icon Display of options that are not available Options that are not available because they depend on the selection of other options are generally hidden If the display of these options could be helpful for a configuration de cision they are instead greyed out and cannot be selected Important Please look at the messages displayed in the sub menus These provide information on any incorrect configurations Warning symbols Symbol Meaning O This symbol appears in messages referring you to settings that were made with the Setup Tool A This symbol appears in messages referring you to the fact that values were entered or selected incorrectly Pay particular attention to the following message Warning Changes not supported by the Setup Tool If you change them with the GUI this can cause inconsistencies or malfunctions Therefore it is recommended that the configuration is continued with the Setup Tool 5 3 1 3 GUI Menus The conf
4. 1023 e Server Entry of server port numbers 5000 32767 e Clients 1 Entry of client port numbers 1024 4999 e Clients 2 Entry of client port numbers 32768 65535 e Not priviliged Entry of unprivileged port numbers 1024 65535 Enter the appropriate values for the individual port or start port of a range in Port and for a range the end port in to Port Destination Port Only for Layer 4 Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the destination port Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description First select the port number range Possible values Any default value The route is valid for all port numbers Single Enables the entry of a port number Range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers Privileged Entry of privileged port numbers 0 1023 Server Entry of server port numbers 5000 32767 Clients 1 Entry of client port numbers 1024 4999 Clients 2 Entry of client port numbers 32768 65535 Not priviliged Entry of unprivileged port numbers 1024 65535 Enter the appropriate values for the individual port or start port of a range in Port and for a range the end port in to Port DSCP TOS Value Select the Type of Service TOS Possible values Ignore default value The type of service is ignored DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format DSCP
5. 49 3 Seconds 60 Seconds Enabled oK Cancel Fig 52 System Management gt Remote Authentication gt TACACS gt New The System Management gt Remote Authentication gt TACACS gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Authentication Type Server IP Address TACACS Secret Priority Displays which TACACS function is to be used The value cannot be changed Possible values e Login Authentication Here you can define whether the current TACACS server is to be used for login authentication to your device Enter the IP address of the TACACS server that is to be re quested for login authentication Enter the password to be used to authenticate ana if applic able encrypt data exchange between the TACACS server and the network access server your device The maximum length of the entry is 32 characters Assign a priority to the current TACACS server The server with the lowest value is the one used first for TACACS login 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Description authentication If no response is given or access is denied only if Policy Non authoritative the entry with the next highest priority is used The available values are 0 to 9 the default value is 0 Entry active Select whether this server is to be used for login authentication The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by defaul
6. IP Address Netmask wer gf Direction o O import O Export Metric Offset for Active Interfaces 0 i l Metric Offset for Inactive Interfaces la o C OK XK Cancel Fig 122 Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Filter gt New The menu Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Filter gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 13 Routing Protocols Teldat GmbH Field Description Interface Select the interface to which the rule to be configured applies IP Address Netmask Enter the IP address and netmask to which the rule is to be ap plied This address can be in the LAN or WAN The rules for incoming and outgoing RIP packets import or ex port for the same IP address must be separately configured You can enter individual host addresses or network addresses Direction Select whether the filter applies to the export or import of routes Possible values e Import default value e Export Metric Offset for Active Select the value to be added to the route metric if the status of Interfaces the interface is up During export the value is added to the ex ported metric if the interface status is up Possible values are 16 to 16 The default value is 0 Metric Offset for Inact Select the value to be added to the route metric if the status of ive Interfaces the interface is dormant During export the value is added to the exp
7. Netmask Only for Network Configuration Static Enter the corresponding netmask Local IP Address Only for Network Configuration Static Enter the local IP address This IP address must be identical for all the Ethernet ports in a network DHCP Client on Inter Only for Network Configuration DHCP face Here you can select an Ethernet interface on your router which is to act as the DHCP client You need this setting for example if your provider s router is being used as the DHCP server You can choose from the interfaces available to your device however the interface must be a member of the drop in group ARP Lifetime Determines the time period for which the ARP entries will be held in the cache The default value is 3600 seconds DNS assignment via The gateway can modify DHCP packets which pass through the DHCP drop in group and identify itself as an available DNS server Possible values e Unchanged default value e Own IP Address Exclude from NAT Here you can take data traffic from NAT DMZ Use this function to for example ensure that certain web serv ers in a DMZ can be accessed The function is enabled with Enabled Field Description The function is disabled by default Interface Selection Select all the ports which are to be included in the Drop In group in the network Add new entries with Add bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 13 Routing Protocols 13 1 RIP The
8. Test Ping Address Output ES Fig 187 Maintenance gt Diagnostics gt Ping Test You can use the ping test to check whether a certain host in the LAN or an internet address can be reached The Outputfield displays the ping test messages The ping test is launched by entering the IP address to be tested in Test Ping Address and clicking the Go button bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 19 1 2 DNS Test Ping Test DNS Test Traceroute Test DNS Test DNS Address Output Fig 188 Maintenance gt Diagnostics gt DNS Test The DNS test is used to check whether the domain name of a particular host is correctly re solved The Outputfield displays the DSN test messages The ping test is launched by en tering the domain name to be tested in DNS Address and clicking the Go button 19 1 3 Traceroute Test Traceroute Test Traceroute Address Output Fig 189 Maintenance gt Diagnostics gt Traceroute Test bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 19 Maintenance You use the traceroute test to display the route to a particular address IP address or do main name if this can be reached The Outputfield displays the traceroute test messages The ping test is launched by entering the IP address to be tested in Traceroute Address and clicking the Go button 19 2 Software 8 Configuration
9. e Import certificate default value e Delete certificate e SCEP Protocol Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Configuration Managementif Action Import config uration Select the protocol for the data transfer Possible values e HTTP default value e HTTPS TETP CSV File Format Only for Command Type Configuration 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description and Action Import configuration or Export config uration Select whether the file is to be sent in the CSV format The CSV format can easily be read and modified In addition you can view the corresponding file clearly using Microsoft Ex cel for example The function is enabled by default Remote File Name Only if Command Type Configuration Management For Action Import configuration Enter the name of the file under which it is saved on the server from which it is to be retrieved For Action Export configuration Enter the file name under which it should be saved on the serv er Local File Name Only for Command Type Configuration Management and Action Import configuration Re name configurationor Copy configuration At import renaming or copying enter a name for the configura tion file under which to save it locally on the device File Name in Flash For Command Type Configuration Management and Action Export configuration Select the file to be exported For Command Type Configuration Manag
10. Aggressive Cl Strict Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN r4402 Advanced Settings Autodetect v 30 Seconds Enabled oK Cancel Fig 142 VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles gt New The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Phase 1 IKE Parameters menu Field Description Description Proposals Enter a description that uniquely defines the type of rule In this field you can select any combination of encryption and message hash algorithms for IKE phase 1 on your device The combination of six encryption algorithms and four message hash algorithms gives 24 possible values in this field At least one proposal must exist Therefore the first line of the table can not be deactivated Encryption algorithms Encryption e 3DES default value 3DES is an extension of the DES al gorithm with an effective key length of 112 bits which is rated as secure lt is the slowest algorithm currently supported e Twofish Twofish was a final candidate for the AES Teldat GmbH Field Description Advanced Encryption Standard It is rated as just as secure as Rijndael AES but is slower Blowfish Blowfish is a very secure and fast algorithm Twofish can be regarded as the successor to Blowfish CAST CAST is also a very secure algorithm marginally slower than Blowfish but faster than 3DES DES DES is an older encryption algorithm which is rated as w
11. Download Select a certificate for signing SCEP communication The default value is Use CA Certificate i e the CA certificate is used RA Encrypt Certificate Only for Mode SCEP Only if RA Sign Certificate not Use CA Certificate If you use one of your own certificates to sign communication with the RA you can select another one here to encrypt com munication The default value is Use RA Sign Certificate i e the same certificate is used as for signing Password Only for Mode SCEP You may need a password from the certification authority to ob tain certificates for your keys Enter the password you received from the certification authority here Fields in the Subject Name menu Field Description Custom Select whether you want to enter the name components of the subject name individually as specified by the CA or want to enter a special subject name If Enabled is selected a subject name can be given in Sum mary with attributes not offered in the list Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c DE 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Description If the field is not selected enter the name components in Com mon Name E mail Organizational Unit Organization Loc ality State Province and Country The function is disabled by default Summary Only for Custom enabled Enter a subject name with attributes not offered in the list Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c
12. Hello Intervall Enter the interval in seconds between the sending of two L2TP HELLO messages These messages are used to keep the tun nel open The available values are 0 to 255 the default value is 30 The 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description value 0 means that no L2TP HELLO messages are sent Minimum Time Enter the minimum time in seconds that your device waits be between Retries fore resending a L2TP control packet for which it received no re sponse The wait time is dynamically extended until it reaches the Max imum Time between Retries The available values are 1 to 255 the default value is 1 Maximum Time Enter the maximum time in seconds that your device waits be between Retries fore resending a L2TP control packet for which it received no re sponse The available values are 8 to 255 the default value is 16 Maximum Retries Enter the maximum number of times your device is to try to re send the L2TP control packet for which is received no response The available values are 8 to 255 the default value is 5 Data Packets Se Select whether your device is to use sequence numbers for quence Numbers data packets sent through a tunnel on the basis of this profile The function is not currently used The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 16 2 2 Users A list of all configured interface L2TP partners is displayed in the VPN gt L2TP gt Users menu 16 2 2 1 New
13. If the class plan is new select the filter to be set at the first point of the class plan If the class plan already exists select the filter to be attached to the class plan Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description To select a filter at least one filter must be configured in the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter menu Direction Select the direction of the data packets to be classified Possible values Incoming Incoming data packets are assigned to the class Class ID that is then to be defined e Outgoing default value Outgoing data packets are as signed to the class Class ID that is then to be defined e Both Incoming and outgoing data packets are assigned to the class Class ID that is then to be defined High Priority Class Enable or disable the high priority class If the high priority class is active the data packets are associated with the class with the highest priority and priority O is set automatically The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Class ID Only for High Priority Class not active Choose a number which assigns the data packets to a class ZS Note The class ID is a label to assign data packets to specific classes The class ID defines the priority Possible values are whole numbers between 1 and 254 Set DSCP TOS value Layer 3 Here you can set or change the DSCP TOS value of the IP data packets based on the class Class ID that has
14. Lease Time Enter the length of time in minutes for which an address from the pool is to be assigned to a host After the Lease Time expires the address can be reassigned by the server The default value is 120 DHCP Options Specify which additional data is forwarded to the DHCP client Possible values for Option e Time Server default value Enter the IP address of the time server to be sent to the client Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description e DNS Server Enter the IP address of the DNS server to be sent to the client e DNS Domain Name Enter the DNS domain to be sent to the client e WINS NBNS Server Enter the IP address of the WINS NBNS server to be sent to the client e WINS NBT Node Type Select the type of the WINS NBT node to be sent to the client e TFTP Server Enter the IP address of the TFTP server to be sent to the client e CAPWAP Controller Enter the IP address of the CAPWAP controller to be sent to the client e URL provisioning server This option enables you to send a client any URL Use this option to send querying IP1x0 telephones the URL of the provisioning server if the telephones are to be provisioned automatically The URL then needs to take the form ht tp lt IP address of the provisioning serv er gt eg prov e Vendor Group Vendor Specific Information This enables you to send the client any manufacturer specific information in any text string Several entri
15. Only for Event Type Ping Test Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Enter the time in Seconds after which a ping must be resent The default value is 60 seconds Trials Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address as Unreacheable applies The default value is 3 Monitored Certificate Only for Event Type Certificate Lifetime Select the certificate whose validity should be checked Remaining Validity Only for Event Type Certificate Lifetime Enter the desired value for the remaining validity of the certific ate in percentage Fields in the Select time interval menu Field Description Time Condition For Event Type Time only First select the type of time entry in Condition Type Possible values Weekday Select a weekday in Condition Settings e Periods default value In Condition Settings select a par ticular period e Day of Month Select a specific day of the month in Condi tion Settings Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type Weekday Monday default value Sunday Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type Periods e Daily The initiator becomes active daily default value 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description e Monday Friday The initiator becomes active daily from Monday to Friday e Monday Saturday The initiator becomes active daily from Monday to
16. equal v Go Source IP Address Interface Join Prune State Uptime Expiry Timer Assert State Assert Winner IP Address View 20 per page Fitter in None v equal v Go Multicast Group Address Source IP Address Interface Uptime Join Prune State Expiry Timer Page 1 Fig 222 Monitoring PIM Interface Specific States Values in the Interface Specific States list Field Description View Select the desired view from the dropdown menu Are available A11 G I States S G I States and S G RPT States Values in the G States list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast group address InetAddressType is dress defined in the pimStarGAddressType object Interface Displays the name of the interface Indicates the status that results from the G Join Prune mes sages received on this interface This corresponds to the status of the Downstream Per Interface G State Machine in the PIM SM specification Join Prune State Uptime Indicates the timespan since the entry was generated by the local router Expiry Timer Displays the remaining time until the G Join State becomes invalid for this interface In the PIM SM specification this ad dress is named G Join Expiry Timer If the timer is deactiv ated it has the value 0 The value FFFFFFFF h stands for infin ite Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Field Description Assert State Displays the G Assert State for this interface This c
17. tion Answering machine AOC D AOC D E AOC E ARP Assignment Asynchronous ATM Attention tone Authentication Authorisation Auto Attendant Automatic callback Automatic callback on busy telephones announcements can be made as on an intercom You configure an analogue answering machine under Terminal Type Display during and at end of connection Advice of charge during end Display only at end of connection Address Resolution Protocol An external call can be signalled to internal subscribers The entries in the Day option and Night option can be different A method of data transmission in which the time intervals between transmitted characters can vary in length This allows computers and peripheral devices to intercommunicate without being synchron ised by clock signals The beginning and end of the transmitted characters must be marked by start and stop bits in contrast to synchronous transmission Asynchronous transfer mode Superimposing of an acoustic signal during a telephone call e g for call waiting Check on the user s identify Based on the identity authentication the user can access certain services and resources A system that forwards incoming calls Special feature on telephones By pressing a key or code the caller requests a call back from the engaged terminal If the subscriber you want is not at their desk or cannot take the call they are auto matically co
18. 14 Multicast dedicated host but rather a group i e during the routing of multicast packets the decisive factor is whether a recipient is in a logged in subnet In the local network all hosts are required to accept all multicast packets For Ethernet or FDD this is based on MAC mapping where the group address is encoded into the destina tion MAC address For routing between several networks the routers first need to make themselves known to all potential recipients in the subnet This is achieved by means of Membership Management protocols such as IGMP for IPv4 and MLP for IPv6 Membership Management protocol In IPv4 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a protocol that hosts can use to provide the router with multicast membership information IP addresses of the class D ad dress range are used for addressing An IP address in this class represents a group A sender e g Internet radio sends data to this group The addresses IP of the various senders within a group are called the source addresses Several senders with different IP addresses can therefore transmit to the same multicast group leading to a 1 to n rela tionship between groups and source addresses This information is forwarded to the router by means of reports In the case of incoming multicast data traffic a router can use this in formation to decide whether a host in its subnet wants to receive it Your device supports the current version IGMP V3 which
19. 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description quest Payloads end during IKE phase 1 are to be ignored The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Send Certificate Re Select whether certificate requests are to be sent during IKE quest Payloads phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Send Certificate Select whether complete certificate chains are to be sent during Chains IKE phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Deactivate this function if you do not wish to send the peer the certificates of all levels from your level to the CA level Send CRLs Select whether CRLs are to be sent during IKE phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Send Key Hash Pay Select whether key hash payloads are to be sent during IKE loads phase 1 In the default setting the public key hash of the remote end is sent together with the other authentication data Only applies for RSA encryption Activate this function with Enabled to sup press this behaviour 16 2 L2TP The layer 2 tunnel protocol L2TP enables PPP connections to be tunnelled via a UDP connection Your Teldat device supports the following two modes e L2TP LNS Mode L2TP Network Server for incoming connections only e L2TP LAC Mode L2TP Access Concentrator for outgoing connections only Note the following
20. 5 Go to Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt 6 Under Preshared Key enter bridgesecret for example 7 For Remote MAC Address enter the MAC address of the bridge to which your bridge is to set up a connection e g 00 a0 9 5a 42 53 8 Leave the default settings in all other fields 9 Click OK 10 Configure a bridge link on the remote device in the same way 11 Store the configuration using the Save configuration button above the menu naviga tion Your device is ready for operation when you have completed the configuration The configuration of the device and its integration into your network are now completed A 4 8 Software Update The range of functions of Teldat devices is continuously being extended These extensions are made available to you by Teldat GmbH free of charge Checking for new software ver sions and the installation of updates can be carried out easily with the GUI An existing in ternet connection is needed for an automatic update Proceed as follows 1 Go to the Maintenance gt Software Configuration menu 2 Under Action select Update System Software and under Source Location Latest Software from Teldat Server 3 Confirm with Go Currently installed Software poss V 9 1 Rev 1 IPSec from 2012 03 23 00 00 00 System Logic 1 0 ADSL Logic E74 2 53 Software and Configuration Options a IIA Action Upd
21. Field Description e Inactive OSPF is disabled for this interface Proxy ARP Mode Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of the specific L2TP partner Possible values e Inactive default value Deactivates Proxy ARP for this L2TP partner e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the L2TP partner is Up active or Dormant In the case of Idle your device only responds to the ARP request the connection is not set up un til someone actually wants to use the route e Up only Your device responds to an ARP request only if the status of the connection to the L2TP partner is Up active i e a connection already exists to the L2TP partner DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server und Secondary DNS Server and WINS Server Primary and Secondary from the L2TP partner or sends these to the L2TP partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 16 2 3 Options Tunnel Profiles Users Options Global Options UDP Destination Port 1701 UDP Source Port Selection O Fixed oK Cancel Fig 150 VPN gt L2TP gt Options The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Options menu Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description UDP Destination Port Enter the port to be monitored by the LNS on incoming L2TP tunn
22. Fields in the Forwarding Parameters menu Field Description Forward Select whether a host or domain is to be forwarded Possible values e Host default value e Domain Host Only for Forwarding Host Enter the name of the host to be forwarded The entry can also start with the wildcard e g teldat de If a name is entered without a full stop you complete with OK lt Default Domain gt is added Domain Only for Forwarding Domain Enter the name of the domain to be forwarded The entry can also start with the wildcard e g teldat de If a name is entered without a full stop you complete with OK lt Default Domain gt is added 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Forward to Select the forwarding destination requests to the name defined in Host or Domain Possible values e Interface default value The request is forwarded to the defined Interface DNS Server The request is forwarded to the defined DNS Server Interface Only for Forward to Interface Select the interface via which the requests for the defined Do main are to be received and forwarded to the DNS server DNS Server Only for Forward to DNS Server Enter the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS server 18 1 5 Cache In the Local Services gt DNS gt Cachemenu a list of all available cache entries is dis played Global Settings DNS Servers Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Auto
23. Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm SNR dB Signal to Noise Ratio in dB is an indicator of the quality of the bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Field Description wireless connection Values e gt 25 dB excellent e 15 25 dB good e 2 15 dB borderline e 0 2 dB bad Data Rate mbps Shows the current transmission rate of data received by this cli ent in mbps The following clock rates are possible IEEE 802 11b 11 5 5 2 and 1 mbps IEEE 802 11g a 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps If the 5 GHz frequency band is used the in dication of 11 5 5 2 and 1 Mbps is suppressed for IEEE 802 11b Rate Displays the possible data rates on the wireless module Tx Packets Shows the number of sent packets for the data rate Rx Packets Shows the number of received packets for the data rate 21 4 3 WDS In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt WDS menu current values and activities of the configured WDS links are displayed WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply WDS Table WDS Description Remote MAC Up Time Tx Packets Rx Packets Signal dBm RSSI RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Data Rate mbps wds1 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Od 20h 22m Os 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P wds1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 Od 20h 21m 9s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P Fig 210 Monitoring gt WLAN gt WDS Values in the WDS list Field Description WDS Description Shows th
24. Only displayed if an SD card is inserted In file name select the vms_wavfiles zip file that you wish to import e Export configuration with state information The active configuration from the RAM is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is dis played in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the desired file name Action Select the action you wish to execute After each task a window is displayed showing the other steps that are required Possible values e No Action default value e Import configuration Under Filename select a config uration file you want to import Please note Click Go to first load the file under the name boot in the flash memory for the device You must restart the device to enable it Please note The files to be imported must be in CSV format e Import language You can import additional language ver sions of the GUI into your device You can download the files to your PC from the download area at www teldat de and from there import them to your device e Update system software You can launch an update of the system software the ADSL logic and the BOOTmonitor Teldat GmbH 19 Maintenance Field Description e Export configuration The configuration file Current File Name in Flash is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location on your PC and
25. Reboot default value Your device is rebooted MIB SNMP The desired value is entered for a MIB variable Interface Status The status of an interface is modified e Wlan Status The status of an WLAN SSID is modified e Software Update A software update is initiated e Configuration Management A configuration file is loaded onto your device or backed up by your device e Ping Test Accessibility of an IP address is checked e Certificate Management A certificate is to be renewed deleted or entered e 5 GHz WLAN Bandscan A scan of the 5 GHz frequency band is performed e 5 8 GHz WLAN Bandscan A scan of the 5 8 GHz fre quency range is performed WLC New Neighbor Scan Only for devices with Wireless LAN Controller A Neighbor Scan is initiated in a WLAN net work controlled by the WLAN controller 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description e WLC VSS State Only for devices with Wireless LAN Con troller The status of a wireless network is modified Event List Select the event list you want which has been created in Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger Event List Condition For the selected chains of events select how many of the con figured events must occur for the operation to be initiated Possible values e Ali default value The operation is initiated if all events oc cur e One The operation is initiated if a single event occurs e None The operation is initiated if
26. Short Guard Interval Enable this function to reduce the guard interval time between transmission of two data symbols from 800 ns to 400 ns Short Retry Limit Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a frame with length less than or equal to the value defined in RTS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is dis carded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 7 Long Retry Limit Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a data packet of length greater than the value defined in RTS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is discarded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 4 Fragmentation Threshold Enter the maximum size as of which the data packets are to be fragmented i e split into smaller units Low values are recom mended for this field in areas with poor reception and in the event of radio interference Possible values are 256 to 2346 The default value is 2346 Cyclic Background Scanning Not all devices support this function You can enable the Cyclic Background Scanning function so that a search is run at regular intervals for neighbouring or rogue access points in the network This search is run without negatively impacting the function as an access point Enable or disable the function Cyclic Background Scanning Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is not activated by default 11 3 3 Wireless Networks
27. Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Statistics Show Transfer Totals Y Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Description en1 5 MAC Address 00 09 4f 5e db 66 IP Address Netmask NAT Disabled Tx Packets 0 Tx Bytes 0 Rx Packets 0 Rx Bytes 0 TCP Connections State Local Address Local Port Remote Address Remote Port Fig 205 Monitoring gt Interfaces gt Statistics gt p Values in the Statistics list Field Description Description Displays the name of the interface MAC Address Displays the interface text IP Address Netmask Shows the IP address and the netmask NAT Indicates if NAT is activated for this interface Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Tx Bytes Displays the total number of octets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Rx Bytes Displays the total number of bytes received Fields in the TCP Connections menu Field Description Status Displays the status of an active TCP connection Local Address Displays the local IP address of the interface for an active TCP connection Local Port Displays the local port of the IP address for an active TCP con nection Remote Address Displays the IP address to which an active TCP connection ex ists Remote Port Displays the port to which an active TCP connection exists 21 4 WLAN 21 4 1 WLANx In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt WLAN menu current values and activities of the WLAN inter face are displayed The values for wire
28. e Current Software from Teldat Server The file is on the official Teldat update server Only for Action Update system software Field Description e TFTP server The file is stored respectively on a TFTP server specified in the URL URL Only for Source Location HTTP server or TFTP server Enter the URL of the update server from which the system soft ware file is loaded or on which the configuration file is saved bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 12 Networking 12 1 Routes Default Route With a default route all data is automatically forwarded to one connection if no other suit able route is available If you set up access to the Internet you must configure the route to your Internet Service Provider ISP as a default route If for example you configure a cor porate network connection only enter the route to the head office or branch office as a de fault route if you do not configure Internet access over your device If for example you configure both Internet access and a corporate network connection enter a default route to the ISP and a network route to the head office You can enter several default routes on your device but only one default route can be active at any one time If you enter several default routes you should thus note differing values for Metric 12 1 1 IPv4 Routes A list of all configured routes is displayed in the Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Routes menu 12 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose t
29. 115200 Baud Permanently installed twisted pair only 10 100 mbps autosensing MDI MDIX 2x 10 100 Base T TX An alarm using relay is possible in the event of overtemperature or error potential free working contact 42 V AC 1A 30VDC2A Module slot for optical interface 100 mbps LWL Property Available sockets Serial interface V 24 Relay switching contact N O Ethernet interface Antennas Antenna connection Transmit Power WLAN Standards amp Guidelines Buttons Value Single Mode LC or LWL Multimode LC 1x 100 Base FX SX with SFP module 9 pin Sub D connector 42 V AC 1 A 30 V DC 2 A potential free software configurable switchable RJ45 socket RTNC socket max 100 mW 20 dBm EIRP R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 60950 1 IEC60950 EN 60950 22 EN 301489 1 EN301489 17 EN 55022 EN 300328 1 EN 301893 EN 302502 EN 50371 Medical equipment EN 60601 1 EN 60601 2 EN 55011 E1 mark vehicle licencing Reset and reset to ex work settings possible with two buttons 1x config reset 1x HW reset To ensure safe operation the WI series devices have a connection to earth The minimum cross section of the earth lead should be 1 5 mmX The distance between the device and the connection to earth should be as short as possible Fig 16 Connection to earth bintec WIx040n bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Installation Teldat GmbH 3 3 7 Reset If the configuration is incorrect or if
30. 5 5 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 802 11n 144 4 0 0 139 0 0 115 6 0 0 86 7 0 0 72 2 0 0 65 0 0 57 8 0 0 43 3 0 0 28 9 0 0 21 7 0 0 14 4 0 0 Ta 0 0 Total 0 0 Fig 213 Monitoring gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt Values in the Bridge Links list Field Description Bridge Link Descrip Shows the name of the bridge link tion Remote MAC Shows the MAC address of the bridge link partner bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the bridge link in question is active Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm Shows the received signal strength in dBm Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this bridge link in Mbps Rate For each of the specified data rates displays the values for Tx Packets and Rx Packets 21 4 5 Client Links In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt Client Links menu current values and activities of the con figured client links are displayed WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Client Link Table Client Link Description AP MAC Address Up Time Tx Packets Rx Packets Signal dBm RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Data Rate mbps WLAN sta1 0 Od 20h 41m 42s 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D Fo
31. BOD BootP Bps Glossary Central unit of wireless telephone devices There are two different types The simple base station is used to charge the handheld unit For special feature telephones the base station can also be used as a telephone the handheld unit is charged using separate charging stations ISDN connection that includes two basic channels B channels each with 64 kbps and one control and signalling channel D chan nel with 16 kbps The two basic channels can be used independ ently of each other for each service offered in the T ISDN You can therefore telephone and fax at the same time T Com offers the Ba sic Rate Interface as a point to multipoint or point to point connec tion Binary digit Smallest unit of information in computer technology Signals are represented in the logical states 0 and 1 You can define a restriction on external dialling for individual sub scribers The telephone numbers entered in the blacklist table can not be called by the terminals subject to dialling control e g entry 0190 would block all connections to expensive service providers Block based encryption algorithm An algorithm developed by Bruce Schneier It relates to a block cipher with a block size of 64 bit and a key of variable length up to 448 bits Bluetooth is a wireless transfer technology that can connect up dif ferent devices Bluetooth replaces cables to connect various devices e g Notebook PC PDA etc
32. Cancel If you do not want to save a newly configured list entry cancel this and any settings made by pressing Cancel OK Confirms the settings of a new entry and the parameter A changes in a list Go Immediately starts the configured action New Calls the sub menu to create a new entry Inserts an entry in an internal list Add y GUI buttons for special functions Button Position Import In the System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration Button Position menu and the System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs menu this button activates the sub menus for configuration of the certificate or CRL imports In the System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List menu this button activates the sub menu for the configuration of the certificate request Request Various icons indicate the following possible actions or statuses GUI symbols Symbol Position Deletes the list entry it y Displays the menu for changing the settings of an entry Displays the details for an entry Moves an entry A combo box opens in which you can choose the list entry that selected entry is to be placed in front of after Creates another list entry first and opens the configuration menu Sets the status of the entry to Inactive Sets the status of the entry to Active Indicates Dormant status for an interface or connection Indicates Up status for an interface or c
33. Chapter 6 Assistans ii Ge a dt Ge ea GS 79 Chapter 7 System Management 220004 80 71 Statusin sot te ont tg hte te dG yh ets Se we one ath tne ae 80 72 Global Settings 6 83 72 1 SM dd ge E Ad aed 83 72 2 Passwords ooo A a A a 86 7 2 3 Date and Time 87 72 4 System Licences a eo 92 73 Interface Mode Bridge Groups 048 94 73 1 INfeHACES vi a a do ae a Fae Ba ae o 96 74 Administrative Access 2 2 en 99 74 1 ACCESS te if als he Pe le ea EO Pt ei evs 99 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 10 1 1 Radio Settings e loba oie da hk ee 147 10 1 2 Wireless Networks VSS 0 162 10 1 3 WODS LIKS ios o oe A A 171 10 1 4 Clienti Link 4 sce on ak hoe OR a Rohe a we Re 174 10 1 5 Bridge LINKS gt oi cath i a en es oe etree et aed Gl tee A a 177 10 2 Administration 4026 amp A oe a OEE A RAE Dee a BO 186 10 2 1 Basic Settings q i mop dead Pe ie eo i eed a pe 186 Chapter 11 Wireless LAN Controller 187 11 1 Wizard a a et Bley ae a Bake SE Seas ta ae 187 14 1 1 Basic Settings s e Tororo t paa ota ha E pa a s 188 11 1 2 Radio Profiles 6 00 2 Los pue Ap god a oR a ee he de n 189 11 1 3 Wireless Network 2 2 1 1 189 11 1 4 Start automatic installation 2 2 a a a 191 11 2 Controller Configura
34. Custom Roaming The default value is 120 ms RTS Threshold Select how the RTS CTS mechanism is to be switched on off If you choose User defined you can specify in the input field the data packet length threshold in bytes 1 2346 as of which the RTS CTS mechanism is to be used This makes sense if several clients that are not in each other s wireless range are run in one access point The mechanism can also be switched on off independently of the data packet length by selecting the value Always onor Always off default value Short Guard Interval Enable this function to reduce the guard interval time between transmission of two data symbols from 800 ns to 400 ns Short Retry Limit Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a frame This value must be less than or equal to the value specified in RTS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is dis carded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 7 Long Retry Limit Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a data packet This value must be longer than the value specified in RTS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is dis carded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 4 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description Fragmentation Enter the maximum size as of which the data packets are to be Threshold fragmented i e split into smaller units Low values are recom mended for this field in areas with p
35. Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field VENTO Licence Serial Number Enter the licence serial number you received when you bought the licence Licence Key Enter the licence key you received by e mail 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Note If Not OKis displayed as the status e Enter the licence data again e Check your hardware serial number If Not Supported is displayed as the status you have entered a license for a sub system that your device does not support This means you cannot use the functions of this licence Deactivating a licence Proceed as follows to deactivate a licence 1 Goto System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New 2 Press the icon in the line containing the licence you want to delete 3 Confirm with OK The licence is deactivated You can reactivate your additional licence at any time by enter ing the valid licence key and licence serial number 7 3 Interface Mode Bridge Groups In this menu you define the operation mode for your device s interfaces Routing versus bridging Bridging connects networks of the same type In contrast to routing bridges operate at lay er 2 of the OSI model data link layer are independent of higher level protocols and trans mit data packets using MAC addresses Data transmission is transparent which means the information contained in the data packets is not interpreted With routing different networks are connected at la
36. IP MAC Binding 396 IPSec 310 458 IPSec Phase 2 461 IPSec Tunnels 460 IPSec Statistics 460 IPSec Tunnels 458 IPSec Phase 2 SAs 459 IPSec Debug Level 343 IPSec over TCP 344 IPSec Peers 311 IPv4 Routes 222 IPv4 Routing Table 228 ISDN Login 99 J Join Prune Interval 290 Join Prune State 484 485 485 Join Prune Hold Time 290 K Teldat GmbH Keepalive Period 294 Key Size 405 Key Value 358 L L2TP 346 LAN 137 Language for login window 429 Last configuration stored 81 Last Member Query Interval 283 Lastseen 218 Last Write Result 424 Layer 4 Protocol 226 LCP Alive Check 300 305 354 LDAP URL Path 128 Lease Time 394 LED Mode 84 Level 443 457 Licence Key 93 Licence Serial Number 93 Lifetime 328 336 Load Balancing 215 476 Load Balancing 238 Load Balancing Groups 238 Local Certificate 328 Local Hostname 348 Local Address 463 Local Certificate 386 Local Certificate Description 126 127 405 Local File Name 405 Local GRE IP Address 358 LocalID 313 459 Local ID Type 313 328 Local ID Value 328 Local IP Address 225 269 299 304 316 349 352 358 Local IP Address 459 Local IP Address 134 Local Port 134 459 463 Local PPTP IP Address 305 Local Services 375 Locality 123 Location 84 197 Index Log Format 446 Logged Actions 366 Logging Level 104 Login Frameset 431 Login Grace Time 104 Logon 477 Long Retry Limit 156 159 204 Loopback ac
37. Possible values are 1 to 8192 The default value is 1500 Use key Enable the key input for the GRE connection which makes it possible to distinguish between several parallel GRE connec tions between two GRE partners see RFC 1701 The identification is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Key Value Only if Use key is enabled Enter the GRE connection key Possible values are 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 17 Firewall Teldat GmbH Chapter 17 Firewall The Stateful Inspection Firewall SIF provided for Teldat gateways is a powerful security feature The SIF with dynamic packet filtering has a decisive advantage over static packet filtering The decision whether or not to send a packet cannot be made solely on the basis of source and destination addresses or ports but also using dynamic packet filtering based on the state of the connection to a partner This means packets that belong to an already active connection can also be forwarded The SIF also accepts packets that belong to an affiliated connection The negotiation of an FTP connection takes place over port 21 for example but the actual data exchange can take place over a completely different port SIF and other security features Teldats Stateful Inspection Firewall fits into the existing security architecture of Teldat The configuration work for the SIF is comparatively straightforward with systems like Network Address Translation
38. SMSs There are no costs for receiving SMSs Simple Network Management Protocol Input level for SNMP commands All ISDN sockets and the NTBA of an ISDN point to multipoint con nection All So buses consist of a four wire cable The lines transmit digital ISDN signals The So bus is terminated with a terminating resistor after the last ISDN socket The So bus starts at the NTBA and can be up to 150 m long Any ISDN devices can be operated on this bus However only two devices can use the So bus at any one time as only two B channels are available Teldat GmbH So connection So interface SOHO SPD Special features Special features connection Specify own tele phone number for next call Speeddial number SPID Splitter Glossary See ISDN Basic Rate Interface Internationally standardised interface for ISDN systems This inter face is provided on the network side by the NTBA On the user side the interface is intended for connecting a PBX point to point connection and for connecting up to eight ISDN terminals point to multipoint connection Small Offices and Home Offices The SPD Security Policy Database defines the security services available for IP traffic These security services are dependent on parameters such as the source and destination of the packet etc Performance features of the T Net and T ISDN networks such as display of the caller s number callback on busy call forwarding changeab
39. VSS Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS YSS Description Network Name SSID Number of associated radio modules Security Status Action vss 1 Funkwerk ec 0 WPAPSK 13 Assign unassigned VSS to all radio modules C START J C New Fig 90 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Wireless Networks VSS An overview of all created wireless networks is displayed in the Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Wireless Networks VSS menu A wireless network is cre ated by default For every wireless network VSS you see an entry with a parameter set VSS Descrip tion Network Name SSID Number of associated radio modules Security Status Action Under Assign unassigned VSS to all radio modules click on the Start button to assign a newly created VSS to all wireless modules 11 3 3 1 Edit or New Choose the pp icon to edit existing entries Choose the Newbutton to configure additional wireless networks bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS Service Set Parameters Network Name SSID visibte Intra cell Repeating Enabled ARP Processing DEnabled WMM MEnabled Security Settings Security Mode native ow Client load balancing Max number of clients hard limit laz he Max number of clients soft limit Client Band select Disabled optimized for fast roaming
40. You can also obtain the preshared key automatically Fields in the Remote Partner menu Field Description Remote MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the bridge link partner 10 1 5 2 Bridge Links Scan After the desired Bridge Links have been configured the en icon is shown in the list You use this icon to open the Automatic Bridge Link Configuration menu Teldat GmbH Automatic Bridge Link Configuration 10 Wireless LAN Radio Settings Bridge Links Bridge Link Description wds1 0 Max Scan Duration 120 Seconds Action Scan Remote Link Description Remote Device Name Signal dBm Remote MAC Address Remote link enabled Connected Action oK Cancel Back Fig 83 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt Automatic Bridge Link Configuration After successful scanning a selection of potential bridge partners is displayed in the scan list In the Action column click Select to connect the local bridge with this bridge If the partners are connected with one another the y icon appears in the Connected column The icon appears in the Connected column if the connection is active The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt Automatic Bridge Link Configuration menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Automatic Bridge Link Configuration menu Field Description Bridge Link Descrip Displays the name of the bridge link you configured tion Max Scan Duration Enter the maximum time in seconds for the scan Possi
41. You can use this menu to manage the software version of your device your configuration files and the language of the GUI 19 2 1 Options Your device contains the version of the system software available at the time of production More recent versions may have since been released You may therefore need to carry out a software update Every new system software includes new features better performance and any necessary bugfixes from the previous version You can find the current system software at www teldat de The current documentation is also available here Important If you want to update your software make sure you consider the corresponding re lease notes These describe the changes implemented in the new system software The result of an interrupted update e g power failure during the update could be that your gateway no longer boots Do not turn your device off during the update An update of BOOTmonitor and or Logic is recommended in a few cases In this case the release notes refer expressly to this fact Only update BOOTmonitor or Logic if Teldat GmbH explicitly recommends this Flash Your device saves its configuration in configuration files in the flash EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory The data even remains stored in the flash when your device is switched off RAM The current configuration and all changes you set on your device during operation are 19 Maintenance Teldat G
42. never blocked The default value is 30 NAT Traversal NAT Traversal NAT T also enables IPSec tunnels to be opened via one or more devices on which network address translation NAT is activated Without NAT T incompatibilities may arise between IPSec and NAT see RFC 3715 section 2 These primarily prevent the setup of an IPSec tunnel from a host within a LANs and behind a NAT device to another host or device NAT T enables these kinds of tunnels without conflicts with NAT device activated NAT is automatically detected by the IPSec Daemon and NAT T is used Only for TKEv1 profiles Possible values e Enabled default value NAT Traversal is enabled e Disabled NAT Traversal is disabled e Force The device always behaves as it would if NAT were in use Only for TKEv2 profiles The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default CA Certificates Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Only for Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Signature Of RSA Encryption If you enable the Trust the following CA certificates option Field Description you can select up to three CA certificates that are accepted for this profile This option can only be configured if certificates are loaded 16 1 3 Phase 2 Profiles You can define profiles for phase 2 of the tunnel setup just as for phase 1 In the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles menu a list of all configured IPSec phase 2 profiles is displayed
43. therefore signalled with the internal telephone numbers 10 11 and 20 for the connections entered in team 00 Point to point Point to point Fax machine function that fetches documents provided by other fax machines or fax databases Input output Plain Old Telephone System bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN PPP PPP authentication PPPoA PPPoE PRI Primary Rate Inter face PRI Protocol Proxy ARP PSN PSTN PVID R key RADIUS RADSL RAS Real Time Clock RTC Receiver volume Point to Point Protocol Security mechanism A method of authentication using passwords in PPP Point to Point Protocol over ATM Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Primary Rate Interface ISDN subscriber connection The PRI consists of one D channel and 30 B channels in Europe In America 23 B channels and one D channel There is also the ISDN Basic Rate Interface Protocols are used to define the manner and means of information exchange between two systems Protocols control and rule the course of data communication at various levels decoding address ing network routing control procedures etc ARP Address Resolution Protocol Packet Switched Network Public Switched Telephone Network Port VLAN ID Telephones that have a R key inquiry key can also be connected to a PBX In modern telephones the R key triggers the hook flash function This is required for use of performance features in T Net such as inq
44. 4 4 IP configuration In the ex works state your device is configured in DHCP Client mode and therefore dynam ically receives an IP address if you run a DHCP server in your network If this is not the case connect your device directly to the configuration PC and use the fallback IP address 192 168 0 252 Alternatively you can assign your device the required fixed IP address by using the Dime Manager To do this install the program from the DVD provided to your configuration PC Proceed as follows a Place the DVD provided in the DVD drive of your configuration PC The installation wizard should start automatically If it does not open the following file on the DVD us ing your file browser starter exe b Follow the instructions in the installation wizard Then carry out the following steps to configure an IP address for your device 1 Start the Dime Manager from the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt Teldat gt Dime Manager The following dialog box appears 17216 98 110 172 16 98 232 17216 3815 t 17216 98 21 17216 9887 17216 9847 DOADFSADB0 1D 192 169 0 254 v 7 8 Rev 7 Beta 3 7 8 Rev 7 Beta 3 TH Fig 28 Dime Manager initial screen The Dime Manager detects the devices installed in the network 2 In the list double click the device you want to configure The following dialog box appears IP Settings
45. 64 0 Messages per Second oK Cancel Fig 127 Multicast gt IGMP gt Options The Multicast gt IGMP gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description IGMP Status Mode Maximum Groups Maximum Sources Select the IGMP status Possible values e Auto default value Multicast is activated automatically for hosts if the hosts open applications that use multicast e Up Multicast is always on e Down Multicast is always off Only for IGMP Status Up or Auto Select Multicast Mode Possible values e Compatibility Mode default value The router uses IG MP version 3 If it notices a lower version in the network it uses the lowest version it could detect e Version 3 only Only IGMP version 3 is used Enter the maximum number of groups to be permitted both in ternally and in reports Enter the maximum number of sources that are specified in ver sion 3 reports and the maximum number of internally managed sources per group Teldat GmbH 14 Multicast Field Description IGMP State Limit Enter the maximum permitted total number of incoming queries and messages per second The default value is 0 i e the number of IGMP status mes sages is not limited 14 3 Forwarding 14 3 1 Forwarding In this menu you specify which multicast groups are always passed between the interfaces of your device 14 3 1 1 New Choose the Newbutton to create forwa
46. Bridge Group 96 Monitored Certificate 400 Monitored Interface 400 419 Monitored Subsystems 447 Monitored Variable 400 Monitored Interfaces 455 Monitored IP Address 417 Monitoring 214 457 MSDUs that could not be transmitted 465 MTU 358 459 Multicast 280 Multicast Group Prefix Length 292 Multicast Group Prefix Length 480 Multicast Routing 282 Multicast Group Address 287 292 Multicast Group Range 292 Multicast Group Address 480 482 Teldat GmbH 482 483 484 485 485 Multicast MSDUs received successfully 465 Multicast MSDUs transmitted success fully 465 N Name 197 341 NAT 230 463 NAT method 232 NAT Traversal 333 NAT Detection 459 NAT Configuration 232 NAT active 231 NAT Interfaces 230 Negative Cache 377 Negotiation Type 459 Neighbor APs 216 Netmask 228 269 352 424 Network Address 269 Network Configuration 269 Network Name SSID 165 174 177 208 Network Name SSID 476 Networking 222 New Destination Port 237 New Destination IP Address Netmask 237 New File Name 437 New Source Port 237 New Source IP Address Netmask 226 237 No 230 457 462 Node Name 424 Noise dBm 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 475 Not Interface Specific Status 480 Number of Messages 447 Number of Spatial Streams 149 201 Number of Admitted Connections 320 O Operation Band 149 201 Teldat GmbH Operation Mode 149 198 201 Options 115 229 285 343 356 3
47. Choose the New button to set up new L2TP partners Basic Parameters Description Connection Type User Name Password Always on Connection Idle Timeout IP Mode and Routes IP Address Mode Default Route Create NAT Policy Local IP Address Route Entries Block after connection failure for Authentication Encryption Compression LCP Alive Check Prioritize TCP ACK Packets IP Options OSPF Mode Proxy ARP Mode DNS Negotiation Tunnel Profiles Users Options uns OLac essees gt DEnabled 300 Seconds O static O Provide IP Address DEnabled DEnabled Remote IP Address Netmask Metric A AE Add Advanced Settings 300 Seconds MS CHAPvw2 v O None Enabled Windows compatible Onone Ostac Oms stac Omppc Enabled DEnabled passive O Active O Inactive O Inactive Up or Dormant up only MEnabled oK Cancel Fig 149 VPN gt L2TP gt Users gt New The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Users gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Enter a name for uniquely identifying the L2TP partner The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used The maximum length of the entry is 25 characters 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description Connection Type Select whether the L2TP partner is to take on the
48. Connection Type 351 Connection Idle Timeout 298 303 351 Consider 239 Contact 84 Control Mode 253 309 Controlled Interfaces 308 Controller Configuration 193 Corrupt Frames Received 465 COS Filter 802 1p Layer 2 247 262 Count 405 Country 123 CPU Usage 81 Create NAT Policy 299 304 352 CRLs 126 CSV File Format 405 CTS frames received in response to an RTS 465 Current File Name in Flash 437 Current Local Time 89 Current Speed Mode 130 Custom 123 Index Cyclic Background Scanning 204 D D Channel Mode 325 Data Bits 132 Data Packets Sequence Numbers 349 Data Rate mbps 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 475 Date 457 Date andTime 87 Default Route 299 304 316 352 358 Default Idle Timeout 431 Default Route Distribution 277 Default User Password 108 Delete 218 228 Delete complete IPSec configuration 343 Denied Clients soft hard 476 Description 118 128 197 201 226 232 244 247 250 256 262 266 298 303 313 319 328 336 341 348 351 358 368 369 370 371 374 380 397 400 405 458 459 462 463 465 Description Connection Information Link 83 Designated Router 479 Designated Router Priority 289 Destination 362 Destination Interface 287 Destination Port 226 319 Destination Port Range 234 244 247 262 Destination File Name 437 Destination IP Address 400 405 422 Destination IP Address Netmask 225 234
49. DNS Requests Shows the number of valid DNS requests received and ad dressed direct to your device Cache Hits Shows the number of requests that were answered with static or dynamic entries from the cache Forwarded Requests Shows the number of requests forwarded to other name serv ers Cache Hitrate Indicates the number of Cache Hits pro DNS request in per centage Successfully Shows the number of successfully answered requests positive Answered Queries and negative Server Failures Shows the number of requests that were not answered by any name server either positively or negatively 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH 18 2 HTTPS You can operate the user interface of your device from any PC with an up to date Web browser via an HTTPS connection HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is the procedure used to establish an en crypted and authenticated connection by SSL between the browser used for configuration and the device 18 2 1 HTTPS Server In the Local Services gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Servermenu configure the parameters of the backed up configuration connection via HTTPS HTTPS Server HTTPS Parameters HTTPS TCP Port 443 Local Certificate Internal Y Apply Cancel Fig 167 Local Services gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Server The Local Services gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Servermenu consists of the following fields Fields in the HTTPS Parameters menu Field Description HTTPS TCP Port Enter the port via which the HT
50. Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decimal format e g 63 TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F Enter the relevant value for DSCP Binary Value DSCP Decimal Value DSCP Hexadecimal Value TOS Binary 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description Mode Value TOS Decimal Valueand TOS Hexadecimal Value Select when the interface defined in Route Parameters gt Inter face is to be used Possible values e Dialup and wait default value The route can be used if the interface is up If the interface is dormant then dial and wait until the interface is up e Authoritative The route can always be used e Dialup and continue The route can be used when the interface is up If the interface is dormant then select and use the alternative route rerouting until the interface is up e Never dialup The route can be used when the interface is up e Always dialup The route can be used when the interface is up If the interface is dormant then dial and wait unt
51. Description NAT active Select whether NAT is to be activated for the interface The function is disabled by default Loopback active The NAT loopback function also enables network address trans lation for connectors whereby NAT is not activated This is often used in order to interpret queries from the LAN as if they were coming from the WAN You can use this to test the server ser vices The function is disabled by default Silent Deny Select whether IP packets are to be silently denied by NAT If this function is deactivated the sender of the denied IP packet is informed by means of an appropriate ICMP or TCP RST mes sage The function is disabled by default PPTP Passthrough Select whether the setup and operation of several simultan eous outgoing PPTP connections from hosts in the network are also to be permitted if NAT is activated The function is disabled by default 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description If PPTP Passthrough is enabled the device itself cannot be configured as a tunnel endpoint Port Shows the number of portforwarding rules configured in Net working gt NAT gt NAT Configuration 12 2 2 NAT Configuration In the Networking gt NAT gt NAT Configuration menu you can exclude data from NAT simply and conveniently as well as translate addresses and ports For outgoing data traffic you can configure various NAT methods i e you can determine how an external host es tablishes a connecti
52. GHz changeover Displays the number of clients who have been moved to a dif ferent frequency band by the 2 4 5 GHz changeover function Denied Clients soft Displays the number of rejected clients after the absolute num hard ber of permitted clients has been reached 21 5 Bridges 21 5 1 br lt x gt In the Monitoring gt Bridges gt br lt x gt menu the current values of the configured bridges are shown bro Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply gt MAC Address Port 00 a0 f9 0b 08 98 en1 0 Fig 217 Monitoring gt Bridges Values in the br lt x gt list Field Description MAC Address Shows the MAC addresses of the associated bridge Port Shows the port on which the bridge is active 21 6 HotSpot Gateway 21 6 1 HotSpot Gateway A list of all linked hotspot users is displayed in the Monitoring gt HotSpot Gateway gt Hot Spot Gateway menu HotSpot Gateway Automatic Refresh Interval eo Seconds Apply Authenticated HotSpot User User Name IP Address Physical Address Logon Interface Fig 218 Monitoring gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway Values in the HotSpot Gateway list Field Description User Name Displays the user s name bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description IP Address Shows the IP address of the user Physical Address Shows the physical address of the user Logon Displays the time of the notification Interface Shows the interface
53. ISP Universal Uniform Resource Locator Universal Serial Bus Electronic user guidance that takes the user through the required functions of a terminal such as a telephone answering machine or fax machine step by step menu guided operation This function is only possible for system telephones and ISDN tele Signalling 1 V 11 V 24 V 28 V 35 V 36 V 42bis V 90 Vanity VDSL VID VJHC VLAN VolP VPN vss WAN WAN interface WAN partner phones ITU T recommendation for balanced dual current interface lines up to 10 mbps CCITT and ITU T recommendation that defines the interface between a PC or terminal as Data Terminal Equipment DTE and a modem as Data Circuit terminating Equipment DCE ITU T recommendation for unbalanced dual current interface line ITU T recommendation for data transmission at 48kbps in the range from 60 to 108kHz Modem for V 35 Data compression procedure ITU standard for 56 kbps analogue modems In contrast to older V 34 modems data is sent in digital form to the client when the V 90 standard is used and does not need to be first converted from digital to analogue on one side of the modem provider as was the case with V 34 and earlier modems This makes higher transmission rates possible A maximum speed of 56 kbps can be achieved only under optimum conditions Letter dialling Very high bit rate digital subscriber line also called VADSL or BD SL VL
54. Machine in the PIM SM Specifica tion Upstream Neighbor IP Displays the primary IP address of the Upstream Neighbors or Address unknown 0 if the Upstream Neighbor IP address is not known or if it is not a PIM Neighbor Uptime Indicates the timespan of the RP s existence 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Upstream Join Timer Join Prune Timer is used to periodically send Join RP mes sages and to correct Prune RP messages from peers on an Upstream LAN interface Values in the G States list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast group address dress Upstream Neighbor IP Displays the primary IP address of the Neighbor on pimStar Address GRPFIfIndex to which the local router periodically G sends Join messages The InetAddressType is defined through the pimStarGUpstreamNeighborType In the PIM SM specification this address is named RPF G Reverse Indicates the address type of the RPF Next Hop to the RP or Path Forwarding RPF unknown 0 if the Next Hop is not known Upstream Join State Indicates whether the local router should join the group s RP Tree This corresponds to the status of the Upstream G State Machine in the PIM SM specification Uptime Indicates the timespan since the entry was generated by the local router Upstream Join Timer Indicates the remaining time until the local router sends out the next periodic G Join message on pimStarGRPFl
55. NAT and IP Access Lists IPAL As SIF NAT and IPAL are active in the system simultaneously attention must be given to possible interaction If any packet is rejected by one of the security instances this is done immediately This is irrelevant whether another instance would accept it or not Your need for security features should therefore be accurately analysed The essential difference between SIF and NAT IPAL is that the rules for the SIF are gener ally applied globally i e not restricted to one interface In principle the same filter criteria are applied to the data traffic as those used in NAT and IPAL e Source and destination address of the packet with an associated netmask e Service preconfigured e g Echo FTP HTTP e Protocol e Port number s To illustrate the differences in packet filtering a list of the individual security instances and their method of operation is given below NAT Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall One of the basic functions of NAT is the translation of the local IP addresses of your LAN into the global IP addresses you are assigned by your ISP and vice versa All connections initiated externally are first blocked i e every packet your device cannot assign to an exist ing connection is rejected This means that a connection can only be set up from inside to outside Without explicit permission NAT rejects every access from the WAN to the LAN IP Access Lists Here packets are allowed or rej
56. Power 149 198 Transmitted MPDUs 465 Transparent MAC Address 98 Trials 400 422 Trigger 399 419 421 Trigger Status 405 Teldat GmbH Triggered Hello Interval 290 TTL 382 Tunnel Profile 351 Tunnel Profiles 347 Tx Bytes 462 463 Tx Errors 462 Tx Packets 462 463 464 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 Type 247 262 371 462 Type of Messages 443 Type of traffic 232 Type of attack 218 U U APSD 165 UDP Inactivity 367 UDP Destination Port 348 UDP Destination Port 356 455 UDP Port 110 UDP Source Port 348 UDP Source Port Selection 356 Unchanged for 462 Unicast MPDUs received successfully 465 Unicast MSDUs transmitted successfully 465 Unsuccessful Trials 417 up 295 Update Interval 390 Update Path 390 Update Interval 455 Update Timer 278 Upstream Join State 481 482 482 Upstream Join Timer 481 482 482 Upstream Neighbor IP Address 481 482 482 Upstream Override Timer 483 Uptime 81 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 475 479 481 482 482 483 484 485 485 URL 220 437 URL SCEP Server URL 405 Usage Area 149 Use CRL 405 Index Use as Stub interface 289 Use PFS Group 336 Use Zero Cookies 344 Used Channel 198 Used Secondary Channel 149 User Defined Channel Plan 159 204 User Name 298 303 351 388 450 477 Users 341 350 V Value 465 Vendor Mode 108 Version Check 405 View 479 481 484 VLAN 141 213 298 VLAN Identi
57. RTS that were received as a response to RTS request to send Received MPDUs that Displays the number of received MSDUs that could not be en couldn t be decrypted crypted One reason for this could be that a suitable key was not entered RTS frames with no Displays the number of RTS frames for which no CTS was re CTS received ceived Corrupt Frames Re Displays the number of frames received incompletely or with er ceived rors 21 4 2 VSS In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt VSS menu current values and activities of the configured wireless networks are displayed WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Client Node Table MAC Address IP Address Up Time Tx Packets RxPackets Signal dBm Noise dBm Data Rate mbps RSSM RSSI2 RSSI3 Funkwerk ec vss1 0 00 04 f0 67 55 f3 0 0 0 0 0 Day s 0 0 9 2 2 89 0 0 0 99 1 Fa Fig 208 Monitoring gt WLAN gt VSS Values in the VSS list Field Description MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the associated client IP Address Shows the IP address of the client Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the cli Field Description ent is logged in Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm RSSI1 Shows the received signal strength in dBm RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm Dat
58. System Management Teldat GmbH Field Description type of encoding e Base64 e Binary Password Enter the password required for the import 76 3 Certificate Servers A list of certificate servers is displayed in the System Management gt Certificates gt Certi ficate Servers menu A certification authority certification service provider Certificate Authority CA issues your certificates to clients applying for a certificate via a certificate server The certificate server also issues the private key lt lt lt und h lt Zertifikatsperrlisten CRL bereit die zur Pr fung von Zertifikaten entweder per LDAP oder HTTP vom Ger t abgefragt werden gt gt gt 7 6 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up a certificate server Certificate List CRLs Certificate Servers Basic Parameters Description LDAP URL Path Idap oK Cancel Fig 58 System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate Servers gt New The System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate Servers gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a unique description for the certificate server LDAP URL Path Enter the LDAP URL or the HTTP URL of the server Chapter 8 Physical Interfaces In this menu you configure the physical interfaces that you have used when connecting your gateway The configuration interface only shows the interfaces that are available on your device In t
59. Thanks to Bluetooth these devices can exchange data with each other without a fixed connection For example PCs notebooks or a PDA can access the Internet or a loc al network The appointments on a PDA can be synchronised with the appointments on the PC without the need for a cable connec tion Because of the many different application areas for the Bluetooth technology the different types of connections between the devices are divided into profiles A profile determines the service function that the individual Bluetooth clients can use among each other Bandwidth on Demand Bootstrap protocol Bits per second A unit of measure for the transmission rate Glossary Break in BRI Bridge Broadcast Brokering Browser Bundle Bus Busy On Busy CA Calendar Teldat GmbH In a PBX the option of breaking in to an existing call This is sig nalled acoustically by an attention tone Basic Rate Interface Network component for connecting homogeneous networks As op posed to a gateway bridges operate at layer 2 of the OSI model are independent of higher level protocols and transmit data packets using MAC addresses Data transmission is transparent which means the information contained in the data packets is not inter preted Broadcasts data packages are sent to all devices in a network in order to exchange information Generally there is a certain address broadcast address in the network that allows all
60. The default value is 0 12 4 2 QoS Classification The data traffic is classified in the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Classification menu i e the data traffic is associated using class IDs of various classes To do this create class plans for classifying IP packets based on pre defined IP filters Each class plan is associated to at least one interface via its first filter 12 4 2 1 New Choose the New button to create additional data classes 12 Networking Basic Parameters Class map Description Filter Direction High Priority Class Class ID Set DSCP TOS value Layer 3 Set COS value 802 1 p Layer 2 Interfaces Teldat GmbH QoS Filter QoS Classification QoS Interfaces Policies New m Selectone Outgoing 1 v Preserve v Preserve Interface Add OK Cancel Fig 110 Networking gt QoS gt QoS Classification gt New The Networking gt QoS gt QoS Classification gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Class map Description Filter Choose the class plan you want to create or edit Possible values New default value You can create a new class plan with this setting e lt Name of class plan gt Shows a class plan that has already been created which you can select and edit You can add new filters Only for Class map New Enter the name of the class plan Select an IP filter
61. W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Select the transmission speed Possible values e Auto default value The transmission speed is determined automatically e lt Value gt According to setting for Operation Band Band width Number of Spatial Streams and Wireless Mode vari ous fixed values in mbps are available Burst Mode Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Activate this function to increase the transmission speed for 802 11g through frame bursting As a result several packets are sent one after the other without a waiting period This is par ticularly effective in 11b g mixed operation The function is enabled with Enabled The function is activated by default If problems occur with older WLAN hardware this function should be deactivated Airtime fairness This function is not available for all devices 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description The Airtime fairness function ensures that the access point s send resources are distributed intelligently to the connected cli ents This means that a powerful client e g a 802 11n client cannot achieve only a poor flow level because a less powerful client e g a 802 11a client is treated in the same way when apportioning The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default This fuction is only applied to unprioritized frames of the WMM Classe Background The menu Advanced Settings co
62. Y MAC Filter Access Control DEnabled Dynamic blacklisting Y Enabled Failed attempts per Time fio I eo Seconds Blacklist blocktime 500 Seconds YLAN VLAN DEnabled OK C Cancel Fig 91 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Wireless Networks VSS gt New The Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Wireless Networks VSS gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Service Set Parameters Field Description Network Name SSID Enter the name of the wireless network SSID Enter an ASCII string with a maximum of 32 characters Also select whether the Network Name SSID is to be trans mitted The network name is displayed by selecting Visible It is visible by default Intra cell Repeating Select whether communication between the WLAN clients is to be permitted within a radio cell bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default ARP Processing Select whether the ARP processing function should be enabled The ARP data traffic is reduced in the network by the fact that ARP broadcasts that have been converted to ARP unicasts are forwarded to IP addresses that are known internally Unicasts are quicker and clients with an enabled power save function are not addressed The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is
63. You can only create new static IP MAC bindings if IP address ranges were configured in Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool 18 4 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up new IP MAC bindings Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services IP Pool Configuration DHCP Configuration IP MAC Binding DHCP Relay Settings Basic Parameters Description IP Address MAC Address OK Cancel Fig 172 Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP MAC Binding gt New The menu Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP MAC Binding gt New consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the name of the host to which the MAC Address the IP Address is to be bound A character string of up to 256 characters is possible IP Address Enter the IP address to be assigned to the MAC address spe cified in MAC Address is to be assigned MAC Address Enter the MAC address to which the IP address specified in IP Address is to be assigned 18 4 4 DHCP Relay Settings If your device for the local network does not distribute any IP addresses to the clients by DHCP it can still forward the DHCP requests on behalf of the local network to a remote DHCP server The DHCP server then assigns the your device an IP address from its pool which in turn sends this to the client in the local network 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH IP Pool Configuration DHCP Configuration IP MAC Binding DHCP Relay Settings B
64. aha a a SS ee 474 Load Balancing ocio 2 period a Pe Soe er a A 476 Bridges ts giin sce Sf fee eae Tg ep Whoa ee ws 476 DIX en ne ace A A A IN ET 477 HotSpot Gateway 2 o o 477 HotSpot Gateway 0 00 2 eee ee 477 QOS eh O OL Pe eG 478 QoS of stay ls fo at ete O 478 PIM 2 Aap A A oe A ee eee Ae 478 GlobaliStatus sei DA ee rei nh a SER E 479 Not Interface Specific Status 2 2 ee ee 480 Interface Specific States 0 0 0 ee 483 GISSA coa E Belek ee ANA 487 DO a a PE A 528 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction The new generation access points are manufactured in an environmentally friendly way and meet the RoHS directive They support the latest WLAN technology and are designed for use particularly in the professional environment Safety notices The safety precautions brochure which is supplied with your device tells you what you need to take into consideration when using your access point Installation How to connect your device is shown in chapter Installation on page 6 Configuration Chapter Basic configuration on page 48 also tells you what preliminary tasks are necessary for configuration You will then be shown how you can access your device from a Windows PC using a current web browser and how to make basic settings Password If you are familiar with the configuration of Teldat devices and you want to
65. an incom ing packet can be assigned to an existing connection and if a suitable connection is expec ted e g such as an affiliated connection of an existing connection the packet is allowed The sequence of filter rules in the list is relevant The filter rules are applied to each packet in succession until a rule matches If overlapping occurs i e more than one filter rule matches a packet only the first rule is executed This means that if the first rule denies a packet whereas a later rule allows it the packet is rejected A deny rule also has no effect if a relevant packet has previously been allowed by another filter rule A list of all configured filter rules is displayed in the Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules menu Order Source vice ce 1 4 New D 4 OK C Cancel_ Fig 152 Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules You can use the button to insert another policy above the list entry The configuration menu for creating a new policy opens You can use the button to move the list entry A dialog box opens in which you can se lect the position to which the policy is to be moved 17 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional parameters Qos options E Basic Parameters Source g INTERFACE ALIASES Y Destination INTERFACE ALIASES vw seme SERVICES y Action
66. basis LAN switches are network components with a similar function to bridges or even gateways They switch data packets between the in put and output port In contrast to bridges switches have several in put and output ports This increases the bandwidth in the network Switches can also be used for conversion between networks with different speeds e g 100 mbps and 10 mbps networks Option of switching between the pulse dialling method and MFC method by means of a switch or key input on the terminal such as the telephone or fax machine Transmission process in which the sender and receiver operate with exactly the same clock signals in contrast to asynchronous trans mission Spaces are bridged by a stop code Syslog is used as the de facto standard for transmitting log mes sages in an IP network Syslog messages are sent as unencrypted text messages over the UDP port 514 and collected centrally They are usually used to monitor computer systems Telephone that belongs to a modern PBX which depending on the PBX has a number of special features and keys e g the T Concept PX722 Product name used by Deutsche Telekom AG for its DSL services and products Product name for T Com fax machines Telephony faxing data transfer and online services from one net work and a single connection T ISDN offers exciting services with numerous benefits for example a point to multipoint connection the ideal solution for famil
67. bintec WI2040n only 2 antenna are used for each of the 2 wireless mod ules These are both sending and receiving antenna There is no third receiving an tenna this is MIMO 2T2R operating mode However gross rates of 300 Mbps are possible The receiving sensitivity decreases slightly Only 2 antenna connections are required to operate bridgelink with dual polar isation antenna Antenna should be Lambda 2 or a multiple of this In bintec WIx040n the antenna are 37 mm apart 2 4 GHz Lambda 2 corresponds to 6 15 cm 5 GHz Lambda 2 corresponds to 2 72 cm Devices with 802 11n support can use up to 3 antenna per wireless module The assign ment of the existing 4 antenna connectors is shown in the following graphic WLAN 1 WLAN1 WLAN1 WLAN2 WLAN2 Ant 1 Ant 2 Ant 3 Ant1 Ant 2 Fig 14 Antenna configuration for bintec WIx040n devices 3 3 4 LEDs The LEDs show the radio status radio activity Ethernet activity and LED states of your device The LED states are indicated by combinations of the LEDs During the heating phase the red Failure LED flashes Once this temperature has been reached the device continues with the start up process All LEDs are on during the start up process This means the monitor has been started and Teldat GmbH firmware is being loaded Note 3 Installation Note that the number of active WLAN LEDs depends on the number of existing wire less modules The LEDs on bintec WI1040n and bint
68. by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Allowed Addresses Use Add to make entries and enter the MAC addresses MAC Address of the clients to be permitted Dynamic blacklisting You can use the Dynamic blacklisting function to identify cli ents that want to gain possibly unauthorised access to the net work and block them for a certain length of time A client is blocked if the number of unsuccessful login attempts with a spe cified time exceeds a certain number This threshold value and the duration of the block can be configured A blocked client is blocked at all the APs that are managed by the wireless LAN controller for the VSS concerned so neither are they able to log into a different radio cell in that VSS If a client needs to be blocked permanently this can be done in the Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Rogue Clients menu The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is activated by default Failed attempts per Time Enter the number of failed attempts that have to originate from a specific MAC address during a certain time for a blacklist entry to be created Default values are 10 failed attempts during 60 seconds Blacklist blocktime Enter the time for which an entry in the dynamic blacklist re mains valid Default value is 500 seconds Fields in the menu VLAN 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description VLAN Select whether the VLAN segmentation is
69. cable D SUB9 R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed 3 external standard antennas User s Guide on DVD Self adhesive feet to allow the device to be used as a desktop Safety notices device Blind stops for SFP SD slot cover with screw 3 pole screw terminal bar for the power supply 2 pole screw terminal bar for relay Mounting bracket for wall mounting 1 screw pin set Blind stops for Ethernet inter faces bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation bintec WI2040n Companion Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed Serial cable D SUB9 4 external standard antennas Self adhesive feet to allow the device to be used as a desktop device Blind stops for SFP SD slot cover with screw 3 pole screw terminal bar for the power supply 2 pole screw terminal bar for relay Mounting bracket for wall mounting 1 screw pin set Blind stops for Ethernet inter faces 3 3 6 General Product Features R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed User s Guide on DVD Safety notices The general product features cover performance features and the technical prerequisites for installation and operation of your device The features are summarised in the following table General Product Features bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n Property Variants bintec WI1040n bintec WI2040n Value An internal wireless mod
70. call and open the door Door intercom on An analogue connection can be set up for connected of function analogue connection module MO6 to connect a DoorLine intercom system Door terminal ad The function module can be installed on an analogue connection of apter your PBX If a door intercom DoorLine is connected to your PBX via a function module you can speak with a visitor at the door via every authorised telephone You can assign particular telephones to each ring button These phones then ring if the ring button is pressed On analogue telephones the signal on the telephone matches the intercom call In place of the internal telephones an ex ternal telephone can also be configured as the call destination for Glossary Dotted Decimal Notation Download Downstream DSA DSS DSL and ISDN con nections DSL modem DSL splitter DSL xDSL DSS1 DSSS DTE Teldat GmbH the ring button Your door intercom can have up to 4 ring buttons The door opener can be pressed during an intercom call It is not possible activate the door opener if an intercom call is not taking place The syntactic representation of a 32 bit whole number written in four 8 bit numbers in decimal form and subdivided by a point It is used to represent IP addresses on the Internet e g 192 67 67 20 Data transfer during online connections where files are loaded from a PC or data network server to the user s own PC PBX or ter minal so that
71. call forwarding CF performance feature of the PBX enables you to be reached even if you are not in the vicinity of your tele phone You achieve this by automatically forwarding your calls to the required internal or external telephone number You can use the configuration program to define whether call forwarding should be carried out in the PBX or the exchange You should use call for warding in the exchange if certain services are activated for your connection You can receive more information on this from your T Com advisor Call option day night Option of changing the call allocation on a PBX using a calendar Call pickup Call pickup Calls received after office hours are forwarded to a telephone still manned or to the answering machine or fax Performance feature of a PBX Calls can be received on an internal terminal that is not part of active call allocation An external call is only signalled for your colleague As you belong Glossary Call Relay on Busy Call Through Call to engaged sub scriber Call waiting Call waiting protec tion Callback on Busy Callback on no reply Called party number Caller list Teldat GmbH to several different teams this is not surprising You can now form various groups of subscribers in which call pickup is possible A call can only be picked up by subscribers terminals in the same pickup group The assignment of subscribers in pickup groups is not de pendent on the se
72. can enter another locality Assigned Wireless Network VSS Displays the wireless networks that are currently assigned The following parameters are available in the wireless module 1 menu The parts wireless module 1 and wireless module 2 are displayed if the AP has two wire less modules Operation Mode Select the mode in which the wireless module is to be operated Possible values e On default value The wireless module is used as an access point in your network e off The wireless module is not active Active Radio Profile Displays the wireless module profile that is currently selected You can select another wire less module profile from the list if more than one wireless module profile are being set up Channel Displays the channel that is assigned You can select an alternative channel 11 Wireless LAN Controller by Teldat GmbH The number of channels you can select depends on the country setting Please consult the data sheet for your device Note Configuring the network name SSID in Access Point mode means that wireless net works can be logically separated from each other but they can still physically interfere with each other if they are operating on the same or closely adjacent wireless chan nels So if you are operating two or more radio networks close to each other it is ad visable to allocate the networks to different channels Each of these should be spaced at least four channels apart as a
73. company and that this was verified through the presentation of an excerpt from the business re gister Additional voice service from T Com for the commercial distribution of private information services The T Com services are limited to providing the technical infrastructure and collection processing for Teldat GmbH Service 0700 Service 0900 Glossary the information providers The provided information is accessed us ing the telephone number 0190 which is uniform across Germany plus a 6 digit telephone number Information offering Entertainment weather finance sport health support and service hotlines Additional voice service from T Com Allows calls to be received via a location independent telephone number uniform across Germany starting with the numbers 0700 Free of charge routing to national fixed network Enhancement with Vanity possible Additional voice service from T Com Replaces Service 0190 Service number 0180 Additional voice service 0180call from T Com to receive calls from a Services Setup Tool SHA1 SHDSL Short hold Signalling Simplex operation ISDN subscribers only location dependent telephone number uniform across Germany starting with the numbers 0180 Euro ISDN contains service indicates with defined names Some of these have only historical meaning In general you should choose the Telephony service for real telephone calls If this selection does not work depends on n
74. device in Bridge mode you must set up a bridge link Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Bridge link autoconfiguration 1 Goto Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt 2 In Operation Mode select Bridge 3 Leave the default settings in all other fields 4 Basic configuration Teldat GmbH 4 Click OK 5 Goto Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt New 6 Under Preshared Key enter bridgesecret for example Leave the default settings in all other fields Click OK 9 Configure a bridge link on the remote device in the same way 10 On your local device in the list Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links click on the en icon 11 On the menu Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt W which opens click under Action on the Scan link 12 After the scan the results are listed For the list entry you require click the Connect link 13 Store the configuration using the Save configuration button above the menu naviga tion To use the bridge link autoconfiguration function please also read the WLAN Automatic Configuration of a Bridge Link Workshop for additional information also read the user s guide chapter Wireless LAN under WLAN gt Bridge Links gt New Manual configuration 1 Goto Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt 2 In Operation Mode select Bridge 3 Leave the default settings in all other fields 4 Click OK
75. devices to inter pret a message as a broadcast Brokering makes it possible to switch between two external or in ternal subscribers without the waiting subscriber being able to hear the other conversation Program for displaying content on the Internet or World Wide Web The external connections of larger PBXs can be grouped into bundles When an external call is initiated by the exchange code or in the event of automatic external line access a bundle released for this subscriber is used to establish the connection If a subscriber has authorisation for several bundles the connection is established using the first released bundle If one bundle is occupied the next released bundle is used If all the released bundles are occupied the subscriber hears the engaged tone A data transmission medium for use by all the devices connected to a network Data is forwarded over the entire bus and received by all devices on the bus Call to engaged team subscriber If one subscriber in a team has taken the receiver off the hook or is on the telephone you can de cide whether other calls are to be signalled for this team The setting for reaching a subscriber can be toggled between Standard and Busy On Busy In the basic configuration it is set to Standard If Busy on Busy is set for a team other callers hear the engaged tone Certificate Authority By allocating a calendar you switch between Day and Night call as Teldat GmbH Call
76. discovered certain basic parameters node name IP address netmask and device address can be configured on the access point provided you know the administrator password Note Any Teldat access points that exist are determined by means of a multicast The IP ad dress of the access point is therefore irrelevant Please note that the discovered Teldat access points are not stored in the flash which means discovery must be repeated after you reboot your device In the Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Device Discovery menu a list of all dis covered access points in the network is displayed under Results In the Interface field se lect the interface of your device via which access point discovery is to be carried out You use the A11 option to query all interfaces The current discovery status is displayed for each individual interface under Discovery Status Here None means that no discovery is active Discovery is displayed if a discov ery is currently performed This discovery function also enables your device to be discovered and configured by other access points with a discovery function You configure this in the Options submenu 18 7 1 1 Discover Click the Discover button to launch the Teldat access point discovery Device Discovery Options Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply Discovery Status Interface Status br Discovery Initiate Funkwerk Discovery Interface All Results Inter
77. ent 4 None None Up only El Page 1 ltems 1 2 Fig 119 Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Interfaces 13 1 1 1 Edit For every RIP interface go to the menu to select options Send Version Receive Versionand Route Announce bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH RIP Parameters for en1 0 Send Version Receive Version Route Announce 13 Routing Protocols RIP Interfaces RIP Filter RIP Options None bi None v Up only OK Cancel Fig 120 Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Interfaces gt The menu Networking gt RIP gt RIP Interfaces gt consists of the following fields Fields in the RIP Parameters for menu Field Description Send Version Decide whether routes are to be propagated via RIP and if so select the RIP version for sending RIP packets over the inter face in send direction Possible values None default value RIP is not enabled RIP V1 Enables sending and receiving of version 1 RIP packets RIP V2 Enables sending and receiving of version 2 RIP packets RIP V1 V2 Enables sending and receiving RIP packets of both version 1 and 2 RIP V2 Multicast For sending RIP V2 messages over multicast address 224 0 0 9 RIP V1 Triggered RIP V1 messages are sent received and processed as per RFC 2091 triggered RIP RIP V2 Triggered RIP V2 messages are sent received and processed as per RFC 2091 triggered RIP Receive Version Decide whether routes are to be impor
78. enter the de sired file name e Export configuration with state information The active configuration from the RAM is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is dis played in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the desired file name e Restore backup Only if under Save configuration with the setting Save configuration and back up previ ous boot configuration the current configuration was saved as boot configuration and the previous boot configura tion was also archived You can load back the archived boot configuration e Copy configuration The configuration file in the Source File Name field is saved asDestination File Name e Rename configuration The configuration file in the Se lect file field is renamed to New File Name e Delete configuration The configuration in the Select file field is deleted e Delete software firmware The file in the Select file field is deleted Configuration Encryp Only for Action Import configuration Export con tion figuration Export configuration with state in formation Define whether the data of the selected Action are to be encrypted The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default If the function is enabled you can enter the Password in the text field Filename Only for Action Import configuration Import lan guage Update system software Enter the path and name
79. entries in the routing table can be defined statically or the routing table can be updated constantly by dynamic exchange of routing information between several devices This ex change is controlled by a Routing Protocol e g RIP Routing Information Protocol By de fault about every 30 seconds this value can be changed in Update Timer a device sends messages to remote networks using information from its own current routing table The complete routing table is always exchanged in this process If triggered RIP is used in formation is only exchanged if the routing information has changed In this case only the changed information is sent Observing the information sent by other devices enables new routes and shorter paths for existing routes to be saved in the routing table As routes between networks can become unreachable RIP removes routes that are older than 5 minutes i e routes not verified in the last 300 seconds Garbage Collection Timer Route Timeout Routes learnt with triggered RIP are not deleted Your device supports both version 1 and version 2 of RIP either individually or together 13 1 1 RIP Interfaces A list of all RIP interfaces is displayed in the Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Interfaces menu RIP Interfaces RIP Filter RIP Options View 20 per page Fitter in None v equal v Go No Interface Send Version Receive Version Route Announce 1 ent 0 None None Up only El 2
80. fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Event List You can create a new event list with New default value You give this lista name with Description You use the remaining parameters to create the first event in the list If you want to add to an existing event list select the event list you want and add at least one more event to it You can use event lists to create complex conditions for initiat ing an action The events are processed in the same order in which they are created in the list Description Only for Event List New Enter your chosen designation for the event list Event Type Select the type of event Possible values e Time default value The operations configured and assigned in Actions are initiated at specific points in time MIB SNMPp The actions configured and assigned in Actions are initiated when the defined MIB variables assumes the as signed values e Interface Status Operations configured and assigned in Actions are initiated when the defined interfaces take on a specified status e Interface Traffic The operations configured and as signed in Actions are triggered if the data traffic on the spe cified interfaces falls below or exceed the defined value e Ping Test the operations configured and assigned in Ac tions are triggered if the defined IP address is accessible or not accessible e Certificate Lifetime Operations configured and as signed in Actions a
81. flow it was derived from The hashing algorithm is designed so that there is a relatively low probability of generating a hash that is the same as another hash generated from a text sequence with a different meaning Encryption methods use hashing to make sure that intruders cannot change transmitted messages High Level Data Link Control High Bit Rate DSL High Bit Rate DSL version 2 Combination of headphones and microphone as a useful aid for anyone who makes a lot of telephone calls and wants to keep hands free for making notes Hashed Message Authentication Code Hashed Message Authentication Code uses Message Digest Al gorithm Version 5 Hashed Message Authentication Code uses Secure Hash Al gorithm Version 1 A telephone call is put on hold without breaking the connection inquiry brokering Both B channels of the ISDN connection are needed for the per formance features Call another person during a call and Speak al ternately with two people brokering As a result you cannot be reached from outside or make external calls via your PBX s second B channel With this setting an external caller put on hold hears the PBX s on hold music The use of the inquiry brokerage and three party conference spe cial features in T Net and certain performance features of some PBXs is only possible with the hook flash function long flash of the signal key on the telephone On modern telephones this key is in dicated with a
82. for Protocol TCMP The Type field shows the class of ICMP messages the Code field specifies the type of message in greater detail Possible values e Any default value e Echo Reply e Destination unreachable O oures Quenela e Redirect e Echo e Time Exceeded e Parameter Problem e Timestamp e Timestamp Reply e Information Request e Information Reply e Address Mask Request e Address Mask Reply Field Description Code Selection options for the ICMP codes are only available for Type Destination unreachable Possible values e Any default value e Net Unreachable e Host Unreachable e Protocol Unreachable e Port Unreachable e Fragmentation Needed e Communication with Destination Network is Ad ministratively Prohibited e Communication with Destination Host is Admin istratively Prohibited 174 2 Groups A list of all configured service groups is displayed in the Firewall gt Services gt Groups menu You can group together services This makes it easier to configure firewall rules 17 4 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional service groups rial WLAN Service List Groups Basic Parameters Description Service Selection KaZaA activity any apple qt auth chargen clients_1 clients_2 daytime dhcp Members discard O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O C OK C Cancel __ Fig 160 Firewall gt Services gt Grou
83. fuse AC or 2 A fuse DC Note If the bintec WIx065n is installed outdoors the lines laid outside the building are to be categorized as TNV1 electric circuits in accordance with EN60950 as their SELV level can also be overridden by transient overvoltage e g during storms during operation in line with the regulations When wiring the connections it is therefore necessary to make sure that protective measures against overvoltage are carried out where the cable enters the building to ensure that the limit values of a SELV electric circuit are maintained in the building You can set up further connections as required e Serial connection For alternative configuration possibilities connect the serial interface of your PC COM1 or COM2 to the serial interface of the gateway console However configuration via the serial interface is not provided by default Installation The access points can be either be used as tabletop units or can be wall mounted with hangers integrated into the housing Optionally they can be mounted with a top hat rail Wall Ceillingmounting To attach the device to the wall bintec WIx065n use the brackets on the back of the housing Optionally a wall mounting with theft protection part number 5020591600 and pole brackets part number 5020591700 are available Warning Before drilling make sure that there are no building installations where you are drilling If gas electricity water or wa
84. g configuring Call forwarding in the exchange or Define telephone number for the next external call A network in infrastructure mode is a network that contains at least one access point as the central point of communication and control In a network in infrastructure mode all clients communicate with each other via access points only There is no direct communication between the individual clients A network of this kind is also known as a BSS basic service set and a network that consists of several BSS is known as an ESS extended service set Most wireless net works operate in infrastructure mode to establish a connection with the wired network Makes it possible to put the first call on hold in the event of a call waiting and take a new call Special signal on a PBX to differentiate between internal and extern Internal calls Internal telephone numbers Internet al calls Free of charge connection between terminals in a PBX Your PBX has a fixed internal telephone number plan The Internet consists of a number of regional local and university networks The IP protocol is used for data transmission on the Inter net Internet time sharing Allows several users to surf the Internet simultaneously over an Intranet IP IP Address IPComP IPCONFIG IPoA ISDN ISDN address ISDN Basic Rate In terface ISDN card ISDN connection The information is requested by the individual computers with a t
85. get started right away all you really need to know is the preset user name and password User Name admin Password admin Note Remember to change the password immediately when you log in to the device for the first time All Teldat devices are supplied with the same password which means they are not protected against unauthorised access until you change the password How to change the passwords is described in chapter Modify system password on page 56 Workshops Step by step instructions for the most important configuration tasks can be found in the separate Application Workshop guide for each application which can be downloaded from the www teldat de website under Solutions Dime Manager The devices are also designed for use with Dime Manager The Dime Manager manage ment tool can locate your bintec devices within the network quickly and easily The NET based application which is designed for up to 50 devices offers easy to use func tions and a comprehensive overview of devices their parameters and files All devices in the local network including remote devices that can be reached over SNMP are located using SNMP Multicast irrespective of their current IP address A new IP ad dress and password and other parameters can also be assigned A configuration can then be initiated over HTTP or TELNET If using HTTP the Dime Manager automatically logs in to the devices on your behalf System software files and configuration
86. gt DynDNS Provider gt New consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Provider Name Server Update Path Port Protocol Enter a name for this entry Enter the host name or IP address of the server on which the provider s DynDNS service runs Enter the path on the provider s server that contains the script for managing the IP address of your device Ask your provider for the path to be used Enter the port at which your device is to reach your provider s server Ask your provider for the relevant port The default value is 80 Select one of the protocols implemented Possible values e DynDNS default value Static DynDNS e ODS Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description SEREN DYNS e GnuDIP HTML O CAD LCR e Custom DynDNS e DnsExit Update Interval Enter the minimum time in seconds that your device must wait before it is allowed to propagate its current IP address to the DynDNS provider again The default value is 300 seconds 18 4 DHCP Server You can configure your device as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server Your device and each PC in your LAN requires its own IP address One option for allocat ing IP addresses in your LAN is the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP If you configure your device as a DHCP server the device automatically assigns IP addresses to requesting PCs in the LAN from a
87. gt New bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 9 LAN 9 2 1 VLANs In this menu you can display all the VLANs already configured edit your settings and cre ate new VLANs By default the Management VLAN is available to which all interfaces are assigned 9 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the H icon to edit existing entries Select the New button in order to create new VLANs VLANs Port Configuration Administration Configure VLAN VLAN Identifier 1 VLAN Name Management Interface Egress Rule Delete VLAN Members en1 4 Untagged OK Cancel Fig 65 LAN gt VLAN gt VLANs gt New The LAN gt VLAN gt VLANs gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Configure VLAN menu Field Description VLAN Identifier Enter the number that identifies the VLAN In the y menu you can no longer change this value Possible values are 1 to 4094 VLAN Name Enter a unique name for the VLAN A character string of up to 32 characters is possible VLAN Members Select the ports that are to belong to this VLAN You can use the Add button to add members For each entry also select whether the frames to be transmitted from this port are to be transmitted Tagged i e with VLAN in formation or Untagged i e without VLAN information 9 LAN Teldat GmbH 9 2 2 Port Configuration In this menu you can define and view the rules for receiving frames at the VLAN ports VLANs Port Configuration A
88. gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the GRE tunnel Local GRE IP Address Enter the source IP address of the GRE packets to the GRE partner If no IP address is given this corresponds to IP address 0 0 0 0 the source IP address of the GRE packets is selected automatically from one of the addresses of the interface via which the GRE partner is reached Remote GRE IP Ad Enter the target IP address of the GRE packets to the GRE dress partner Default Route If you enable the Default Route all data is automatically routed to one connection The function is disabled by default bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Local IP Address Here enter the LAN side IP address that is to be used as your device s source address for your own packets through the GRE tunnel Route Entries Define other routing entries for this connection partner Add new entries with Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 MTU Enter the maximum packet size Maximum Transfer Unit MTU in bytes that is allowed for the GRE connection between the partners
89. gt PIM gt PIM Interfaces gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the PIM Interface Settings menu Field Description Interface Choose the interface used for PIM i e over which multicast routing is operated PIM Mode Indicates the mode to be used for PIM Your device uses PIM in sparse mode The entry cannot be changed Use as Stub interface Determine whether or not the interface is used for PIM data packets This parameter allows you to use an interface for IG MP for example whilst preventing fake PIM messages If this function is deactivated default value the PIM data pack ets for this interface are blocked If the function is active the interface for the PIM data packets bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH Field Description are released Designated Router Pri ority Define the value of the designated router priority entered in the Designated Router Priority option The higher the value the greater the probability that the corres ponding router will be used as the designated router The default value is 1 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Hello Interval Define the interval in seconds at which PIM Hello messages are sent over this interface The value 0 means that no PIM Hello messages are sent on this interface Possible values 0 to 18000 seconds The d
90. gt Services gt Service List In addition the service groups configured in Firewall gt Services gt Groups can be selected 17 Firewall Teldat GmbH Field Description Action Select the action to be applied to a filtered packet Possible values e Access default value The packets are forwarded on the basis of the entries e Deny The packets are rejected e Reject The packets are rejected An error message is is sued to the sender of the packet Apply QoS Only for Action Access Select whether you want to enable QoS for this policy with the priority selected in Priority The function is enabled with Enabled The option is deactivated by default If QoS is not activated for this policy bear in mind that the data cannot be prioritised on the sender side either A policy for which QoS has been enabled is also set for the fire wall Make sure therefore that data traffic that has not been ex pressly authorised if blocked by the firewall Priority Only for Apply QoS Enabled Select the priority with which the data specified by the policy is handled on the send side Possible values e None default value No priority e Low Latency Low Latency Transmission LTT i e hand ling of data with the lowest possible latency e g suitable for VoIP data e High e Medium e Low Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall 17 1 2 QoS More and more applications need increasingly larger bandwidths which are not always
91. gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt gt Advanced Settings for Operation Mode Access Client Fields in the menu Advanced Settings for Access Client Mode Field Description Scan channels User Defined Channel Plan Roaming Profile Choose the channels which the WLAN client automatically scans for available wireless networks Possible values e Ali default value All channels are scanned e Auto The channel is automatically selected e User defined The desired channels can therefore be defined Only for Scan channels User defined Define the channels which the WLAN client automatically scans for available wireless networks Select the roaming profile The options available include typical roaming functions Possible values e Fast Roaming The WLAN client searches for available 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description wireless networks as soon as the radio signal of the existing radio connection becomes unsuitable for higher data rates e Normal Roaming default value Standard roaming e Slow Roaming The WLAN client searches for available wireless networks as soon as the radio signal of the existing radio connection becomes weaker e No Roaming The WLAN client searches for available wire less networks if it is no longer connected to a wireless net work e Custom Roaming Specify the individual roaming paramet ers Scan Threshold Indicates the value in dBm above which the system sca
92. icon to edit existing entries To configure access lists select the New but ton Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment Basic Parameters Rule Chain New 2 Description PA Access Filter Selectone v Action Allow iffilter matches m 4 oK C Cancel Fig 115 Networking gt Access Rules Rule Chains gt New The Networking gt Access Rules Rule Chains gt Newmenu consists of the following fields bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Rule Chain Select whether to create a new rule chain or to edit an existing one Possible values e New default value You can create a new rule chain with this setting e lt Name of class plan gt Select an already existing rule chain and thus add another rule to it Description Enter the name of the rule chain Access Filter Select an IP filter If the rule chain is new select the filter to be set at the first point of the rule chain If the rule chain already exists select the filter to be attached to the rule chain Action Define the action to be taken for a filtered data packet Possible values e Allow default value Allow packet if it matches the filter e Allow if filter does not match Allow packet if it does not match the filter e Deny if filter matches Deny packet if it matches the filter e Deny if filter does not match Deny packet if it does not
93. in a terminal The login prompt window appears This is located in the SNMP shell of the device 2 Continue with Login on page 65 Windows 1 How an SSH connection is set up very much depends on the software used Consult the documentation for the program you are using As soon as you have connected to the device the login prompt window will appear You are now in the SNMP shell of the device 2 Continue with Login on page 65 Note PuTTY requires certain settings for a connection to a Teldat device The support pages of http www teldat de include FAQs which list the required settings 5 1 2 Access via the Serial Interface Your device has a serial interface with which a PC can be connected directly The follow ing chapter describes what you have to remember when setting up a serial connection and what you can do to configure your device in this way Access via the serial interface is ideal if you are setting up an initial configuration of your device and a LAN access is not possible via the pre configured IP address 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 Windows To connect your device to your PC via the serial interface proceed as described in nstalla tion on page 6 If you are using a Windows PC you need a terminal program for the serial connection e g 5 Access and configuration Teldat GmbH HyperTerminal Make sure that HyperTerminal was also installed on the PC with the Win dows installation However you can a
94. in the WLAN this data can in theory be intercepted Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN and read by any attacker with the appropriate resources Particular attention must therefore be paid to protecting the wireless connection There are three security modes WEP WPA PSK and WPA Enterprise WPA Enterprise of fers the highest level of security but this security mode is only really suitable for compan ies because it requires a central authentication server Private users should choose WEP or preferably WPA PSK with higher security as their security mode WEP 802 11 defines the security standard WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption of data with 40 bit Security Mode wEP 40 or 104 bit Security Mode wEP 104 However this widely used WEP has proven susceptible to failure However a higher degree of se curity can only be achieved through hardware based encryption which required additional configuration for example 3DES or AES This permits even sensitive data from being transferred via a radio path without fear of it being stolen IEEE 802 11 Standard IEEE 802 11i for wireless systems contains basic security specifications for wire less networks in particular with regard to encryption It replaces the insecure WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy with WPA Wi Fi Protected Access It also includes the use of the ad vanced encryption standard AES to encrypt data WPA WPA Wi Fi Protected Access offers additional privacy by mea
95. into the entry field The function is disabled by default Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Overwrite similar certi ficate Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to overwrite a certificate already present on the your device with the new one The function is disabled by default Write certificate in con figuration Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to integrate the certificate in a configuration file and if so select the desired configuration file The function is disabled by default Certificate Request De scription Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter a description under which the SCEP certificate on your device is to be saved URL SCEP Server URL Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter the URL of the SCEP server e g ht tp scep teldat de 8080 scep scep dll Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data Subject Name Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter a subject name with attributes Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c DE CA Name Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter the name of the CA certificate of the certification authority CA from which you wish to request your certificate e g cawin
96. is redirected to the home login page e After the user has entered the registration data user password these are sent to the central RADIUS server Hotspot server as RADIUS registration e Following successful registration the gateway opens Internet access e For each user the gateway sends regular additional information to the RADIUS server for recording accounting data e When the ticket expires the user is automatically logged off and again redirected to the home login page Requirements To operate a Hotspot the customer requires e a Teldat device as hotspot gateway with active Internet access and configured hotspot server entries for login and accounting see menu System Management gt Remote Au thentication gt RADIUS gt New with Group Description default group 0 e Teldat Hotspot hosting article number 5510000198 e Access data e Documentation e Software licensing Please note that you must first activate the licence Go to www teldat de then Service Support gt Services gt Online Services Enter the required data please note the relevant explanations on the license sheet and follow the instructions of the online licensing You then receive the Hotspot server s login data Note Activation may require 2 3 business days Access data for gateway configuration RADIUS Server IP 62 245 165 180 RADIUS Server Password Set by Teldat GmbH Domain Individually set for customers by customer dealer Wal
97. list of all the Drop In Groups Each Drop In group represents a network 12 6 1 1 New Select the New button to set up other Drop In Groups Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Drop In Groups Basic Parameters Group Description O Mode Transparent Network Configuration Static 4 Network Address Ooo Netmask EF Local IP Address a ARP Lifetime 3600 Seconds DNS assignment via DHCP Unchanged Y Exclude from NAT DMZ Enabled Interface Interface Selection Add OK Cancel Fig 118 Networking gt Drop In gt Drop In Groups gt New The Networking gt Drop In gt Drop In Groups gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Group Description Enter a unique name for the Drop In group Mode Select which mode is to be used to send the MAC addresses of network components Possible values e Transparent default value ARP packets and IP packets belonging to the drop in network are routed transparently unchanged e Proxy ARP packets and IP packets related to the drop in network are forwarded with the MAC address of the corres ponding interface Network Configuration Select how an IP address is assigned to the routers of the Drop In group Possible values e Static default value 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description DHCP Network Address Only for Network Configuration Static Enter the network address of the Drop In network
98. llegado al final de su vida til deber ser llevado a los centros de recogida previstos y que su tratamiento debe estar separado del de los residuos urbanos Symbolen som sitter p apparaten med den korsade avfallstunnan betyder att apparaten nar den tj nat ut ska kasseras och l mnas till de f rutsedda sorterg rdarna och skiljas fran normalt hus h llsavfall Tegnet p apparatet som viser en avfallcontainer med et kyss over betyr at apparatet m kastet p hertil egnet avfallssted og ikke sammen med vanlig avfall fra husholdningen To ovu Bolo nov Ppioketal OTIV OVOKEDN LE TO otavpwp vo KOVTEIVEP ATOPPLLLATWV onpaiver OTLN OVOKEVI oTo T doG TNS StapKEtac xpons tng np ner va Sratedei eywpiot anr Ta kavovik anoppiupata ota yr aut Tov okon npopien peva onpeia SidBeons Symbolet med gennemkrydset affaldsbeholder p apparatet betyder at apparatet n r det ikke kan bruges l ngere skal bortskaffes adskilt fra normalt husholdningsaffald p et af de dertil be regnede bortskaffelsessteder Znajduj cy si na urz dzeniu symbol przekre lonego pojemnika na mieci oznacza e po up ywie ywotno ci urz dzenia nale y go odda do odpowiedniej plac wki utylizacyjnej i nie wyrzuca go do normalnych mieci domowych Het doorgehaalde symbool van de afvalcontainer op het apparaat betekent dat het apparaat op het einde van zijn levensduur niet bij het normale huisvuil mag worden verwijderd Het moet bij een erkend inza
99. match the filter e Ignore Use next rule To set the rules of a rule chain in a different order select the S button in the list menu for the entry to be shifted A dialog box opens in which you can decide under Move whether the entry below default value or above another rule of this rule chain is to be shifted 12 5 3 Interface Assignment In this menu the configured rule chains are assigned to the individual interfaces and the gateway s behavior is defined for denying IP packets A list of all configured interface assignments is displayed in the Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment menu Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment View 20 per page Fiter in None v equal v Go Interface Rule Chain Silent Deny Reporting Method en1 0 Yes Info mi Page 1 Items 1 1 New Fig 116 Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment 12 5 3 1 Edit or New Choose the i icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure additional assignments Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment Basic Parameters Interface Selectone v Rule Chain Selectone v Silent Deny MEnabled Reporting Method Info v OK Cancel Fig 117 Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment gt New The Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment gt New menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description I
100. menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Layer 2 5 Options menu Field Value Interface Shows the interface that is being edited Wildcard Mode Select the Wildcard mode you want to use on the interface Possible values none default value Wildcard mode is not used e static With this setting you must enter the MAC address of a device that is connected over IP under Wildcard MAC Ad dress Each packet without IP and without ARP is forwarded to this device This occurs even when the device is no longer connected e first lf you choose this setting the MAC address of the first non IP unicast frame or non ARP unicast frame which occurs Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field VENTO on any of the Ethernet interfaces is used as the wildcard MAC address This wildcard MAC address can only be reset by rebooting the device or by selecting another wildcard mode last If you choose this setting the internal WLAN MAC ad dress is used to establish a connection to the access point As soon as a non IP unicast frame or non ARP unicast frame ap pears it is forwarded to the MAC address from which the last non IP unicast frame or non ARP unicast frame was received on the Ethernet interface of the device This wildcard MAC ad dress is renewed with each non IP unicast frame or non ARP unicast frame Wildcard MAC Address Only for Wildcard Mode static Transparent MAC Ad dress Enter the MAC address of a d
101. messages from other subsystems Possible values e Ali default value All firewall activities are displayed e Deny Only reject and deny events are shown see Action e Accept Only accept events are shown e None Syslog messages are not generated Full Filtering Here you define whether packets are only to be filtered if they are sent to an interface other than the interface that created the connection With Enable all the packets are filtered default value Fields in the Session Timer menu Field Description UDP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a UDP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 180 TCP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a TCP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 3600 PPTP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a PPTP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 Field Description The default value is 86400 Other Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a session of another type is to be regarded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30to 86400 The default value is 30 17 2 Interfaces 17 2 1 Groups A list of all configured interface routes is displayed in the Firewall gt Interfaces gt Groups menu You can group together the interfaces of y
102. method is being PGP PH Phone book PIN Ping PKCS Point to multipoint Point to multipoint Point to multipoint Point to multipoint connection for the PBX Point to point Point to point ISDN access Polling Port POTS replaced by the multifrequency code method MFC Pretty Good Privacy Packet handler The PBX has an internal phone book You can store up to 300 tele phone numbers and the associated names You can access the PBX s phone book with the Teldat devices for example CS 410 You add entries to the phone book using the configuration interface Personal identification number Packet Internet Groper Public Key Cryptography Standards Point to multipoint connection Basic connection in T ISDN with three telephone numbers and two lines as standard The ISDN terminals are connected directly on the network termination NTBA or ISDN internet connection of a PBX Point to multipoint You enter the multiple subscriber numbers received from T Com with the order confirmation in the table fields defined for them in the configuration As a rule you receive three multiple subscriber num bers but can apply for up to 10 telephone numbers for each con nection When you enter the telephone numbers they are assigned to an index and also to a team Note that initially all telephone numbers are assigned to team 00 The internal telephone numbers 10 11 and 20 are entered in team 00 ex works External calls are
103. mode of the interface Possible values e Static default value Enter a static IP address e IKE Config Mode Client Can only be selected for IKEv1 Select this option if your gateway receives an IP ad dress from the server as IPSec client e IKE Config Mode Server Select this option if your gate way assigns an IP address as server for connecting clients This is taken from the selected IP Assignment Pool Config Mode Only for IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Server Of IKE Config Mode Client Possible values e Pull default value The client requests the IP address and the gateway answers the request e Push The gateway suggests an IP address to the client and the client must either accept or reject this This value must be identical for both sides of the tunnel IP Assignment Pool Only if IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Serv Sis Select an IP pool configured in the VPN gt IPSec gt IP Poolsmenu If an IP pool has not been configured here yet the message Not yet defined appears in this field Default Route Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Client Select whether the route to this IPSec peer is to be defined as Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Local IP Address Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Server Enter the WAN IP address of your IPS
104. not correct This problem is avoided by transferring the IP address over ISDN This type of transfer of dynamic IP addresses also enables the more secure ID Pro tect mode main mode to be used for tunnel setup Method of operation Various modes are available for transferring your own IP address to the peer The address can be transferred free in the D channel or in the B channel but here the call must be accepted by the remote station and therefore incurs costs If a peer whose IP address has been assigned dynamically wants to arrange for another peer to set up an IPSec tunnel it can transfer its own IP address as per the settings described in Fields in the menu IPSec Callback on page 325 Not all transfer modes are supported by all telephone companies If you are not sure automatic selection by the device can be used to ensure that all the available possibilities can be used Note The callback configuration should be the same on the two devices so that your device is able to identify the IP address information from the called peer The following roles are possible e One side takes on the active role the other the passive role e Both sides can take on both roles both The IP address transfer and the start of IKE phase 1 negotiation take place in the following steps 1 Peer A the callback initiator sets up a connection to the Internet in order to be as signed a dynamic IP address and be reachable for peer B over the Intern
105. of the discovered access point You can change the related netmask You can change the gateway address of the discovered access point You must enter the administrator password for the access point The configuration operation cannot be performed without a password The value of this field can only be read Displays the result of the last configuration operation Possible values e No error The access point reported a successful operation or a configuration change has not yet been performed with OK Timeout The access point has not responded Access denied The access point reported an authorisation error Check the authentication password Invalid IP Parameters There is a problem with the in tended IP parameters IP address netmask or gateway ad dress Destination Unreachable The access point cannot be reached for internal reasons e g the interface to which the access point is connected is down A configuration request cannot be sent to the access point Other Error The access point responds to the configura tion request with an unexpected or non specific error 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description e Internal Error An internal device problem prevented the configuration option from being carried out 18 72 Options In this menu you can grant permission for your device to be discovered by other Teldat devices using the Teldat Discovery protocol and to be configured by means of this
106. or 802 11g e 802 11 mixed long b g Your device adapts to the cli ent technology and operates according to either 802 11b or 802 11g Only a data rate of 1 and 2 mbps needs to be sup ported by all clients basic rates This mode is also needed for Centrino clients if connection problems occur e 802 11 mixed short b g Your device adapts to the client technology and operates according to either 802 11b or 802 11g The following applies for mixed short The data rates 5 5 and 11 mbps must be supported by all clients basic rates e 802 11b g n Your device operates according to either 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n e 802 11g n Your device operates according to either 802 11g or 802 11n e 802 11n Your device operates only according to 802 11n For Operation Band 5 GHz Indoor 5 GHz Outdoor 5 GHz In Outdoor or 5 8 GHz Outdoor Possible values e 802 11a The device operates only in accordance with 802 11a e 802 11n Your device operates only according to 802 11n e 802 11a n Your device operates according to either 802 11a or 802 11n 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description Max Transmission Rate Select the transmission speed Possible values e Auto default value The transmission speed is determined automatically e lt Value gt According to setting for Operation Band Band width Number of Spatial Streams and Wireless Mode vari ous fixed values in mbps are available Burst Mo
107. or respective EU Directives Certification authorities that issue so called qualified certificates are organised in a hier archy with the Federal Network Agency as the higher certifying authority The structure and content of a certificate are stipulated by the standard used X 509 is the most important and the most commonly use standard for digital certificates Qualified certificates are personal and extremely trustworthy Digital certificates are part of a so called Public Key Infrastructure PKI PKI refers to a system that can issue distribute and check digital certificates Certificates are issued for a specific period usually one year i e they have a limited valid ity period Your device is designed to use certificates for VPN connections and for voice connections over Voice over IP 76 1 Certificate List A list of all existing certificates is displayed in the System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List menu 7 6 1 1 Edit Click the icon to display the content of the selected object key certificate or request bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Certificate List CRLs Certificate Servers Edit parameters Description test Certificate is CA Certificate M true O Disabled O Always Certificate Revocation List CRL Checking Only if a CRL Distribution Point is present Ouse settings from superior certificate Force certificate to be trusted O True Wiew details Certificate SerialN
108. packets Only for Route Type Host Route via Interface or Net work Route via Interface Enter the IP address of the destination host or destination net work When Route Type Network Route via Interface Also enter the relevant netmask in the second field Only for Route Type Default Route via Gateway Host Route via Gateway Or Network Route via Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway to which your device is to forward the IP packets Select the priority of the route The lower the value the higher the priority of the route Value range from 0 to 15 The default value is 7 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Fields in the menu Extended Route Parameters Field Description Description Enter a description for the IP route Source Interface Select the interface over which the data packets are to reach the device The default value is None New Source IP Ad Enter the IP address and netmask of the source host or source dress Netmask network Layer 4 Protocol Select a protocol Possible values ICMP IGMP TCP UDP GRE ESP AH OSPF PIM L2TP Any The default value is Any Source Port Only for Layer 4 Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the source port First select the port number range Possible values e Any default value The route is valid for all port numbers e Single Enables the entry of a port number e Range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers e Privileged Entry of privileged port numbers 0
109. part number 5500001254 is available as an accessory PoE an Ethernet 1 Class 0 according to 802 3af max 12 4 W The Gigabit PoE Injector with part number 5530000082 is available as an accessory Environmental requirements Storage temperature 40 C to 85 C Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C Relative atmospheric humidity 10 to 100 Available interfaces WLAN bintec W1003n 1 Radio module 802 11abgn 2 4 oder 5GHz Mimo 2x2 bintec W2003n 1 Radio module 802 11bgn 2 4GHz Mimo 2x2 1 Radiomodul 802 11an 5GHz Mimo 2x2 bintec W2003n ext 1 Radio module 802 11abgn 2 4 or 5GHz Mimo 2x2 1 Radio module 802 11abgn 2 4 or 5GHz Mimo 2x2 Teldat GmbH 3 Installation Property Value bintec W2004n 1 Radio module 802 11bgn 2 4GHz Mimo 3x3 1 Radiomodul 802 11an 5GHz Mimo 3x3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LAN 10 100 1000 mbps Available sockets Ethernet interface bintec W1003n 1 RJ45 socket bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n 2 RJ45 sockets Antennas Antenna connection bintec W1003n 2 internal antennas bintec W2003n 4 internal antennas bintec W2003n ext 4 externe dualband antennas bintec W2004n 6 internal antennas Transmit Power WLAN max 100 mW 20 dBm EIRP Standards amp Guidelines R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 60950 1 IEC60950 EN 60950 22 EN 301489 1 EN301489 17 EN 55022 EN 300328 1 EN 301893
110. performance feature is switched off This function can be used to monitor rooms from an external tele phone You can acoustically monitor a room from an internal telephone in your PBX This is set up using the telephone procedures described in the user s guide Please read the information on the described functions in the user s guide A device that connects different networks at layer 3 of the OSI mod el and routes information from one network to the other The RSA algorithm named after its inventors Rivest Shamir Adle man is based on the problem of factoring large integers It therefore takes a large amount of data processing capacity and time to derive a RSA key Real Time Streaming Protocol See Primary Rate Interface The SAD Security Association Database contains information on security agreements such as AH or ESP algorithms and keys se quence numbers protocol modes and SA life For outgoing IPSec connections an SPD entry refers to an entry in the SAD i e the SPD defines which SA is to be applied For incoming IPSec connec tions the SAD is queried to determine how the packet is to be pro cessed Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line A server offers services used by clients Often refers to a certain computer in the LAN e g DHCP server Part of the T Com certification services for the Internet Digital pass for a company With the ServerPass T Com confirms that a server on the Internet belongs to a particular
111. predefined IP address pool If a client requires an IP address for the first time it sends a DHCP request with its MAC address to the available DHCP server as a network broadcast The client then receives its IP address from Teldat as part of a brief exchange You therefore do not need to allocate fixed IP addresses to PCs which reduces the amount of configuration work in your network To do this you set up a pool of IP ad dresses from which your device assigns IP addresses to hosts in the LAN for a defined period of time A DHCP server also transfers the addresses of the domain name server entered statically or by PPP negotiation DNS NetBIOS name server WINS and default gateway 18 4 1 IP Pool Configuration The Local Services gt DHCP Server IP Pool Configuration menu displays a list of all the configured IP pools This list is global and also displays pools configured in other menus 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH 18 4 1 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the Fay icon to edit exist ing entries IP Pool Configuration DHCP Configuration IP MAC Binding DHCP Relay Settings Basic Parameters IP Pool Name IP Address Range Primary J DNS Server Secondary OK Cancel Fig 170 Local Services gt DHCP Server IP Pool Configuration New Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Addres
112. role of the L2TP network server LNS or the functions of a L2TP access concentrator client LAC client Possible values e LNS default value If you select this option the L2TP partner is configured so that it accepts L2TP tunnels and restores the encapsulated PPP traffic flow e LAC If you select this option the L2TP partner is configured so that it encapsulates a PPP traffic flow in L2TP and sets up a L2TP tunnel to a remote LNS Tunnel Profile Only for Connection Type LAC Select a profile created in the Tunnel Profile menu for the con nection to this L2TP partner User Name Enter the code of your device Password Enter the password Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle time in seconds for static short hold The static short hold setting determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the short hold The default value is 300 Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP address or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Possible values e Static default value You enter a stat
113. route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Create NAT Policy Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be ac tivated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Local IP Address Only for IP Address Mode Static Assign an IP address from your LAN to the PPT interface which is to be used as your device s internal source address Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode Static Define other routing entries for this PPTP partner Add new entries with Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The de fault value is 60 Maximum Number of Enter the number of unsuccessful attempts to setup a connec Dialup Retries tion before the interface is blocked Possible values are 0 to 100 15 WAN Teldat GmbH Field Description The default value is 5 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this Internet connection Sele
114. rules ap ply when using the parameter e If an interface is only assigned to one load balancing group it is not necessary to configure the route selector e If an interface is assigned to multiple load balancing groups configuration of the route selector is essential e The route selector must be configured identically for all inter face entries within a load balancing group Select the Destination IP Address of the desired route 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description You can choose between all routes and all extended routes Tracking IP Address You can use the Tracking IP Address parameter to have a particular route monitored The load balancing status of the interface and the status of the routes connected to the interface can be influenced using this parameter This means that routes can be enabled or disabled irrespective of the interface s operation status The connection is monitored using the gateway s host surveillance function here Host surveillance entries must be configured in order to use this function These can be configured in the Local Ser vices gt Surveillance gt Hosts menu Here it is important that only the host surveillance entries with the the action Surveil lance are taken into account in the context of load balancing Links between the load balancing function and the host surveil lance function are made through the configuration of the Track ing IP Address in the Load Balancing gt Load Bala
115. sight and the antenna installation Then carry out the Scan The partner should then be found AP MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the remote client Network Name SSID Displays the name of the remote client Channel Shows the Channel used Mode Shows the security mode encryption and authentication for the wireless network Signal Displays the signal strength of the detected client link in dBm Connected Displays the status of the link on your client Action You can change the status of the client link The available ac tions are displayed in this field 10 1 5 Bridge Links Not available with W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n If you re operating your device in Bridge mode Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt gt Operation Mode Bridge you can Edit or create the desired Bridge Links in the menu Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt g gt New With the bridge function you can make a Teldat wireless connection between one or more other devices The range of these wireless connections can be several kilometres depend 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH ing on the antennas used Note Always use the antennas and antenna cables supplied with the equipment to prevent unintentional violations of the applicable law If you have special requirements e g re garding cable lengths please contact your dealer or Teldat GmbH Bridges are generally used to interconnect various LAN segments at Layer
116. source IP address of the data packets and the corres Netmask ponding netmask Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Range Enter a source port number or a range of source port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description DSCP TOS Filter Select the Type of Service TOS Layer 3 Possible values e Ignore default value The type of service is ignored e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit e DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format e DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decimal format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F COS Filter Enter the service class of the IP packets Class of Service 802 1p Layer 2 CoS Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 Value range 0 to 7
117. system time are shown here The entry cannot be changed Fields in the Manual Time Settings menu Field Description Set Date Enter a new date Format Day dd Month mm e Year yyyy Set Time Enter a new time Format e Hour hh e Minute mm 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Fields in the Automatic Time Settings Time Protocol menu Field Description ISDN Timeserver Only for devices with ISDN interface Determine whether the system time is to be updated via ISDN If a time server is configured the time is only determined over ISDN until a successful update is received from this time server Updating over ISDN is deactivated for the period in which the time is determined by means of a time server The function is activated with Enabled The function is disabled by default First Timeserver Enter the primary time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time server request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service with TCP port 37 e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Second Timeserver Enter the secondary time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time s
118. that the port is not specified The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced IPSec Options Field Description Phase 1 Profile Select a profile for Phase 1 Besides user defined profiles pre defined profiles are available Possible values e None use default profile Uses the profile marked as standard in VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles e Multi Proposal Uses a special profile which contains the proposals for Phase 1 3DES MD5 AES MD5 and Blowfish MD5 regardless of the proposal selection in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles e lt Profilname gt Uses a profile configured in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles for Phase 1 Phase 2 Profile Select a profile for Phase 2 Besides user defined profiles pre defined profiles are available Possible values e None use default profile Uses the profile marked as standard in VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles e Multi Proposal Uses a special profile which contains the proposals for Phase 2 3DES MD5 AES 128 MD5 and Blow fish MD5 regardless of the proposal selection in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles e lt Profilname gt Uses a profile configured in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles for Phase 2 Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description XAUTH Profile Select a profile created in VPN gt IPSec gt XAUTH Profiles if you wish to use this IPSec peer XAuth for authentication If XAuth is used together w
119. the Callback Mode Possible values e Inactive default value IPSec callback is deactivated The local device neither reacts to incoming ISDN calls nor initiates ISDN calls to the remote device e Passive The local device only reacts to incoming ISDN calls and if necessary initiates setting up an IPSec tunnel to the peer No ISDN calls are sent to the remote device to cause this to set up an IPSec tunnel e Active The local device sends an ISDN call to the remote device to cause this to set up an IPSec tunnel The device does not react to incoming ISDN calls e Both Your device can react to incoming ISDN calls and send ISDN calls to the remote device The setting up of an IPSec tunnel is executed after an incoming ISDN call and initiated by an outgoing ISDN call Only for Mode Passive or Both Enter the ISDN number from which the remote device calls the local device calling party number Wildcards may also be used Only for Mode Active or Both Enter the ISDN number with which the local device calls the re mote device calls called party number Wildcards may also be used 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description Transfer own IP ad Select whether the IP address of your own device is to be trans dress over ISDN GSM _ ferred over ISDN for IPSec callback The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Transfer Mode Only for Transfer own IP address over ISDN GSM enabled S
120. the Windows application Activity Monitor The default value is 2107 registered by IANA Internet As signed Numbers Authority Password Enter the password for the Activity Monitor bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 21 Monitoring This menu contains information that enable you to locate problems in your network and monitor activities e g at your device s WAN interface 21 1 Internal Log 21 1 1 System Messages In the Monitoring gt Internal Log gt System Messages menu a list of all internally stored system messages is displayed Above the table you will find the configured vales for the Maximum Number of Syslog Entries and Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries fields These values can be changed in the System Management gt Global Settings gt System menu System Messages Automatic Refresh interval 50 Seconds Apply Maximum Number of Syslog Entries 50 Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries Information View 20 per page Fitter in None equal y Go No Date Time Level Subsystem Message 1 2005 01 12 22 39 28 Alert Configuration NCI Alert f Incitappiloopobj cpp 628 ERROR LoopObj LoopObj name wlanifTable 2 2005 01 10 22 47 13 Information IPSec init starting 3 2005 01 10 22 47 13 Information IPSec BinTec ipsecd version 3 0 Copyright c 1996 2010 by Funkwerk Enterprise Communications GmbH 4 2005 01 10 22 47 13 Information IPSec init running 5 2005 01 10 22 47 13 Inform
121. the default values 5 Default BOOTmonitor Parameters You can change the default settings of the BOOTmonitor of the device e g the baud rate for serial connections 6 Show System Information Shows useful information about your device e g serial number MAC address and software versions The BOOTmonitor is started as follows MAC address and software versions The devices passes through various functional states when starting e Start mode BOOTmonitor mode e Normal mode After some self tests have been successfully carried out in the start mode your device reaches the BOOTmonitor mode The BOOTmonitor prompt is displayed if you are serially connected to your device Press lt sp gt for boot monitor or any other key to boot system W1002 Bootmonitor V 7 9 1 Rev 1 from 2009 10 19 00 00 00 Copyright c 1996 2005 by Teldat GmbH 1 Boot System Software Update via TFTP Software Update via XMODEM Delete Configuration Default Bootmonitor Parameters Show System Information 2 3 4 5 6 Your Choice gt _ Fig 38 BOOTmonitor After display of the BOOTmonitor prompt press the space bar within four seconds to use the functions of the BOOTmonitor If you do not make an entry within four seconds the device changes back to normal operating mode Note If you change the baudrate the preset value is 9600 baud make sure the terminal program used also uses this baudrate If this is not the c
122. the remaining chips Data Terminal Equipment Teldat GmbH DTMF Dynamic IP address E1 T1 ECB ECT Email Glossary Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone dialling system In contrast to a static IP address a dynamic IP address is assigned temporarily by DHCP Network components such as the web server or printer usually have static IP address while clients such as note books or workstations usually have dynamic IP addresses E1 European variant of the 2 048 mbps ISDN Primary Rate Inter face which is also called the E1 system Electronic Code Book mode Explicit Call Transfer This performance feature allows two external connections to be transferred without blocking the two B channels of the exchange connection Electronic mail Emergency numbers You urgently need to contact the policy fire brigade or another tele Encapsulation Encryption Entry of external connection data ESP ESS Ethernet phone number To make things worse all the connections are busy However you have informed your PBX of the telephone numbers that need to be contactable in an emergency If you now dial one of these numbers it is recognised by the PBX and a B channel of the T ISDN is automatically freed up for your emergency call Emer gency calls are not subject to configuration restrictions If Calling with prefix plus code number is set for a a connection the internal connection is busy To make an external call first dia
123. the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the cli ent link in question is active Signal dBm Shows the received signal strength in dBm Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description SNR dB Shows the signal quality in dB Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this client link in Mbps Rate For each of the specified data rates displays the values for Tx Packets and Rx Packets 21 4 6 Load Balancing The Monitoring gt WLAN Load Balancing menu displays an overview of the Load Balan cing For each VSS you can see such information as the number of clients connected the number of clients that are affected by the 2 4 5 GHz changeover and the number of rejec ted clients WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management View 20 per page Fitter in None v equal v Go d F Active 2 415 GHz Denied Clients VSS Description Network Name SSID MAC Address Cliente changeover softmard vss7 10 default 00 a0 19 0b cf e0 0 0 0 0 iu Page 1 Items 1 1 Fig 216 Monitoring gt WLAN Load Balancing Values in the list Load Balancing VSS Description Displays the unique description of the wireless network VSS Network Name SSID Displays the name of the wireless network SSID MAC Address Displays the MAC address being used for this VSS Active Clients Displays the number of active clients 2 4 5
124. they can be used there Data transmission rate from the ISP to the customer Digital Signature Algorithm Digital Signature Standard Data is transferred between the Internet and your PBX over ISDN or T DSL The PBX determines the remote terminal to which a data packet is to be sent For a connection to be selected and set up parameters must be defined for all the required connections These parameters are stored in lists which together permit the right con nection to be set up The PBX uses the PPP Point to Point Pro tocol for ISDN access and PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet for access over T DSL The traffic on these two Internet connections is monitored separately by the PBX Special modem for data transmission using DSL access technology A DSL splitter is a device that splits the data or frequencies of vari ous applications that run via a subscriber line or distribution point and provides this via separate connections Digital Subscriber Line Digital Subscriber Signalling System Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum is a wireless technology that was originally developed for the military and offers a high level of protec tion against faults because the wanted signal is spread over a wide area The signal is spread by means of a spread sequence or chip ping code consisting of 11 chips across 22 MHz Even if there is a fault on one or more of the chips during transfer the information can still be obtained reliably from
125. used 21 7 QoS In the Monitoring gt QoS menu statistics are displayed for interfaces on which QoS has been configured 21 71 QoS A list of all interfaces for which QoS was configured is displayed in the Monitoring gt QoS gt QoS menu Qos QoS Interface QoS Queue Send Dropped Queued Fig 219 Monitoring gt QoS gt QoS Values in the QoS list Field Description Interface Shows the interface for which QoS has been configured QoS Queue Shows the QoS queue which has been configured for this inter face Send Shows the number of sent packets with the corresponding pack et class Dropped Shows the number of rejected packets with the corresponding packet class in case of overloading Queued Shows the number of waiting packets with the corresponding packet class in case of overloading 21 8 PIM Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring 21 8 1 Global Status The status of all configured PIM components is displayed in the Monitoring PIM Global Status menu Global Status Not Interface Specific Status Interface Specific States View All v PIM Interfaces View 20 per page Filter in None Y equal v Go Interface IP Address Designated Router Page 1 PIM Neighbors View 120 per page Filter in None equal ba Go Interface Generation ID IP Address Uptime Expiry Timer Page 1 Multicast Group RP Mappings View 20 per page Fitter in None equal v Go Multicast Group Address Multicast Group Prefix Length Rendev
126. v Advanced Settings Ticket Type Username Password v Allowed HotSpot Client All v Login Frameset Y Active Pop Up window for status indication V Active YJ Enabled Default Idle Timeout 600 Seconds OK Cancel Fig 185 Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway gt The Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway gt menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Interface Choose the interface to which the Hotspot LAN or WLAN is con nected When operating over LAN enter the Ethernet interface here e g en1 0 If operating over WLAN the WLAN interface to which the access point is connected must be selected N Caution For security reasons you cannot configure your device over an interface that is configured for the Hotspot Therefore take care when selecting the interface you want to use for the Hotspot If you select the interface over which the current configura tion session is running the current connection will be lost You must then log in again over a reachable interface that is not configured for the Hotspot to configure your device 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Domain at the HotSpot Enter the domain name that you used when setting up the Hot Server Spot server for this customer The domain name is required so that the Hotspot server can distinguish between the different cli ents customers Walled Gard
127. we Teldat JII bintec elmes elmeg IP S400 elmeg hybird zm POTS Public Network m um HHE HE mmm G Manual bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Reference Copyright Version 14 0 2013 Teldat GmbH bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 1 Manual Teldat GmbH Legal Notice Aim and purpose This document is part of the user manual for the installation and configuration of Teldat devices For the latest information and notes on the current software release please also read our release notes particularly if you are updating your software to a higher release version You will find the latest release notes under www teldat de Liability This manual has been put together with the greatest possible care However the information con tained in this manual is not a guarantee of the properties of your product Teldat GmbH is only liable within the terms of its conditions of sale and supply and accepts no liability for technical inaccuracies and or omissions The information in this manual can be changed without notice You will find additional information and also release notes for Teldat devices under www teldat de Teldat devices make WAN connections as a possible function of the system configuration You must monitor the product in order to avoid unwanted charges Teldat GmbH accepts no responsibility for data loss unwanted connection costs and damage caused by unintended operation of the product Trademarks Teldat trade
128. when configuring the server and client An L2TP tunnel profile must be created on each of the two sides LAC and LNS The corresponding L2TP tunnel profile is used on the initiator side LAC to set up the connection The L2TP tunnel profile is needed on the responder side LNS to accept the connection 16 2 1 Tunnel Profiles A list of all configured tunnel profiles is displayed in the VPN gt L2TP gt Tunnel Profiles menu 16 2 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional tunnel profiles Basic Parameters Description Bem o SS Local Hostname RR Remote Hostname A Password eseese gt LAC Mode Parameters Remote IP Address pz UDP Source Port O Fixed UDP Destination Port frzor Advanced Settings Local IP Address AAA Hello Intervall po Seconds Minimum Time between Retries it Seconds Maximum Time between Retries fie Seconds Maximum Retries es Data Packets Sequence Numbers DEnabled OK C Cancel Fig 148 VPN gt L2TP gt Tunnel Profiles gt New The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Tunnel Profiles gt New consists of the following fields bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the current profile The device automatically names the profiles L2TP and numbers them but the value can be c
129. when the device is rebooted For bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n proceed as follows 1 Switch off your device 2 Press the Cfg button on your device 3 Keep the Cfg button on your device pressed down and switch the device back on 4 Look at the LEDs Initially Failure LED flashes first Hold the Cfg button until the red LED goes out and the green Status LED starts to flash Proceed as follows if you also want to reset all the user passwords to the ex works state and delete stored configurations when resetting the device 1 Set up a serial connection to your device Reboot your device and monitor the boot sequence Start the BOOTmonitor and choose the 4 Delete Configuration and fol low the instructions or 2 Set up a serial connection to your device First carry out the reset procedure de Teldat GmbH 3 Installation scribed and enter erase bootconfig as Login at the login prompt in the command line Leave the password empty and press the Return key The device runs through the boot sequence again You can now configure your device again as described from Basic configuration on page 48 Note If you delete the boot configuration using the GUI all passwords will also be reset and the current boot configuration deleted The next time the device will boot with the standard ex works settings 3 5 Cleaning You can clean your device easily Use a damp cloth or antistatic cloth Do not use solvents Neve
130. which operates in the 2 4 GHz range 2400 MHz 2485 MHz and offers a maximum data transmission rate of 11 mbps 802 11b and 802 11g WLAN systems involve no charge or login With 802 11a bandwidths of up to 54 mbps can be used in the 5150 GHz to 5725 MHz range With the higher frequency range 19 non overlapping frequencies are available in Germany This frequency range can also be used without a licence in Germany In Europe transmission power of not just 30 mW but 1000 mW can be used with 802 11h but only if TPC TX Power Control method for controlling transmission power in wireless sys tems to reduce interferences and DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection are used The pur pose of TPC and DFS is to ensure that satellite connections and radar devices are not in terfered with The standard 802 11n Draft 2 0 uses MIMO technology Multiple Input Multiple Output for data transmission that allows data transfer via WLAN over longer distances or with higher data rates With a bandwidth of 20 or 40 MHz a gross data rate of 150 Mbps or 300 Mbps is achieved An amendment to the Telecommunications Act TKG allowed the 5 8 GHz band 5755 MHz 5875 MHz to be used for so called BFWA applications Broadband Fixed Wireless Access This simply requires registration with the Federal Network Agency However the use of TPC and DFS is mandatory in this case 10 1 WLAN In the Wireless LAN gt WLAN menu you can configure all WLAN modules of your dev
131. your access point Set Visible Enabled This will exclude all WLAN clients that attempt to establish a connec tion with the general value for Network Name SSID Any and do not know the SSID set tings Use the available encryption methods To do this select Security Mode WEP 40 WEP 104 WPA PSKOr WPA Enterprise and enter the relevant key in the access point un der WEP Key 1 4 or Preshared Key and in the WLAN clients The WEP key should be changed regularly To do this change the Transmit Key Select the longer 104 Bit WEP key For transmission of information with very high security relevance configure Security Mode WPA Enterprisewith WPA Mode WPA 2 This method contains hardware based encryption and RADIUS authentication of the client In special cases combination with IPSec is possible Restrict WLAN access to permitted clients Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless net work cards for these clients in the Allowed Addresses list in the MAC Filter menu see Fields in the menu MAC Filter on page 170 A list of all WLAN networks is displayed in the Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Wireless Net works VSS menu 10 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the gojicon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure additional wireless networks Radio Settings Wireless Networks VSS Service Set Parameters Network Name SSID defaut visible Intra cell Repeating Ml Enabled U APSD El Enabled Security Settings S
132. 00 The default value is 0 i e no limits are set the queue can oc cupy the maximum bandwidth Protocol Header Size Only for Traffic shaping enabled below Layer 3 Choose the interface type to include the size of the respective overheads of a datagram when calculating the bandwidth Possible values e User defined Value in byte Possible values are 0 to 100 e Undefined Protocol Header Offset 0 default value Can only be selected for Ethernet interfaces e Ethernet e Ethernet and VLAN e PPP over Ethernet Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description e PPP over Ethernet and VLAN Can only be selected for IPSec interfaces e IPSec over Ethernet e IPSec over Ethernet and VLAN e TPSec via PPP over Ethernet e IPSec via PPPoE and VLAN Encryption Method Only if an IPSec Peers is selected as Interface Traffic shap ing is Active and Protocol Header Size below Layer 3 is not Undefiniert Protocol Header Offset 0 Select the encryption method used for the IPSec connection The encryption algorithm determines the length of the block cipher which is taken into account during bandwidth calculation Possible values ODES SMS Iilonmirigsia Case enjoin lolloels size 64 Bit e AES128 AES192 AES256 Twofish cipher block size 128 Bit Real Time Jitter Con Only for Traffic shaping enabled trol Real Time Jitter Control optimises latency when forwarding real time datagrams The function e
133. 05 417 422 Source IP Address Netmask 234 244 247 262 319 Source IP Address 482 483 485 485 Source Port Range 371 Special Handling Timer 244 Special Session Handling 242 Specify bandwidth 365 SSH 99 101 SSH Port 102 SSH service active 102 SSID 218 Start Mode 320 Start Time 403 State Province 123 Static Blacklist 218 Static Hosts 381 Statistics 385 461 Status 80 400 458 460 462 463 Stop Bits 132 Stop Time 403 Subject 447 Subject Name 405 Subsystem 457 Successful Trials 417 Successfully Answered Queries 385 Summary 123 Surveillance 416 Switch Port 130 Sync SAs with ISP interface state 344 Syslog 442 Syslog Servers 442 System 83 Teldat GmbH System Logic 437 System Name 84 System Licences 92 System Messages 457 System Reboot 441 System Date 81 System Management 80 T TACACS 112 TACACS Secret 113 TCP Inactivity 367 TCP Keepalives 104 TCP Port 114 TCP MSS Clamping 140 Teldat Discovery 423 Telnet 99 Temperature 81 420 Terms amp Conditions 429 Third Timeserver 90 Ticket Type 431 Time 457 Time Condition 403 Time Update Interval 90 Time Update Policy 90 Time Zone 89 Timeout 114 134 Timestamp 443 Total 461 Traceroute Test 434 Tracking IP Address 241 Traffic Direction 400 Traffic shaping 253 256 365 Transfer Mode 325 Transfer own IP address over ISDN GSM 325 Transferred Traffic 400 Transmit Key 166 172 175 209 Transmit
134. 1 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH 11 4 6 Rogue Clients Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Rogue Clients View 20 per page Fitter in None wv equal hee Go Static Blacklist Delete Rogue Client MAC Address Network Name SSID Attacked Access Point Signal dBm Type of attack First seen Last seen Select all Select all Deselect all Deselect all Page 1 New Apply Fig 97 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Rogue Clients The Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Rogue Clients menu displays the clients which have attempted to gain unauthorised access to the network and which are therefore on the blacklist The blacklist is configured for each VSS in the Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Wireless Networks VSS menu You can also add a new entry to the static blacklist Possible values for Rogue Clients Status Meaning Rogue Client MAC Ad Displays the MAC address of the client on the blacklist dress SSID Displays the SSID involved Attacked Access Point Displays the AP concerned Signal dBm Displays the signal strength of the client during the attempted access Type of attack This displays the type of potential attack e g an incorrect au thentication First seen Displays the time of the first registered attempted access Last seen Displays the time of the last registered attempted access Static Blacklist You can categorise a rogue client as un
135. 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Peer Parameters Administrative Status up ODown Description Peer Peer Address FT on Fully Qualified Domain Name FADN Y Pen Internet Key Exchange IKEv1 v Preshared Key C 7 7 Interface Routes IP Address Assignment Static A Default Route Cl Enabled Local IP Address Mm Remote IP Address Netmask Metric Route Entries Additional Traffic Filter Additional Traffic Filter Advanced IPSec Options Phase 1 Profile Phase 2 Profile XAUTH Profile Number of Admitted Connections Start Mode Advanced IP Options A Add Description Protocol Sre IPiMask Port Dest IPMask Port d 4 Add Advanced Settings None use default profile v None use default profile v Select one v One User Multiple Users On Demand Always up Public Source IP Address DEnabled Back Route Verify DEnabted Proxy ARP O Inactive up or Dormant Up only C OK C _ Cancel __ E Fig 139 VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers gt New The menu VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Peer Parameters Field Description Administrative Status Select the status to which you wish to set the peer after saving the peer configuration bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description Possible values e Up default value The peer is available for setting up a tunnel immediately after saving the c
136. 2 of the OSI 7 layer model The special feature of Teldat bridges is that the distances between these segments can be several kilometres without the necessity for a cable for these ranges If you operate a wireless port in Bridge mode this can only be used for a bridge link This means e The port has no network name e Wireless clients cannot log in associate to this port e There is no node table for this port as there are no clients e There is no Access Control List ACL for this port This port will only connect to the partner bridge port you have configured and also only ac cept connections from this port The Teldat bridges have transmission rates far above the possibilities of the ISDN SO ISDN S2M or ADSL The high speed bridge even surpasses standard Ethernet 10BaseT 10Base2 10Base5 Caution Never connect two bridges that have set up a connection to each other with radio to the same LAN segment This leads to unavoidable overloading of your network and stops all network traffic Some of the possible network topologies are described here to give you an overview of the options available when you use Teldat bridges LANA LAN B Fig 76 Point to point topology LAN C LAN A Fig 77 Point to multipoint topology bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Radio Cell Fig 78 Wireless backbone Radio Cell Fig 79 Wireless bridge with connection of wireless clients To be able to set up a wirel
137. 20h 33m 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 O 33s Fig 212 Monitoring gt WLAN gt Bridge Links Values in the Bridge Links list Field Description Bridge Link Descrip Shows the name of the bridge link tion Remote MAC Shows the MAC address of the bridge link partner Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the bridge link in question is active Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm Shows the received signal strength in dBm Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this bridge link in Mbps If required the Test link can be used to launch a link test The link test provides all the data necessary for checking the quality of the bridge link The link test also helps you to align the antennas This option is only displayed if the link state is Enabled Bridge link details You can use the P icon to open an overview of further details of the bridge links WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links ClientLinks Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Bridge Link Description Remote MAC Up Time Tx Packets Rx Packets Signal dBm RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Data Rate mbps wds1 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Od 20h 35m 43s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rate Tx Packets Rx Packets 802 11a big 54 0 0 48 0 0 36 0 0 24 0 0 18 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 9 0 0 6 0 0
138. 244 247 262 319 Destination IP Address 228 Destination Port Range 371 Details 458 Teldat GmbH Device 197 Device Discovery 423 DH Group 328 DHCP Hostname 140 DHCP Options 394 DHCP Server 193 DHCP Configuration 392 DHCP Broadcast Flag 140 DHCP Client on Interface 269 DHCP MAC Address 140 DHCP Relay Settings 397 DHCP Server 391 Diagnostics 433 Direction 250 275 Distribution Mode 239 Distribution Policy 239 240 Distribution Ratio 241 DNS 375 DNS Hostname 382 DNS Negotiation 300 305 355 DNS Server 308 342 383 392 DNS Requests 385 DNS Servers 379 DNS Test 434 Domain 383 Domain Forwarding 382 Domain at the HotSpot Server 429 Domain Name 377 Done 220 dormant 295 down 295 Drop non members 144 Drop In 268 Drop In Groups 268 Drop untagged frames 144 Dropped 461 478 Dropping Algorithm 258 DSA Key Status 103 DSCP TOS Value 226 DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 247 262 DTIM Period 156 170 204 Duplicate received MSDUs 465 Dynamic blacklisting 213 Dynamic RADIUS Authentication 344 Teldat GmbH DynDNS Provider 389 DynDNS Update 387 DynDNS Client 387 E E mail 123 E mail Address 450 EAP Preauthentification 166 209 Enable update 388 Enable IPSec 343 Enable VLAN 145 Enable Discovery Server 426 Enabled 358 Encrypt configuration 405 Encrypted 461 Encryption 114 354 Encryption Algorithms 102 Entry active 108 113 Error 220 Errors 459 461 Ethernet Ports 129 Event 44
139. 3 Eth1 Eth 2 SFP Fig 22 LEDs of bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n In operation mode the LEDs display the following status information for your device LED status display bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n LED Status Information Failure red on After power up and during booting or if an error occurs flashes During the heating phase Teldat GmbH LED Status off Status green off on static on flashing on flashing slowly WLAN 1 2 2x green WLAN 3 without function on static on flickering on flashing fast on flashing fast off ETH 1 2 2x green on on flickering SFP green off on on flickering 3 4 5 Scope of supply 3 Installation Information If the device is at the login prompt The power supply is not connected If other LEDs are on also Error Error Ready Free At least one client is registered At least one client is registered and there is data traffic BLD Broken Link Detection active 5 GHz scan active No cable or no Ethernet link Cable plugged in and link Cable plugged in and link with data traffic No data traffic Data traffic via the SFP interface Cable plugged in and data traffic Your device is supplied with the following parts Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation bintec WI1065n Companion Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed Serial cable D SUB9 3 external standard antennas B
140. 42 12 4 QOS i ak aa Bae Hee A ear eke es A A 246 12 4 1 Qos Fillers ae BMA A GO A we da E 246 12 4 2 QoS Classification 2 249 12 4 3 QoS Interfaces Policies 0 2 252 12 5 Access RuleS s t w oea iesca e nuaa 4 1 4 0 0 4 ee a 259 12 5 1 Access Filler 3 3 ia a A a EIA ae 261 12 5 2 Rule ChalhS a da Se Pree ake ay ee OS Ab Soe Seon 2 265 12 5 3 Interface Assignment 2 266 12 6 DOP Ne sige A a A a e do ad Es 268 12 6 1 Drop In Groups 2 2 a 268 Chapter 13 Routing Protocols ss eea a a e ee a e eae 272 13 1 RIPE a E T an A a ti a A ha 272 13 1 1 RIP Interfaces ota E A a E o a 272 13 1 2 RIP Filter ois co eae ke O 274 13 1 3 RIP Options mie con 24 ee Bee ak Sel ek bed 276 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 14 MUIICASE i doo do h Ae dh ae ote 280 14 1 General os kd oh oo ee eel ee oh ROE Bitlet oY 281 14 1 1 General tc ira BE tes eg BB hg Bh oe e od od 282 14 2 IGMP Ses ce oe tee Be ae DR A Oh ok e g 282 14 2 1 IGMP tC a et ct he ee er ta ro la ds as oe ed tas 283 14 2 2 Options 04 1 At fe 2 0 ef dite No A Sh eA fhe 285 14 3 Forwardingy lt oa Ge SS ete SOE SE Ge Bie be SS aai 287 14 3 1 Forwarding e ias de e he Sako es eh le Bak 287 14 4 TR E ye Ae aA a F 288 14 4 1 PIM Inte Haces lt i ke Se ce ee ee ot eS ee aA 288 14 4 2 PIM Rendezvous Points 2 eee a o 292 14 4 3 PIM Options 0 savas amp Son A
141. 5 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 802 11n 144 4 D D 139 0 0 115 6 0 0 86 7 0 0 72 2 0 0 65 0 0 57 8 0 0 43 3 0 0 28 9 0 0 WNT 0 0 14 4 0 0 Da 0 0 Total 0 0 Back Fig 211 Monitoring gt WLAN gt WDS gt 5 Values in the WDS list Field Description WDS Description Shows the name of the WDS link Remote MAC Shows the MAC address of the WDS link partner Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the WDS link in question is active Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm RSSI1 Shows the received signal strength in dBm RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this WDS link in Mbps Rate For each of the specified data rates displays the values for Tx Packets and Rx Packets 21 4 4 Bridge Links In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt Bridge Links menu current values and activities of the bridge links are displayed WLAN1 VSS DS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Bridge Link Table Bridge Link Tx Rx Signal dBm RSSM RSSI2 Noise Data Rate Description penta MOS Seure Packets Packets RSSI3 dBm mbps wds1 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 0d 20h 34m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24s wds1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 Od
142. 5 5875 MHz only in Germany and Great Britain reporting obligations in Germany licencing obligations in Great Britain Teldat GmbH 3 Installation Property Value Standards amp Guidelines R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 60950 1 IEC60950 EN 300 328 EN 301 489 17 EN 301 489 1 EN 301 893 EN 60601 1 2 Medical electrical equipment Part 1 2 Buttons A monitor button 3 2 Reset If the configuration is incorrect or if your device cannot be accessed you can reset the device to the ex works standard settings using the Reset button on the bottom of the device Practically al existing configuration data will then be ignored only the current user pass words are retained Configurations stored in the device are not deleted and can if required be reloaded when the device is rebooted For bintec W1002n proceed as follows 1 Switch off your device 2 Press the Reset button on your device 3 Keep the Reset button on your device pressed down and switch the device back on 4 Look at the LEDs Initially all LEDs illuminate The device runs through the boot sequence After the LED has flashed three times release the Reset button The Status LED flashes and the Eth 1 and Eth 2 LEDs illuminate if these exist for the ports that are connected to the Ethernet Proceed as follows if you also want to reset all the user passwords to the ex works state and delete stored configurations when resetting th
143. 5 7 4 750 5 4 4 2 Example Radius of 1st Fresnel zone as a function of distance to the transmit antenna for a distance of 700 m at 2 45 GHz Example 2 Distance from transmit an Radius of 1st Fresnel zone Radius at 60 of tenna km m 1st Fresnel zone m 100 1 6 1 25 200 2 1 1 6 300 2 3 1 75 400 2 3 1 75 500 2 1 6 600 1 6 1 25 Note When setting up a bridge link make sure that no obstacles or trees protrude into the Fresnel zone If obstacles exist the transmission rate will drop and the path may even tually fail It is not essential to consider the LOS for short distances inside buildings as the radius of the Fresnel zone will be very small here If you meet these requirements the link can be set up and maintained without further limitations A special feature of links with Teldat bridges is that they are completely un affected by weather conditions Note For a bridge path always use the marked antenna connection This is the device s primary connection primary antenna connection Antl Fig 81 Antenna connection A label containing details of the two antennas is located on the back of the device The primary antenna is designated Ant 1 10 1 5 1 Edit or New Choose the pJicon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure additional Bridge links Radio Settings Bridge Links Basic Parameters Bridge Link Description Y Use default Remote Configuration O Denied Allowed B
144. 62 380 Priority Queueing 256 Privacy 172 184 Propagate PMTU 338 Propagation Delay 290 Proposals 328 336 Protocol 234 244 247 262 319 371 390 405 443 Protocol Header Size below Layer 3 253 Provider 388 Provider Name 390 Provisioning Server code 3 395 Proxy Interface 285 Proxy ARP 140 321 Proxy ARP Mode 355 Index Public Source IP Address 321 PVID 144 Q QoS 246 365 478 QoS Classification 249 QoS Interfaces Policies 252 QoS Filter 246 QoS Queue 478 Query Interval 283 Queued 478 Queues Policies 253 R RA Encrypt Certificate 121 RA Sign Certificate 121 Radio Profiles 200 Radio Settings 147 RADIUS 106 RADIUS Dialout 110 RADIUS Secret 108 Radius Server 209 RADIUS Server Group ID 341 Rate 471 473 475 Real Time Jitter Control 253 Real Time Jitter Control 308 Reboot 441 Reboot after execution 405 Reboot device after 405 Receive Version 273 Received DNS Packets 385 Received MPDuUs that couldn t be de crypted 465 Recipient 447 Region 186 193 Register Suppression Timer 294 Relay 135 Relay Configuration 135 Remaining Validity 400 Remote Configuration 183 Remote Hostname 348 Remote Address 463 Remote Networks 458 Teldat GmbH Remote Port 459 463 Remote Authentication 106 Remote Device Name 185 Remote File Name 405 Remote GRE IP Address 358 Remote ID 459 Remote IP 134 458 Remote IP Address 348 Remote IP Address 459 Remote Link Descript
145. 66 415 426 432 435 445 455 Organization 123 Organizational Unit 123 OSPF Mode 355 Other Inactivity 367 Outbound Interface 256 Outgoing Phone Number 325 Overbooking allowed 256 Override Interval 290 Overwrite similar certificate 405 P Packets 459 Parity 132 Passed 461 Password 121 126 127 298 303 341 348 351 388 405 437 450 455 Password for protected Certificate 405 Passwords 86 Peer Address 313 PeerID 313 Phase 1 Profile 320 Phase 1 Profiles 327 Phase 2 Profile 320 Phase 2 Profiles 335 Physical Address 477 Physical Interfaces 129 PIM 288 478 PIM Mode 289 PIM Status 294 PIM Interfaces 288 PIM Options 293 PIM Rendezvous Points 292 Ping 99 Ping Generator 422 Ping Test 433 Poisoned Reverse 277 Policies 361 Policy 110 114 Index Pool Usage 393 Pop Up window for status indication 431 POP3 Server 450 POP3 Timeout 450 Port 231 390 477 Port Configuration 144 Port Configuration 129 Port Mode 131 135 Port Number 134 Positive Cache 377 PPPoE 297 PPPoE Mode 298 PPPoE Ethernet Interface 298 PPPoE Interfaces for Multilink 298 PPTP 302 PPTP Inactivity 367 PPTP Passthrough 231 PPTP Address Mode 305 PPTP Ethernet Interface 303 Precedence 292 Preshared Key 166 172 175 184 209 313 Primary DHCP Server 398 Primary DNS Server 380 Prioritisation Algorithm 253 Prioritize TCP ACK Packets 300 305 354 Priority 108 113 256 3
146. 7 Event Type 400 Event List 400 405 Event List Condition 405 Exclude from NAT DMZ 269 Expiry Timer 479 484 485 485 Extended Route 228 External Filename 126 127 External Reporting 442 F Facility 443 Fallback interface to get DNS server 377 File Encoding 126 127 File Name 405 File Name in Flash 405 Filename 437 Filter 250 Filter Rules 365 Filter Rules 361 Firewall 360 Index Firewall Status 366 Firmware Maintenance 219 First Timeserver 90 Firstseen 218 Force certificate to be trusted 118 Forward 383 Forward to 383 Forwarded Requests 385 Forwarding 287 Fragmentation Threshold 156 159 204 Frame transmissions without ACK re ceived 465 Frozen Parameters 245 Full Filtering 366 G Garbage Collection Timer 278 Gateway 228 394 424 Gateway IP Address 225 General 281 Generate Private Key 121 Generation ID 479 Global Settings 377 Global Status 479 Global Settings 83 GRE 357 GRE Tunnels 357 Group Description 108 239 240 269 Group ID 417 Groups 368 370 373 H Handshake 132 Hashing Algorithms 102 Hello Interval 290 Hello Intervall 349 Hello Hold Time 290 High Priority Class 250 Hold Down Timer 279 Host 383 Host for multiple locations 432 Index Host Name 388 Hosts 416 HotSpot Gateway 428 HotSpot Gateway 426 477 HTTP 99 HTTPS 99 386 HTTPS Server 386 HTTPS TCP Port 386 IEEE 802 11d Compliance 149 IGMP 282 IGMP Proxy 285 IGMP State L
147. AN ID Van Jacobson Header Compression Virtual LAN Voice over IP Virtual Private Network Virtual Service Set Wide Area Network WAN interface Remote station that is reached over a WAN e g ISDN bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Glossary Web server Webmail WEP Western plug WINIPCFG WLAN WMM WPA WPA Enterprise WPA PSK WWW X 21 X 21bis X 25 X 31 Teldat GmbH Server that provides documents in HTML format for access over the Internet WWW T Online service with which e mails can be sent and received world wide on the Internet by means of a browser Wired Equivalent Privacy also known as RJ 45 plug Plug used for ISDN terminals with eight contacts Developed by the US telephone company Western Bell Western plugs for analogue telephones have four or six contacts A graphical tool on Windows 95 98 and Millennium that uses Win32 API to view and configure the IP address configuration of com puters A group of computers wirelessly connected to each other wireless LAN Wireless multimedia Wi Fi protected access Concentrates primarily on the needs of companies and offers secure encryption and authentication Uses 802 1x and the Extensible Au thentication Protocol EAP and thus offers an effective means of user authentication Intended for private users or small businesses that do not run a central authentication server PSK stands for Pre Shared Key and means that AP and c
148. Access Y Apply QoS EEnabied C OK D4 Cancel Fig 153 Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules gt New The menu Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall Field Description Source Select one of the preconfigured aliases for the source of the packet In the list all WAN LAN interfaces interface groups see Fire wall gt Interfaces gt Groups addresses see Firewall gt Ad dresses gt Address List and address groups see Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups are available The value Any means that neither the source interface nor the source address is checked Destination Select one of the preconfigured aliases for the destination of the packet In the list all WAN LAN interfaces interface groups see Fire wall gt Interfaces gt Groups addresses see Firewall gt Ad dresses gt Address List and address groups see Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups The value Any means that neither the destination interface nor the destination address is checked Service Select one of the preconfigured services to which the packet to be filtered must be assigned The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following igi e telnet ont O alas O tag O imialicia O Imceraeic e Netmeeting Additional services are created in Firewall
149. Based on Ethernet Interface 138 Teldat GmbH Baudrate 132 Beacon Period 156 170 204 Block after connection failure for 300 305 354 Block Time 114 333 blocked 295 BOSS 437 BOSS Version 81 Bridge Links 177 472 Bridge Link Description 183 185 Bridge Link Description 472 473 Bridges 476 Burst size 256 Burst Mode 154 203 Byte Count 134 Bytes 459 c CA Certificate 121 CA Certificates 333 CA Name 405 Cache 384 Cache Hitrate 385 Cache Hits 385 Cache Size 377 CAPWAP Encryption 197 Certificate Request 120 Certificate List 117 Certificate Servers 128 Certificate is CA Certificate 118 Certificate Request Description 121 405 Certificate Revocation List CRL Checking 118 Certificates 116 Channel 149 177 198 Channel Plan 156 204 Channel Sweep 159 Class ID 250 256 Class map 250 Clear Serial RX Buffer 135 Clear Serial TX Buffer 135 Client Mode 149 Client Link 174 Index Client Links 474 Client Band select 168 211 Client Link Description 177 Client Link Description 474 Client MAC Address 468 Code 371 Command Mode 405 Command Type 405 Common Name 123 Compare Condition 400 Compare Value 400 Compression 104 354 Config Mode 316 Configuration Encryption 437 Configuration contains certificates keys 405 Configuration Interface 96 Configured Speed Mode 130 Confirm Admin Password 87 Congestion Avoidance RED 258 Connected 177 185 Connection State 247 262
150. DE Common Name Only for Custom disabled Enter the name according to CA E mail Only for Custom disabled Enter the e mail address according to CA Organizational Unit Only for Custom disabled Enter the organisational unit according to CA Organization Only for Custom disabled Enter the organisation according to CA Locality Only for Custom disabled Enter the location according to CA State Province Only for Custom disabled Enter the state province according to CA Country Only for Custom disabled Enter the country according to CA The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Subject Alternative Names menu Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description 1 2 3 For each entry define the type of name and enter additional subject names Possible values e None default value No additional name is entered e TP An IP address is entered e DNS A DNS name is entered e E mail An e mail address is entered e URT A uniform resource identifier is entered e DN A distinguished name DN name is entered e RID A registered identity RID is entered Fields in the Options menu Field Description Autosave Mode Select whether your device automatically stores the various steps of the enrolment internally This is an advantage if enrol ment cannot be concluded immediately If the status has not been saved the incomplete registration cannot be compl
151. Device Discovery Options Discovery Server Options Enable Discovery Server Y Enabled OK Cancel Fig 183 Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Options The Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Optionsmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Discovery Server Options menu Field Description Enable Discovery Select whether your device is to be discovered and configured Server by other Teldat devices in the network The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 18 8 HotSpot Gateway The HotSpot Solution allows provision of public Internet accesses using WLAN or wired Ethernet The solution is adapted to setup of smaller and larger Hotspot solutions for cafes hotels companies communal residences campgrounds etc The HotSpot Solution consists of a Teldat gateway installed onsite with its own WLAN access point or additional connected WLAN device or wired LAN and of the Hotspot serv er centrally located at a computing centre The operator account is administered on the server via an administration terminal e g a hotel reception PC this includes functions such as registration entry generating tickets statistical analysis etc Login sequence at the Hotspot server Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services e When a new user connects with the Hotspot he she is automatically assigned an IP ad dress via DHCP e As soon as he attempts to access any Internet site with a browser the user
152. E mail a Organizational Unit Organization Locality po 7 State Province L Country L t C SYr Advanced Settings Subject Alternative Names Options Autosave Mode Fl Enabled oK Cancel Fig 55 System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Certificate Request The menu System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Certificate Request consists of the following fields Fields in the Certificate Request menu Field Description Certificate Request De Enter a unique description for the certificate scription Mode Select the way in which you want to request the certificate Possible settings e Manual default value Your device generates a PKCS 10 for the key This file can then be uploaded directly in the browser or copied in the menu using the View details bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Description field This file must be provided to the CA and the received certificate must then be imported manually to your device e SCEP The key is requested from a CA using the Simple Cer tificate Enrolment Protocol Generate Private Key Only for Mode Manual Select an algorithm for key creation RSA default value and DSA are available Also select the length of the key to be created Possible values 512 768 1024 1536 2048 4096 Please note that a key with a length of 512 bits could be rated as unsecure whereas
153. EN 302502 EN 50371 Buttons 3 1 6 Reset Reset If the configuration is incorrect or if your device cannot be accessed you can reset the device to the ex works standard settings using the Reset button on the bottom of the device All existing configuration data will be deleted For bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n proceed as follows 1 Press the Reset button on your device 2 Keep the Reset button on your device pressed 3 Look at the LEDs The Staus LED is lit the device runs through the boot sequence When the Status LED starts flashing again release the Reset button You can now configure your device again as described from Basic configuration on page 48 Note If you delete the boot configuration using the GUI all passwords will also be reset and the current boot configuration deleted The next time the device will boot with the standard ex works settings Note If you have changed the LED behavior to something other then the default value this setting is preserved after resetting the device 3 2 bintec W1002n 3 2 1 Setting up and connecting Note All you need for this are the cables and antennas supplied with the equipment N Caution The use of the wrong mains adapter may damage your device Only use the mains ad aptor supplied If you require foreign adapters mains units please contact our Teldat service bintec W1002n is equipped with a single ra
154. H Fax FHSS Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum File transfer Filter Firewall Firmware First level domain Flash key Follow me Glossary via the standard access after a predefined number of attempts setup is attempted using the second entry then subsequent entries If the final entry in the list does not enable a connection to be set up successfully the operation is terminated until a new request is made When fall back occurs and all other ISPs can only be reached by dialup connections both B channels may be occupied If channel bundling is used you cannot be reached for the duration of this con nection Abbreviation of telefax In a FHSS system the frequency spread is achieved through con stantly changing frequencies based on certain hopping patterns In contrast to DSSS systems hopping patterns are configured not the frequency The frequency changes very frequently in one second Data transmission from one computer to another e g based on the Eurofile transfer standard A filter comprises a number of criteria e g protocol port number source and destination address These criteria can be used to se lect a packet from the traffic flow Such a packet can then be handled in a specific way For this purpose a certain action is asso ciated with the filter which creates a filter rule Describes the whole range of mechanisms to protect the local net work against external access Your gateway provide
155. IP Settings Device Name 11200 Current Password New Password Show passwords in clear text P configuration IP Address 172 16 98 110 IP Address Mode Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 lA Save configuration permanently Fig 29 IP address assignment with the Dime Manager 3 Enter the network parameters Device name IP address Netmask and Gateway and click on OK Note Sn The maximum length of the Device name parameter is 32 characters bintec AN and Industrial W The Device name parameter may contain only the letters a z A Z the digitss 0 9 dash and dot to avoid errors by other systems during interpretation of the Device name The first character must be a letter and the last character cannot be a dot or dash A single character is not permitted as a name Your device can now be reached over the Ethernet with its IP address using a Web browser and can now be configured GUI Call up Fig 30 GUI Login Start the configuration interface as follows a Enter the IP address of your device in the address line of your Web browser With DHCP server e the IP address that the DHCP server assigned to your device Without DHCP server e With direct connection to the configuration PC the fallback IP address 192 168 0 252 e The fixed IP address assigned via the Dime Manager Press the Enter Return key b Enter admin in the User field and admin in
156. IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options View feo per page L Fitter in None y equal y Go Default Description Proposals PFS Group Lifetime Page 1 C New D 4 OK C Cancel _ Fig 143 VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles In the Default column you can mark the profile to be used as the default profile 16 1 3 1 New Choose the New button to create additional profiles bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 VPN IPSec Peers Teldat GmbH Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Phase 2 IPSEC Parameters Description Proposals Use PFS Group Lifetime IP Compression Alive Check Propagate PMTU IPSec 2 Encryption Authentication Enabled AES v MDS5 vw AES v MD5 vw AES v MD5 vw Enabled 1768 Bit 21024 Bit O 5 1536 Bit 7200 Seconds 0 kBytes Rekey after 80 Lifetime Advanced Settings Enabled Autodetect v i Enabled OK Cancel Fig 144 VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles gt New The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Phase 2 IPSEC Parameters menu Field Description Description Proposals Enter a description that uniquely identifies the profile The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters In this field you can select any combination of encrypti
157. LAN Controller Teldat GmbH all Managed Access Points is displayed For each managed AP you will see an entry with the following parameter set Update firm ware Location Device IP Address LAN MAC Address Firmware Version Status Click the Select all button to select all of the entries for a firmware update Click the Deselect all button to disable all entries and to then select individual entries if required e g if there is a large number of entries and only individual APs are to be given software updates Possible values for Status Status Meaning Image already exists The software image already exists no update is required Error An error has occurred Running The operation is currently in progress Done The update is complete The Wireless LAN Controller gt Maintenance gt Firmware Maintenance menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Firmware Maintenance menu Field Description Action Select the action you wish to execute After each task a window is displayed showing the other steps that are required Possible values e Update system software You can also start an update of the system software e Save configuration with state information You can save a configuration which contains the AP status inform ation Source Location Select the source for the action Possible values e HTTP server default value The file is stored respectively on a remote server specified in the URL
158. N Prune Delay settings These result in a delay in processing prune messages for upstream routers If the Propagation Delay is too short the transfer of multicast packets may be cancelled before a downstream router has sent a prune override message Possible values 0 to 32 seconds The default value is 1 Override Interval Define the value that the gateway enters in the Over ride_Interval field for the LAN Prune Delay option Override Interval defines the maximum time a downstream router can wait until sending a prune override message Possible values 0 to 65 seconds The default value is 3 14 4 2 PIM Rendezvous Points In menu Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Rendezvous Points you determine which Rendezvous Point is responsible for which group A list of all PIM Rendezvous Points is displayed PIM Interfaces PIM Rendezvous Points PIM Options View 20 per page L Filter in None v equal v Go Multicast Group Range Rendezvous Point IP Address Status Page 1 New Fig 131 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Rendezvous Points 14 4 2 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries To configure PIM Rendezvous Points select the New button PIM Interfaces PIM Rendezvous Points PIM Options PIM Rendezvous Point Settings Multicast Group Range All Groups v Rendezvous Point IP Address pooo Precedence booo OK C Cancel Fig 132 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Rendezvous Poi
159. OK Cancel Fig 41 System Management gt Global Settings gt Passwords Note All Teldat devices are delivered with the same username and password As long as the password remains unchanged they are not protected against unauthorised use Make sure you change the passwords to prevent unauthorised access to the device If the password is not changed under System Management gt Status there appears the warning System password not changed Teldat GmbH 7 System Management The System Management gt Global Settings gt Passwords menu consists of the following fields Fields in the System Password menu Field Value System Admin Pass Enter the password for the user name admin word This password is also used with SNMPv3 for authentication MD5 and encryption DES Confirm Admin Pass Confirm the password by entering it again word Fields in the SNMP Communities menu Field Value SNMP Read Com Enter the password for the user name read munity SNMP Write Com Enter the password for the user name write munity Fields in the Global Password Options menu Field Value Show passwords and Define whether the passwords are to be displayed in clear text keys in clear text plain text The function is enabled with Show The function is disabled by default If you activate the function all passwords and keys in all menus are displayed and can be edited in plain text One exception is IPSec keys They can only be ent
160. P Key 1 4 Only for Security Mode WEP 40 WEP 104 Enter the WEP key Enter a character string with the right number of characters for the selected WEP mode For WEP 40 you need a character string with 5 characters for WEP 104 with 13 characters e g hellofor WEP 40 teldat wep1 for WEP 104 WPA Mode Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Enterprise Select whether you want to use WPA with TKIP encryption or WPA 2 with AES encryption or both Possible values WPA and WPA 2 default value WPA and WPA 2 can be applied e WPA Only WPA is applied e WPA 2 Only WPA 2 is applied WPA Cipher Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Enterprise and for WPA Mode wPAand WPA and WPA 2 Select the type of encryption with which to apply WPA Possible values e AES default value AES is used e AES and TKIP AES or TKIP is used 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description WPA2 Cipher Only for Security Mode WPA PSK and WPA Enterprise and for WPA Mode wPA 2and WPA and WPA 2 Select the type of encryption with which to apply WPA 2 Possible values e AES default value AES is used e AES and TKIP AES or TKIP is used Preshared Key Only for Security Mode WPA PSK Enter the WPA password Enter an ASCII string with 8 63 characters e Note Change the default Preshared Key If the key has not been changed your device will not be protected against unau thorised access EAP Preauthentifica O
161. P and then PPP with RADIUS Options e Inband Only inband RADIUS requests PAP CHAP MS CHAP V1 amp V2 i e PPP requests without CLID are sent to the RADIUS server defined in Server IP Address e Outband CLID Only outband RADIUS requests i e re quests for calling line identification CLID are sent to the RADIUS server Inband is enabled by default 7 6 Certificates An asymmetric cryptosystem is used to encrypt data to be transported in a network to gen erate or check digital signatures and the authenticate users A key pair consisting of a pub lic key and a private key is used to encrypt and decrypt the data For encryption the sender requires the public key of the recipient The recipient decrypts the data using his private key To ensure that the public key is the real key of the recipient and is not a forgery a so called digital certificate is required This confirms the authenticity and the owner of a public key It is similar to an official pass port in that it confirms that the holder of the passport has certain characteristics such as gender and age and that the signature on the passport is authentic As there is more than one certificate issuer e g the passport office for a passport and as such certificates can be issued by several different issuers and in varying qualities the trustworthiness of the is suer is extremely important The quality of a certificate is regulated by the German Signa ture Act
162. Port gt Serial Portmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Controller Configuration menu Field Description Port Mode Select in which mode the serial interface is to be used Possible values e Configuration default value The serial interface is used as a console e Data Port The serial interface is operated as a data inter face Serial over IP is used Ifthe Data Port option is selected for Port Mode an extra configuration section opens bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Serial Port General Port Mode O configuration Data Port Serial Settings Baudrate 9600 Data Bits Bm Parity None Stop Bits 11 Handshake None Y P Mode server O Client OUDP Local IP Address pooo Local Port Eoo Remote IP pooo Port Number VA Trigger Byte Count 128 Timeout DEnabled Inter Byte Gap 100 ms MEnabled Butter Clear Serial RX Buffer Clear Clear Serial Tx Buffer Clear C OK C Cancel_ Fig 61 Physical Interfaces gt Serial Port gt Serial Port with Port Mode Data Port Fields in the Serial Settings menu Field Description Baudrate Select which baud rate should be used Make sure that the re mote terminal is suitable for the selected baud rate If this is not the case you will not be able to establish a serial connection to the device Possible values O 00 O 600 o 1200 e 2400 e 4800 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 8 Physical Interfaces Fiel
163. RICKware for Windows to your PC from the download area at www teldat de and from there import it to your device 20 5 1 Options Options Basic Parameters Monitored Interfaces None Physical Physical WANVPN Send information to AIlIP Addresses Broadcast Y Update Interval 5 Seconds UDP Destination Part 2107 Password seesceee OK Cancel Fig 199 External Reporting gt Activity Monitor gt Options The menu External Reporting gt Activity Monitor gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Monitored Interfaces Select the type of information to be sent in the UDP packets to the Windows application Possible values None default value Deactivates the sending of information to the Activity Monitor e Physical Only information about the physical interfaces is sent e Physical WAN VPN Information about physical and virtual interfaces is sent Send information to Select where your device sends the UDP packets Possible values e All IP Addresses Broadcast default value The de fault value 255 255 255 255 means that the broadcast ad dress of the first LAN interface is used Field Description e Single Host The UDP packets are sent to the IP address entered in the adjacent input field Update Interval Enter the update interval in seconds Possible values are 0 to 60 The default value is 5 UDP Destination Port Enter the port number for
164. Rogue Clients viemJRo per pagel Filter in None v equal v Go Location Slave AP Name VSS MAC Address VSS Channel Status Page 1 Fig 93 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Wireless Networks VSS In menu Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Wireless Networks VSS an overview of the currently used AP is displayed You see which wireless module is assigned to which wireless network For each wireless a parameter set is displayed Location Name VSS MAC Address VSS Channel Clients Status 11 4 3 Load Balancing Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Rogue Clients view 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Active 2 45 GHz Denied Clients Location Slave AP Name VSS MAC Address VSS Clients changeover softharel Page 1 Apply Fig 94 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Load Balancing The Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Load Balancing menu displays an overview of the Load Balancing For each VSS you can see such information as the number of cli ents connected the number of clients that are affected by the 2 4 5 GHz changeover and the number of rejected clients bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH 11 4 4 Neighbor APs Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Roque Clients View 20 per page Filter inf None wv e
165. S Provider menu Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description The default value is DynDNS Enable update Select whether the DynDNS entry configured here is to be activ ated The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Mail Exchanger MX Enter the full host name of a mail server to which e mails are to be forwarded if the host currently configured is not to receive mail Ask your provider about this forwarding service and make sure e mails can be received from the host entered as MX Wildcard Select whether forwarding of all subdomains of the Host Name is to be enabled for the current IP address of the Interface advanced name resolution The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 18 3 2 DynDNS Provider A list of all configured DynDNS providers is displayed in the Local Services gt DynDNS Cli ent gt DynDNS Provider menu 18 3 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new DynDNS providers 18 Local Services Basic Parameters Provider Name Server Update Path Port Protocol Update Interval Teldat GmbH DynDNS Update DynDNS Provider 80 DynDNS v 300 Seconds oK Cancel Fig 169 Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Provider gt New The menu Local Services gt DynDNS Client
166. S WAN driver enables the use of a DCN network on Windows NDIS is the abbreviation for Network Device Interface Specification and is a standard for the connection of network cards hardware to network protocols software A journey of discovery for interesting information in wide ranging data networks such as T Online Known mainly from the Internet bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN NetBIOS Netmask Network Network address Network termination NTBA Neiz Direkt keypad functions NMS Notebook function NT NTBA NTP OAM Offline Online Online banking Online Pass Online services OSI model bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Network Basic Input Output System The second part of an address in an IP network used for identifica tion of a device e g 255 255 255 0 See also IP address Your PBX has a DSL router so that one or more PCs can surf the In ternet and download information A network address designates the address of a complete local net work In telecommunications the network termination is the point at which access to a communication network is provided to the terminal You can use the Netz Direkt keypad function automatic external line access to enter a key sequence from your ISDN or analogue telephone to use current T ISDN functions For more information on this consult your T Com client advisor and request the necessary codes e g call forwarding in the exchange Netw
167. S1 User to User Teldat GmbH telephone number is stored in your telephone s caller list However because your connection is automatically set to Automatic Outside Line as a result of the ex works settings you would first have to dial for a callback in order to obtain the internal dialling tone and then 22 If Transfer Internal Code is active is placed before the 22 and the callback can be made directly from the caller list The number of bits per second transmitted in T Net or T ISDN from the PC or fax machine Fax machines achieve up to 14 4 kbps mo dems 56 kbps In the ISDN data and fax exchange with 64 kbps is possible With T DSL up to 8 mbps can be received and up to 768 kbps sent Terminal Selection Digit TTL stands for Time to Live and describes the time during which a data packet is sent between the individual servers before it is dis carded Twofish was a possible candidate for the AES Advanced Encryp tion Standard It is regarded as just as secure as Rijndael AES but is slower Universal Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line User Datagram Protocol Update to a software program PBX firmware An update is the up dated version of an existing software product and is indicated by a new version number Data transfer during online connections where files are transferred from the user s PC to another PC or to a data network server Universal Plug and Play Data transmission rate from the client to the
168. Saturday e Saturday Sunday The initiator becomes active on Sat urdays and Sundays Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type Day of Month DES Start Time Enter the time from which the initiator is to be activated Activa tion is carried on the next scheduling interval the default value of this interval is 55 seconds Stop Time Enter the time from which the initiator is to be deactivated De activation is carried on the next scheduling interval If you do not enter a Stop Time or set a Stop Time Start Time the initiat or is activated and deactivated after 10 seconds 18 5 2 Actions In the Local Services gt Scheduling gt Actions menu is displayed a list of all operations to be initiated by events or event chains configured in Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger 18 5 2 1 New Choose the New button to configure additional operations Teldat GmbH Basic Parameters Description Command Type Event List Event List Condition Reboot device after 18 Local Services Trigger Actions Options Reboot v Selectone All v 60 Seconds oK Cancel Fig 175 Local Services gt Scheduling gt Actions gt New The menu Local Services gt Scheduling gt Actions gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Command Type Enter your chosen designation for the action Select the desired action Possible values
169. Server default value The gateway waits for incoming TCP connections e Client The gateway actively sets up a TCP connection e UDP The gateway sends and receives UDP packets Local IP Address Enter the IP address of the client logging in IF Local IP Ad dress 0 0 0 0 any client can log in Local Port Enter the port for Local IP Address Remote IP Enter the IP address of the server at which your gateway should log in Port Number Enter the port for Remote IP Fields in the Trigger menu Field Description Byte Count Enter the received characters in bytes which are used as a trig ger for data transmission The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Possible values 1 1460 Default value 128 Timeout Enter the time in ms since receiving the last character which is used as a trigger for data transmission The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Teldat GmbH 8 Physical Interfaces Field Description Possible values 0 65535 Default value 0 Inter Byte Gap Enter the time in ms since receiving the first character which is used as a trigger for data transmission The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Possible values 0 65535 Default value 100 Fields in the Buffer menu Field Description Clear Serial RX Buffer Click the Clear button to clear the receive buffer Clear Serial TX Buf
170. T NAT method symmetric Service user defined and Pro tocol TCP UDP TCP UDP or Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Enter the destination port or the destination port range of the original data packets The default setting A11 means that the port is not specified In the NAT Configuration gt Replacement Values menu you can define depending on whether you re dealing with inbound or outbound data traffic new addresses and ports to which specific addresses and ports from the NAT Configuration gt Specify original traffic menu can be translated Fields in the Replacement Values menu Field Description New Destination IP Ad Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT dress Netmask New Destination Port New Source IP Ad dress Netmask New Source Port Enter the destination IP address to which the original source IP address is to be translated with corresponding netmask as the case arises Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Leave the destination port as it appears or enter the destination port to which the original destination port is to be translated Selecting Original leaves the original destination port If you disable Original an input field appears in which you can enter a new destination port Origina
171. TPS connection is to be estab lished Possible values are 0 to 65535 The default value is 443 Local Certificate Select a certificate that you want to use for the HTTPS connec tion Possible values e Internal default value Select this option if you want to use the certificate built into the device Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description e lt Certificate name gt Under System Management gt Cer tificates gt Certificate List select entered certificate 18 3 DynDNS Client The use of dynamic IP addresses has the disadvantage that a host in the network can no longer be found once its IP address has changed DynDNS ensures that your device can still be reached after a change to the IP address The following configuration steps are necessary e Registration of a host name at a DynDNS provider e Configuration of your device Registration The registration of a host name means that you define an individual user name for the DynDNS service e g dyn_client The service providers offer various domain names for this so that a unique host name results for your device e g dyn client provider com The DynDNS provider relieves you of the task of answer ing all DNS requests concerning the host dyn_client provider com with the dynamic IP address of your device To ensure that the provider always knows the current IP address of your device your device contacts the provider when setting up a new connection a
172. TS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is dis carded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 7 Long Retry Limit Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a data packet This value must be longer than the value specified in RTS Threshold After this many failed attempts the packet is dis carded Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 4 Fragmentation Enter the maximum size as of which the data packets are to be Threshold fragmented i e split into smaller units Low values are recom mended for this field in areas with poor reception and in the event of radio interference Possible values are 256 to 2346 The default value is 2346 bytes If Access Client is selected for Operation Mode with Client Mode Infrastructure the following parameters are additionally available under Advanced Settings Teldat GmbH Scan channels Roaming Profile Scan Threshold Scan Interval Channel Sweep Min Period Active Scan Max Period Active Scan Min Period Passive Scan Max Period Passive Scan RTS Threshold Short Guard Interval Short Retry Limit Long Retry Limit Fragmentation Threshold 10 Wireless LAN Advanced Settings All v Normal Roaming 70 dBm 5000 ms 2 10 ms 40 ms 20 ms 120 ms Always off Mi Enabled 2346 Bytes OK Cancel Fig 71 Wireless LAN
173. TS received 12 Corrupt Frames Received ojojojojojojojojojojojo Back Fig 207 Monitoring gt WLAN gt WLAN gt Advanced Values in the Advanced list Field Description Description Displays the description of the displayed value Value Displays the statistical value Meaning of the list entries Description Meaning Unicast MSDUs trans Displays the number of MSDUs successfully sent to unicast ad mitted successfully dresses since the last reset An acknowledgement was received for each of these packets Multicast MSDUs Displays the number of MSDUs successfully sent to multicast transmitted success addresses including the broadcast MAC address fully Transmitted MPDUs Displays the number of MPDUs received successfully Multicast MSDUs re Displays the number of successfully received MSDUs that were ceived successfully sent with a multicast address 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Description Meaning Unicast MPDUs re Displays the number of successfully received MSDUs that were ceived successfully sent with a unicast address MSDUs that could not Displays the number of MSDUs that could not be sent be transmitted Frame transmissions Displays the number of sent frames which which an acknow without ACK received ledgement frame was not received Duplicate received MS Displays the number of MSDUs received in duplicate DUs CTS frames received in Displays the number of received CTS clear to send frames response to an
174. Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Field Description Status Displays the number of IPSec tunnels by their current status e Up Currently active IPSec tunnels e Going up IPSec tunnels currently in the tunnel setup phase e Blocked IPSec tunnels that are blocked e Dormant Currently inactive IPSec tunnels e Configured Configured IPSec tunnels Fields in the SAs menu Field Description IKE Phase 1 Shows the number of active phase 1 SAs Established from the total number of phase 1 SAs Total IPSec Phase 2 Shows the number of active phase 2 SAs Established from the total number of phase 2 SAs Total Fields in the Packet Statistics menu Field Description Total Shows the number of all processed incoming In or outgoing Out packets Passed Shows the number of incoming In or outgoing Out packets forwarded in plain text Dropped Shows the number of all rejected incoming In or outgoing Out packets Encrypted Shows the number of all incoming In or outgoing Out pack ets protected by IPSec Errors Shows the number of incoming In or outgoing Out packets for which processing led to errors 21 3 Interfaces 21 3 1 Statistics In the Monitoring gt Interfaces gt Statistics menu current values and activities of all device interfaces are displayed With the filter bar you can select whether to display Transfer Totals or Transfer Throughput The values per second are shown on the Transfer Through
175. Traffic Filter Teldat gateways support two different methods of setting up IPSec connections e a method based on policies and e a method based on routing The policy based method can only be configured using the Setup tool With the GUI you use the routing based method The routing based method is also available using the Setup tool Teldat GmbH 16 VPN The policy based method uses data traffic filters to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs This allows for a very fine grained filter to be applied to the IP packet even at the level of the protocol and the port The routing based method offers various advantages over the policy based method e g NAT PAT within a tunnel IPSec in combination with routing protocols and the creation of VPN backup scenarios With the routing based method the configured or dynamically learned routes are used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs Although this method doe simplify many configurations problems may also be caused by competing routes or the coarser filtering of data traffic The Additional Traffic Filter parameter fixes this problem You can apply a finer filter i e you can enter the source IP address or the source port If a Additional Traffic Filter is configured this is used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs the route now only determines which data traffic is to be routed If an IP packet does not match the defined Additional Traffic Filter it is rejected If an IP packet meet
176. VPN security that the integrity of all certificates manually marked as trustworthy certification authority and user certificates is ensured The dis played fingerprints can be used to check this integrity Compare the displayed values with the fingerprints specified by the issuer of the certificate e g on the Internet It is sufficient to check one of the two values 7 6 1 2 Certificate Request Registration authority certificates in SCEP If SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol is used your device also supports separ ate registration authority certificates Registration authority certificates are used by some Certificate Authorities CAs to handle certain tasks signature and encryption during SCEP communication with separate keys and to delegate the operation to separate registration authorities if applicable When a certificate is downloaded automatically i e if CA Certificate Download is selected all the certificates needed for the operation are loaded automatically If all the necessary certificates are already available in the system these can also be selec ted manually Select the Certificate Request button to request or import more certificates bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Certificate List CRLs Certificate Servers Certificate Request Certificate Request Description CA Mode Manual O scep Generate Private Key RSA Y 1024 Y Bits Subject Name Custom DEnabled Common Name 3
177. WI2065n have a Serial interface for connection to a console This supports Baud rates from 1200 to 115200 Bps The interface is designed as a 9 pin SUB D socket o Eo Fig 25 9 pin Sub D connector The pin assignment is as follows Pin assignment of the Sub D port Pin bintec W1002n function 1 Not used RxD TxD Not used GND DSR RTS CTS Not used 3 6 3 Socket for power supply The WI devices bintec WI1040n bintec WI2040n bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n have a 3 pole connection for the power supply An individual power supply can be connec ted with any polarity and to any terminal with 2 pins If a redundant power supply is selec ted 2 mains units the minus poles must be connected together to terminal 2 and the plus poles must be connected separately to terminals 1 and 3 Fig 26 3 pole connector for the power supply The pin assignment is as follows Pin assignment of the connector for the power supply Pin Configuration 2 3 7 Frequencies and channels Different certification regulations apply around the world ETSI standards generally apply predominantly used in Europe For operation in Europe please read the notes in the R amp TTE Compliance Information 3 8 Support information If you have any questions about your new product or are looking for additional information the Teldat GmbH Support Centre can be reached Monday to Friday between the hours of 8 am and 5 pm They can be contacted as
178. _STOP 107 Action 177 177 185 185 220 266 362 405 421 437 458 462 Action to be performed 417 Actions 404 Active Clients 476 Active Clients 214 Active IPSec Tunnels 81 Active Radio Profile 198 Active Sessions SIF RTP etc 81 Activity Monitor 454 Additional Traffic Filter 317 319 Additional freely accessible Domain Names 429 Address Mode 138 Address Range 369 Address Type 369 Address List 369 Teldat GmbH Address Subnet 369 Addresses 369 Admin Status 244 Administration 144 186 Administrative Status 313 380 Administrative Access 99 ADSL Logic 437 Airtime fairness 154 203 Alert Service 447 Alert Service 450 Alert Recipient 447 Alert Settings 450 Alert Service 447 Alive Check 110 333 338 Alive Check 459 All Multicast Groups 287 Allowed Addresses 170 213 Allowed HotSpot Client 431 Always on 298 303 351 AP MAC Address 177 474 475 Apply QoS 362 ARP Lifetime 269 ARP Processing 165 208 As DHCP Server 379 As IPCP Server 379 Assert State 484 485 Assert Winner IP Address 484 485 Assigned Wireless Network VSS 198 Assistants 79 Attacked Access Point 218 Authentication 300 305 354 Authentication Method 313 328 Authentication Password 424 Authentication Type 108 113 Authentication Method 459 Authentication for PPP Dialin 116 Autosave Mode 125 405 Back Route Verify 321 Back Route Verify 230 Bandwidth 149 201
179. a 2 Data traffic on this WDS link is encrypted with WPA Enter the key for this WDS link in Preshared Key Transmit Key Only for Privacy WEP 40 WEP 104 Select one of the keys configured in WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4 as a standard key The default value is Key 1 WEP Key 1 to WEP Key Only for Privacy WEP 40 WEP 104 4 Enter the WEP key There are two ways of entering a WEP key e Direct entry in hexadecimal form If the entry starts with 0x the generator is deactivated Enter a hexadecimal string with exactly the right number of charac ters for the selected WEP mode 10 characters WEP 40 or 26 characters for WEP 104 e g WEP 40 0xA0B23574C5 WEP 104 0x81DC9BDB52D04DC20036DBD831 e Direct entry of ASCII characters Enter a character string with the right number of characters for the selected WEP mode For WEP 40 you need a character string with 5 characters for WEP 104 with 13 characters e g hellofor WEP 40 teldat wep1 for WEP 104 Preshared Key Only for Privacy WPA WPA 2 Enter the WPA password Enter an ASCII string with 8 63 characters Fields in the Remote Partner menu 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description Remote MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the WDS partner 10 1 4 Client Link Not available with W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n If you re operating your device in Access Point mode Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Set tings gt g gt Operation Mode Access Client you ca
180. a Rate mbps Shows the current transmission rate of data received by this cli ent in mbps The following clock rates are possible IEEE 802 11b 11 5 5 2 and 1 mbps IEEE 802 11g a 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 mbps If the 5 GHz frequency band is used the indication of 11 5 5 2 and 1 mbps is suppressed for IEEE 802 11b VSS Details for Connected Clients In the Monitoring gt WLAN gt VSS gt lt Connected Client gt gt A menu the current values and activities of a connected client are shown The values for wireless mode 802 11n are listed separately bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN WLAN1 VSS DS Bridge Links ClientLinks Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 200 Seconds Apply Signal dBm RSSH RSSI2 RSSI3 00 0c 84 03 8b 9a 10 0 0 234 0 Day s 0 0 14 90 92 90 88 87 3 18 Rate Tx Packets Rx Packets 802 11 albig Client MAC Address IP Address Up Time Noise dBm SNR dB Data Rate mbps nN 200000200000 E 802 11n 300 270 wo a ojojofjojojfojojojoajolajo CO Back Fig 209 Monitoring gt WLAN gt VSS gt lt connected client gt gt Values in the list lt Connected Client gt Field Description Client MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the associated client IP Address Shows the IP address of the client Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the cli ent is logged in Signal dBm RSSI1 Shows the received signal strength in dBm RSSI2 RSSI3
181. a key of 4096 bits not only needs a lot of time to create but also occupies a major share of the resources during IPSec processing A value of 768 or more is however recommended and the default value is 1024 bits SCEP URL Only for Mode SCEP Enter the URL of the SCEP server e g ht tp scep teldat de 8080 scep scep dll Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data CA Certificate Only for Mode SCEP Select the CA certificate e In Download In CA Name enter the name of the CA certificate of the certification authority CA from which you wish to request your certificate e g cawindows Your CA ad ministrator can provide you with the necessary data If no CA certificates are available the device will first down load the CA certificate of the relevant CA It then continues with the enrolment process provided no more important para meters are missing In this case it returns to the Generate Certificate Request menu If the CA certificate does not contain a CRL distribution point Certificate Revocation List CRL and a certificate server is Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description not configured on the device the validity of certificates from this CA is not checked e lt name of an existing certificate gt If all the necessary certific ates are already available in the system you select these manually RA Sign Certificate Only for Mode SCEP Only for CA Certificate not
182. ack is not executed is if SAs Security Associations already exist i e the tunnel to the peer already exists Note If a tunnel is to be set up to a peer the interface over which the tunnel is to be imple mented is activated first by the IPSec Daemon If IPSec with DynDNS is configured on the local device the own IP address is propagated first and then the ISDN call is sent to the remote device This ensures that the remote device can actually reach the local device if it initiates the tunnel setup Transfer of IP Address over ISDN Transferring the IP address of a device over ISDN in the D channel and or B channel opens up new possibilities for the configuration of IPSec VPNs This enables restrictions that occur in IPSec configuration with dynamic IP addresses to be avoided Note To use the IP address transfer over ISDN function you must obtain a free of charge extra licence You can obtain the licence data for extra licences via the online licensing pages in the support section at www teldat de Please follow the online licensing instructions Before System Software Release 7 1 4 IPSec ISDN callback only supported tunnel setup if the current IP address of the initiator could be determined by indirect means e g via DynDNS However DynDNS has serious disadvantages such as the latency until the IP address is actually updated in the database This can mean that the IP address propagated 16 VPN Teldat GmbH via DynDNS is
183. aged you may endanger your life or damage property Screw the mount to the wall with the 2 screws e Hang the device in the mount with the screw nut but do not tighten it Make sure the device connections are accessible e Protect the device against theft with the lock supplied Fig 12 Wall mounting of the bintec WIx040n standard design DIN rail or theft protection optional 3 3 2 Connectors All the connections are located on the underside of the device bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n have two Ethernet ports and a serial interface The connections are arranged as follows Cfge ee ases S olla i fe O olla Reset SFP Serial MMC SD Power 24V DC Eth1 Eth2 PoE Relay card 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig 13 Underside bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n Underside of bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n 1 Power 24V DC Socket for power supply 2 Eth1 PoE Eth2 10 100 Base T Ethernet interfaces 3 Reset HW and Reset button and delete configuration Cfg 3 Installation Teldat GmbH 4 SFP SFP slot for 100 Mbit s fibre module optional 5 Serial Serial interface RS232 6 Relay N O Alarm relay 3 3 3 Antenna connectors Note The three antenna for devices bintec WI1040n have 2 Transmit and 3 Receive func tions in n operating mode MIMO 2T3R WLAN 1 Ant 1 and WLAN 1 Ant send and re ceive Ant 3 only receives For devices
184. aking into account the priority con figured and if the relevant interface status is up the primary DNS server is queried and then the secondary DNS server If one of the DNS servers can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dynamic entry created in the cache Otherwise if a suitable Internet or dialin connection is selected as the standard inter face the relevant DNS server is asked depending on the configuration of the Internet or dialin connections if necessary by setting up a WAN connection at extra cost If one of the DNS servers can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dy namic entry created in the cache Otherwise if overwriting the addresses of the global name servers is allowed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup menu Interface Mode Dynamic a connection is set up if necessary at extra cost to the first Internet or dialin connection configured to en able DNS server addresses to be requested from DNS servers DNS Negotiation Enabled if this has not been already attempted When the name servers have been negotiated successfully these name servers are then available for more queries Otherwise the initial request is answered with a server error If one of the DNS servers answers with non existent domain the initial request is im mediately answered accordingly and a corresponding negative entry is made in the DNS cache of your device 18 1 1 Global Settings Global Settings DNS Serve
185. al error and warning priority are recorded e Notice Messages with emergency alert critical error warning and notice priority are recorded e Information default value Messages with emergency alert critical error warning notice and information priority are recorded e Debug All messages are recorded Maximum Number of Accounting Log Entries Enter the maximum number of accounting entries that are stored internally in the device Possible values are 0 to 1000 The default value is 20 Manual WLAN Control ler IP Address The feature is only for devices with WLAN controller available Enter the IP address of the WLAN controller The value can only be modified it the the WLAN controller func 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Value tion is enabled LED Mode The feature is only for W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n available Select the lighting scheme of the LEDs Possible values e Status default value Only the status LED flashes once per second e Flashing All LEDs show their standard behavior e Off All LEDs are deactivated 7 2 2 Passwords Setting the passwords is another basic system setting System Passwords Date andTime System Licences System Password System Admin Password essees Confirm Admin Password essees SNMP Communities SNMP Read Community essees SNMP Write Community essees Global Password Options Show passwords and keys in cleartet Show
186. al Reporting aaa aaa a 442 SVSIOG A a a A Be Se UA AA Se 442 Syslog Servers s sc dos ee ee Sh a es Ge 442 IP ACCOUNLING 0 esd Ae Src Ss Mergen bp he e Eo Ae Gn ee ee a a 445 Interfaces ho cerro Waele ct ky cette dele eae 445 Options ie A Ea ee ee A ae ee ene a 445 AlertService 2 u hae a i i a a ee er 447 Alert Recipient 2 e eona ee o 447 Alert Settings 20002000000 pba ot e a 4 450 SNMP Hythe A LAA o n a AA INS 452 SNMP Trap Options 2 2 2 eo eo 452 SNMP Trap Hosts o o o 453 Activity Monitor 2 o o eo eo 454 Options Lx ceci a e ee a ees 455 Momoning terede bannata o E e e 457 Internal Loga 4h a a a Gt te AA 457 System Messages o 457 A cette tek d e Seb weradleden d ai Ase geese 458 IPSec Tunnels 1 e 458 IPSec Statistics cir ss wee sty Wes Bee ey Ba RE ee ed 460 Interacess iy eget OES Si ee A ee 461 Statistics o osota te Boh OR a Oe BOER we oe 461 X bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 4 21 4 1 21 4 2 21 4 3 21 4 4 21 4 5 21 4 6 21 5 21 5 1 21 6 21 6 1 21 7 21 7 1 21 8 21 8 1 21 8 2 21 8 3 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN WEAN y onl tte a a Eee Gee a ta 464 WEANK e i a hag ae cee ete I Ea eons ce r 464 VSS ee ee ides eeu Ge an gion E a ek ed 466 WDS ir he s are Ai dey We arid et ee ew ee srl 469 Bridge LINKSE ae Geant eek tes ey nnd eee ee Bee a Neo ie ny Sag 472 Cllent LinKs 2 se an ae
187. al logical networks into smal ler physical units to simplify routing Subnet mask A method of splitting several IP networks into a series of subgroups or subnetworks The mask is a binary pattern that must match the IP addresses in the network 255 255 255 0 is the default subnet mask In this case 254 different IP addresses can occur in a subnet from X X X 1 tO X X X 254 Subscriber Name To distinguish between connections more easily you can assign a subscriber name for each internal subscriber Suppress A CLIP CLIR Calling line identification presentation calling line identi telephone number fication restriction CLIR Teldat GmbH Suppress B tele phone number COLR Suppress own tele phone number Suppression of the telephone number Switch Switchable dialling method Synchronous Syslog System telephones T DSL T Fax T ISDN Glossary COLP COLR Connected line identification presentation connected line identification restriction Activate suppress transmission of called party s telephone number to caller This performance feature suppresses the display of the called subscriber s telephone number If display of the B telephone number is suppressed your telephone number is not transmitted to the caller when you take a call Temporary deactivation of the transmission of your own telephone number Performance feature of a PBX The display of the telephone number can be deactivated on an individual
188. allocation Call costs account Call diversion Call filter Call forwarding in the exchange Call forwarding in the PBX Glossary signment For each day of the week you can select any day night switching time A calendar has four switch times which can be spe cifically assigned to each individual day of the week In a PBX calls can be assigned to certain terminals You can set up a call costs account for a subscriber here The maximum available number of units in the form of a limit can be as signed to each subscriber on their personal call costs account The cost limit is to be activated so that units can be booked Once the units have been used up no further external calls are possible In ternal calls can still be made at any time The units are booked to the account each time a call is ended Also known as call forwarding An incoming call is diverted to a spe cified telephone Internet or wireless connection Performance feature e g of the T Concept PX722 system tele phone special feature telephones or answering machines The call is only signalled in the case of certain previously defined telephone numbers You can only use the options of call forwarding in the exchange via the keypad if certain services are activated for your connection You can receive more information on this from your T Com advisor The exchange connects the calling subscriber with an external sub scriber you have specified The
189. an select the storage location on your PC and enter the de sired file name e Import configuration Under Filename select a config uration file you want to import Please note Click Go to first load the file under the name boot in the flash memory for the device You must restart the device to enable it Please note The files to be imported must be in CSV format e Copy configuration The configuration file in the Source File Name field is saved asDestination File Name e Delete configuration The configuration in the Select file field is deleted e Rename configuration The configuration file in the Se lect file field is renamed to New File Name e Restore backup configuration Only if under Save configuration with the setting Save configuration and 19 Maintenance Teldat GmbH Field Description back up previous boot configuration the current configuration was saved as boot configuration and the previ ous boot configuration was also archived You can load back the archived boot configuration e Delete software firmware The file in the Select file field is deleted e Import language You can import additional language ver sions of the GUI into your device You can download the files to your PC from the download area at www teldat de and from there import them to your device e Update system software You can launch an update of the system software the ADSL logic and the BOOTmonitor e Import Voice Mail Wave Files
190. and sends one itself Propagate PMTU Select whether the PMTU Path Maximum Transfer Unit is to be propagated during phase 2 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 16 VPN Teldat GmbH 16 1 4 XAUTH Profiles In the XAUTH Profiles menu a list of all XAUTH profiles is displayed Extended Authentication for IPSec XAuth is an additional authentication method for IPSec tunnel users The gateway can take on two different roles when using XAuth as it can act as a server or as a client e As a server the gateway requires a proof of authorisation e Asa client the gateway provides proof of authorisation In server mode multiple users can obtain authentication via XAuth e g users of Apple iPhones Authorisation is verified either on the basis of a list or via a Radius Server If using a one time password OTP the password check can be carried out by a token server e g SecOVID from Kobil which is installed behind the Radius Server If a company s headquarters is connected to several branches via IPSec several peers can be configured A specific user can then use the IPSec tunnel over various peers depending on the assign ment of various profiles This is useful for example if an employee works alternately in dif ferent branches if each peer represents a branch and if the employee wishes to have on site access to the tunnel XAuth is carried out once IPSec IKE Phase 1 has been completed su
191. ario in which an internal source host has initiated an IP connection to an ex ternal destination host over the NAT interface and in which an internally valid source address and internally valid source port are translated to an externally valid source address and an ex ternally valid source port Possible values e full cone UDP only Any given external host may send IP packets via the external address and the external port to the initiating source address and the initial source port e restricted cone UDP only Like full cone NAT as ex ternal host however only the initial external destination host is allowed e port restricted cone UDP only Like restricted cone NAT however exclusively data from the initial destination port are allowed e symmetric default value any protocol Outbound an ex ternally valid source address and an externally valid source port are administratively set Inbound only response packets 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description within the existing connection are allowed In the NAT Configuration gt Specify original traffic menu you can configure for which data traffic NAT is to be used Fields in the Specify original traffic menu Field Description Service Not for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and NAT method full cone restricted cone Orf port restricted cone Select one of the preconfigured services Possible values e User defined def
192. ase you will not be able to es tablish a serial connection to the device bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 6 Assistants The Assistants menu offers step by step instructions for the following basic configuration tasks e First steps e Internet Access VPN e Wireless LAN e VoIP PBX in LAN Choose the corresponding task from the navigation bar and follow the instructions and ex planations on the separate pages of the Wizard bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 7 System Management The System Management menu contains general system information and settings You see a system status overview Global system parameters such as the system name date time passwords and licences are managed and the access and authentication meth ods are configured 71 Status If you log into the GUI your device s status page is displayed which shows the most im portant system information You see an overview of the following data e System status e Your device s activities Resource utilisation active sessions and tunnels e Status and basic configuration of LAN WAN and WLAN interfaces You can customise the update interval of the status page by entering the desired period in seconds as Automatic Refresh Interval and clicking on the Apply button N Caution Under Automatic Refresh Interval do not enter a value of less than 5 seconds other wise the refresh interval of the screen will be too short to make further chan
193. asic Parameters Primary DHCP Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DHCP Server 0 0 0 0 OK Cancel Fig 173 Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Relay Settings The menu Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Relay Settings consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Primary DHCP Server Enter the IP address of a server to which BootP or DHCP re quests are to be forwarded Secondary DHCP Serv Enter the IP address of an alternative BootP or DHCP server er 18 5 Scheduling Your device has a event scheduler which enables certain standard actions for example activating and deactivating interfaces to be carried out Moreover every existing MIB vari able can be configured with any value You specify the Actions you want and define the Trigger that control when and under which conditions the Actions are to be carried out A Trigger may be a single event or a sequence of events which are combined into an Event List You also create an event list for a single event but it only contains one event Actions can be initiated on a time controlled basis Moreover the status or accessibility of interfaces or their data traffic may lead to execution of the configured actions or also the validity of licences Here also it is possible to set up every MIB variable as initiator with any value To take the event scheduler live enable the Schedule Interval under Options This inter val species the time
194. at can be configured Online blue and italic Indicates hyperlinks e g www teldat de bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 5 Chapter 3 Installation Note Please read the safety notices carefully before installing and starting up your device These are supplied with the device 3 1 bintec W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n 3 1 1 Setting up and connecting Note All you need for this are the cables and antennas supplied with the equipment The devices bintec W1003n bintec W2003n and bintec W2004n are equipped integrated antennas Their radiation is optimized for ceiling mounting The device bintec W2003n ext uses included external antennas Fig 2 Connection options bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext bintec W2004n 6 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 3 Installation h Power supply y Fig 3 Connection options bintec W1003n When setting up and connecting carry out the steps in the following sequence 1 Antennas For bintec W2003n ext screw the standard antennas supplied on to the connectors provided for this purpose If you are using alternative antennas please note that you have to connect MIMO antennas to the ports Ant 1 and Ant 2 and a SIMO antenna to port Anti 2 LAN For the standard configuration of your device via Ethernet connect port ETH1 or ETH2 of your device to your LAN using the Ethernet cable supplied bintec W1003n has a single Gigabit Ethernet port ETH1 The device automat
195. ate system software x Source Location current Sofware from Teldat Server Y The device will now connect to the Teldat GmbH download server and check whether an updated version of the system software is available If so your device will be updated auto matically When installation of the new software is complete you will be invited to restart the device Caution After confirming with Go the update cannot be aborted If an error occurs during the update do not re start the device and contact support bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Chapter 5 Access and configuration This chapter describes all the access and configuration options 5 1 Access Options The various access options are presented below Select the procedure to suit your needs There are various ways you can access your device to configure it e Via your LAN e Via the serial interface 5 1 1 Access via LAN Access via one of the Ethernet interfaces of your device allows you to to open the GUlina web browser for configuration purposes and to access your device via Telnet or SSH N Caution If you carry out the initial configuration with the GUI this can result in inconsistencies or malfunctions as soon as you carry out additional settings using other configuration options Therefore it is recommended that the configuration is continued with the GUI If you use SNMP shell commands continue with this configuration method 5 1 1 1 HTTP HTTPS With a cu
196. ation Teldat GmbH Property Value bintec W1002n One internal wireless module 3 external antennas Dimensions and weights Equipment dimensions without cable 163 mm x 168 mm x 50 mm WxLxH Weight approx 430 g LEDs 4 1x Status 1x WLAN 2x Ethernet Power consumption of the device 5 10 Watt depending on extensions Voltage supply External switched mode power supply 12 V DC 1 25 A PoE on Ethernet 1 Class 0 insulated with one WLAN module A Gigabit PoE injector is available as an access ory part number 5530000082 Environmental requirements Storage temperature 10 C to 70 C Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C Relative atmospheric humidity 10 to 95 non condensing Room classification Only use in dry rooms Available interfaces Serial interface V 24 Permanently installed supports Baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Baud Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LAN 2 port switch Permanently installed twisted pair only 10 100 mbps autosensing MDIX Available sockets Serial interface V 24 9 pin Sub D connector Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Antennas Antenna connection RTNC socket Transmit Power max 100 mW 20 dBm EIRP Frequency bands 2 4 GHz Indoor Outdoor 2412 2 472 MHz 5 GHz Indoor 5150 5350 MHz 5 GHz Outdoor 5470 5725 MHz 5 GHz BFWA 575
197. ation INET sshd pid 52 listening on 0 0 0 0 port 22 6 2005 01 10 22 47 12 Information Configuration system r4402 started at Mon Jan 10 22 47 12 2005 7 2005 01 10 22 47 09 Information Configuration boot_fac configuration loaded Page 1 Items 1 7 Fig 200 Monitoring gt Internal Log gt System Messages Values in the System Messages list Field Description No Displays the serial number of the system message Date Displays the date of the record Time Displays the time of the record Level Displays the hierarchy level of the message bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Subsystem Displays which subsystem of the device generated the mes sage Message Displays the message text 21 2 IPSec 21 2 1 IPSec Tunnels A list of all configured IPSec tunnel providers is displayed in the Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Tunnels menu IPSec Tunnels IPSec Statistics Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply View 20 per page Filter in None equal v Go Description Remote IP Remote Networks Security Algorithm Status Action 1 Peer 1 E a 1 4 Fe Page 1 Items 1 1 Fig 201 Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Tunnels Values in the IPSec Tunnels list Field Description Description Displays the name of the IPSec tunnel Remote IP Displays the IP address of the remote IPSec Peers Remote Networks Displays the currently negotiated subnets of the rem
198. ations on the subsystem in question 2 About this guide Teldat GmbH Chapter Description VPN Firewall Local Services Maintenance External Reporting Monitoring Glossary Index The glossary contains a reference to the most important tech nical terms used in network technology The index lists all the key terms for operating the device and all the configuration options and gives page numbers so they can be found easily To help you locate information easily this user s guide uses the following visual aids List of visual aids Symbol A A Use Indicates practical information Indicates general and important points Indicates a warning of risk level Attention points out possible dangers that may cause damage to property if not observed Indicates a warning of risk level Warning points out possible dangers that may cause physical injury or even death if not ob served The following typographical elements are used to help you find and interpret the informa tion in this user s guide Typographical elements Typographical element Use Indicates lists Menu gt Submenu Indicates menus and sub menus File gt Open non proportional e g Indicates commands that you must enter as written ping 192 168 0252 bold e g Windows Indicates keys key combinations and Windows terms Start menu bold e g Licence Key Indicates fields italic e g none Indicates values that you enter or th
199. attempt is made to allocate the same IP address that was assigned to this partner the previous time 15 1 3 1 Edit or New Choose theNew button to set up new IP address pools Choose the H icon to edit existing entries 15 WAN Teldat GmbH PPPoE PPTP PPPoA ISDN IP Pools Basic Parameters IP Pool Name l IP Address Range Alo Primary Secondary J DNS Server OK Cancel Fig 136 WAN gt Internet Dialup IP Pools gt New Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 15 2 Real Time Jitter Control When telephoning over the Internet voice data packets normally have the highest priority Nevertheless if the upstream bandwidth is low noticeable delays in voice transmission can occur when other packets are routed at the same time The real time jitter control function solves this problem So that the line is not blocked for too long for the voice data packets the size of the other packets can be reduced if re quired during a telephone call 15 2 1 Controlled Interfaces In the WAN gt Real Time Jitter Contro
200. ault Subject You can enter a subject Event This feature is available only for devices with Wireless LAN Controller Select the event to trigger an email notification Possible values e Syslog contains string default value A Syslog mes sage includes a specific string e New Neighbor AP found A new adjacent AP has been found e New Rogue AP found A new Rough AP has been found i e an AP using an SSID of its own network yet is not a com ponent of this network e New Slave AP WTP found A new unconfigured AP has reported to the WLAN e Managed AP offline A managed AP is no longer access ible Matching String You must enter a Matching String This must occur in a syslog message as a necessary condition for triggering an alert The entry is limited to 55 characters Bear in mind that without the use of wildcards e g only those strings that correspond exactly to the entry fulfil the condition The Matching String Teldat GmbH 20 External Reporting Field Description entered therefore usually contains wildcards To be informed of all syslog messages of the selected level just enter Severity Select the severity level which the string configured in the Matching String field must reach to trigger an e mail alert Possible values Emergency default value Alert Critical Error Warn ing Notice Information Debug Monitored Subsystems Select the subsystems to be monitored Add n
201. ault value e lt service name gt Action Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Select data packets to be excluded from NAT Possible values e Exclude default value All data packets will be excluded from NAT if they match the subsequently specified paramet ers Protocol Source IP Address Netmask Destination IP Ad dress Netmask ect e Do not exclude All data packets will be excluded from NAT if they do not match the subsequently specified paramet ers Protocol Source IP Address Netmask Destination IP Ad dress Netmask ect Protocol Only for certain services Not for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and NAT method full cone restricted cone Orf port restricted cone In this case UDP is automatically defined Select a protocol According to the selected Service different protocols are available Possible values Field Description e Any default value AH o Chaos O GI O IBAS O T AS O JOP alia JER TS O RE e Kryptolan O ESTA O sien SPEUR O WIRIRIO ENS TD Source IP Address Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT or Netmask excluding Without NAT Enter the source IP address and corresponding netmask of the bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description original data packets as the case arises Original Destination IP Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Address Netmask En
202. available Quality of Service QoS makes it possible to distribute the available bandwidths effectively and intelligently Certain applications can be given preference and bandwidth re served for them A list of all QoS rules is displayed in the Firewall gt Policies gt QoS menu 17 1 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new QoS rules Filter Rules QoS Options Configure QoS Interface Interface Selectone Y Traffic Shaping Enabled Filter Rules Source Destination Service Priority Use Bandwidth Bit s Bounded oK Cancel Fig 154 Firewall gt Policies gt QoS gt New The Firewall gt Policies gt QoS gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Configure QoS Interface menu Field Description Interface Select the interface on which bandwidth management is to be carried out Traffic Shaping Select whether you want to activate bandwidth management for the selected interface The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Specify bandwidth Only for Traffic Shaping Enabled Enter the maximum available bandwidth in kbps for the selected interface 17 Firewall Teldat GmbH Field Description Filter Rules This field contains a list of all configured firewall policies for which QoS was activated Apply QoS Enabled The follow ing options are available for each list entry e Use Select whether this entry should be assigned to the QoS inter
203. be configured and ad ministrated remotely using ISDN Login ISDN Login operates on gateways in the ex works state as soon they are connected to an ISDN connection and therefore reachable via an extension number The network address of the ISDN interface e g 4711 A router that does not have network connections but provides the same functions between PC ISDN and the Internet ISDN Basic Rate Interface This performance feature requires the installation of the T ISDN Speedmanager If you are surfing the Internet and use two B chan nels for downloading you cannot be reached by telephone from out side As a further call is signalled over the D channel your PBX can depending on the setting specifically shut down a B channel so that you can take the call Alternative name for the So bus ISDN Primary Rate Interface International Standardization Organization Internet Service Provider International Telecommunication Union Stored keys can be viewed by the government The US government in particular requires key storages to prevent crimes being covered up through data encryption Local Area Network Link Access Procedure Balanced The last access by T Service is stored and displayed in the configur ation Layer 1 of the ISO OSI Model the bit transfer layer Liquid Crystal Display a screen in which special liquid crystal is used to display information bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN LCP LDAP Lease Time Leas
204. been defined Possible values e Preserve default value The DSCP TOS value of the IP data packets remains unchanged e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description e DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format e DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decimal format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F Set COS value 802 1p Layer 2 Here you can set change the service class Layer 2 priority in the VLAN Ethernet header of the IP packets based on the class Class ID that has been defined Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 The default value is Preserve Interfaces Only for Class map New When creating a new class plan select the interfaces to which you want to link the class plan A class plan can be assigned to multiple interfaces 12 4 3 QoS Interfaces Policies In the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Interfaces Policies menu you set prio
205. ble is mod ified if the initiator is active e Inactive The value of the MIB variable is modified if the ini tiator is inactive e Both The value of the MIB variable is differentially modified if the initiator status changes MIB Variables Only if Command Type M7B SNMP Select the MIB variable whose value is to be configured as de pendent upon initiator status If the initiator is active Trigger Status Active the MIB vari able is described with the value entered in Active Value If the initiator is inactive Trigger Status Inactive the MIB variable is described with the value entered in Inactive Value If the MIB variable is to be modified depending on whether the initiator is active or inactive Trigger Status Both it is de scribed with an active initiator with the value entered in Active Value and with an inactive initiator with the value in Inactive Value Use Add to create more entries Interface Only if Command Type Interface Status Select the interface whose status should be changed 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Set interface status Only if Command Type Interface Status Select the status to be set for the interface Possible values e Up default value e Down e Reset Source Location Only if Command Type Software Update Select the source for the software update Possible values e Current Software from Teldat Server default value The latest software will be downloaded fr
206. ble values e Up default value The function is enabled e Down The interface is disabled Traffic Direction Only for Event Type Interface Traffic 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Select the direction of the data traffic whose values should be monitored as initiating an operation Possible values e RX default value Incoming data traffic is monitored e TX Outgoing data traffic is monitored Interface Traffic Condi tion Only for Event Type Interface Traffic Select whether the value for data traffic must be Greater default value or Less the value specified in Trans ferred Traffic in order to initiate the operation Transferred Traffic Only for Event Type Interface Traffic Enter the desired value in kBytes for the data traffic to serve as comparison The default value is 0 Destination IP Address Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter the IP address whose accessibility is to be checked Source IP Address Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter an IP address to be used as sender address for the ping test Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address of the interface over which the ping is sent is automatically entered as sender address e Specific Enter the desired IP address in the input field Status Only for Event Type Ping Test Select whether Destination IP Address Reacheable must be default value or Unreacheab e in order to initiate the opera tion Interval
207. ble values are 10to 600 The default value is 120 Action Start the scan by clicking on Scan If the antennas are installed correctly on both sides and LOS is free the bridge finds available bridges and displays them in the following list If the partner bridge cannot be found check the line of sight and the antenna installation Then carry out the Scan The partner should then be found Remote Link Descrip Displays the name of the bridge link configured on the remote tion bridge Remote Device Name Displays the name of the remote bridge Signal dBm Displays the signal strength of the detected bridge link 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description Remote MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the remote bridge Remote link enabled Displays the status of the link on the remote bridge Connected Displays the status of the link on your bridge Action You can change the status of the bridge link The available ac tions are displayed in this field 10 2 Administration The Wireless LAN gt Administration menu contains basic settings for operating your gate way as an access point AP 10 2 1 Basic Settings Basic Settings WLAN Administration Region OK Cancel Fig 84 Wireless LAN gt Administration gt Basic Settings The Wireless LAN gt Administration gt Basic Settingsmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the WLAN Administration menu Field Description Region Select the country in which
208. bscribers can telephone simultaneously Three party conferences are also pos sible with external subscribers Windows application similar to the Windows Explorer which uses SNMP commands to request and carry out the settings of your gate way The application was called the DIME Browser before BRICK ware version 5 1 3 One important prerequisite for the transfer of your configuration to the PBX is that you have set up a connection between the PC and PBX You can do this using the LAN Ethernet connection With some restrictions you can also program your PBX using the telephone For information on programming your PBX using the tele phone please see the accompanying user s guide The performance features for analogue terminals can only be used with terminals that use the MFC dialling method and that have an R or flash key The internal telephone number of the connection and not the ex ternal number multiple subscriber number must be entered as the MSN in the ISDN terminal connected to the internal ISDN bus See the user s guide for the ISDN terminals Enter MSN Please note that not all the ISDN terminals available on the market can use the performance features provided by the PBX via their key interface Cyclic Redundancy Check Computer Telephony Integration Term for connection between a PBX and server CTI enables PBX functions to be controlled and evaluated by a PC Control and signalling channel of an ISDN Basic Rate In
209. ccessfully and be fore IKE Phase 2 begins If XAuth is used together with IKE Config Mode the transactions for XAuth are carried out before the transactions for IKE Config Mode 16 1 4 1 New Choose the New button to create additional profiles IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Basic Parameters Description Role Server Y Mode radius Y RADIUS Server Group ID No Radius Server configured for XAUTH oK Cancel Fig 145 VPN gt IPSec gt XAUTH Profiles gt New Teldat GmbH 16 VPN The VPN gt IPSec gt XAUTH Profiles gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for this XAuth profile Role Select the role of the gateway for XAuth authentication Possible values e Server default value The gateway requires a proof of au thorisation e Client The gateway provides proof of authorisation Mode Only for Role Server Select how authentication is carried out Possible values e RADIUS default value Authentication is carried out via a Ra dius server It is configured in the System Management gt Re mote Authentication gt RADIUSmenu and selected in the RADIUS Server Group ID field e Local Authentication is carried out via a local list Name Only for Role Client Enter the authentication name of the client Password Only for Role Client Enter the auth
210. ccording to Retries or the next configured RADIUS server is requested Possible values are whole numbers between 50 and 50000 The default value is 1000 1 second Alive Check Here you can activate a check of the accessibility of a RADIUS server in Status Down An Alive Check is carried out regularly every 20 seconds by sending an ACCESS_ REQUEST to the IP address of the RADI US server If the server is reachable Status is set to alive again If the RADIUS server is only reachable over a switched line dialup connection this can cause additional costs if the server is down for a long time The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Retries Enter the number of retries for cases when there is no response to a request If an response has still not been received after these attempts the Status is set to down In Alive Check Enabled your device attempts to reach the server every 20 seconds If the server responds Status is set back to alive Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 10 The default value is 1 To prevent Status being set to down set this value to 0 RADIUS Dialout Only for Authentication Type PPP Authentication and IPSec Authentication Select whether your device receives requests from RADIUS server dialout routes This enables temporary interfaces to be configured automatically and your device can initiate outgoing connections that are not configured p
211. ce dynamically via DHCP IP Address Netmask Only for Address Mode Static With Add add a new address entry enter the IP Address and the corresponding Netmask of the virtual interface Interface Mode Only for physical interfaces in routing mode Select the configuration mode of the interface Possible values e Untagged default value The interface is not assigned for a specific purpose e Tagged VLAN This option only applies for routing inter faces You use this option to assign the interface to a VLAN This is done using the VLAN ID which is displayed in this mode and can be configured The definition of a MAC address in MAC Address is optional in this module MAC Address Only with virtual interfaces and only for Interface Mode Un tagged Enter the MAC address associated with the interface For virtual interfaces you can use the MAC address of the physical inter face under which the virtual interface was created but this is not necessary You can also allocate a virtual MAC address The first 6 characters of the MAC are preset but can be changed VLAN ID Only for Interface Mode Tagged VLAN 9 LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description This option only applies for routing interfaces Assign the inter face to a VLAN by entering the VLAN ID of the relevant VLAN Possible values are 1 default value to 4094 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings me
212. cess Client Mode e Operation Mode Access Client or Off Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Value e The channel used on this wireless module e Software version of the wireless card Bridge mode e Operation Mode Bridge or Off e The channel used on this wireless module e Number of configured bridge links e Software version of the wireless card Interface specifics for relay e Configured Mode Fields in the WAN Interfaces menu Field Value Description Connec All the WAN interfaces are listed here and their most important tion Information Link settings are shown The system also displays whether the inter face is active 7 2 Global Settings The basic system parameters are managed in the Global Settings menu 7 2 1 System Your device s basic system data are entered in the System Management gt Global Set tings gt System menu 7 System Management Basic Settings System Name Location Contact Maximum Number of Syslog Entries Teldat GmbH System Passwords Date and Time System Licences Product Name TELDAT 50 Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries Information Maximum Number of Accounting Log Entries 20 Manual WLAN Controller IP Address LED mode Status v OK Cancel Fig 40 System Management gt Global Settings gt System The System Management gt Global Settings gt Systemmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Val
213. cket once The packet is sent to a virtual address defined as a multicast group Interested recipients log in to these groups Other areas of use One classic area in which multicast is used is for conferences audio video with several re cipients The most well known are probably the MBone Multimedia Audio Tool VAT Video Conferencing Tool VIC and Whiteboard WB VAT can be used to hold audio con ferences All subscribers are displayed in a window and the speaker s are indicated by a black box Other areas of use are of particular interest to companies Here multicasting makes it possible to synchronise the databases of several servers which is valuable for multinationals or even companies with just a few locations Address range for multicast For IPv4 the IP addresses 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 224 0 0 0 4 are reserved for multicast in the class D network An IP address from this range represents a multicast group to which several recipients can log in The multicast router then forwards the re quired packets to all subnets with logged in recipients Multicast basics Multicast is connectionless which means that any trouble shooting or flow control needs to be guaranteed at application level At transport level UDP is used almost exclusively as in contrast to TCP it is not based on a point to point connection At IP level the main difference is therefore that the destination address does not address a Teldat GmbH
214. cket then contains the SSID of the wireless LAN and information on whether WEP encryp tion is used An ad hoc network refers to a number of computers that form an in dependent 802 11 WLAN each with a wireless adapter Ad hoc net works work independently without an access point on a peer to peer basis Ad hoc mode is also known as IBSS mode Independent Ba sic Service Set and makes sense for the smallest networks e g if two notebooks are to be linked to each other without an access point Asymmetric digital subscriber line Authentication header Display unit e g for T Concept PX722 system telephone able to display letters and other characters as well as digits For the connection of analogue terminals such as telephone fax and answering machine Terminals that transmit voice and other information analogously e g telephone fax machine answering machine and modem To transmit voice via the telephone acoustic oscillations are conver ted to continuous electrical signals which are transmitted via a net work of lines digital voice transmission If you want to call your employees or family members to a meeting or the dinner table you could call each one of them individually or simply use the announcement function With just one call you reach all the announcement enabled telephones without the subscribers having to pick up the receiver Announcement func Performance feature of a PBX On suitable telephones e g system
215. ct one from the list of created groups Each host to be monitored must be assigned to a group The operation configured in Interface is only executed if no group member can be reached Fields in the Trigger menu Field Description Monitored IP Address Enter the IP address of the host to be monitored Possible values e Default Gateway default value The default gateway is 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description monitored e Specific Enter the IP address of the host to be monitored manually in the adjacent input field Source IP Address Select how the IP address is to be determined that your device uses as the source address of the packet sent to the host to be monitored Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address is determined automatically e Specific Enter the IP address in the adjacent input field Interval Enter the time interval in seconds to be used for checking the availability of hosts Possible values are 1 to 65536 The default value is 10 Within a group the smallest Interval of the group members is used Successful Trials Specify how many pings need to be answered for the host to be regarded as accessible You can use this setting to specify for example when a host is deemed to be accessible once more and used again instead of a backup device Possible values are 1 to 65536 The default value is 3 Unsuccessful Trials Specify how many pings need to be
216. ct the authentication specified by your provider Possible values e PAP default value Only run PAP PPP Password Authentic ation Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authentic ation Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred en crypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol e PAP CHAP MS CHAP Primarily run CHAP on denial then the authentication protocol required by the connection partner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case se lect this option DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server from the connection partner or sends these to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default PPTP Address Mode Displays the address mode The value cannot be changed Possible values e Static The Local PPTP IP Address will be assigned to the Teldat GmbH 15 WAN Fi
217. ction method Local Port Shows the local port Remote Port Shows the remote port Packets Shows the total number of incoming and outgoing packets Bytes Shows the total number of incoming and outgoing bytes Errors Shows the total number of errors IKE Phase 1 SAs x The parameters of the IKE Phase 1 SAs are displayed here 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Role Algorithm Life time remaining Status IPSec Phase 2 SAs Shows the parameters of the IPSec Phase 2 SAs x Role Algorithm Life time remaining Status Messages The system messages for this IPSec tunnel are displayed here 21 2 2 IPSec Statistics In the Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Statistics menu statistical values for all IPSec connec tions are displayed IPSec Tunnels IPSec Statistics Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply Licences In Use Maximum IPSec Tunnels 0 110 Peers Up Going up Blocked Dormant Configured Status 0 0 0 1 1 SAs Established Total IKE Phase 1 0 0 IPSec Phase 2 0 0 Packet Statistics In Out Total 59 135 Passed 59 135 Dropped 0 0 Encrypted 0 0 Errors D 0 Fig 203 Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Statistics The Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Statistics menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Licences menu Field Description IPSec Tunnels Shows the IPSec licences currently in use In Use and the maximum number of licenses usable Maximum Fields in the Peers menu
218. d DSA i e two files must be stored in the flash for each algorithm see example at above If no keys are available you have to generate these first Proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 Leave the Flash Management shell with exit Launch the GUI and log on to your device see Calling up GUI on page 68 Make sure that English is selected as the language Check the key status in the System Management gt Administrative Access gt SSH menu If both keys are available you ll see in both fields RSA Key Status and DSA Key Status the value Generated If one or both of these fields contains the value Not Generated you must generate the relevant key To have the device generate the key click Generate The device generates the key and stores it in the FlashROM Generated indicates that generation was successful Make sure that both keys have been successfully generated If necessary repeat the procedure described above Login via SSH Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration Proceed as follows to log in on your device via SSH If you have made sure that all the keys needed are available on the device you have to check whether an SSH client is installed on your PC Most UNIX and Linux distributions in stall a SSH client by default Additional software e g PUTTY usually has to be installed on a Windows PC Proceed as follows to log in on your device via SSH UNIX 1 Enterssh lt IP address of the device gt
219. d Description e 9600 default value O IIZ e 57600 O HAS200 Data Bits Select how many data bits should be sent in sequence for traffic data Possible values e 8 default value Eight Data Bits are sent in sequence e 7 Seven Data Bits are sent in sequence Parity Select whether or not a parity bit should be used to identify transmission errors Possible values e None default value No parity bit is used e Even An even number of 1 bits is used to identify transmis sion errors e Odd An uneven number of 1 bits is used to identify trans mission errors Stop Bits Stop bits terminate the data transmission of a transmission unit Choose whether a stop bit should be used or whether two stop bits should be used Possible values e 1 default value O 2 Handshake Choose how the recipient can continue the data transmission so that no data is lost if no other data can be processed Possible values e None default value The recipient is unable to continue the data transmission e RTS CTS The hardware handshake used controls the data flow over the RTS and CTS lines 8 Physical Interfaces Teldat GmbH Field Description e XON XOFF lf the software handshake is used the recipient sends special signs to the sender to control the data flow Fields in the IP menu Field Description Mode Select the Mode in which the gateway should process IP data packets Possible values e
220. d in Austria for example 15 1 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new PPTP interfaces bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Basic Parameters Description PPTP Interface User Name Password Always on Connection Idle Timeout IP Mode and Routes IP Address Mode Default Route Create NAT Policy Block after connection failure for Maximum Number of Dialup Retries Authentication DNS Negotiation Prioritize TCP ACK Packets PPTP Address Mode Local PPTP IP Address Remote PPTP IP Address LCP Alive Check PPPoE PPTP PPPoA ISDN AUX IP Pools Selectone e eessssss s tS ClEnablea 300 Seconds Ostatic Get IP Address M Enabled E Enabled Advanced Settings feo Seconds E PAP Y MEnabled Denabled Static fi 0 0 0 140 fi 0 0 0 138 MJEnabled L oK C cancel Fig 135 WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPTP gt New The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPTP gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description PPTP Ethernet Inter face bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Enter a name for uniquely identifying the internet connection The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used Select the IP interface over which packets are to be transported to the remote PPTP terminal If you want to use an external DSL modem select the Ether
221. d in the device e Yes CRLs are always checked e No No checking of CRLs Select radio Only for Command Type 5 GHz WLAN Bandscanand 5 8 GHz WLAN Bandscan Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Select the WLAN module on which to perform the frequency band scan WLC SSID Only if Command Type WLC VSS State Select the wireless network administered over the WLAN con troller whose status should be changed Set status Only if Command Type WLC VSS State Select the status for the selected wireless network Possible values e Activate default value e Deactivate 18 5 3 Options You configure the schedule interval in the Local Services gt Scheduling gt Options Trigger Actions Options Scheduling Options Schedule Interval 0 sec Enabled OK Cancel Fig 176 Local Services gt Scheduling gt Options The Local Services gt Scheduling gt Optionsmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Scheduling Options menu Field Description Schedule Interval Select whether the schedule interval is to be enabled for the in terface Enter the period of time in seconds after which the system checks whether configured events have occurred Possible values are 0 to 65535 Field Description The value 300 is recommended 5 minute accuracy Values lower than 60 are generally pointless and are an unnecessary use of system resources 18 6 Surveillance In this menu you can co
222. d through a standard PoE injector part number 5530000082 You can set up further connections as required e Serial connection For alternative configuration possibilities connect the serial interface of your PC COM1 or COM2 to the serial interface of the gateway console However configuration via the serial interface is not provided by default Installation The access points can be fitted to the wall using brackets or can used as a table top device Use as a table top device Attach the four self adhesive feet on the bottom of the device Place your device on a solid level base Wallmounting To attach the devices bintec W1002n to the wall use the brackets on the back of the housing Optional wall mounting with theft protection part number 5510000009 is avail able Warning Before drilling make sure that there are no building installations where you are drilling If gas electricity water or waste water lines are damaged you may endanger your life or damage property e Screw the mount to the wall with the 2 screws e Hang the device in the mount with the screw nut but do not tighten it Make sure the device connections are accessible e Protect the device against theft with the theft protection Fig 8 Wall mounting straps bintec W1002n 3 2 2 Connectors All the connections are located on the underside of the device On bintec W1002n the third antenna connection is located on the underside of t
223. de Activate this function to increase the transmission speed for 802 11g through frame bursting As a result several packets are sent one after the other without a waiting period This is par ticularly effective in 11b g mixed operation The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default If problems occur with older WLAN hardware this function should not be active Airtime fairness This function is not available for all devices The Airtime fairness function ensures that the access point s send resources are distributed intelligently to the connected cli ents This means that a powerful client e g a 802 11n client cannot achieve only a poor flow level because a less powerful client e g a 802 11a client is treated in the same way when apportioning The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default This fuction is only applied to unprioritized frames of the WMM Classe Background The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Channel Plan Select the desired channel plan The channel plan makes a preselection when a channel is se Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description lected This ensures that no channels overlap i e a distance of four channels is maintained between the channels used This is useful if more access points are used with overlapping radio cells Possib
224. device continues with the start up process During the heating phase the red Failure LED flashes bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN a i Ta EE E Wireless LAN Antenna OMA ntenna Power Supply at iat bintec RS230a Ethernet Alarm Relay connect via fibre optic Server Fig 11 Connection options bintec WIx040n When setting up and connecting carry out the steps in the following sequence 1 Antennas Screw the standard antennas supplied on to the connectors provided for this pur pose 2 LAN For the standard configuration of your device via Ethernet connect port ETH1 or ETH2 of your device to your LAN using the Ethernet cable supplied The device automatically detects whether it is connected to a switch or directly to a PC Use just one of the ports ETH1 and ETH2 the second port is used to cascade a number of devices If you use both Ethernet connections on the same switch loops may be formed The standard patch cable RJ45 RJ45 is symmetrical It is therefore not possible to mix up the cable ends bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Installation Teldat GmbH 3 Power connection Connect the device to a mains socket Use the power cord supplied and insert it in the appropriate socket on your device Now plug the power cord into a power socket 100 240 V The status LEDs signal that your device is correctly connected to the power supply Optionally power can be supplied through a sta
225. dio module and three standard screw on anten nas Power is supplied through a wall power supply or through PoE Power over Ethernet bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Wireless LAN RESET ETH2 CONSOLE ETH1 O gt O i ANT3 7 1 Power supply Serial connect to PC bintec RS230a Switch Fig 7 Connection options bintec W1002n When setting up and connecting carry out the steps in the following sequence 1 Antennas Screw the standard antennas supplied on to the connectors provided for this pur pose 2 LAN For the standard configuration of your device via Ethernet connect port ETH1 or ETH2 of your device to your LAN using the Ethernet cable supplied The device automatically detects whether it is connected to a switch or directly to a PC Use just one of the ports ETH1 and ETH2 the second port is used to cascade a number of devices If you use both Ethernet connections on the same switch loops bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Installation Teldat GmbH may be formed The standard patch cable RJ45 RJ45 is symmetrical It is therefore not possible to mix up the cable ends 3 Power connection Connect the device to a mains socket Use the power cord supplied and insert it in the appropriate socket on your device Now plug the power cord into a power socket 100 240 V The status LEDs signal that your device is correctly connected to the power supply Optionally power can be supplie
226. disabled by default Make sure that ARP processing cannot be applied together with the MAC bridge function WMM Select whether voice or video prioritisation via WMM Wireless Multimedia is to be activated for the wireless network so that optimum transmission quality is always achieved for time critical applications Data prioritisation is supported in accordance with DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point or IEEE802 1d The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the menu Security Settings Field Description Security Mode Select the security mode encryption and authentication for the wireless network Possible values e Inactive default value Neither encryption nor authentica tion e WEP 40 WEP 40 bits e WEP 104 WEP 104 bits WPA PSK WPA Preshared Key WPA Enterprise 802 11x 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description Transmit Key Only for Security Mode WEP 40 or WEP 104 Select one of the keys configured in WEP Key as a standard key The default value is Key 1 WEP Key 1 4 Only for Security Mode WEP 40 WEP 104 Enter the WEP key Enter a character string with the right number of characters for the selected WEP mode For WEP 40 you need a character string with 5 characters for WEP 104 with 13 characters e g hellofor WEP 40 teldat wep1 for WEP 104 WPA Mode Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Enterprise Sel
227. dministration View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Interface PYID Drop untagged frames Drop non members ent 4 1 Management Page 1 ltems 1 1 OK Cancel Fig 66 LAN gt VLANs gt Port Configuration The LAN gt VLANs gt Port Configurationmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Port Configuration menu Field Description Interface Shows the port for which you define the PVID and processing rules PVID Assign the selected port the required PVID Port VLAN Identifi er If a packet without a VLAN tag reaches this port it is assigned this PVID Drop untagged frames If this option is enabled untagged frames are discarded If the option is disabled untagged frames are tagged with the PVID defined in this menu Drop non members If this option is enabled all tagged frames that are tagged with a VLAN ID to which the selected port does not belong are dis carded 9 2 3 Administration In this menu you make general settings for a VLAN The options must be configured sep arately for each bridge group VLANs Port Configuration Administration Bridge Group brO VLAN Options Enable VLAN DEnabled Management VID 1 Management C OK JC Cancel Fig 67 LAN gt VLANs gt Administration The LAN gt VLANs gt Administrationmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Bridge Group br lt ID gt VLAN Options menu Field Description E
228. dows Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Password Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP To obtain certificates you may need a password from the certi fication authority Enter the password you received from the cer tification authority here Key Size Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Select the length of the key to be created Possible values are 1024 default value to 2048 and 4096 Autosave Mode Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Select whether your device automatically stores the various steps of the enrolment internally This is an advantage if enrol ment cannot be concluded immediately If the status has not been saved the incomplete registration cannot be completed As soon as the enrolment is completed and the certificate has been downloaded from the CA server it is automatically saved in the device configuration The function is enabled by default Use CRL Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Define the extent to which certificate revocation lists CRLs are to be included in the validation of certificates issued by the own er of this certificate Possible values e Auto default value In case there is an entry fora CDP CRL distribution point this should be evaluated in addition to the CRLs globally configure
229. e vent IP packets fragmenting the MSS Maximum Segment Size is automatically decreased by the device to the value set here The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Once enabled the default value 1350 is entered in the input field 9 2 VLAN By implementing VLAN segmentation in accordance with 802 1Q you can configure VLANs on your device The wireless ports of an access point in particular are able to re move the VLAN tag of a frame sent to the clients and to tag received frames with a pre defined VLAN ID This functionality makes an access point nothing less than a VLAN compliant switch with the enhancement of grouping clients into VLAN groups In general VLAN segmenting can be configured with all interfaces bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Standard LAN VLAN Segmentation gt o en VLAN VLAN VLAN Deve lop Public ment ment Wireless LAN 1 Wireless LAN 2 Fig 64 VLAN segmenting VLAN for Bridging and VLAN for Routing In the LAN gt VLAN menu VLANs virtual LANs are configured with interfaces that operate in Bridging mode Using the VLAN menu you can make all the settings needed for this and query their status N Caution For interfaces that operate in Routing mode you only assign a VLAN ID to the inter face You define this via the parameters Interface Mode Tagged VLAN and field VLAN ID in menu LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces
230. e an access client can be used as central interface between a number of terminals In this way devices such as computers and printers can be wirelessly in terconnected Select the Channelto be used Operation Band Select the operation band and where applicable the usage area of the wireless module For Operation Mode Access Point Bridge or Operation Mode Access Client and Client Mode Ad Hoc Possible values e 2 4 GHz In Outdoor default value Your device is oper ated at 2 4 GHz mode 802 11b and mode 802 11g inside or outside buildings e 5 GHz Indoor Your device runs in 5 GHz Mode 802 11a h inside buildings e 5 GHz Outdoor Your device runs in 5 GHz Mode 802 11a h outside buildings e 5 GHz In Outdoor Your device is run with 5 GHz Mode 802 11a h inside or outside buildings e 5 8 GHz Outdoor Only for so called Broadband Fixed Wireless Access BFWA applications The frequencies in the frequency range from 5 755 MHz to 5 875 MHz may only be used in conjunction with commercial offers for public network accesses and requires registration with the Federal Network Agency For Operation Mode Access Client and Client Mode JIE IBS CANE US Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description Possible values e 2 4 and 5 GHz Your device runs in 2 4 Mode 802 11b and Mode 802 11g or 5 GHz Mode 802 11a h e 5 GHz default value Your device runs in 5 GHz Mode 802 11a h e 2 4 GHz Your device r
231. e save the current configuration as the boot configuration and also archive the previous boot configuration as a backup If you want to load the archived boot configuration into your device go to the bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 5 Access and configuration Teldat GmbH gt Software 8 Configuration menu select Action Import configuration and click on Go The archived backup is used as the current boot configuration The navigation bar also contains the main configuration menus and their sub menus Click the main menu you require The corresponding sub menu then opens If you click the sub menu you want the entry selected will be displayed in red All the other sub menus will be closed You can see at a glance the sub menu you are in Status page If you call the GUI the status page of your device is displayed after you log in The most important data of your device can be seen on this at a glance Main configuration window The sub menus generally contain several pages These are called using the buttons at the top of the main window If you click a button the window is opened with the basic paramet ers You can extend this by clicking the Advanced Settings tab which displays the addi tional options Configuration elements The various actions that you can perform when configuring your device in the GUI are triggered by means of the following buttons GUI buttons Button Position Updates the view Apply
232. e Alert Service for WLAN surveillance click Start to monitor your managed APs You are taken to the External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Recipient menu with the default setting Event Managed AP offline You can specify that you wish to be notified by e mail if the Managed AP offline event occurs Click under New Neighborscan on Start to rescan adjacent AP s You will receive a warn ing that the wireless modules of the access points must also be disabled for a certain peri od of time When you start the process with OK a progress bar is displayed The located AP display is updated every ten seconds 11 2 Controller Configuration In this menu you make the basic settings for the wireless LAN controller 11 2 1 General General Basic Settings Region Germany v Interface LAN_EN1 0 DHCP Server with enabled CAPWAP option 138 DHCP Server External or static O Internal Slave AP location jad Local LAN Remote WAN Slave AP LED mode Status Y oK Cancel Fig 85 Wireless LAN Controller gt Controller Configuration gt General The Wireless LAN Controller gt Controller Configuration gt Generalmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Region Select the country in which the wireless LAN controller is to be operated Possible values are all the countries configured on the device s wireless module 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Descr
233. e If required select your device s source interface Source IP Address Enter if required the source IP address and netmask of the Netmask data packets Possible values e Any default value e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network Enter the network address and the related net mask Source Port Range Enter if required a source port number or a range of source port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range Special Handling Timer Enter the time period during which the specified data packets are to be routed via the route that has been defined The default value is 900 seconds The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Frozen Parameters Specify whether when data packets are subsequently sent the two parameters Destination Address and Destination Port must have the same value as the first data packet i e whether 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description the subsequent data packets must be routed via the same Des tination Port to the same Destination Address The two parameters Destination Address and Destination Port are enabled by default If you leave the default setting Enabled for one or both para meters the value of the parameter concerned must be the same as in the f
234. e Information menu Field Value CPU Usage Displays the CPU usage as a percentage Memory Usage Displays the usage of the working memory in MByte in relation to the available total working memory in MByte The usage is also displayed in brackets as a percentage 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Value Temperature Devices from the bintec WI series are fitted with a temperature sensor This shows the current temperature and the maximum and minimum temperatures reached Active Sessions SIF Displays the total of all SIF TDRC and IP load balancing ses RTP etc sions Active IPSec Tunnels Displays the number of currently active IPSec tunnels in relation to the number of configured IPSec tunnels Fields in the Physical Interfaces menu Field VENTO Interface Connection The physical interfaces are listed here and their most important Information Link settings are shown The system also displays whether the inter face is connected or active Interface specifics for Ethernet interfaces e IP address e Netmask Interface specifics for serial ISDN interfaces e Configured e Not configured Interface specifics for xDSL interfaces e Downstream Upstream Line Speed Interface Specifics for WLAN Interfaces Access Point Mode e Operation Mode Access Point or Off e The channel used on this wireless module e Number of connected clients e Number of WDS links e Software version of the wireless card Ac
235. e Soc al OR Gad a RS aS a RS 368 17 2 1 GIOUPS 25 4 i a A Se ea et a Ee a ee i 368 173 A eae eee T bp GAL awe Gell ee a 369 173 1 Address List ace ii Slash ate ak ata ee eb a8 369 17 3 2 GIOUPS cies tae ga Sy hein es he tee ic Ny beige ah aed 370 17 4 SCIVICES 2 mua se belay Reb ed ts ea ee a Ba EO ee a a a 371 17 4 1 Service ISA 2 22 as CAE Ce Sed A 371 17 4 2 GOUDES e Se Se ty ect Rhett a te eR ee a e SS 373 Chapter 18 Local ServiCES oo sais ps esa adrenal Moat ae 375 18 1 DNS va ir Shak Bee howe ee a RR ks Baw era E 375 18 1 1 Global Settings si odas er oa ra A OA at ee a ea A 377 18 1 2 DNS S rvia o a a se BS a i 379 18 1 3 Static Hosts 2 SUIS UT Bo Bure Ae 381 18 1 4 Domain Forwarding 2 2 pin o 382 18 1 5 Caches s elisha eh ee 8S a ae ee a ee ei 384 18 1 6 Statistics maa u ace a Boe wok ah ies Je a Bae is Se 384 viii bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 2 18 2 1 18 3 18 3 1 18 3 2 18 4 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 4 3 18 4 4 18 5 18 5 1 18 5 2 18 5 3 18 6 18 6 1 18 6 2 18 6 3 18 6 4 18 7 18 7 1 18 7 2 18 8 18 8 1 18 8 2 Chapter 19 19 1 19 1 1 19 1 2 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN HIRD P Stas a a o fe tad E E E Ay oe ds 386 HIPS Sewers 25 tele S ita as Se ge ees ee Rot oe an 386 DynDNS Client a a deh ee he ba ee e A es 387 DynDNS Update 00 a soa gk y e Goo Ge Ma ee eh g 387 DynDNS Provider 0 e eo oo 389 DHCP Serve
236. e Y oK Cancel Fig 44 System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces The System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfacesmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Interfaces menu Field Description Interface Description Displays the name of the interface Select whether you want to run the interface in Routing Mode or whether you want to assign the interface to an existing bro br1 etc or new bridge group New Bridge Group Mode Bridge Group Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description When selecting New Bridge Group a new bridge group is automatically created after you click the OK button Configuration Interface Select the interface via which the configuration is to be carried out Possible values e Select one default value Ex works setting The right con figuration interface must be selected from the other options e Ignore No interface is defined as configuration interface e lt Interface name gt Select the interface to be used for con figuration If this interface is in a bridge group it is assigned the group s IP address when it is taken out of the group 7 3 1 1 Add Add Choose the New button to edit the mode of PPP interfaces Interfaces Interface Selectone Y oK Cancel Fig 45 System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces gt Add The System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfac
237. e a 14 3 2 1 Setting Up andconnecting 2 o eee 14 3 2 2 Gornectorg s 3 a ey ek BR a Ba ew 17 3 2 3 Antenna connectors 2 1 o 18 3 2 4 EEDS A fn Beate a th a tee coats lay O E te ey Gris 18 3 2 5 Scope of supply 2 a 19 3 2 6 General Product Features 2 oa a a a ee ee 19 3 2 7 Resets 668 om roe paok Re RE be R pa Ok ee Pe He 21 3 3 bintec WI1040n and WI2040n 2 2 le 22 3 3 1 Setting Up and connecting 2 2 ee ee 22 3 3 2 Connectors s ocio Re ew Ee 25 3 3 3 Antenna connectors 2 o 26 3 3 4 LEDS Ae tos ec n ae eee A ee ee hn ee et E A 26 3 3 5 Scope of supply 2 2 a 28 3 3 6 General Product Features 2 2 a a a 29 3 3 7 Resets sg be eh PER ROR eR a R t op p aube G 31 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN i 3 4 bintec WI1065n and WI2065n 33 3 4 1 Setting Up andconnecting 2 o 33 3 4 2 CONNECTS a iss sn Sok ke gee a dad eet E e As a 36 3 4 3 Antenna connectors 2 6 ee ee ee 37 3 4 4 LEDS 2 0 a PaO a Bae Eo Fone bee 2 38 3 4 5 Scope of Supply tai waa Geis Boe BAe wee ee Gee a 39 3 4 6 General Product Features 2 a a a a a ee 40 3 4 7 Resets is hte bh AS aa eh ee AA AA A Ae ae A 42 3 5 ClO ANINGs een ie eee A ee Sete at A a te ae Ge ae 43 3 6 PIR ASSIGNMONtS conos a Bh ate ee a E T 43 3 6 1 Ethernet interface 2 2 ee 43 3 6 2 Serial interface o am Gyan GR Ge a a She HR a 45 3 6 3 Socket forpow
238. e device 1 Set up a serial connection to your device Reboot your device and monitor the boot sequence Start the BOOTmonitor and choose the 4 Delete Configuration and fol low the instructions or 2 Set up a serial connection to your device First carry out the reset procedure de scribed and enter erase bootconfigas Login at the login prompt in the command line Leave the password empty and press the Return key The device runs through the boot sequence again You can now configure your device again as described from Basic configuration on page 48 Note If you delete the boot configuration using the GUI all passwords will also be reset and the current boot configuration deleted The next time the device will boot with the standard ex works settings 3 3 bintec WI1040n and WI2040n 3 3 1 Setting up and connecting Note All you need for this are the cables and antennas supplied with the equipment Note For the bintec WIx040n series devices a screw terminal bar is included as standard for power supply The industrial access point bintec WI1040n is equipped with a single radio module and three external antennas bintec WI2040n is equipped with two radio modules and four ex ternal antennas Devices of the industrial WLAN series with 802 11n support are fitted with a unit that heats the radio module to operating temperature when the temperature falls below 10 degrees Celsius Once this temperature has been reached the
239. e name of the WDS link Remote MAC Shows the MAC address of the WDS link partner Uptime Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for which the WDS link in question is active Field Description Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Signal dBm RSSI1 Shows the received signal strength in dBm RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Shows the received noise strength in dBm Data Rate mbps Shows the current clock rate of data received on this WDS link in Mbps If required the Test link can be used to launch a link test The test is only available for Teldat devices and only if the WDS link is active The link test provides all the data necessary for checking the quality of the WDS link The link test also helps you to align the antennas This option is only displayed if the link state is Enabled WDS Link Details You use the A icon to open an overview of further details for the WDS links The values for wireless mode 802 11n are listed separately bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply ADS Description Remote MAC Up Time Tx Packets Rx Packets Signal dBm RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 Noise dBm Data Rate mbps wds1 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Od 20h 25m50s 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 Rate Tx Packets Rx Packets 802 11 atbig 54 0 0 48 0 0 36 0 0 24 0 0 18 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 9 0 0 6 0 0 5
240. e not O this can different consequences for other routers Hence avoid using this func tion if exact control of the behaviour of the static RP is not re quired 14 4 3 PIM Options PIM Interfaces PIM Rendezvous Points PIM Options Basic Settings PIM Status Enabled Keepalive Period 210 Seconds Register Suppression Timer 60 Seconds oK Cancel Fig 133 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Options 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH The Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description PIM Status Keepalive Period Register Suppression Timer Select whether PIM should be activated The function is activ ated by selecting Enable The function is disabled by default Enter the interval in seconds within which a KeepAlive message must be sent Possible values 0 to 65535 The default value is 210 Enter the time in seconds after which a PIM Designated Router DR should no longer send any register encapsulated data to the Rendezvouz Point RP once the Register Stop Message has been received This object is used to employ timers at the DR as well as at the RP This timespan is named Re gister_Suppression_Time in the PIM SM specification Possible values 0 to 65535 The default value is 60 Teldat GmbH 15 WAN Chapter 15 WAN This menu offers various options for configuring accesses or connections from your LAN to the WAN Yo
241. e static short hold setting determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the short hold The default value is 300 Example 10 for FTP transmission 20 for LAN to LAN transmis sion 90 for Internet connections Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP address or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values Get IP Address default value Your device is dynamically assigned an IP address e Static You enter a static IP address Default Route Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled 15 WAN Teldat GmbH Field Description The function is enabled by default Create NAT Policy Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be ac tivated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Local IP Address Only if IP Address Mode Static Enter the static IP address of the connection partner Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode Static Define other routing entries for this connection partner Add new entries with Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your d
242. e subscriber If you want to change an entered direct call number you can simply enter the new direct call number without having to delete the old direct call number The old number is auto Teldat GmbH Glossary matically overwritten when the new configuration is transferred to the PBX Direct dial in Performance feature of larger PBXs at the point to point connection The extensions can be called directly from outside Direct dialling range See Extension numbers range DISA Direct Inward System Access Display and output In the configuration it is possible to define storage of data records of connection data for specific terminals or all terminals In the ex works setting all in coming external connections and all external calls you make are stored Display of caller s A suitable telephone is a prerequisite for this feature Transmission number of the telephone number must be permitted by the caller DLCI In a Frame Relay network a DLCI uniquely describes a virtual con nection Note that a DLCI is only relevant for the local end of the point to point connection DMZ Demilitarised Zone DNS Domain Name System Do not disturb Station guarding DOI Domain of Interpretation Domain A domain refers to a logical group of devices in a network On the Internet this is part of a naming hierarchy e g bintec de Door intercom Door intercom device It can be connected to various PBXs A tele phone can be used to take an intercom
243. e sure your device selects the first al ternative subject name by default Make sure you and your peer both use the same name i e that your local ID and the peer ID your partner configures for you are identical Alive Check During communication between two IPSec peers one of the peers may become unavail able e g due to routing problems or a reboot However this can only be detected when the end of the lifetime of the security connection is reached Up until this point the data packets are lost These are various methods of performing an alive check to prevent this happening In the Alive Check field you can specify whether a method should be used to check the availability of a peer Two methods are available Heartbeats and Dead Peer Detection Teldat GmbH 16 VPN The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Alive Check Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the method to be used to check the functionality of the IPSec connection In addition to the default method Dead Peer Detection DPD the proprietary Heartbeat method is implemented This sends and receives signals every 5 seconds depending on the config uration If these signals are not received after 20 seconds the SA is discarded as invalid Possible values e Autodetect default value Your device detects and uses the mode supported by the remote terminal e Inactive Your dev
244. eak due to its small effective length of 56 bits AES Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of security against attacks and general speed The partner s AES key length is used here If this has also selected the parameter AES a key length of 128 bits is used AES 128 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 128 bits AES 192 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 192 bits AES 256 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 256 bits Hash algorithms Authentication e mD5 default value MD5 Message Digest 5 is an older hash algorithm It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e SHA1 SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm 1 is a hash algorithm developed by NSA United States National Security Associ ation It is rated as secure but is slower than MDS It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e RipeMD 160 RipeMD 160 is a 160 bit hash algorithm It is used as a secure replacement for MD5 and RipeMD e Tiger1 92 Tiger 192 i
245. ec WI2040n are arranged as follows Failure Status WLAN 1 WLAN 2 WLAN 3 Eth 1 Eth 2 SFP Fig 15 LEDs of bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n In operation mode the LEDs display the following status information for your device LED status display bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n LED Failure red Status green WLAN 1 2 2x green WLAN 8 without function Status on flashes off off on static on flashing on flashing slowly on static on flickering Information After power up and during booting or if an error occurs During the heating phase If the device is at the login prompt The power supply is not connected If other LEDs are on also Error Error Ready Free At least one client is registered At least one client is registered and there is data traffic LED Status Information on flashing fast BLD Broken Link Detection active on flashing fast 5 GHz scan active off No cable or no Ethernet link ETH 1 2 2x green on Cable plugged in and link on flickering Cable plugged in and link with data traffic SFP green off No data traffic on Data traffic via the SFP interface on flickering Cable plugged in and data traffic 3 3 5 Scope of supply Your device is supplied with the following parts Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation bintec WI1040n Companion Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP pyp Quick Install Guide printed Serial
246. ec tunnel This can be the same IP address as the address configured on your router as the LAN IP address Metric Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Client and Default Route Enabled Select the priority of the route The lower the value the higher the priority of the route Value range from 0 to 15 The default value is 7 Route Entries Only for IP Address Assignment Staticor IKE Config Mode Client Define routing entries for this connection partner e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or LAN e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route possible values 0 15 The default value is 7 Fields in the menu Additional Traffic Filter Field Description Additional Traffic Filter Only for Internet Key Exchange I KEv1 Use Add to create a new filter Additional data traffic filters Teldat Gateways support two different methods for establishing IPSec connections 16 VPN Teldat GmbH e a method based on policies and a method based on routing The policy based method can only be configured using the Setup tool With the GUI you use the routing based method The latter is also available using the Setup tool The policy based method uses data traffic filters to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs This enables the filtering of the IP packets to be very fine grained down to protocol and port level The r
247. ect whether you want to use WPA with TKIP encryption or WPA 2 with AES encryption or both Possible values WPA and WPA 2 default value WPA and WPA 2 can be used e WPA Only WPA is used e WPA 2 Only WPA2 is used WPA Cipher Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Enterprise and for WPA Mode wPAand WPA and WPA 2 Select the type of encryption you want to apply to WPA Possible values e TKIP default value TKIP is used e AES AES is used WPA2 Cipher Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Enterprise and for WPA Mode WPA 2and WPA and WPA 2 Select the type of encryption you want to apply to WPA2 Possible values Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description e AES default value AES is used e TKIP TKIP is used Preshared Key Only for Security Mode WPA PSK Enter the WPA password Enter an ASCII string with 8 63 characters Note Change the default Preshared Key If the key has not been changed your device will not be protected against unau thorised access Radius Server You can control access to a wireless network via a RADIUS server With Add you can create new entries Enter the IP address and the password of the RADIUS server EAP Preauthentifica Only for Security Mode wPA Enterprise ee Select whether the EAP preauthentification function is to be ac tivated This function tells your device that WLAN clients which are already connected to another access po
248. ected exclusively on the basis of the criteria listed above i e the state of the connection is not considered except for Services TCP SIF The SIF sorts out all packets that are not explicitly or implicitly allowed The result can be a deny in which case no error message is sent to the sender of the rejected packet or a reject where the sender is informed of the packet rejection The incoming packets are processed as follows e The SIF first checks if an incoming packet can be assigned to an existing connection If so it is forwarded If the packet cannot be assigned to an existing connection a check is made to see if a suitable connection is expected e g as affiliated connection of an exist ing connection If so the packet is also accepted e If the packet cannot be assigned to any existing or expected connection the SIF filter rules are applied If a deny rule matches the packet the packet is rejected without send ing an error message to the sender of the packet if a reject rule matches the packet is rejected and an ICMP Host Unreachable message sent to the sender of the packet The packet is only forwarded if an accept rule matches e All packets without matching rules are rejected without sending an error message to the sender when all the existing rules have been checked default behaviour 17 1 Policies 17 1 1 Filter Rules The default behaviour with Action Access consists of two implicit filter rules If
249. ecurity Mode Inactive v Client load balancing Max number of clients hard limit laz Max number of clients soft limit las Client Band select Disabled optimized for fast roaming MAC Filter Access Control DEnabled Advanced Settings Beacon Period 100 ms DTIM Period A OK C Cancel __ Fig 72 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Wireless Networks VSS gt gt New The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Wireless Networks VSS gt g gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Service Set Parameters Field Description Network Name SSID Enter the name of the wireless network SSID Enter an ASCII string with a maximum of 32 characters Also select whether the Network Name SSID is to be trans mitted The network name is displayed by selecting Visible It is visible by default Intra cell Repeating Select whether communication between the WLAN clients is to be permitted within a radio cell The function is activated by selecting Enabled bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description The function is enabled by default ARP Processing Select whether the ARP Processing function should be activ ated The ARP data traffic is reduced in the network by the fact that ARP broadcasts that have been converted to ARP unicasts are forwarded to IP addresses that are known internally Uni casts are quicker and clients with an enabled power save func tion a
250. ed Line LLC Local exchange Loudspeaker MAC Address Man in the Middle Attack MD5 MFC MIB Microphone mute Mixed mode MLPPP Modem MPDU bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Link Control Protocol Lightweight Directory Access Protocol The Lease Time is the time a computer keeps the IP address as signed to it without having to talk to the DHCP server Leased line Link Layer Control Switching node of a public local telephone network that supports the connection of end systems Function on telephones with an integrated loudspeaker You can press a button so that the people present in the room can also hear the telephone call Every device in the network is defined by a fixed hardware address MAC address The network card of a device defines this interna tionally unique address Encryption using public keys requires the public keys to be ex changed first During this exchange the unprotected keys can be in tercepted easily making a man in the middle attack possible The attacker can set a key at an early stage so that a key known to the man in the middle is used instead of the intended key from the real communication partner See HMAC MD5 Multifrequency code dialling method Management Information Base Switch for turning off the microphone The subscriber on the tele phone cannot hear the discussions in the room The access point accepts WPA and WPA2 Multilink PPP Modulator Demodulator MAC P
251. ed SNMP Version 2 e v3 SNMP Version 3 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field VENTO By default v1 v2c and v3 are enabled If no option is selected the function is deactivated SNMP Listen UDP Port Shows the UDP port 161 at which the device receives SNMP requests The value cannot be changed Tip If your SNMP Manager supports SNMPv3 you should if possible use this version as older versions transfer all data unencrypted 75 Remote Authentication This menu contains the settings for user authentication 7 5 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service is a service that enables authentica tion and configuration information to be exchanged between your device and a RADIUS server The RADIUS server administrates a database with information about user authen tication and configuration and for statistical recording of connection data RADIUS can be used for e Authentication e Accounting e Exchange of configuration data For an incoming connection your device sends a request with user name and password to the RADIUS server which then searches its database If the user is found and can be au thenticated the RADIUS server sends corresponding confirmation to your device This con firmation also contains parameters called RADIUS attributes which your device uses as WAN connection parameters If the RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message at the
252. ed by default MobIKE Only for peers with IKEv2 MobIKE With changing public IP addresses enables only these addresses to be updated in the SAs without having to renegoti ate the SAs themselves The function is enabled by default Note that MobIKE requires a current IPSec client e g an up to date Windows 7 or Windows 8 client or the most recent ver sion of the Teldat IPSec client Proxy ARP Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of the specific connection partner Possible values e Inactive default value Deactivates Proxy ARP for this IPSec peer e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the IPSec peer is Up active or Dormant dormant In the case of Dormant your device only responds to the ARP request the connection is not set up until someone actually wants to use the route e Up only Your device responds to an ARP request only if the status of the connection to the IPSec peer is Up active i e a connection already exists to the IPSec peer IPSec Callback Teldat devices support the DynDNS service to enable hosts without fixed IP addresses to obtain a secure connection over the Internet This service enables a peer to be identified using a host name that can be resolved by DNS You do not need to configure the IP ad dress of the peer The DynDNS service does not signal whether a peer is actually online and can
253. ed period the system attempts to contact the time server after 1 2 4 8 seconds and then every 10 seconds If certificates are used to encrypt data traffic in a VPN it is ex tremely important that the correct time is set on the device To ensure this is the case for Time Update Policy select the value Endless 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field Description Internal Time Server Select whether the internal timeserver is to be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled Time requests from a client will be answered with the current system time This is given as GMT without offset The function is disabled by default Time requests from a client are not answered 7 2 4 System Licences This chapter describes how to activate the functions of the software licences you have pur chased The following licence types exist e Licences already available in the device s ex works state e Free extra licences e Extra licences at additional cost The data sheet for your device tells you which licences are available in the device s ex works state and which can also be obtained free of charge or at additional cost You can access this data sheet at www teldat de Entering licence data You can obtain the licence data for extra licences via the online licensing pages in the sup port section at www teldat de Please follow the online licensing instructions Please also note the information on the licence card for lic
254. efault Security mode WPA PSK Preshared key supersecret Access Client mode If you run your device in Access Client mode you can set up the required client links To do this you need the following data IP configuration of the access client Access data Example value Your values Network Name SSID default Security mode WPA PSK Preshared key supersecret Bridge mode If you run your device in Bridge mode you can either configure connections to other bridges manually or use the bridge link autoconfiguration function For the manual configur 4 Basic configuration Teldat GmbH ation of a bridge link you need the following data Configuration of a bridge link Access data Example value Your values Preshared key bridgesecret MAC address of remote bridge 00 a0 9 5a 42 53 To use the bridge link autoconfiguration function proceed as described in the WLAN Auto matic Configuration of a Bridge Link Workshop for additional information also read the user s guide chapter Wireless LAN under WLAN gt Bridge Links gt New 4 3 2 Configuring a PC In order to reach your device via the network and to be able to carry out configuration the PC used for the configuration has to satisfy some prerequisites Make sure that the TCP IP protocol is installed on the PC e Select the suitable IP configuration for your configuration PC The PC via which you want to configure the IP address for your device must be in the same network as
255. efault value is 16384 12 5 Access Rules Accesses to data and functions are restricted with access lists which user gets to use which services and files You define filters for IP packets in order to allow or block access from or to the various hosts in connected networks This enables you to prevent undesired connections being set up via the gateway Access lists define the type of IP traffic the gateway is to accept or deny The access decision is based on information contained in the IP packets e g 12 Networking Teldat GmbH e source and or destination IP address e packet protocol e source and or destination port port ranges are supported Access lists are an effective means if for example sites with LANs interconnected over a Teldat gateway wish to deny all incoming FTP requests or only allow Telnet sessions between certain hosts Access filters in the gateway are based on the combination of filters and actions for filter rules rules and the linking of these rules to form rule chains They act on the incoming data packets to allow or deny access to the gateway for certain data A filter describes a certain part of the IP data traffic based on the source and or destination IP address netmask protocol and source and or destination port You use the rules that you set up in the access lists to tell the gateway what to do with the filtered data packets i e whether it should allow or deny them You can also define seve
256. efault value is 30 Triggered Hello Inter val Define the maximum waiting time until a PIM Hello message is sent after a system boot or after a reboot of a neighbour The value 0 means that PIM Hello messages are always sent straight away Possible values 0 to 60 seconds The default value is 5 Hello Hold Time Define the value of the holdtime field in a PIM Hello message This indicates how long a PIM route is available As soon as the Hello Hold Time has expired and no other Hello messages have been received the PIM router will be classed as unavail able Possible values 0 to 65535 seconds The default value is 105 Teldat GmbH 14 Multicast Field Description Join Prune Interval Define the frequency at which the PIM Join Prune messages are sent on the interface The value 0 means that no periodic PIM Join Prune messages are sent on this interface Possible values 0 to 18000 seconds The default value is 60 Join Prune Hold Time Define the value entered in the holdtime field of a PIM Join Prune message This is the time for which a recipient must maintain the Join Prune state Possible values 0 to 65535 seconds The default value is 210 Propagation Delay Define the value entered in the Propagation Delay field This field is part of the LAN Prune Delay option in the PIM Hello messages which are sent on this interface Propagation Delay and Override Interval represent the so called LA
257. el connections Available values are all whole numbers from 1 to 65535 the default value is 1701 as specified in RFC 2661 UDP Source Port Se Select whether the LNS should only use the monitored port lection UDP Destination Port as the local source port for the L2TP connection The function is enabled with Fixed The function is disabled by default 16 3 GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE is a network protocol that encapsulates other proto cols and transports them in the form of IP tunnels to the specified recipients The specification of the GRE protocol is available in two versions e GRE V 1 for use in PPTP connections RFC 2637 configuration in the PPTPmenu e GRE V 0 RFC 2784 for general encapsulation using GRE In this menu you can configure a virtual interface for using GRE V O The data traffic routed over this interface is then encapsulated using GRE and sent to the specified recipient 16 3 1 GRE Tunnels A list of all configured GRE tunnels is displayed in the VPN gt GRE gt GRE Tunnels menu 16 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new GRE tunnels GRE Tunnels Basic Parameters Description EEES Local GRE IP Address AAA Remote GRE IP Address NAAA Default Route DEnabled Local IP Address o Remote IP Address Netmask Metric Route Entries LES Add MTU fisoo Use key Enabled C OK C Cancel Fig 151 VPN gt GRE gt GRE Tunnels gt New The VPN gt GRE gt GRE Tunnels
258. eld Description selected Ethernet port Local PPTP IP Address Assign the PPTP interface an IP address that is used as the source address The default value is 10 0 0 140 Remote PPTP IP Ad Enter the IP address of the PPTP partner dress The default value is 10 0 0 138 LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This makes it possible to switch to a backup connection more quickly in the event of line faults The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 15 1 3 IP Pools The IP Pools menu displays a list of all IP pools Your device can operate as a dynamic IP address server for PPP connections You can use this function by providing one or more pools of IP addresses These IP addresses can be assigned to dialling in connection partners for the duration of the connection Any host routes entered always have priority over IP addresses from the address pools This means that if an incoming call has been authenticated your device first checks whether a host route is entered in the routing table for this caller If not your device can al locate an IP address from an address pool if available If address pools have more than one IP address you cannot specify which connection partner receives which address The addresses are initially assigned in order If a new dial in takes place within an interval of one hour an
259. elect the mode in which your device is to attempt to transfer its IP address to the peer Possible values e Autodetect best mode Your device automatically de termines the most favourable mode It first tries all D channel modes before switching to the B channel Costs are incurred for using the B channel e Autodetect only D Channel Modes Your device auto matically determines the most favourable D channel mode The use of the B channel is excluded e Use specific D Channel Mode Your device tries to transfer the IP address in the mode set in the Mode field e Try specific D Channel Mode fall back to B Channel Your device tries to transfer the IP address in the mode set in the Mode field If this does not succeed the IP address is transferred in the B channel This incurs costs e Use only B Channel Mode Your device transfers the IP address in the B channel This incurs costs D Channel Mode Only for Transfer Mode Use specific D Channel Mode or Try specific D Channel Mode fall back to B Channel Select the D channel mode in which your device tries to transfer the IP address Possible values e LLC default value The IP address is transferred in the LLC information elements of the D channel e SUBADDR The IP address is transferred in the subaddress in formation elements of the D channel Field Description e LLC and SUBADDR The IP address is transferred in both the LLC and subaddress information
260. elements 16 1 2 Phase 1 Profiles A list of all configured tunnel profiles is displayed in the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles menu IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Internet Key Exchange Version 1 IKEv1 View feo per page Fitter in None v equal y Go Default Description Proposals Authentication Mode DH Group Lifetime Page 1 Create new IKEv1 Profile New Internet Key Exchange Version 2 IKEv2 View feo per page L Fitter in None v equal y Default Description Proposals Lifetime Page 1 Create new IKEv2 Profile C OK C Cancel Fig 141 VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles In the Default column you can mark the profile to be used as the default profile 16 1 2 1 New Choose the New at Create new IKEv1 Profile or Create new IKEv2 Profile button to create additional profiles bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN IPSec Peers Phase 1 IKE Parameters Description Proposals DH Group Lifetime Authentication Method Mode Local ID Type Local ID Value Alive Check Block Time NAT Traversal Teldat GmbH Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Ikea Encryption Authentication Enabled AES v MD5 hc AES MD5 v AES v MD5 v O 1768 Bit 2 1024 Bit O 5 1536 Bit haoo Seconds 0 kBytes Preshared Keys O Main Mode ID Protect
261. elete the boot configuration using the GUI all passwords will also be reset and the current boot configuration deleted The next time the device will boot with the standard ex works settings On devices of the bintec WIx040n series there is a further button the HW reset After pressing briefly once the device reboots Fig 17 Underside of the bintec WIx040n with the HW and Cfg reset buttons 3 4 bintec WI1065n and WI2065n 3 4 1 Setting up and connecting Note All you need for this are the cables and antennas supplied with the equipment Note For the bintec WIx065n series devices a screw terminal bar is included as standard for power supply bintec WI1065n is an outdoor access point with a single radio module and three external antennas bintec WI 2065n is equipped with two radio modules and four external anten nas Devices of the industrial WLAN series with 802 11n support are fitted with a unit that heats the radio module to operating temperature when the temperature falls below 10 degrees Celsius Once this temperature has been reached the device continues with the start up process During the heating phase the red Failure LED flashes bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN a i Ta EE E Wireless LAN Antenna OMA ntenna Power Supply at iat bintec RS230a Ethernet Alarm Relay connect via fibre optic Server Fig 18 Connection options bintec WIx065n When setting up and connect
262. ement and Action Rename configuration Select the file to be renamed For Command Type Configuration Management and Action Delete configuration Select the file to be deleted For Command Type Configuration Management and Action Copy configuration Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Select the file to be copied Configuration contains certificates keys Only for Command Type Configuration Management and Action Import configuration or Ex port configuration Select whether the certificates and keys contained in the config uration are to be imported or exported The function is disabled by default Encrypt configuration Only for Command Type Configuration Management and Action Import configuration or Ex port configuration Define whether the data of the selected Action are to be en crypted The function is disabled by default Reboot after execution Only if Command Type Configuration Management Select whether your device should restart after the intended Ac tion The function is disabled by default Version Check Only for Command Type Configuration Management and Action Import configuration Select whether when importing a configuration file to check on the server for the presence of a more current version of the already loaded configuration If not the file import is interrupted The function is disabled by default Destination IP Address Only if Command Type P
263. emote Authentication gt RADIUS menu 75 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to add RADIUS serv ers RADIUS TACACS Options Basic Parameters Authentication Type PPP Authentication Server IP Address M RADIUS Secret Jeoccccce Default User Password Jeeccceece Priority ov Entry active El Enabled Group Description Default Group 0 Advanced Settings Policy Authoritative v UDP Port fez Server Timeout IS Milliseconds Alive Check Enabled Retries A DEnabled RADIUS Dialout Reload Interval E j Seconds OK Cancel Fig 51 System Management gt Remote Authentication gt RADIUS gt New The System Management gt Remote Authentication gt RADIUS gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field VENTO Authentication Type Select what the RADIUS server is to be used for Possible values e PPP Authentication default value only for PPP connec tions The RADIUS server is used for controlling access to a network bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field VENTO e Accounting for PPP connections only The RADIUS server is used for recording statistical call data e Login Authentication The RADIUS server is used for controlling access to the SNMP shell of your device e IPSec Authentication The RADIUS server is used for sending configuration data for IPSec peers to y
264. en Enable this function if you want to define a limited and free area of websites intranet The function is not activated by default Walled Network Net mask Only if Walled Garden is enabled Enter the network address of the Walled Network and the cor responding Netmask of the intranet server For the address range resulting from Walled Network Net mask clients require no authentication Example Enter 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 if all IP addresses from 192 168 0 0 to 19 168 0 255 are free Enter 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 255 if only the IP address 192 168 0 1 is free Walled Garden URL Only if Walled Garden is enabled Enter the Walled Garden URL of the intranet server Freely ac cessible websites must be reachable over this address Terms amp Conditions Only if Walled Garden is enabled In the Terms amp Conditions input field enter the address of the general terms and conditions on the intranet server or public server e g htip www webserver de agb htm The page must lie within the address range of the walled garden network Additional freely ac cessible Domain Names Only if Walled Garden is enabled Add further URLs or IP addresses with Add The web pages can be accessed via these additional freely accessible ad dresses Language for login window Here you can choose the language for the start login page The following languages are supported English Deutsch Italiano Francais Espaf
265. ences at additional cost You will then re ceive an e mail containing the following data e Licence Key and e Licence Serial Number You enter this data in the System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New menu In the System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New menu a list of all registered licences is displayed Description Licence Type Licence Serial Number Status Possible values for Status Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Licence Meaning OK Subsystem is activated Not OK Subsystem is not activated Not supported You have entered a licence for a subsystem your device does not support In addition above the list is shown the System Licence ID required for online licensing Note To restore the standard licences for a device click the Default Licences button standard licences 7 2 4 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to enter more licences System Passwords Date and Time System Licences Basic Settings Licence Serial Number Licence Key oK Cancel Fig 43 System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New Activating extra licences You activate extra licences by adding the received licence information in the System Man agement gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New menu The menu System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New consists of the following fields
266. entication password RADIUS Server Group Only for Role Server ID Select the desired list in System Management gt Remote Au thentication gt RADIUS configured RADIUS group Users Only for Role Server and Mode Local If your gateway is configured as an XAuth server the clients can be authenticated via a locally configured user list Define the members of the user group of this XAUTH profile here by 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description entering the authentication name of the client Name and the authentication password Password Add new members with Add 16 1 5 IP Pools In the IP Pools menu a list of all IP pools for your configured IPSec connections is dis played If for an IPSec peer you have set IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Server you must define the IP pools here from which the IP addresses are assigned 16 1 5 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the 3 icon to edit exist ing entries IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Basic Parameters IP Pool Name IP Address Range Primary J DNS Server Secondary OK Cancel Fig 146 VPN gt IPSec IP Pools gt New Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary E
267. eout 300 Seconds IP Mode and Routes IP Address Mode Ostatic Get IP Address Default Route MEnabled Create NAT Policy El Enabled Advanced Settings Block after connection failure for 50 Seconds Maximum Number of Dialup Retries 5 Authentication PAP na DNS Negotiation El Enabled Prioritize TCP ACK Packets T DEnabled LCP Alive Check M Enabled l MTU El Automatic 4 OK cancel Fig 134 WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPPoE gt New The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPPoE gt New consists of the following fields bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 15 WAN Teldat GmbH Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a name to uniquely identify the PPPoE partner The first character in this field must not be a number No special charac ters or umlauts must be used PPPoE Mode Select whether you want to use a standard Internet connection over PPPoE Standard or your Internet access is to be set up over several interfaces Multilink If you choose Mul tilink you can connect several DSL connections from a pro vider over PPP as a static bundle in order to obtain more band width Each of these DSL connections should use a separate Ethernet connection for this At the moment many providers are still in the process of preparing the PPPoE Multilink function For PPPoE Multilink we recommend using your device s Eth
268. er net switch in Split Port mode and to use a separate Ethernet in terface e g en1 1 en1 2 for each PPPoE connection If you also want to use an external modem for PPPoE Multilink you must run your device s Ethernet switch in Split Port mode PPPoE Ethernet Inter Only for PPPoE Mode Standard face Select the Ethernet interface specified for a standard PPPoE connection If you want to use an external DSL modem select the Ethernet port to which the modem is connected When using the internal DSL modem select here the EthoA in terface configured in Physical Interfaces gt ATM gt Profiles gt New PPPoE Interfaces for Only for PPPoE Mode Multilink Multilink Select the interfaces you want to use for your Internet connec tion Click the Add button to create new entries User Name Enter the user name Password Enter the password VLAN Certain Internet service providers require a VLAN ID Activate this function to be able to enter a value under VLAN ID Teldat GmbH 15 WAN Field Description VLAN ID Only if VLAN s enabled Enter the VLAN ID that you received from your provider Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Only activate this option if you have Internet access with a flat rate charge Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle time in seconds for static short hold Th
269. ered in plain text If you press OK or call the menu again they are displayed as asterisks 7 2 3 Date and Time You need the system time for tasks such as correct timestamps for system messages ac counting or IPSec certificates PASS System Passwords Date and Time System Licences Basic Settings Time Zone Europe Berlin v Current Local Time Saturday 2000 Apr 29 05 35 41 Manual Time Settings D Month Year Set Date Y Hour Minute Set Time Automatic Time Settings Time Protocol ISDN Timeserver DEnabled First Timeserver SNTP v Second Timeserver SNTP v Third Timeserver SNTP v Time Update Interval h 440 Minute s Time Update Policy Normal Internal Time Server C Enabled C OK C Cancel Fig 42 System Management gt Global Settings gt Date and Time You have the following options for determining the system time local time ISDN Manual The system time is updated via ISDN i e the date and time are taken from the ISDN when the first outgoing call is made or is set manually on the device If the correct location of the device country city is set for the Time Zone switching from summer time to winter time and back is automatic This is independent of the exchange time or the ntp server time Summer time starts on the last Sunday in March by switching from 2 a m to 3 a m The calendar related or schedule related switches that are scheduled for the missing hour are then carried out Winte
270. eries are sent and responses are accepted Query Interval Enter the interval in seconds in which IGMP queries are to be sent Possible values are 0 to 600 The default value is 125 Maximum Response For the sending of queries enter the time interval in seconds bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH Field Description Time within which hosts must respond The hosts randomly select a time delay from this interval before sending the response This spreads the load in networks with several hosts improving per formance Possible values are 0 0 to 25 0 The default value is 10 0 Robustness Select the multiplier for controlling the timer values A higher value can e g compensate for packet loss in a network suscept ible to loss If the value is too high however the time between logging off and stopping of the data traffic can be increased leave latency Possible values are 2 to 8 The default value is 2 Last Member Query In Define the time after a query for which the router waits for an terval answer If you shorten the interval it will be more quickly detected that the last member has left a group so that no more packets for this group should be forwarded to this interface Possible values are 0 0 to 25 0 The default value is 1 0 IGMP State Limit Limit the number of reports queries per second for the selected interface Mode Specify whether the interface defined here only works
271. ermanently The function is activated by selecting Enabled Field VENTO The function is disabled by default If the function is active you can enter the following options e Reload Interval Enter the time period in seconds between update intervals The default entry here is 0 i e an automatic reload is not car ried out 7 5 2 TACACS TACACS permits access control for your device network access servers NAS and other network components via one or more central servers Like RADIUS TACACS is an AAA protocol and offers authentication authorisation and accounting services TACACS Accounting is currently not supported by Teldat devices The following TACACS functions are available on your device e Authentication for login shell e Command authorisation on the shell e g telnet show TACACS uses TCP port 49 and establishes a secure and encrypted connection A list of all entered TACACS servers is displayed in the System Management gt Remote Authentication gt TACACS menu 7 5 2 1 Edit or New Choose the i icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to add TACACS serv ers bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH Basic Parameters Authentication Type Server IP Address TACACS Secret Priority Entry active Policy TCP Port Timeout Block Time Encryption 7 System Management RADIUS TACACS Options eae oo se ov MEnabled Advanced Settings Non authoritative
272. ersupply 2 2 2 ee ee 45 3 7 Frequencies and channels 2 025844 46 3 8 Supportinformation 2 o o o 46 3 9 WEEE information 2 2 eo 47 Chapter 4 Basic configuration 0 o e 48 4 1 PresettingS s ss e ide ee E ia oi 48 4 1 1 Preconfigureddata o o 48 4 1 2 Software update 2 e 49 4 2 System requirements 2 2 o 50 4 3 Preparation ni 4 isa a a A AA aa 50 4 3 1 Gatheringidald o caoba a a ees 50 4 3 2 ConfiguringaPC aoi e sosa osob nyos e eo eo 52 4 4 IP config ration e susie a o E e ae ds 53 45 Modify system password 2 2 2 a a 56 4 6 Setting up a wireless network 2 a ee ee 56 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 4 7 Setting Up a bridge link 57 4 8 Software Update a oa oa oa o 59 Chapter 5 Access and configuration o a 60 5 1 ACCESSI OPMONS 0 e a Pa os a A Pa ee ae 60 5 1 1 Access M A LAN seon o a a RR AE AR AAA 60 5 1 2 Access via the Serial Interface a 63 5 2 LOGIN a b ia hy A bk eb et 65 5 2 1 User names and passwords in ex works state 2 65 5 2 2 Logging in for Configuration o 66 5 3 Configuration options a a 66 5 3 1 GUI for advanced users 2 1 ee 67 5 3 2 SNMP shell 2 2 o 77 5 4 BOO Monitor fos de a A de di a e a 77
273. erver request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service with TCP port 37 Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Third Timeserver Enter the third time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time server request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service with TCP port 37 e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Time Update Interval Enter the time interval in minutes at which the time is automatic ally updated The default value is 1440 Time Update Policy Enter the time period after which the system attempts to contact the time server again following a failed time update Possible values e Normal default value The system attempts to contact the time server after 1 2 4 8 and 16 minutes e Aggressive For ten minutes the system attempts to con tact the time server after 1 2 4 8 seconds and then every 10 seconds Endless For an unlimit
274. es gt Addmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Interfaces menu Field Description Interface Select the interface whose status should be changed Edit for devices the WIxxxxn and RS series For WLAN clients in bridge mode so called MAC Bridge you can also edit additional set tings via the Fay icon 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Interfaces Layer 2 5 Options Interface sta1 0 Wildcard Mode last v OK Cancel Fig 46 System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces gt Add You can realise bridging for devices behind access clients with the MAC Bridge function In wildcard mode you cannot define how Unicast non IP frames or non ARP frames are pro cessed To use the MAC bridge function you must carry out configuration steps in several menus 1 Select GUI menu Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings and click the icon to modi fy an entry 2 Select Operation Mode Access Client and save the settings with OK 3 Select the System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces menu The additional interface sta1 0 is displayed 4 For interface sta1 0 select Mode Bridge Group brO lt IPAddress gt and Con figuration Interface en 1 0 and save the settings with OK 5 Click the Save configuration button to save all of the configuration settings You can use the MAC Bridge The System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces gt
275. es are possible Add additional entries with the Add button Edit In the Local Services gt DHCP Server DHCP Configuration gt Advanced Settings menu you can edit an entry in the DHCP Options field if Option Vendor Group is selected Choose the Fr icon to edit an existing entry In popup menu you configure manufacture specif ic settings in the DHCP server for specific telephones Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Select vendor Your device does not currently use this parameter Here you can select for which manufacturer specific values 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description shall be transmitted for the DHCP server Possible values e Siemens default value e Other Provisioning Server Your device does not currently use this parameter code 3 Enter which manufacturer value shall be transmitted For the setting Select vendor Siemens the default value sdlp is displayed You can complete the IP address of the desired server 18 4 3 IP MAC Binding The Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP MAC Binding menu displays a list of all clients that received an IP address from your device via DHCP You can allocate an IP address from a defined IP address pool to specific MAC addresses You can do this by selecting the Static Binding option in the list to convert a list entry as a fixed binding or you manually create a fixed IP MAC binding by configuring this in the New sub menu Note
276. ess link to Teldat bridges an uninterrupted view must exist between the antennas at both ends This is called a line of sight abbreviated to LOS The term line of sight does not just mean a straight line of vision between the two anten nas but a kind of tunnel which must not be disturbed by obstacles This tunnel is called the 1st Fresnel zone The Fresnel zone has the shape of an ellipse rotated around its lon bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN gitudinal axis At least 60 of the 1st Fresnel zone must remain free of obstacles The ra dius or the small semi axis depends on the frequency used and the distance between the antennas e EF Distance between the Antennas m_a E Fresnel Zone Fig 80 1 Fresnel zone Example Radius of 1st Fresnel zone as a function of distance from transmit antenna for antenna separation of 5 km at 2 45 GHz Example 1 Distance from transmit an Radius of 1st Fresnel zone Radius at 60 of tenna km m 1st Fresnel zone m 0 250 5 4 4 2 0 500 7 4 5 7 0 750 8 8 6 8 1 000 9 9 7 7 1 250 10 7 8 3 1 500 11 3 8 8 1 750 11 8 9 1 2 000 12 1 9 4 2 250 12 3 9 5 2 500 12 4 9 6 2 750 12 3 9 5 3 000 12 1 9 4 3 250 11 8 9 1 3 500 11 3 8 8 3 750 10 7 8 3 4 000 9 9 7 7 4 250 8 8 6 8 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Distance from transmit an Radius of 1st Fresnel zone Radius at 60 of tenna km m 1st Fresnel zone m 4 500 7 4
277. ession Select whether compression is to be activated before data en cryption If data is compressed effectively this can result in higher performance and a lower volume of data to be trans ferred In the case of fast lines or data that cannot be com pressed you are advised against using this option as the per formance can be significantly affected by the increased effort during compression The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Alive Check Select whether and how IPSec heartbeats are used A Teldat IPSec heartbeat is implemented to determine whether or not a Security Association SA is still valid This function sends and receives signals every 5 seconds depending on the configuration If these signals are not received after 20 seconds the SA is discarded as invalid Possible values e Autodetect default value Automatic detection of whether the remote terminal is a Teldat device If it is Heartbeats Send Expect for a remote terminal with Teldat or In active for a remote terminal without Teldat is set e Inactive Your device sends and expects no heartbeat Set this option if you use devices from other manufacturers e Heartbeats Expect only Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer but does not send one itself e Send Your device expects no heartbeat from the peer but sends one itself e Heartbeats Send amp Expect Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer
278. et 2 Your device creates a token with a limited validity and saves it together with the cur rent IP address in the MIB entry belonging to peer B 3 Your device sends the initial ISDN call to peer B which transfers the IP address of peer A and the token as per the callback configuration 4 Peer B extracts the IP address of peer A and the token from the ISDN call and as signs them to peer A based on the calling party number configured the ISDN number used by peer A to send the initial call to peer B 5 The IPSec Daemon at peer B s device can use the transferred IP address to initiate phase 1 negotiation with peer A Here the token is returned to peer A in part of the payload in IKE negotiation 6 Peer A is now able to compare the token returned by peer B with the entries in the MIB and so identify the peer without knowing its IP address As peer A and peer B can now mutually identify each other negotiations can also be con Teldat GmbH M 16 VPN ducted in the ID Protect mode using preshared keys Note In some countries e g Switzerland the call in the D channel can also incur costs An incorrect configuration at the called side can mean that the called side opens the B channel the calling side incurs costs The following options are only available on devices with an ISDN connection Fields in the menu IPSec Callback Field Description Mode Incoming Phone Num ber Outgoing Phone Num ber Select
279. et cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed Self adhesive feet R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed Wall or ceiling mounting User s Guide on DVD Safety notices bintec Companion W2003n ext Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed 4 external standard RSMA an R amp TTE Compliance Informa tennas tion printed Self adhesive feet User s Guide on DVD Wall or ceiling mounting Safety notices bintec W2004n Companion Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed Self adhesive feet Wall or ceiling mounting R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed User s Guide on DVD 3 Installation Teldat GmbH Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation Safety notices 3 1 5 General Product Features The general product features cover performance features and the technical prerequisites for installation and operation of your device The features are summarised in the following table General Product Features Property Value Dimensions and weights Equipment dimensions without cable W x Lx H ca 162 x 145 x 45 mm Weight approx 1 000 g with WLAN modules LEDs bintec W1003n 3 1x Power 1x WLAN 1x Ethernet bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n 4 1x Power 2x WLAN 2x Ethernet Power consumption of the device max 12 W Voltage supply 9 V 1 3 A The power adapter with the
280. et up a connection has failed The default value is 300 Select the authentication protocol for this L2TP partner Possible values PAP CHAP MS CHAP default value Primarily run CHAP on denial the authentication protocol required by the PPTP part ner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e PAP Only run PAP PPP Password Authentication Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authentic ation Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred en crypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case se lect this option If necessary select the type of encryption that should be used for data traffic to the L2TP partner This is only possible if STAC or MS STAC compression is not activated for the connection If Encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it oth erwise a connection cannot be set up Possible values e None MPP encryption is not used Enabled default value MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used to RFC 3078 e Windows compatible MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used as compatible with Microsoft and Cisco Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Compression If necessary select the type of encryption that should be u
281. eted As soon as the enrolment is completed and the certificate has been downloaded from the CA server it is automatically saved in the device configuration The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 7 6 1 3 Import Choose the Import button to import certificates 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Certificate List CRLs Certificate Servers Import External Filename Browse Local Certificate Description File Encoding Auto v Password OK Cancel Fig 56 System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Import The menu System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Import consists of the following fields Fields in the Import menu Field Description External Filename Enter the file path and name of the certificate to be imported or use Browse to select it from the file browser Local Certificate De Enter a unique description for the certificate scription File Encoding Select the type of coding so that your device can decode the certificate Possible values e Auto default value Activates automatic code recognition If downloading the certificate in auto mode fails try with a cer tain type of encoding e Base64 e Binary Password You may need a password to obtain certificates for your keys Enter the password here 7 6 2 CRLs In the System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs menu a list of all CRLs Certification Revocation L
282. etwork operator you can try speech audio 3k1Hz or telephony 3k1Hz The same applies for faxing Here too there is the collective term Fax plus a couple of more specific cases From a purely technical point of view the services are bits in a data word evaluated by means of a mask If you include several bits in the mask all these services are approved for activa tion while in the case of just one bit it is just the one selected ser vice Menu driven tool for the configuration of your gateway The Setup Tool can be used as soon as the gateway has been accessed serial ISDN Login LAN See HMAC SHA Single Pair High Speed Is the defined amount of time after which a connection is cleared if no more data is transmitted Short hold can be set to static fixed amount of time or dynamic according to charging information Simultaneous signalling All assigned terminals are called simultan eously If a telephone is busy call waiting can be used This connection can only be used for an ISDN telephone only T Concept PX722 system telephones with a simplex function If you call an ISDN telephone with a simplex function this automatically Glossary SIP SMS SMS receipt SMS server tele phone numbers SNMP SNMP shell So bus Teldat GmbH activates the Loudspeaker function so that a conversation can take place immediately Please see the information on the telephone user s guide on the simplex operation functi
283. evice that is connected over IP Only for Wildcard Mode static first Choose whether or not the Wildcard MAC Address are used in addition as WLAN MAC address to establish the connection to the access point The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 74 Administrative Access In this menu you can configure the administrative access to the device 7 4 1 Access In the System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access menu a list of all IP capable interfaces is displayed 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Access SSH SNMP O Administrative access is currently unrestricted The displayed configuration is not yet activated Interface Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS Ping SNMP ISDN Login eni 0 Y v v v v v eni 4 v v v v v v bri 0 v Advanced Settings Restore Default Settings iil Add OK Cancel Fig 47 System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access For an Ethernet interface you can select the access parameters Telnet SSH HTTP HT TPS Ping SNMP and for the ISDN interfaces ISDN Login Only for hybird devices You can also authorise your device for maintenance work from Teldat s Customer Service department You do this you enable either Service Login ISDN Web Access or Service Call Ticket SSH Web Access depending on the service you require and select the OK button Follow the instructions given by Telekom s C
284. evice to a suitable DNS server This also includes specific forwarding of defined domains Forwarded Domains DNS cache for saving the positive and negative results of DNS requests e Static entries static hosts to manually define or prevent assignments of IP addresses to names DNS monitoring statistics to provide an overview of DNS requests on your device Name server Under Local Services gt DNS gt Global Settings gt Basic Parameters you enter the IP ad dresses of name servers that are queried if your device cannot answer requests itself or by forwarding entries Global name servers and name servers that are attached to an interface can both be entered Your device can also receive the global name servers dynamically via PPP or DHCP and transfer them dynamically if necessary 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Strategy for name resolution on your device A DNS request is handled by your device as follows 1 2 4 6 If possible the request is answered directly from the static or dynamic cache with IP address or negative response Otherwise if a suitable forwarding entry exists the relevant DNS server is asked de pending on the configuration of the Internet or dialin connections if necessary by set ting up a WAN connection at extra cost If the DNS server can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dynamic entry created in the cache Otherwise if name servers have been entered t
285. evice uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The de fault value is 60 Maximum Number of Enter the number of unsuccessful attempts to setup a connec Dialup Retries tion before the interface is blocked Possible values are 0 to 100 The default value is 5 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this connection partner Select the authentication specified by your provider Teldat GmbH 15 WAN Field Description Possible values e PAP default value Only run PAP PPP Password Authentic ation Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authentic ation Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred en crypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol PAP CHAP MS CHAP Primarily run CHAP on denial then the authentication protocol required by the connection partner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use
286. ew subsystems with Add Message Timeout Enter how long the router must wait after a relevant event be fore it is forced to send the alert mail Possible values are 0 to 86400 The value 0 disables the timeout The default value is 60 Number of Messages Enter the number of syslog messages that must be reached be fore an E mail can be sent for this case If timeout is configured the mail is sent when this expires even if the number of mes sages has not been reached Possible values are 0 to 99 the default value is 1 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH 20 3 2 Alert Settings Alert Recipient Alert Settings Basic Parameters Alert Service Enabled Maximum E mails per Minute se Y E mail Parameters Sender E mail Address L r s C C CY SMTP Server SMTP Authentication Onone OESMTP SMTP after POP OK Cancel Fig 196 External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Settings The menu External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Alert Service Select whether the alert service is to be enabled for the inter face The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Maximum E mails per Minute Limit the number of outgoing mails per minute Possible values are 1 to 15 the default value is 6 Fields in the E mail Parameters menu Field Description E mail Addre
287. expansion channel Number of Spatial Only for Wireless Mode 802 11b g n 802 11g9 n Streams 802 11n 802 11la n Select how many traffic flows are to be used in parallel Possible values e 3 Three traffic flows are used e 2 Two traffic flows are used e 1 One traffic flow is used Max Link Distance Only for Operation Mode Bridge Enter the maximum link range Ifthe Use default option is enabled the automatically gener ated range is used If this option is not enabled enter the desired maximum value in the m field Option Use default is active by default Transmit Power Select the maximum value for the radiated antenna power The actually radiated antenna power may be lower than the maxim um value set depending on the data rate transmitted The max imum value for Transmit Power is country dependent Possible values 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description e Max default value The maximum antenna power is used Saba e 8 dBm e 11 dBm e 14 dBm e 16 dBm Fields in the menu Performance Settings Field Description Wireless Mode Select the wireless technology that the access point is to use Only for Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Possible values e 802 11g The device operates only in accordance with 802 119 802 11b clients have no access e 802 11b Your device operates only in accordance with 802 11b and forces all clients to adapt to it e 802 11 mixed b g Your device adapts
288. f the timer is deactivated it has the value 0 The value FFFFFFFF h stands for infinite In the PIM DM specification this timer is named S G Prune Timer Assert State Displays the S G Assert State for this interface This corres ponds to the status of the Per Interface S G Assert State Ma chine in der PIM SM Specification See I D ietf pim sm v2 new section 4 6 1 Assert Winner IP Ad Indicates the address of Assert Winner if pimStarGlAssertState dress runs iAmAssertLoser InetAddressType is defined through the object pimSGlAssertWinnerAddressType Values in the S G RPT States list 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast IP address InetAddressType is defined dress through the object pimSGAddressType Source IP Address Displays the source IP address InetAddressType is defined through the object pimStarGAddress Type Interface Displays the name of the interface Uptime Indicates the timespan since the entry was generated by the local router Join Prune State Indicates whether the local router should sever the source of the RP tree This corresponds in the PIM SM specification to the status of the Upstream S G rpt State Machine for Triggered Messages Expiry Timer Displays the remaining time until the S G rpt Prune State be comes invalid for this interface In the PIM SM specification this timer is named S G rpt Prune Expiry Timer If the timer is de ac
289. face The option is deactivated by default e Bandwidth Enter the maximum available bandwidth in Bit s for the service specified under Service 0 is entered by de fault e Bounded Select whether the bandwidth defined in Band width can be exceeded in the longer term By activating this field you specify that it cannot be exceeded If the option is deactivated the bandwidth can be exceeded and the excess data rate is handled in accordance with the priority defined in the firewall policy The option is deactivated by default 17 1 3 Options In this menu you can disable or enable the firewall and can log its activities In addition you can define after how many seconds of inactivity a session shall be ended Filter Rules QoS Options Global Firewall Options Firewall Status i Enabled Logged Actions Al v Full Filtering v Enable Session Timer UDP Inactivity jiso Seconds TCP Inactivity 3500 Seconds PPTP Inactivity s6400 seconds Other Inactivity Bo Seconds OK Cancel Fig 155 Firewall gt Policies gt Options The menu Firewall gt Policies gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Firewall Options menu Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall Field Description Firewall Status Enable or disable the firewall function The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Logged Actions Select the firewall syslog level The messages are output together with
290. face Node Name IP Address Mask MAC Address Last Write Result el brO wi3040 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 00 01 cd 06 1 a b4 No error pl brO w1002n 10 0 0 233 255 255 255 0 00 01 cd De 8f 04 No error pl C Discover Fig 181 Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Device Discovery If access points were discovered in the network they are displayed in the list You use the button to go to the configuration menu for the access point Device Discovery Options Basic Parameters Interface bro MAC Address 00 01 cd 06 1a b4 Node Name Wio IP Address 192 168 0 252 Netmask 255 255 2550 Gateway pooo Authentication Password 222 Last Write Result No error 4 oK C Cancel _ Fig 182 Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Device Discovery gt This Local Services gt Teldat Discovery gt Device Discovery gt menu includes the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Interface The value of this field can only be read bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description MAC Address Node Name IP Address Netmask Gateway Authentication Pass word Last Write Result Shows the interface of your device on which discovery is carried out The value of this field can only be read Shows the MAC address of the discovered access point You can change the name of the discovered access point You can change the IP address
291. faces according to the percentage assignment of sessions to the interfaces The number of sessions is decisive e Load dependent Bandwidth A newly added session is assigned to one of the group interfaces according to the share of the total data rate handled by the interfaces The current data rate based on the data traffic is decisive in both the send and receive direction Only for Distribution Policy Load dependent Bandwidth Choose the direction in which the current data rate is to be con sidered Options e Download Only the data rate in the receive direction is con sidered 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description e Upload Only the data rate in the send direction is con sidered By default the Down1oad and Upload options are disabled Distribution Mode Select the state the interfaces in the group may have if they are to be included in load balancing Possible values e Always default value Also includes idle interfaces e Only use active interfaces Only interfaces in the up state are included In the Interface area you add interfaces that match the current group context and config ure these You can also delete interfaces Use Add to create more entries Load Balancing Groups Special Session Handling Group Description Distribution Polic Session Round Robin y Distributiot Basic Parameters Group Description Ad Distribution Policy Session Round Robin A Interface Select
292. fault value The Aggressive Mode is neces sary if one of the peers does not have a static IP address and preshared keys are used for authentication It requires only three messages to configure a secure channel e Main Mode ID Protect This mode also designated Main Mode requires six messages for a Diffie Hellman key calculation and thus for configuring a secure channel over which the IPSec SAs can be negotiated A condition is that both peers have static IP addresses if preshared keys are used for authentication Also define whether the selected mode is used exclusively 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description Strict or the peer can also propose another mode Local ID Type Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the local ID type Possible values e Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN e E mail Address e IPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name Local ID Value Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Enter the ID of your device For Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Signa ture of RSA Encryption the Use Subject Name from certi ficate option is displayed When you enable the Use Subject Name from certificate op tion the first alternative subject name indicated in the certificate is used or if none is specified the subject name of the certific ate is used Note If you use certificates for authentication and your certific ate contains alternative subject names see Certificates on page 116 you must mak
293. fer Click the Clear button to clear the send buffer 8 3 Relay Devices of the WI series are fitted with a relay The relay is open when at rest i e unex cited fault You can choose whether the relay is manually controlled or used as an alarm relay coupled with the red error LED When manually controlled the state of the relay is set during booting when the configuration is loaded 8 3 1 Relay Configuration In this menu you can configure the Port Mode mode Relay Configuration Basic Parameters Port Mode Inaktive O Active O Alarm Relay OK Cancel Fig 62 Physical Interfaces gt Relay gt Relay Configuration The Physical Interfaces gt Relay gt Relay Configurationmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Port Mode Possible values e Inactive default value The relay is manually set to al ways open e Active The relay is manually set to always closed e Alarm Relay The relay is automatically coupled with the red error LED bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 9 LAN Chapter 9 LAN In this menu you configure the addresses in your LAN and can structure your local network using VLANs 9 1 IP Configuration In this menu you can edit the IP configuration of the LAN and Ethernet interfaces of your device 9 1 1 Interfaces The existing IP interfaces are listed in the LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces menu You can edit the IP c
294. fier 143 VLAN Members 143 VLAN ID 138 213 298 VLAN Name 143 VLANs 143 VPN 310 VSS 466 VSS Description 476 w Walled Garden 429 Walled Garden URL 429 Walled Network Netmask 429 WAN 295 WDS 469 WDS Description 172 WDS Description 469 471 WDS Links 171 Weight 256 WEP Key 1 172 WEP Key2 172 WEP Key3 172 WEP Key 4 172 WEP Key 1 4 166 175 209 Wildcard 389 Wildcard Mode 98 Wildcard MAC Address 98 WINS Server 377 Wireless Mode 154 203 Wireless LAN 146 Wireless Networks VSS 162 207 215 WLAN 147 464 WLANx 464 WLC SSID 405 WMM 165 208 WPA Cipher 166 175 209 WPA Mode 166 175 209 WPA2 Cipher 166 175 209 Write certificate in configuration 405 Xx XAUTH Profile 320 XAUTH Profiles 340 Z Zero Cookie Size 344 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN
295. figured in the system Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Fields in the IP address to use for DNS WINS server assignment menu Field Description As DHCP Server Select which name server addresses are sent to the DHCP cli ent if your device is used as DHCP server Possible values e None No name server address is sent e Own IP Address default value The address of your device is transferred as the name server address e DNS Setting The addresses of the global name servers entered on your device are sent As IPCP Server Select which name server addresses are to be transmitted by your device in the event of dynamic server name negotiation if your device is used as the IPCP server for PPP connections Possible values e None No name server address is sent e Own IP Address The address of your device is transferred as the name server address e DNS Setting default value The addresses of the global name servers entered on your device are sent 18 1 2 DNS Servers A list of all configured DNS servers is displayed in the Local Services gt DNS gt DNS Serv ers menu 18 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the pl icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to set up additional DNS servers Here you can configure both global DNS servers and DNS servers that are to be assigned to a particular interface Configuring a DNS server for a particular interface can be useful for example if accounts with different
296. files can be managed individually as required or in logical groups for devices of the same type You can find the Dime Manager on the enclosed product DVD 2 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 2 About this guide Chapter 2 About this guide This document is valid for Teldat devices with system software as of software version 9 1 2 The Reference which you have in front of you contains the following chapters User s Guide Reference Chapter Description Introduction About this guide Installation Basic configuration Reset Technical data Access and configura tion Assistants System Management Physical Interfaces LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Control ler Networking Routing Protocols Multicast WAN You see an overview of the device We explain the various components of this manual and how to use it This contains instructions for how to set up and connect your device This chapter provides a step by step guide to the basic func tions on your device This chapter explains how to reset your device to the ex works state This section contains a description of all the device s technical properties This includes explanations about the different access and con figuration methods All the configuration options of the GUI are described in this chapter The individual menus are described in the order of nav igation The individual chapters also contain more detailed explan
297. flndex In the PIM SM specification this address is named G Upstream Join Timer If the timer is deactivated it has the value 0 Values in the S G States list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast group address InetAddressType is dress defined in the pimSGAddressType object Source IP Address Displays the source IP address InetAddressType is defined in the pimSGAddress Type object Upstream Neighbor IP Displays the primary IP address of the Neighbor on pimSGRP Address Flflndex to which the router periodically S G sends Join mes sages The value is 0 if the RPF Next Hop is unknown or is no PM Neighbor InetAddressType is defined in the pimSGAd dressType object In the PIM SM specification this address is named RPF S G Upstream Join State Indicates whether the local router should join the Shortest Path Tree for the source and the group represented by this Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Field Description entry This corresponds to the status of the Upstream S G State Machine in the PIM SM specification Uptime Indicates the timespan since the entry was generated by the local router Upstream Join Timer Indicates the remaining time until the local router sends out the next periodic S G Join message on pimSGRPFlfIndex In the PIM SM specification this timer is named S G Upstream Join Timer If the timer is deactivated it has the value 0 Shortest Path Tree Indicates whether the S
298. follows Email hotline Oteldat de International Support Coordina Telephone 49 911 9673 1550 tion Fax 49 911 9673 1599 End customer Hotline 0900 1 38 65 93 1 10 min on land lines in Germany For detailed information on our support services contact www teldat de bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 9 WEEE information The waste container symbol with the X through it on the device indicates that the device must be disposed of separately from normal domestic waste at an appropriate waste disposal facility at the end of its useful service life Das auf dem Ger t befindliche Symbol mit dem durchgekreuzten Miillcontainer bedeutet dass das Ger t am Ende der Nutzungsdauer bei den hierf r vorgesehenen Entsorgungsstellen getrennt vom normalen Hausmiill zu entsorgen ist Le symbole se trouvant sur l appareil et qui repr sente un conteneur a ordures barr signifie que l appareil une fois que sa dur e d utilisation a expir doit tre limin dans des poubelles sp cia les pr vues a cet effet de mani re s par e des ordures m nag res courantes Il simbolo raffigurante il bidone della spazzatura barrato riportato sull apparecchiatura significa che alla fine della durata in vita dell apparecchiatura questa dovr essere smaltita separatamente dai rifiuti domestici nei punti di raccolta previsti a tale scopo El s mbolo del contenedor con la cruz que se encuentra en el aparato significa que cuando el equipo haya
299. for a configurable length of time they are logged out of the hotspot The function is enabled by default The default value is 600 seconds 18 8 2 Options In the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt Options menu general settings are per formed for the hotspot HotSpot Gateway Options Basic Parameters Hostfor multiple locations oK Cancel Fig 186 Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt Options The Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt Optionsmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Host for multiple loca If several locations branches are set up on the Hotspot server tions enter the value of the NAS identifier RADIUS server parameter that has been registered for this location on the Hotspot server Chapter 19 Maintenance This menu provides you with numerous functions for maintaining your device lt firstly provides a menu for testing availability within the network You can manage your system configuration files If more recent system software is available you can use this menu to in stall it If you need other languages for the configuration interface you can import these You can also trigger a system reboot in this menu 19 1 Diagnostics In the Maintenance gt Diagnostics menu you can test the availability of individual hosts the resolution of domain names and certain routes 19 1 1 Ping Test Test DNS Test Traceroute Test Ping Test
300. g fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Interface Select the interface for which QoS is to be configured Prioritisation Al Select the algorithm according to which the queues are to be gorithm processed This activates and deactivates QoS on the selected interface Possible values e Priority Queueing QoS is activated on the interface The available bandwidth is distributed strictly according to the queue priority e Weighted Round Robin QoS is activated on the interface The available bandwidth is distributed according to the weighting weight of the queue Exception High priority pack 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description ets are always handled with priority e Weighted Fair Queueing QoS is activated on the inter face The available bandwidth is distributed as fairly as pos sible among the automatically detected traffic flows in a queue Exception High priority packets are always handled with priority e Disabled default value QoS is deactivated on the inter face The existing configuration is not deleted but can be ac tivated again if required Traffic shaping Activate or deactivate data rate limiting in the send direction The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Maximum Upload Only for Traffic shaping enabled Speed Enter a maximum data rate for the queue in the send direction in kbits Possible values are 0 to 10000
301. g on the configuration e mail alerts are sent to the administrator as soon as relevant syslog messages appear 20 3 1 Alert Recipient A list of Syslog messages is displayed in the Alert Recipient menu 20 3 1 1 New Select the New to create additional alert recipients Alert Recipient Alert Settings Add Edit Alert Recipient Alert Service E mail Recipient RSE Message Compression MEnabled Subject _o oe Event Matching String Syslog contains string v Wildcards alowed Severity Emergency v Subsystem Monitored Subsystems IA L Add Message Timeout eo Number of Messages fi OK Cancel Fig 195 External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Recipient gt New The menu External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Recipient gt New consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Add Edit Alert Recipient menu Field Description Alert Service Displays the alert service Select the alert service only for RS120wu RS230au and RS230bu bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH Field Description Possible values e E mail e SMS Recipient Enter the recipient s e mail address The entry is limited to 40 characters Message Compression Select whether the text in the alert E mail is to be shortened The e mail then contains the syslog message only once plus the number of relevant events Enable or disable the field The function is enabled by def
302. g sessions A list of all configured load balancing groups is displayed in the Networking gt Load Balan cing gt Load Balancing Groups menu You can click the P icon next to any list entry to go to an overview of the basic parameters that affect this group Note Note that the interfaces that are combined into a load balancing group must have routes with the same metric If necessary go to the Networking gt Routes menu and check the entries there 12 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional groups Teldat GmbH Basic Parameters Group Description Distribution Policy Distribution Mode Interface Selection for Distribution Interface Distribution Ratio Add 12 Networking Load Balancing Groups Special Session Handling m Session Round Robin v Always O Only use active interfaces Route Selector Tracking IP Address OK Cancel Fig 106 Networking gt Load Balancing gt Load Balancing Groups gt New The menu Networking gt Load Balancing gt Load Balancing Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Group Description Distribution Policy Consider Enter the desired description of the interface group Select the way the data traffic is to be distributed to the inter faces configured for the group Possible values e Session Round Robin default value A newly added ses sion is assigned to one of the group inter
303. gap in which the system checks whether at least one event has oc curred This event is used as the initiator for a configured action N Caution The configuration of actions that are not available as defaults requires extensive know ledge of the method of operation of Teldat gateways An incorrect configuration can cause considerable disruption during operation If applicable save the original config uration on your PC Note To run the event scheduler the date configured on your device must be 1 1 2000 or later 18 5 1 Trigger The Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger menu displays all the event lists that have been configured Every event list contains at least one event which is intended to be the ini tiator for an action 18 5 1 1 New Choose the New button to create more event lists F Trigger Actions Options Basic Parameters Event List New Description J Event Type Time x Select time interval Condition Type _ Condition Settings 7 O los ay Monday Time Condition Periods O Day of Month Daily E y Start Time Hour Minute Stop Time Hour Minute L oK C Cancel Fig 174 Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger gt New bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH The menu Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger gt New consists of the following
304. ge in which you perform the configuration German and English are available Ec View Select the desired view from the dropdown menu Stand ard and SNMP browsers can be selected bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Online Help Click this button if you want help with the menu now active The description of the sub menu where you are now is displayed Online Help Logout If you want to end the configuration click this button to Logout log out of your device A window is opened offering you the fol lowing options e Save configuration save previous boot configuration then exit Save configuration then exit e Exit without saving Navigation bar y _ Save configuration P Fig 34 Save Configuration button bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Global Settings Interface Mode Bridge Groups Administrative Access Remote Authentication Fig 35 Menus The Save configuration button is found in the navigation bar If you save a current configuration you can save this as the boot configuration or you can also archive the previous boot configuration as a backup If you click the Save configuration button in the GUI you will be asked Do you really want to save the current configuration as a boot configuration You have the following two options e Save configuration i e save the current configuration as the boot configuration e Save configuration and backup previous boot configuration i
305. gered and the view is up dated The Generating status is displayed in green When generation has been completed successfully the status changes from Generating to Generated If an error occurs during the generation Not generated and the Generate link are displayed again You can then repeat generation If the Unknown status is displayed generation of a key is not 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field VENTO possible for example because there is not enough space in the FlashROM The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Value Login Grace Time Enter the time in seconds that is available for establishing the connection If a client cannot be successfully authenticated dur ing this time the connection is terminated The default value is 600 seconds Compression Select whether data compression should be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default TCP Keepalives Select whether the device is to send keepalive packets The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Logging Level Select the syslog level for the syslog messages generated by the SSH Daemon Possible settings e Information default value Fatal and simple errors of the SSH Daemon and information messages are recorded e Fatal Only fatal errors of the SSH Daemon are recorded e Error Fatal and simp
306. ges bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply O Warning System Password not changed System Information Uptime 0 Day s 5 Hour s 3 Minute s System Date Thursday 2004 Mar 25 15 49 26 Serial Number WN2DJC010290024 BOSS Version V 9 1 Rev 1 IPSec from 2012 04 19 00 00 00 Last configuration stored Thursday 1970 Jan 01 00 00 00 Resource Information CPU Usage 0 Memory Usage 20 3 31 9 MByte 64 Temperature Current 43 C Min 38 C Max 43 C Active Sessions SIF RTP etc 0 Active IPSec Tunnels 0 0 Physical Interfaces Interface Connection Information Link en1 0 brO 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 o en1 1 brO 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 o WWLAN1 Bridge Channelin Use 1 1 BR Link Fw 2 0 0 0 o WLAN2 off o Relay Mode Inaktive o WAN Interfaces Description Connection Information Link Fig 39 System Management gt Status The menu System Management gt Status consists of the following fields Fields in the System Information menu Field Value Uptime Displays the time past since the device was rebooted System Date Displays the current system date and system time Serial Number Displays the device serial number BOSS Version Displays the currently loaded version of the system software Last configuration stored Displays day date and time of the last saved configuration boot configuration in flash Fields in the Resourc
307. gnments it is also possible to forward the call to an external subscriber so that you can be contacted at all times With call assignment Day Night therefore you define which internal terminals are to ring in the event of an external call Call assignment Day Night is achieved using a table in which all the incoming calls are assigned to internal subscribers You define switching of call variant Day Night Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data communications network Digital European Cordless Telecommunication European standard for wireless telephones and wireless PBXs Internal calls can be made free of charge between several handheld units Another ad vantage is the higher degree of interception protection GAP Describes the address of the gateway to which all traffic not destined for its own network is sent Denial Of Service At A Denial of Service DoS attack is an attempt to flood a gateway or Glossary tack DES Destination number memory DHCP Dial preparation Dial in parameters Dialling control Dialup connection Digital exchange Digital voice trans mission DIME DIME Browser Direct Call Teldat GmbH host in a LAN with fake requests so that it is completely overloaded This means the system or a certain service can no longer be run Data Encryption Standard Speeddial memory Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol On some telephones with a display you can first enter a telephone chec
308. gt New bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH The Networking gt Load Balancing gt Special Session Handling gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Admin Status Description Service Protocol Destination IP Ad dress Netmask Select whether the Special Session Handling should be activ ated The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Enter a name for the entry Select one of the preconfigured services if required The ex tensive range of services configured ex works includes the fol lowing O ACV e apple qt O eiela e charge o clics d e daytime e dhcp e discard The default value is User defined Select a protocol if required The Any option default value matches any protocol Enter if required the destination IP address and netmask of the data packets Possible values e Any default value e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network Enter the network address and the related net mask Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Destination Port Range Enter if required a destination port number or a range of des tination port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range Source Interfac
309. gured in the Networking gt Load Balancing gt Special Session Handling gt New gt Advanced Settings menu If in the Networking gt Load Balancing gt Special Session Handling gt New menu for ex ample you select the parameter Service http SSL and leave the default value for all the other parameters the first HTTPS packet specifies the Destination Address and the Destination Port i e Port 443 with HTTPS for data packets sent subsequently If underFrozen Parameters for the two parameters Destination Address and Destina tion Port you leave the default setting enabled the HTTPS packets with the same source IP address as the first HTTPS packet are routed via port 443 to the same Destination Ad dress via the same interface as the first HTTPS packet 12 3 2 1 Edit or New Choose the ig icon to edit existing entries Select the New button create new entries Load Balancing Groups Special Session Handling Basic Parameters Admin Status MJ Enabled Description AAA Service User defined Y Protocol dontveriy Y Destination IP Address Netmask Any v Destination PortRange All vA wi Source Interface Nne Source IP Address Netmask Any v Source Por Range m A AA Special Handling Timer 900 Seconds Frozen Parameters Advanced Settings Source IP Address lt Destination Address lV Destination Port OK Cancel Fig 108 Networking gt Load Balancing gt Special Session Handling
310. hanged Enter the host name for LNS or LAC Local Hostname e LAC The local hostname is used in outgoing tunnel setup messages to identify this device and is associated with the re mote hostname of a tunnel profile configured on the LNS These tunnel setup messages are SCCRQs Start Control Connection Request sent from the LAC and SCCRPs Start Control Connection Reply sent from the LNS e LNS Is the same as the value for Remote Hostname of the incoming tunnel setup message from the LAC Enter the host name of the LNS or LAC Remote Hostname e LAC Defines the value for Local Hostname of the LNS contained in the SCCRQs received from the LNS and the SCCRPs received from the LAC A Local Hostname con figured in the LAC must match Remote Hostname configured for the intended profile in the LNS and vice versa e LNS Defines the Local Hostname of the LAC If the Remote Hostname field remains empty on the LNS the related profile qualifies as the standard entry and is used for all incoming calls for which a profile with a matching remote hostname cannot be found Password Enter the password to be used for tunnel authentication Au thentication between LAC and LNS takes place in both direc tions i e the LNS checks the Local Hostname and the Pass wordcontained in the SCCRQ of the LAC and compares them with those specified in the relevant profile The LAC does the same with the fields of the SCCRP of the LNS If this field remai
311. hannel 0 Bandwidth 20 MHz Number of Spatial Streams 25 Transmit Power Max Performance Settings Wireless Mode 802 11b g n Ni Max Transmission Rate Auto Nj Burst Mode i Enabled Advanced Settings OK Cancel Fig 70 Wireless LAN WLAN Radio Settings E for Operation Mode Access Client The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Wireless Settings Field Description Operation Mode Define the mode in which the wireless module of your device is to operate Possible values e off default value The wireless module is not active e Access Point Your device is used as an access point in your network e Access Client Your device serves as an Access Client in your network Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n e Bridge Your device is used as a wireless bridge in your net work Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext bintec W2004n and devices in the RS series 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description Client Mode Only for Operation Mode Access Client Select the client connection mode to the access point Possible values e Infrastructure default value In a network in infrastruc ture mode all clients communicate with each other via access points only There is no direct communication between the in dividual clients e Ad Hoc In ad hoc mod
312. hannel Plan All v Beacon Period 100 ms DTIM Period Booo RTS Threshold fay Short Guard Interval DEnabled Short Retry Limit A Long Retry Limit ff Fragmentation Threshold fae SS Bytes Cyclic Background Scanning C Enabled OK C Cancel Fig 89 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Radio Profiles gt New The Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Radio Profiles gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Radio Profile Definition Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the wireless module profile Operation Mode Define the mode in which the wireless module profile is to be operated Possible values e off default value The wireless module profile is not active e Access Point Your device is used as an access point in bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description your network Operation Band Select the frequency band of the wireless module profile Possible values e 2 4 GHz In Outdoor default value Your device is oper ated at 2 4 GHz mode 802 11b mode 802 11g and mode 802 11n inside or outside buildings e 5 GHz Indoor Your device is operated at 5 GHz mode 802 11a h and mode 802 11n inside buildings e 5 GHz Outdoor Your device is operated at 5 GHz mode 802 11a h and mode 802 11n outside buildings e 5 GHz In Outdoor Your device is operated at 5 GH
313. he APs communicate via CAPWAP The configuration is transferred and enabled to the APs Managed The AP is set to Managed status The controller has sent a configuration to the AP and has enabled this The AP is man aged centrally from the controller and cannot be configured via the GUI No License Available The AP does not have an unassigned licence for this AP Offline The AP is either administratively disabled or switched off or has its power supply cut off etc 11 3 1 1 Edit Choose the icon to edit existing entries You can also delete entries using the icon If you have deleted APs these will be loc ated again but shall not be configured Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS Access Point Settings Device WI2040n Location EAS Name jwizoaon oo Description LC CAPWAP Encryption MEnabled Radio Module1 Operation Mode Son Corr Active Radio Profile Selectone Channel No Profile Selected Used Channel 0 Transmit Power Max v Profil MAC Address Assigned Wireless Network VSS gt Add oK cancel Fig 87 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Slave Access Points gt The data for wireless module 1 and wireless module 2 are displayed in the Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Slave Access Points gt menu if the correspond ing device has two wireless modules With devices featuring a single wireless module the data for wi
314. he DHCP server For information on determining the dynamically assigned IP address please see your DHCP server documentation b Fallback IP address If you do not run a DHCP server you can connect your device directly to your configur ation PC and then reach it using the following predefined fallback IP configuration e IP Address 192 168 0 252 e Netmask 255 255 255 0 Make sure that the PC from which the configuration is performed has a suitable IP bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 4 Basic configuration configuration see Configuring a PC on page 52 c Assigning a fixed IP address You can use the Dime Manager to assign a new IP address and the required pass word to your device Note Please note If your device has obtained an IP address dynamically from a DHCP server operated in your network for the basic configuration the fallback IP address 192 168 0 252 is deleted automatically and your device will no longer function over this address However if you have set up a connection to the device over the fallback IP address 192 168 0 252 or have assigned an IP address with the Dime Manager in the basic configuration you will only be able to access your device over this IP address The device will no longer obtain an IP configuration dynamically over DHCP Use the following access data to configure your device in an ex works state e User Name admin e Password admin Note All Teldat devices are del
315. he System Management gt Status menu you can see a list of all physical interfaces and information on whether the interfaces are connected or active and whether they have already been configured 8 1 Ethernet Ports An Ethernet interface is a physical interface for connection to the local network or external networks Note In the ex works state the Ethernet ports ETH1 and ETH2 are assigned to the standard bridge group br0 which is preconfigured as DHCP client and with the fallback IP Ad dress 192 168 0 252 and Netmask 255 255 255 0 8 1 1 Port Configuration Your device allows you to configure the two Ethernet interfaces separately Port Configuration Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds _ Switch Configuration __ Switch Port 3 Ethernet Interface Selection Configured Speed Mode Current Speed Mode E 7 Flow Control mad Furantonegoraton E Down Disabled 4 2 ento Y Ful Autonegotiation 100 mbps Full Duplex Disabled 3 Penta v Ful autonegotiation Down Disabled Y 4 eno Furautonegotation Down Dicabied NS rr Fur Autonego aton v Down forsan E C OK Cancel Fig 59 Physical Interfaces gt Ethernet Ports gt Port Configuration The menu Physical Interfaces gt Ethernet Ports gt Port Configuration consists of the fol lowing fields bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 8 Physical Interfaces Teldat GmbH Fields in the Port Configuration menu Field Description Sh
316. he device bintec W1002n has two Ethernet ports and a serial interface The connections are arranged as follows PE CONSOLE RESET ETH2 E Ci O 5 Fig 9 bintec W1002n underside bintec W1002n underside 1 POWER Socket for plug in power pack 2 CONSOLE Serial interface 3 RESET Reset button 4 ETH1 PoE and 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface ETH2 5 ANT3 Connections for screwing on the external antennas ANT3 RX3 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Installation Teldat GmbH Top witho ANT1 ANT2 Connections for screwing on the external antennas a ANT1 TX RX1 Connection of first directional antenna ig ANT2 TX RX2 Connection of second option directional an tenna 3 2 3 Antenna connectors The three antenna for devices bintec W1002n have 2 Transmit and 3 Receive functions in n operating mode MIMO 2T3R WLAN 1 Ant 1 and WLAN 1 Ant send and receive Ant 3 only receives The connectors on industrial WLAN devices with 802 11n support are the same as the connectors on other industrial WLAN devices 3 2 4 LEDs The LEDs show the radio status radio activity and Ethernet activity of your device All LEDs are on during the start up process This means the monitor has been started and firmware is being loaded The LEDs on bintec W1002n are arranged as follows Status CE WAN CC ETH C bintec W1002n etz CT Fig 10 LEDs of bintec W1002n In operation mode the LEDs disp
317. he eo icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional routes Options Basic Parameters Route Type Network Route via Interface Interface None v Route Class standard O Extended Destination IP Address Netmask ee A Local IP Address booo Metric pa 4 oK Y Cancel Fig 100 Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Routes gt New with Extended Route Standard bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN If the Extendedoption is selected for the Route Class an extra configuration section opens IPv4 Route Configuration IPv4 Routing Table Options Basic Parameters Route Type Network Route via Interface v Interface None v Route Class O Standard Extended Route Parameters Destination IP Address Netmask Local IP Address ooo Metric pa Extended Route Parameters Description Mm Source Interface Any v Source IP Address Netmask jooo 87 255 255 2550 Layer 4 Protocol Any v Source Port m Port HIS to Port E Destination Port E Port HT to Port E DSCP TOS Value ignore S y Mode Dialup and wait 4 oK Cancel Fig 101 Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Routes gt New with Extended Enabled The Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Routes gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Interface Select the interface to be used for this route Route Type Select the type of route Possible values Default Route via Interface R
318. he function is disabled by default RTT mode should be activated for QoS classes in which real time data has priority This mode improves latency when for warding real time datagrams It is possible to configure multiple queues when RTT mode is enabled Queues with enabled RTT mode must always have a higher priority than queues with disabled RTT mode Traffic Shaping Activate or deactivate data rate Traffic Shaping limiting in the send direction The data rate limit applies to the selected queue This is not the limit that can be defined on the interface The function is enabled with Enabled 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description The function is disabled by default Maximum Upload Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Speed Enter a maximum data rate for the queue in kbits Possible values are 0 to 1000000 The default value is 0 Overbooking allowed Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Enable or disable the function The function controls the band width limit If Overbooking allowed is activated the bandwidth limit set for this queue can be exceeded as long as free bandwidth exists on the interface If Overbooking allowed is deactivated the queue can never occupy bandwidth beyond the bandwidth limit that has been set The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Burst size Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Enter the maximum number of bytes that may still be transmi
319. he list entry Interface Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Displays the name of the interface Back Route Verify Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Select whether Back Route Verify is to be activated for the interface The function is enabled with Enabled By default the function is deactivated for all interfaces 12 2 NAT Network Address Translation NAT is a function on your device for defined conversion of source and destination addresses of IP packets If NAT is activated IP connections are still only allowed by default in one direction outgoing forward protective function Excep tions to the rule can be configured in NAT Configuration on page 232 12 2 1 NAT Interfaces A list of all NAT interfaces is displayed in the Networking gt NAT gt NAT Interfaces menu Teldat GmbH 12 Networking NAT Interfaces NAT Configuration View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Interface NAT active Loopback active Silent Deny PPTP Passthrough Portforwardings LAN_EN1 0 0 LAN_EN1 5 0 Page 1 Items 1 2 OK Cancel Fig 104 Networking gt NAT gt NAT Interfaces For every NAT interface the NAT active Loopback active Silent Denyand PPTP Passthrough Can be selected In addition Port forwardings displays how many port forwarding rules were configured for this interface Options in the menu NAT Interfaces Field
320. he security concept of your device enables you to read all the other configuration settings with the user name read but not the access information It is therefore impossible to log in with read read the password of the admin user and subsequently log in with admin and make changes to the configuration Caution All Teldat devices are delivered with the same username and password As long as the password remains unchanged they are therefore not protected against unauthor ised use How to change the passwords is described in on page Make sure you change the passwords to prevent unauthorised access to your device If you have forgotten your password you must reset your device to the ex works state which means your configuration will be lost 5 2 2 Logging in for Configuration Set up a connection to the device The access options are described in Access Options on page 60 GUI Graphical User Interface Log in via the HTML surface as follows 1 Enter your user name in the User field of the input window 2 Enter your password in the Password field of the input window and confirm with Re turn or click the Login button The status page of the GUI opens in the browser SNMP shell Log into the SNMP shell as follows 1 Enter your user name e g admin and confirm with Return 2 Enter your user password e g admin and confirm with Return Your device logs in with the input prompt e g w1002 gt The login was succes
321. he wireless module on which the WDS link or bridge link is configured c Number of the WDS link or bridge link Example wds1 0 first WDS link or bridge link on the first wireless module The name of the client link is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type b Number of the wireless module on which the client link is configured c Number of the client link 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Example sta1 0 first client link on the first wireless module The name of the virtual interface connected to an Ethernet port is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type b Number of the Ethernet port c Number of the interface connected to the Ethernet port d Number of the virtual interface Example en1 0 1 first virtual interface based on the first interface on the first Ethernet port 73 1 Interfaces You define separately whether each interface is to operate in routing or bridging mode If you want to set bridging mode you can either use existing bridge groups or create a new bridge group The default setting for all existing interfaces is routing mode When selecting the option New Bridge Group for Mode Bridge Group a bridge group i e br0 br1 etc is auto matically created and the interface is run in bridging mode Interfaces Interface Description Mode Bridge Group 1 ent 0 Routing Mode Y 2 ent 4 Routing Mode Y Configuration Interface Selecton
322. hentication and Encryption Parameters Field Value Encryption Algorithms Select the algorithms that are to be used to encrypt the SSH connection Possible options e 3DES e Blowfish e AES 128 e AES 256 Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field VENTO Hashing Algorithms By default 3DES Blowfish and AES 128 are enabled Select the algorithms that are to be available for message au thentication of the SSH connection Possible options SIMS SEAN e RipeMD 160 By default MD5 SHA 1 and RipeMD 160 are enabled Fields in the menu Key Status Field VENTO RSA Key Status DSA Key Status Shows the status of the RSA key If an RSA key has not been generated yet Not generatedis displayed in red and a link Generate is provided If you select the link the generation process is triggered and the view is up dated The Generating status is displayed in green When generation has been completed successfully the status changes from Generating to Generated If an error occurs during the generation Not generated and the Generate link are displayed again You can then repeat generation If the Unknown status is displayed generation of a key is not possible for example because there is not enough space in the FlashROM Shows the status of the DSA key If no DSA key has yet been generated Not generated is dis played in red and a link Generate is provided If you select the link the generation process is trig
323. hortest Path Tree Bit is set i e whether forwarding via the Shortest Path Tree should take place Values in the S G RPT States list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast group address InetAddressType is dress defined in the pimStarGAddressType object Source IP Address Displays the source IP address InetAddressType is defined in the pimStarGAddress Type object Reverse Indicates the address type of the RPF Next Hop to the RP or Path Forwarding RPF unknown 0 if the RPF Next Hop is not known Uptime Indicates the timespan since the entry was generated by the local router Upstream Override Indicates the remaining time until the local router sends out the Timer next Triggered S G rpt Join message on pimSGRPFlfIndex In the PIM SM specification this timer is named S G rpt Up stream Override Join Timer If the timer is deactivated it has the value 0 21 8 3 Interface Specific States The menu Monitoring PIM Interface Specific States includes interface specific status information 21 Monitoring View All G States View 20 per page Multicast Group Address Page 1 S G States View 20 per page Multicast Group Address Page 1 5 6 Rpt States Teldat GmbH Global Status Not Interface Specific Status Interface Specific States Fitter in None Y equal v Go Interface Join Prune State Uptime Expiry Timer Assert State Assert Winner IP Address Fitter in None
324. ia a central point which is known as the rendezvous point Data packets are initially routed here before being made available to other recipient routers Multicast routing protocols differentiates between sparse mode and dense mode In dense mode all packets are forwarded and only packets to groups that have been explicitly can celled are rejected In sparse mode packets are only forward to groups if they have been ordered Your device uses PIM in sparse mode 14 4 1 PIM Interfaces A list of all PIM interfaces is displayed in the Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Interfaces menu PIM Interfaces PIM Rendezvous Points PIM Options View 20 per page Fitter in None vw equal Go Interface IP Version Designated Router Use as Stub interface Status Action Page 1 New Fig 129 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Interfaces 14 4 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries To configure PIM lists select the New button PIM Interfaces PIM Rendezvous Points PIM Options PIM Interface Settings Interface Selectone PIM Mode Sparse Mode Use as Stub interface DEnabled Designated Router Priority OA Advanced Settings Hello Interval fo Seconds Triggered Hello Interval 5 Seconds Hello Hold Time hs Seconds Join Prune Interval fo Seconds Join Prune Hold Time 210 Seconds Propagation Delay seconds Override Interval E seconds OK C Cancel Fig 130 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Interfaces gt New The Multicast
325. ic IP address e Provide IP Address Only for Connection Type LNS Your device dynamically assigns an IP address to the remote terminal e Get IP Address Only for Connection Type LAC Your device is dynamically assigned an IP address Default Route Only for IP Address Mode Get IP Address and Static Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Create NAT Policy Only for IP Address Mode Get IP Address and Static Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be ac tivated for this connection The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default IP Assignment Pool Only for IP Address Mode Provide IP Address IPCP Select an IP pool configured in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt IP Poolsmenu Local IP Address Only for IP Address Mode Static Enter the WAN IP address of your device Route Entries Only for IP Address Mode Static Enter Remote IP Address and Netmask of the LANs for L2TP partners and the corresponding Metric Add new entries with Add 16 VPN Teldat GmbH The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for Authentication Encryption again after an attempt to s
326. ically detects whether it is connected to a switch or directly to a PC Use just one of the ports ETH1 and ETH2 the second port is used to cascade a number of devices If you use both Ethernet connections on the same switch loops may be formed The standard patch cable RJ45 RJ45 is symmetrical It is therefore not possible to mix up the cable ends 3 Power connection The devices bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n are supplied without a mains unit The power adapter with EU plug part num ber 5500001254 is available as an accessory Connect the device to a mains socket Use the power cord and insert it in the appro priate socket on your device Now plug the power cord into a power socket 100 240 V The status LED signal that your device is correctly connected to the power supply Optionally power can be supplied through a standard PoE injector part number 5530000082 Installation The access points are to be mounted either on the wall or on the ceiling or use as a table top device Use as a table top device Attach the four self adhesive feet on the bottom of the device Place your device on a solid level base Wall Ceilingmounting To attach the devices bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext or bintec W2004n to the wall or ceiling use the appropriate support is included part number 5500001278 Warning Before drilling make sure that there are no building installa
327. ice Depending on the model one or two WLAN modules WLAN 1 and where applicable WLAN 2 are available 10 1 1 Radio Settings In the Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings menu an overview of all the configuration options for the WLAN module is displayed Radio Settings MAC Address _ _ Operation Mode Operation Band ChannelinUse Maximum Birate Transmit Power Status 100 00 00 00 00 00 on 24 GHz 6 Auto Max o al Fig 68 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings 10 1 1 1 Radio Settings gt In this menu you change the settings for the wireless module Select the pl icon to edit the configuration bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Operation Mode Access Point Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Channel Auto Selected Channel Number of Spatial Streams Transmit Power Performance Settings Wireless Mode 802 11 bigin Airtime fairness DeEnabled Advanced Settings Channel Plan All RTS Threshold always of ov Short Guard Interval Fragmentation Threshold Fig 69 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt for Operation Mode Access Point c WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Radio Settings Wireless Settings Operation Mode Access Client Client Mode O Infrastructure Ad Hoc Operation Band 2 4 GHz v IEEE 802 11d Compliance Flexible Channel 0 Selected Channel 0 Used Secondary C
328. ice sends and expects no heartbeat Set this option if you use devices from other manufacturers e Heartbeats Expect only Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer but does not send one itself e Heartbeats Send only Your device expects no heart beat from the peer but sends one itself e Heartbeats Send amp Expect Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer and sends one itself Dead Peer Detection Use DPD dead peer detection in accordance with RFC 3706 DPD uses a request reply pro tocol to check the availability of the remote terminal and can be configured independently on both sides This option only checks the availability of the peer if data is to be sent to it e Dead Peer Detection Idle Use DPD dead peer de tection in accordance with RFC 3706 DPD uses a request reply protocol to check the availability of the remote terminal and can be configured independently on both sides This op tion is used to carry out a check at certain intervals depending on forthcoming data transfers Only for Phase 1 IKEv2 Parameters Enable or disable alive check 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description The function is enabled by default Block Time Define how long a peer is blocked for tunnel setups after a phase 1 tunnel setup has failed This only affects locally initiated setup attempts Possible values are 1 to 86400 seconds 1 means the value in the default profile is used and 0 means that the peer is
329. ies or small businesses This connection Glossary T Net T NetBox T NetBox telephone number T Online T Online software T Service T Service access TA Teldat GmbH option which can be used with the existing telephone cable costs less than two telephone connections but offers far greater quality and ease of use Two independent lines so that you can still make a phone call receive a fax or surf the Internet when another family member is making a long call on the other line Three or more tele phone numbers which you can assign individually to your devices and distribute differently if needed through simple programming steps Most ISDN telephones can manage several telephone num bers so you can set up a central telephone in your household for example to allow you to react to calls to all ISDN telephone num bers with this telephone The fax and telephone in your home office can also each be assigned a number as can your son or daughter s phone As a result each family member can be contacted with a separate number helping to eliminate day to day friction And as far as the costs are concerned on request you can have your bill broken down to show which units have been charged for the indi vidual ISDN telephone numbers The digital telephone network of T Com for connecting analogue ter minals The answering machine in T Net and T ISDN The T NetBox can store up to 30 messages Enter the current T NetB
330. ies with the symbol 12 1 3 Options Back Route Verify The term Back Route Verify describes a very simple but powerful function If a check is ac tivated for an interface incoming data packets are only accepted over this interface if out going response packets are routed over the same interface You can therefore prevent the acceptance of packets with false IP addresses even without using filters IPv4 Route Configuration IPv4 Routing Table Options Back Route Verify O Enable for all interfaces Enable for specific interfaces Disable for all interfaces Mode View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go No Interface Back Route Verify 1 bro Enabled Page 1 Items 1 1 OK Cancel Fig 103 Networking gt Routes gt Options The Networking gt Routes gt Optionsmenu consists of the following fields 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Fields in the Back Route Verify menu Field Description Mode Select how the interfaces to be activated for Back Route Verify are to be specified Possible values e Enable for all interfaces Back Route Verify is activ ated for all interfaces e Enable for specific interfaces default value A list of all interfaces is displayed in which Back Route Verify is only enabled for specific interfaces e Disable for all interfaces Back route verify is dis abled for all interfaces No Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Displays the serial number of t
331. iguration options of your device are contained in the sub menus which are dis played in the navigation bar in the left hand part of the window Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration Note Please note that not all devices have the full range of functions Check the software of your device on the corresponding product page under www teldat de 5 3 2 SNMP shell SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol that defines how you can ac cess the configuration settings All configuration settings are stored in the MIB Management Information Base in the form of MIB tables and MIB variables You can access these directly from the SNMP shell via SNMP commands This type of configuration requires a detailed knowledge of our devices 5 4 BOOTmonitor The BOOTmonitor is only available over a serial connection to the device The BOOTmonitor provides the following functions which you select by entering the cor responding number 1 Boot System reboot the system The device loads the compressed boot file from the flash memory to the working memory This happens automatically on starting 2 Software Update via TFTP The devices performs a software update via a TFTP server 3 Software Update via XMODEM The device performs a software update via a serial interface with XMODEM 4 Delete configuration The device is reset to the ex works state All configuration files are deleted and the BOOT monitor settings are set to
332. il the interface is up In this case an alternative interface with a poorer metric is used for routing until the interface is up 12 1 2 IPv4 Routing Table A list of all IPv4 routes is displayed in the Network gt Routes IPv4 Routing Table menu The routes do not all need to be active but can be activated at any time by relevant data traffic IPv4 Route Configuration IPv4 Routing Table Options View 20 per page Fitter in None w equal v Go Destination IP Extended FERRER Netmask Gateway Interface Metric Route Type Route Protocol 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 232 BRIDGE_BRO 1 Default Route Local iu via Gateway 10 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 10 0 0 1 BRIDGE_BRO 0 Network Route Local fl Page 1 items 1 2 via Interface Fig 102 Network gt Routes IPv4 Routing Table Fields in the menu IPv4 Routing Table Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Destination IP Address Displays the IP address of the destination host or destination network Netmask Displays the netmask of the destination host or destination net work Gateway Displays the gateway IP address Nothing is displayed here when routes are received by DHCP Interface Displays the interface used for this route Metric Displays the route s priority The lower the value the higher the priority of the route Route Type Displays the route type Extended Route Displays whether a route has been configured with advanced parameters Delete You can delete entr
333. ime delay Local computer network within a company based on Internet techno logy providing the same Internet services e g homepages and sending email Internet Protocol The first part of the address by which a device is identified in an IP network e g 192 168 1 254 See also netmask IP payload compression A tool used on Windows computers to check or change its own IP settings IP over ATM Integrated Services Digital Network The address of an ISDN device that consists of an ISDN number fol lowed by further numbers that relate to a specific terminal e g 47117 ISDN subscriber connection The Basic Rate Interface consists of two B channels and one D channel In addition to the Basic Rate In terface there is the Primary Rate Interface The interface to the sub scriber is provided by an So bus Adapter for connecting a PC to the ISDN Basic Rate Interface From a technical perspective we differentiate between active and passive cards Active ISDN cards have their own processor which handles communication operations independently of the PC processor and therefore does not require any resources A passive ISDN card on bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN ISDN Login ISDN number ISDN router ISDN BRI ISDN Dynamic ISDN Intern al External ISDN PRI ISO ISP ITU Key Escrow LAN LAPB Last access Layer 1 LCD the other hand uses the PC s resources Function of your gateway Your gateway can
334. imit 283 IGMP State Limit 286 IGMP Status 286 Ignore Certificate Request Payloads 345 IKE Phase 1 461 IKE Phase 1 SAs 459 Image already exists 220 Include certificates and keys 437 Incoming Phone Number 325 Index Variables 400 405 Inter Byte Gap 134 Interface 97 98 101 130 144 193 223 228 230 232 241 253 267 275 283 289 309 365 380 383 388 393 405 419 421 424 429 477 478 479 479 484 485 485 Interface Action 419 Interface Mode 138 380 Interface Status 400 Interface Traffic Condition 400 Interface Description 96 Interface Assignment 266 Interface Connection Information Link 82 Interface Mode Bridge Groups 94 Interface Selection 269 Interface Specific States 483 Interfaces 96 137 250 368 419 445 461 Teldat GmbH InternalLog 457 Internal Time Server 90 Internet Dialup 295 Internet Key Exchange 313 Interval 400 405 417 422 Intra cell Repeating 165 208 Invalid DNS Packets 385 IP Compression 338 IP Accounting 445 IP Configuration 137 IP Address 382 397 424 443 454 466 468 477 479 479 IP Address Assignment 316 IP Address Mode 299 304 352 IP Address Range 308 342 392 IP Address Range 193 IP Address Netmask 138 275 IP Address Netmask 463 IP Assignment Pool 316 IP Assignment Pool IPCP 352 IP Pool Name 308 342 392 393 IP Pool Configuration 391 IP Pools 307 342
335. in host mode or in both host mode and routing mode Possible values e Routing default value The interface is operated in Routing mode e Host The interface is only operated in host mode IGMP Proxy IGMP Proxy enables you to simulate several locally connected interfaces as a subnet to an adjacent router Queries coming in to the IGMP Proxy interface are forwarded to the local subnets Local reports are forwarded on the IPGM Proxy interface Multicast Receiver Mu hicast Sridar Teldat Gateway Teldat Gateway e g bintec RXL12500 e g bintec RXL12500 IGMP Proxy Interface Multicast Receiver Fig 126 IGMP Proxy The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description IGMP Proxy Select whether your device is to forward the hosts IGMP mes sages in the subnet via its defined Proxy Interface Proxy Interface Only for IGMP Proxy enabled Select the interface on your device via which queries are to be received and collected 14 2 2 Options In this menu you can enable and disable IGMP on your system You can also define whether IGMP is to be used in compatibility mode or only IGMP V3 hosts are to be accep ted bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 14 Multicast Basic Settings IGMP Status Mode Maximum Groups Maximum Sources IGMP State Limit Teldat GmbH IGMP Options Oup ODown Auto Compatibility Mode Version 3 only 64
336. ine a filter that takes the status of the TCP connec tions into account Possible values e Any default value All TCP packets match the filter e Established All TCP packets that would not open any new TCP connection on routing over the gateway match the filter Destination IP Ad dress Netmask Enter the destination IP address and netmask of the data pack ets Possible values e Any default value e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network Enter the network address and the related net mask Destination Port Range Only if Protocol TCP UDP Enter a destination port number or a range of destination port numbers that matches the filter 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description Source IP Address Netmask Source Port Range DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 Possible values e A11 default value The filter is valid for all port numbers e Specify port Enables the entry of a port number e Specify port range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers Enter the source IP address and netmask of the data packets Only if Protocol TCP UDP Enter a source port number or the range of source port num bers Possible values e A11 default value The filter is valid for all port numbers e Specify port Enables the entry of a port number e Specify port range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers Select the Type of Service TOS Possible values e Ignore defaul
337. ing carry out the steps in the following sequence 1 Antennas Screw the standard antennas supplied on to the connectors provided for this pur pose 2 LAN For the standard configuration of your device via Ethernet connect port ETH1 or ETH2 of your device to your LAN using the Ethernet cable supplied The device automatically detects whether it is connected to a switch or directly to a PC Use just one of the ports ETH1 and ETH2 the second port is used to cascade a number of devices If you use both Ethernet connections on the same switch loops may be formed The standard patch cable RJ45 RJ45 is symmetrical It is therefore not possible to mix up the cable ends bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 3 Installation 3 Power connection Connect the device to a mains socket Use the power cord supplied and insert it in the appropriate socket on your device Now plug the power cord into a power socket 100 240 V The status LEDs signal that your device is correctly connected to the power supply Optionally power can be supplied through a standard PoE injector part number 5530000082 Note bintec WIx065n series products are supplied without a mains unit All devices must be earthed Note To restrict power in the event of a fault the 24 V DC electric circuit is to be protected with an external 2 A fuse on the installation side for bintec WIx065n The relay contact must also be protected externally with a 1 A
338. ing Test Enter the IP address whose accessibility is to be checked Source IP Address Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter an IP address to be used as sender address for the ping test 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address of the interface over which the ping is sent is automatically entered as sender address e Specific Enter the desired IP address in the input field Interval Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter the time in Seconds after which a ping must be resent The default value is 1 second Count Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address is considered unreachable The default value is 3 Server Address Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Enter the URL of the server from which a certificate file is to be retrieved Local Certificate De scription For Command Type Certificate Management and Ac tion Import certificate Enter a description for the certificate under which to save it on the device For Command Type Certificate Management and Ac tion Delete certificate Select the certificate to be deleted Password for protec ted Certificate Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to use a secure certificate requiring a password and enter it
339. int can first carry out 802 1x authentication as soon as they are within range Such WLAN clients can then simply connect over the existing network connection with your device The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the menu Client load balancing Field Description Max number of clients hard limit Enter the maximum number of clients that can be connected to this wireless network SSID The maximum number of clients that can register with a wire less module depends on the specifications of the respective WLAN module This maximum is distrubuted across all wireless networks configured for this radio module No more new wire less networks can be created and a warning message will ap pear if the maximum number of clients is reached 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description Possible values are whole numbers between 1 and 254 The default value is 32 Max number of clients soft limit Not all devices support this function To avoid a radio module being fully utilised you can set a soft restriction on the number of connected clients If this number is reached new connection queries are initially rejected If the cli ent cannot find another wireless network and therefore repeats its query the connection is accepted Queries are only definit ively rejected when the Max number of clients hard limit is reached The value of the Max numbe
340. iol Portugu s and Neder lands Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description The language can be changed on the start login page at any time The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Ticket Type Allowed HotSpot Client Login Frameset Pop Up window for status indication Select the ticket type Possible values e Voucher Only the user name must be entered Define a de fault password in the input field e Username Password default value User name and pass word must be entered Here you can define which type of users can log in to the Hot spot Possible values e All All clients are approved e DHCP Client Prevents users who have not received an IP address from DHCP from logging in Enable or disable the login window The login window on the HTML homepage consists of two frames When the function is enabled the login form displays on the left hand side When the function is disabled only the website with information advertising and or links to freely accessible websites is dis played The function is enabled by default Specify whether the device uses pop up windows to display the status The function is enabled by default 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Default Idle Timeout Enable or disable the Default Idle Timeout If a hotspot user does not trigger any data traffic
341. ion 138 is active assigns the IP addresses to the APs IP Address Range Only for DHCP Server Internal Enter the start and end IP address of the range These IP ad dresses and your device must originate from the same network Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description Slave AP location Select whether the APs that the wireless LAN controller is to manage are located in the LAN or the WAN Possible values e Local LAN default value e Remote WAN The Remote WAN setting is useful if for example there is a wireless LAN controller installed at head office and its APs are distributed to different branches If the APs are linked via VPN it may be that a connection is terminated If this happens the relevant AP with the setting Remote WAN maintains its con figuration until the connection is reestablished It then boots up and the controller and the AP then resynchronize Slave AP LED mode The feature is only for the Access Points W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n available Select the lighting scheme of the slave AP LEDs Possible values e State default value Only the status LED flashes once per second e Flashing All LEDs show their standard behavior e off All LEDs are deactivated 11 3 Slave AP configuration In this menu you will find all of the settings that are required to manage the slave access points 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH 11 3 1 Slave Access Point
342. ion 185 Remote link enabled 185 Remote MAC 469 471 472 473 Remote MAC Address 173 184 185 Remote PPTP IP Address 305 Rendevous Point IP Address 480 481 Rendezvous Point IP Address 292 Reporting Method 267 Response 382 Restore Default Settings 100 Retransmission Timer 279 Retries 110 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 482 483 RFC 2091 Variable Timer 277 RFC 2453 Variable Timer 277 RIP 272 RIP Filter 274 RIP Interfaces 272 RIP Options 277 RIP UDP Port 277 Roaming Profile 159 Robustness 283 Rogue Clients 218 Rogue APs 217 Rogue Client MAC Address 218 Role 341 Route Announce 273 Route Class 223 Route Entries 299 304 316 352 358 Route Selector 241 Route Timeout 278 Teldat GmbH Route Type 223 228 Routes 222 Routing Protocols 272 RSA Key Status 103 RTS Threshold 156 159 204 RTS frames with no CTS received 465 RTT Mode Realtime Traffic Mode 256 Rule Chain 266 267 Rule Chains 265 Running 220 Rx Bytes 462 463 Rx Errors 462 Rx Packets 462 463 464 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 S Scan channels 159 Scan Interval 159 Scan Threshold 159 SCEP URL 121 Schedule Interval 415 Scheduling 398 Second Timeserver 90 Secondary DHCP Server 398 Secondary DNS Server 380 Security Mode 166 175 209 Security Algorithm 458 Select radio 405 Select vendor 395 Select file 437 Selected Channel 149 Selected Channels 156 Selection 370 Send 478 Se
343. ion for Distribution Interface None y Distribution Ratio 0 Advanced Settings Route Selector None y Tracking IP Address None y Apply Cancel Fig 107 Networking gt Load Balancing gt Load Balancing Groups gt Add Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Group Description Shows the description of the interface group Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Distribution Policy Displays the type of data traffic selected Fields in the Interface Selection for Distribution menu Field Description Interface Select the interfaces that are to belong to the group from the available interfaces Distribution Ratio Enter the percentage of the data traffic to be assigned to an in terface The meaning differs according to the Distribution Ratio em ployed e For Session Round Robin is based on the number of distrib uted sessions e For Load dependent Bandwidth the data rate is the de cisive factor The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Route Selector The Route Selector parameter is an additional criterion to help define a load balancing group more precisely Here routing in formation is added to the interface entry within a load balan cing group The route selector is required in certain scenarios to enable the IP sessions managed by the router to be balanced uniquely for each load balancing group The following
344. iption The range of channels that can be used varies depending on the country setting The default value is Germany Interface Select the interface to be used for the wireless controller DHCP Server Select whether an external DHCP server shall assign IP ad dresses to the APs or if you wish to assign fixed IP addresses yourself Alternatively you can use your device as a DHCP server For this internal DHCP server CAPWAP option 138 is active in order to allow communication between the master and slaves Please note Make sure that option 138 is active when using an external DHCP server If you wish to use a Teldat Gateway for example as a DHCP server click on the GUI menu for this device under Local Ser vices gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool gt New gt Advanced Set tings in the DHCP Options field on the Add button Select as Option CAPWAP Controller and in the Value field enter the IP address of the WLAN controller If you use static IP addresses in your network you must enter these to all APs manually The IP addresses of the wireless LAN controller must be entered for each AP in the System Management gt Global Settings gt System menu in the Manual WLAN Controller IP Address field Possible values e External or static default value An external DHCP server with an CAPWAP option 138 enabled assigns the IP addresses to the APs or you can give static IP addresses to the APs e Internal Your device on which the CAPWAP opt
345. irst that the clients actually support these channels Possible values e For Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Possible values are 1 to 13 and Auto default value Auto is not possible in bridge mode e For Operation Band 5 GHz Indoor Possible values are 36 40 44 48 and Auto standard value e For Operation Band 5 GHz In Outdoor and 5 GHz Outdoor and 5 8 GHz Outdoor Only the Auto option is possible here Access Client mode In Access Client mode you may only select the proper channel in Client Mode Ad Hoc Possible values e For Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Possible values are 1 to 13 and Auto default value e For Operation Band 5 GHz Indoor Possible values are 36 40 44 48 and Auto standard value e For Operation Band 5 GHz In Outdoor and 5 GHz Outdoor and 5 8 GHz Outdoor Only the Auto option is possible here Selected Channel Displays the channel used Used Secondary Chan Not for Operation Mode Access Point and Operation nel Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description Displays the second channel used Bandwidth Only for Wireless Mode 802 11b g n 802 11g n SO2 lia GOA idea Select how many channels are to be used Possible values e 20 MHz default value One channel with 20 MHz bandwidth is used e 40 MHz Two channels each with 20 MHz bandwidth are used In the case one channel acts as a control channels and the other as an
346. irst data packet with data packets sent sub sequently You can disable one or both parameters if you wish The Source IP Address parameter must always have the same value in data packets sent subsequently as it did in the first data packet So it cannot be disabled 12 4 QoS QoS Quality of Service makes it possible to distribute the available bandwidths effectively and intelligently Certain applications can be given preference and bandwidth reserved for them This is an advantage especially for time critical applications such as VoIP The QoS configuration consists of three parts e Creating IP filters e Classifying data e Prioritising data 12 4 1 QoS Filter In the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filtermenu IP filters are configured The list also displays any configured entries from Networking gt Access Rules gt Rule Chains 12 4 1 1 New Choose the New button to define more IP filters QoS Filter QoS Classification QoS Interfaces Policies Basic Parameters Description Service User defined v Protocol Any v Destination IP Address Netmask Any v Any v Source IP Address Netmask DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 Ignore v COS Filter 802 1 p Layer 2 ignore v OK UC Cancel Fig 109 Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter gt New The Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the na
347. is updated every ten seconds Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller 11 4 5 Rogue APs Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Rogue Clients view20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go SSD MAC Address Signal dBm Channel Last seen Detected via AP Accepted Page 1 Actions New Neighborscan START OK Fig 96 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Rogue APs APs which are using an SSID from their own network but are not managed by Wireless LAN Controller are displayed in the Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Rogue APs menu Rogue APs which have been found for the first time are displayed with a red back ground For each rogue AP you will see an entry with the following parameter set SSID MAC Ad dress Signal dBm Channel Last seen Detected via AP Accepted Note Check the rogue APs shown carefully as an attacker could attempt to spy on data in your network using a rogue AP You can class a rogue AP as trustworthy by enabling the Accepted checkbox If an alarm has been configured this is then removed and no longer sent The red background disap pears Click under New Neighborscan on Start to rescan adjacent AP s You will receive a warn ing that the wireless modules of the access points must also be disabled for a certain peri od of time When you start the process with OK a progress bar is displayed The located AP display is updated every ten seconds 1
348. is upwardly compatible which means that both V3 and V1 V2 hosts can be managed Your device supports the following multicast mechanisms e Forwarding This relates to static forwarding i e incoming data traffic for a group is passed in all cases This is a useful option if multicast data traffic is to be permanently passed IGMP IGMP is used to gather information about the potential recipients in a subnet In the case of a hop incoming multicast data traffic can thus be selected Tip With multicast the focus is on excluding data traffic from unwanted multicast groups Note that if forwarding is combined with IGMP the packets can be forwarded to the groups specified in the forwarding request 14 1 General 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH 14 11 General In the Multicast gt General gt Generalmenu you can disable or enable the multicast func tion General Basic Settings Multicast Routing Enabled OK Cancel Fig 124 Multicast gt General gt General The Multicast gt General gt Generalmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Multicast Routing Select whether Multicast Routing should be used The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 14 2 IGMP IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol see RFC 3376 is used to signal the informa tion about group membership in a subnet As a result only the packets explicitly wanted by a host ente
349. ist is displayed Teldat GmbH 7 System Management If a key is no longer to be used e g because it has fallen into the wrong hands or has been lost the corresponding certificate is declared invalid The certification authority revokes the certificate and publishes it on a certificate blacklist so called CRL Certificate users should always check against these lists to ensure that the certificate used is currently valid This check can be automated via a browser The Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol SCEP supports the issue and revocation of certificates in networks 7 6 2 1 Import Choose the Import button to import CRLs Certificate List CRLs Certificate Servers CRL Import External Filename Browse Local Certificate Description File Encoding Auto v Password OK Cancel Fig 57 System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs gt Import The System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs gt Importmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the CRL Import menu Field Description External Filename Enter the file path and name of the CRL to be imported or use Browse to select it from the file browser Enter a unique description for the CRL Local Certificate De scription File Encoding Select the type of encoding so that your device can decode the CRL Possible values e Auto default value Activates automatic code recognition If downloading the CRL in auto mode fails try with a certain 7
350. ith IKE Config Mode the transac tions for XAuth are carried out before the transactions for IKE Config Mode Number of Admitted Choose how many users can connect using this peer profile Connections Possible values e One User default value Only one peer can be connected with the data defined in this profile e Multiple Users Several peers can be connected with the data defined in this profile The peer entry is duplicated for each connection request with the data defined in this profile Start Mode Select how the peer is to be switched to the active state Possible values e On Demand default value The peer is switched to the active state by a trigger e Always up The peer is always active Fields in the menu Advanced IP Options Field Description Public Source IP Ad dress If you are operating more than one Internet connection in paral lel you can specify here the public IP address which is to be used as the source address for the peer s data traffic Select whether the Public Source IP Address is to be enabled The function is enabled with Enabled In the input field enter the public IP address which is to be used as the sender address The function is disabled by default Back Route Verify Select whether a check on the back route should be activated for the interface to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description The function is disabl
351. ivered with the same username and password As long as the password remains unchanged they are therefore not protected against unauthor ised use Make sure you change the passwords to prevent unauthorised access to your device How to change the passwords is described in Modify system password on page 56 4 1 2 Software update Your device contains the version of the system software available at the time of production More recent versions may have since been released You can easily perform an update with the GUI using the Maintenance gt Software amp Configuration menu For a description of the update procedure see Software Update on page 59 4 2 System requirements For configuration your PC must meet the following system requirements e Internet Explorer oder Mozilla Firefox e Installed network card Ethernet e DVD drive e TCP IP protocol installed see Configuring a PC on page 52 4 3 Preparation To prepare for configuration you need to e Obtain the data required for the basic configuration e Check whether the PC from which you want to perform the configuration meets the ne cessary requirements e install the Dime Manager software which provides more tools for working with your device 4 3 1 Gathering data The main data for the basic configuration can be gathered quickly as no information is re quired that needs in depth network knowledge If applicable you can use the example val ues Before you
352. k it first and then dial it Define the dial in parameters i e you enter the provider s dial in number and specify In the configuration for certain terminals you can define restrictions for external dialling A connection is set up when required by dialling an extension num ber in contrast to a leased line Allows computer controlled crossbar switches to set up a connection quickly and special features such as inquiries call waiting three party conference and call forwarding to be activated All T Com ex changes have been digital since January 1998 As a result of the internationally standardised Pulse Code Modula tion PCM analogue voice signals are converted to a digital pulse flow of 64 kbps Advantages Better voice quality and less suscept ibility to faults during analogue voice transmission Desktop Internetworking Management Environment Old name for Configuration Manager You are not at home However there is someone at home who needs to be able to reach you quickly and easily by telephone if ne cessary e g children or grandparents As you can set up the Direct Call function for one or more telephones the receiver of the tele phone simply needs to be lifted After five seconds the PBX auto matically calls the defined direct call number if you do not start dial ling another number first You can enter up to 12 destination num bers when you configure Direct Call A direct call number can only be used by on
353. key calculation mod ular exponentiation at 768 bits is used to create the encryption material e 2 1024 Bit default value During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1024 bits is used to create the encryption material e 5 1536 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1536 bits is used to create the en cryption material Lifetime Define how the lifetime is defined that will expire before phase 2 SAs need to be renewed The new SAs are negotiated shortly before expiry of the current SAs As for RFC 2407 the default value is eight hours which means the key must be renewed once eight hours have elapsed The following options are available for defining the Lifetime e Input in Seconds Enter the lifetime for phase 2 key in seconds The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 7200 e Input in kBytes Enter the lifetime for phase 2 keys as amount of data processed in Kbytes The value can be a whole num ber from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 Rekey after Specify the percentage in the course of the lifetime at which the phase 2 keys are to be regenerated The percentage entered is applied to both the lifetime in seconds and the lifetime in Kbytes The default value is 80 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description IP Compr
354. l Teldat GmbH Field Description e Address Range Enter an IP address range with a start and end address Address Subnet Only for Address Type Address Subnet Enter the IP address of the host or a network address and the related netmask The default value is 0 0 0 0 Address Range Only for Address Type Address Range Enter the start and end IP address of the range 173 2 Groups A list of all configured address groups is displayed in the Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups menu You can group together addresses This makes it easier to configure firewall rules 173 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional address groups Address List Groups Basic Parameters Description E Addresses Selection Selection ANY OK Cancel Fig 158 Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups gt New The menu Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the address group Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall Field Description Selection Select the members of the group from the available Addresses To do this activate the Fields in the Selection column 17 4 Services 17 4 1 Service List In the Firewall gt Services gt Service List menu a list of all available services is displayed 17 4 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional services Service List Group
355. l gt Controlled Interfaces a list of functions is dis played for which the Real Time Jitter Control function is configured Teldat GmbH 15 2 1 1 New 15 WAN Click the New button to optimise voice transmission for other interfaces Basic Settings Interface Control Mode Maximum Upload Speed Controlled Interfaces None Controlled RTP Streams only 0 kbps oK Cancel Fig 137 WAN gt Real Time Jitter Control gt Controlled Interfaces gt New The menu WAN gt Real Time Jitter Control gt Controlled Interfaces gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Interface Control Mode Maximum Upload Speed Define for which interfaces voice transmission is to be optim ised Select the mode for the optimisation Possible values e Controlled RTP Streams only default value By means of the data routed via the media gateway the system detects voice data traffic and optimises the voice transmis sion e All RTP Streams All RTP streams are optimised e Inactive Voice data transmission is not optimised e Always Voice data transmission is always optimised Enter the maximum available upstream bandwidth in kbp s for the selected interface 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Chapter 16 VPN A connection that uses the Internet as a transport medium but is not publicly accessible is referred to as a VPN Virtual Private Network Only authorised users ha
356. l O and then the required emergency number Encapsulation of data packets in a certain protocol for transmitting the packets over a network that the original protocol does not dir ectly support e g NetBIOS over TCP IP Refers to the encryption of data e g MPPE In the ex works setting all external connections made and received via your PBX are recorded and stored in the form of connection data records Encapsulating Security Payload The Extended Service Set describes several BSS several access points that form a single logical wireless network A local network that connects all devices in the network PC print ers etc via a twisted pair or coaxial cable Glossary Ethernet connec tions Eumex Recovery Euro ISDN Eurofile transfer Exchange Exchange access right Extended redialling Extension Extension number Extension numbers range Fall Back Priority of the Internet provider entries Teldat GmbH The 4 connections are led equally through an internal switch Net work clients can be directly connected to the connection sockets The ports are designed as 100 BaseT full duplex autosensing auto MDIX upwardly compatible to 10 Base T Up to 4 SIP telephones or IP softclients with SIP standard can be directly connected to PCs with a network card If the power supply to the PBX cuts out while new firmware is being loaded the PBX functions are deleted Harmonised ISDN standardised within E
357. la we Sioa Be Soe AL a 293 Chapter 15 WANE lt 2 os SF a ieee ee ae a ee Reva eae a NG 295 15 1 Internet Dialup 1 ee 295 15 1 1 PPROE a i dd AS IN A a a 297 15 1 2 PRIPESI nen IA A ES A SA 302 15 1 3 IP POOS a Lo IA ri BS A rd Re 307 15 2 Real Time Jitter Control a a a a a a 308 15 2 1 Controlled Interfaces 2 a 308 Chapter 16 VPN a da dd e dot aates 310 16 1 IPSEC 2 Seth Ged ett ic Bh RE a 310 16 1 1 IPSEC PESTS 4 Sxu Plan e EE ce A ee Bs Ea we SS Ge 311 16 1 2 Phase 1Profiles 2 202 a2 0 bo ee te had ee ds 327 16 1 3 Ph se 2 Profiles iet 34s eke eM be A eet a ee te ada 335 16 1 4 XAUTH Profiles cer adara 24 Ate ideals tg a we Abe a 340 16 1 5 IPXPOD S 2002 8 5 ote et fe eS Me det da a ae a a E 342 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 1 6 Options wick Se ek a Be o 343 16 2 LTRs bh Sorter O eye edna tee dares 346 16 2 1 Tunnel Profiles cotas ek Se het Sh eel ek eo eee ele ob dee 347 16 2 2 WSEIS a 26 io eee NO dea ec ee Sh ce pes ee AA PP 350 16 2 3 Options 254 ii a Fo Ba ee ee Te Be 356 16 3 GRE e dida gee Rade Bedi Bot NAO eet E Soh e tin ea 357 16 3 1 GRETunnelsy Lap to Be bt ts eet oe od ads Bt ed 357 Chapter 17 Firewall vcs 2 ve ee ee a ER ee 360 171 POLICIES Loma A A e A A 361 17 1 1 Filter Rules gt 2 cs ae cee ne eee Ye a oe Ob ak ee 361 17 1 2 QOS vs ek ce ed ee ed i eee ae ee a a 365 17 1 3 Options 02 gos Seb doe a ee ea 366 172 Interfaces 0 a
358. lay the following status information for your device LED status display bintec W1002n LED Status Information Status off The power supply is not connected If other LEDs are on also Error on static Error on flashing Ready WLAN 1 on flashing slowly Free on static At least one client is registered D Status Information At least one client is registered and there is data traffic BLD Broken Link Detection active on flickering on flashing fast on flashing fast 5 GHz scan active ETH 1 2 off No cable or no Ethernet link on Cable plugged in and link on flickering Cable plugged in and link with data traffic 3 2 5 Scope of supply Your device is supplied with the following parts Cable sets mains unit Software Documentation other Companion bintec W1002n Ethernet cable RJ 45 DVD Quick Install Guide STP printed Plug in power pack 12 V 230 V 3 external standard anten nas Self adhesive feet to allow the device to be used as a desktop device 2 screws and 2 raw plug for fastening to the wall 3 2 6 General Product Features R amp TTE Compliance Inform ation printed User s Guide on DVD Safety notices The general product features cover performance features and the technical prerequisites for installation and operation of your device The features are summarised in the following table General Product Features bintec W1002n bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Install
359. ld certainly do this for your connection to the Inter net Service Provider ISP Only outgoing sessions are allowed initially if NAT is activated To allow certain connec tions from outside to hosts within the LAN these must be explicitly defined and admitted Connection Idle Timeout The connection idle timeout is determined in order to clear the connection automatically if it is not being used i e if data is no longer being sent to help you save costs where neces sary Block after Connection Failure You use this function to set up a waiting time for outgoing connection attempts after which your device s connection attempt is regarded as having failed 15 1 1 PPPoE A list of all PPToE interfaces is displayed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPPoE menu PPP over Ethernet PPPoE is the use of the Point to Point Protocol PPP network pro tocol over an Ethernet connection Today PPPoE is used for ADSL connections in Ger many In Austria the Point To Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP was originally used for AD SL access However PPPoE is now offered here too by some providers 15 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new PPPoE interfaces PEPEE ere rezos ison aux oo Basic Parameters Description PPPoE Mode O standard Multilink PPPoE Ethernet Interface Selectone Y User Name 1 Password eonasona Always on DEnabled Connection Idle Tim
360. ldat GmbH 3 Installation Property Value WLAN 1 Ant 1 WLAN 1 Ant 2 WLAN 2 Ant 1 WLAN 2 Ant 2 Dimensions and weights Equipment dimensions without cable 257 mm x 285 mm x 60 mm WxLxH Weight approx 1 900 g with WLAN modules LEDs 7 1x Failure 1x Status 2x WLAN 2x Ethernet 1x SFP Power consumption of the device 5 24 Watt depending on extensions Voltage supply Earth conductor connection to earth 5 20W All devices must be earthed 24 V 30 DC 1 1 A with reverse voltage protection in sulated 3 pole PoE on Ethernet 1 Class 0 insulated with max two WLAN modules Protection against theft Theft protection is available as an option Temperature sensor Temperature monitoring and software controlled actions possible Environmental requirements Storage temperature 40 C to 85 C Operating temperature 20 C to 65 C Relative atmospheric humidity 10 to 100 Available interfaces Serial interface V 24 Permanently installed supports Baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Baud Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LAN Permanently installed twisted pair only 10 100 mbps autosensing MDI MDIX 2x 10 100 Base T TX Relay An alarm using relay is possible in the event of overtem perature or error potential free working contact 42 V AC 1A 30VDC2A Optical interface Module slot for optical i
361. le connection lock changeable telephone number lock connection without dialling and transmission of charge information Availability depends on the standard of the connected terminals T ISDN Basic Rate Interface with an extensive range of services call waiting call forwarding third party conference display of call costs at the end of a connection inquiry brokering telephone num ber transmission In the special features connection three multiple subscriber numbers are included as standard If you want to make a business call late in the evening from your private sphere say the living room for example you can define your business telephone number as the outgoing multiple subscriber number MSN for this call The advantages of this are that the costs for the connection are recorded for the selected MSN and the per son you are calling can identify you by the transferred MSN Before you call an external number you can define which of your telephone numbers is to be sent to the exchange and called party You make the selection using the telephone number index A speeddial index 000 299 can be assigned to each of the 300 telephone numbers in the telephone book You then dial this speed dial index instead of the long telephone number Note that telephone numbers dialled using the speeddial function must also comply with the dialrule Service Profile Identifier The splitter separates data and voice signals on the DSL connec ti
362. le errors of the SSH Daemon are re corded e Debug All messages are recorded Teldat GmbH 7 System Management 7 4 3 SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a network protocol used to monitor and control network elements e g routers servers switches printers computers etc from a central station SNMP controls communication between the monitored devices and monit oring station The protocol describes the structure of the data packets that can be transmit ted as well as the communication process The data objects queried via SNMP are structured in tables and variables and defined in the MIB Management Information Base This contains all the configuration and status variables of the device SNMP can be used to perform the following network management tasks e Surveillance of network components e Remote controlling and configuration of network components e Error detection and notification You use this menu to configure the use of SNMP Access SSH SNMP Basic Settings SNMP Version Vivi Mivac Viva SNMP Listen UDP Port 161 OK Cancel Fig 50 System Management gt Administrative Access gt SNMP The menu System Management gt Administrative Access gt SNMP consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Value SNMP Version Select the SNMP version your device is to use to listen for ex ternal SNMP access Possible values e vi SNMP Version 1 e v2c Community Bas
363. le values e A11 All channels can be dialled when a channel is selected e Auto Depending on the region operation band wireless mode and bandwidth the channels that have a distance of 4 channels are provided e User defined You can select the desired channels your self User Defined Channel Plan Only for Channel Plan User defined The currently selected channels are displayed here With Add you can add channels If all available channels are displayed you cannot add any more entries You can also delete entries using the icon Beacon Period Enter the time in milliseconds between the sending of two beacons This value is transmitted in Beacon and Probe Response Frames Possible values are 1to 65535 The default value is 100 DTIM Period Enter the interval for the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM The DTIM field is a data field in transmitted beacons that in forms clients about the window to the next broadcast or multic ast transmission lf clients operate in power save mode they come alive at the right time and receive the data Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 2 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description RTS Threshold Here you can specify the data packet length threshold in bytes 1 2346 as of which the RTS CTS mechanism is to be used This makes sense if several clients that are not in each other s wireless range are run in one access point
364. lect the device to be used to send the text message Maximum SMS per Day Limit the maximum number of SMS sent during a single day Activating No Limitation allows any number of SMS to be sent The defualt value is 10 SMS per day Note Entering a value of 0 is equivalent to activating No Lim itation 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH 20 4 SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol from the IP protocol family for transporting management information about network components Every SNMP management system contains an MIB SNMP can be used to configure con trol and administrate various network components from one system Such an SNMP tool is included on your device the Configuration Manager As SNMP is a standard protocol you can use any other SNMP managers e g HPOpenView For more information on the SNMP versions see the relevant RFCs and drafts e SNMP V 1 RFC 1157 e SNMP V 2c RFC 1901 1908 e SNMP V 3 RFC 3410 3418 20 4 1 SNMP Trap Options In the event of errors a message known as a trap packet is sent unrequested to monitor the system In the External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Options menu you can configure the sending of traps SNMP Trap Options SNMP Trap Hosts Basic Parameters SNMP Trap Broadcasting Enabled SNMP Trap UDP Port 162 SNMP Trap Community snmp Trap OK Cancel Fig 197 External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Options The menu Exter
365. led Garden Network Individually set for customers by customer dealer Walled Garden Server URL Individually set for customers by customer dealer Terms 8 Conditions URL Individually set for customers by customer dealer Access data for configuration of the Hotspot server Admin URL https hotspot teldat de Username Individually set by Teldat Password Individually set by Teldat Note Also refer to the WLAN Hotspot Workshop that is available to download from www teldat de 18 8 1 HotSpot Gateway In the HotSpot Gateway menu you can configure the Teldat gateway installed onsite for the Hotspot Solution A list of all configured hotspot networks is displayed in the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway menu HotSpot Gateway Options Interface Domain LAN_EN1 0 hotspot domain de 11 pl Enabled 4 New D OK Cancel __ Fig 184 Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway You can use the Enabled option to enable or disable the corresponding entry 18 8 1 1 Edit or New You configure the hotspot networks in the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway gt menu Choose the New button to set up additional Hotspot networks bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services HotSpot Gateway Options Basic Parameters Interface LAN_EN1 0 v Domain at the HotSpot Server Walled Garden Enabled Language for login window English
366. less mode 802 11n are listed separately WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply WLAN1 Statistics mbps Tx Packets Rx Packets 802 11a big 54 0 0 48 0 0 36 0 0 24 0 0 18 0 0 12 0 0 ait 0 0 9 0 0 6 0 0 5 5 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 802 11n 144 4 0 0 139 0 0 115 6 0 0 86 7 0 0 72 2 0 o 65 0 0 57 8 0 0 43 3 0 0 28 9 0 0 Pale 0 0 14 4 0 0 Ta 0 0 Total 0 0 Fig 206 Monitoring gt WLAN gt WLAN Values in the WLAN list Field Description mbps Displays the possible data rates on this wireless module Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent for the data rate shown bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Field Description in mbps Rx Packets Shows the total number of received packets for the data rate shown in mbps You can choose the Advanced button to go to an overview of more details WLAN1 VSS WDS Bridge Links Client Links Client Management Automatic Refresh Interval 300 Seconds Apply Description Value Unicast MSDUs transmitted successfully Multicast MSDUs transmitted successfully Transmitted MPDUs Multicast MSDUs received successfully Unicast MPDUs received successfully MSDUs that could not be transmitted Frame transmissions without ACK received oH OO fk WH Duplicate received MSDUs 9 CTS frames received in response to an RTS 10 Received MPDUs that couldnt be decrypted 11 RTS frames with no C
367. lient use a fixed character string 8 to 63 char acters known to all subscribers as the basis for key calculation for wireless traffic World Wide Web The X 21 recommendation defines the physical interface between two network components in packet switched data networks e g Da tex P The X 21bis recommendation defines the DTE DCE interface to V series synchronous modems An internationally agreed standard protocol that defines the interface between network components and a packet switched data network ITU T recommendation on the integration of X 25 compatible DTEs in ISDN D channel X 500 ITU T standards that cover user directory services see LDAP Ex ample The phone book is the directory in which you find people on the basis of their name agreement with the telephone directory The Internet supports several databases with information on users such as e mail addresses telephone numbers and postal ad dresses You can search these databases to obtain information about individuals X 509 ITU T standards that define the format of the certificates and certific ate queries and their use bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Index Index 220 ISDN Timeserver 90 System Admin Password 87 1 2 3 124 2 2 4 5 GHz changeover 476 A Access Control 170 213 Access Filter 266 Access Filter 261 Access Rules 259 ACCESS_ACCEPT 107 ACCESS REJECT 107 ACCESS_REQUEST 107 ACCOUNTING_START 107 ACCOUNTING
368. lind stops for SFP SD slot cover with screw 3 pole screw terminal bar for the power supply R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed User s Guide on DVD Safety notices Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation 2 pole screw terminal bar for relay 1 screw pin set Blind stops for Ethernet inter faces 4 threaded caps for antennas bintec WI2065n Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP Serial cable D SUB9 4 external standard antennas Blind stops for SFP SD slot cover with screw 3 pole screw terminal bar for the power supply 2 pole screw terminal bar for relay 1 screw pin set Blind stops for Ethernet inter faces 4 threaded caps for antennas One set of rubber seals for cable bushings 3 4 6 General Product Features Companion DVD Quick Install Guide printed R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed User s Guide on DVD Safety notices The general product features cover performance features and the technical prerequisites for installation and operation of your device The features are summarised in the following table General Product Features bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n Property Value Variants bintec WI1065n An internal wireless module 3 external antenna WLAN 1 Ant 1 WLAN 1 Ant 2 WLAN 1 Ant 3 bintec WI2065n Two internal wireless modules 4 external antenna bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Te
369. links Radio Settings Virtual Service Sets WDS Links Basic Parameters WDS Description Y Use default ADS Security Settings Privacy None v Remote Partner Remote MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 OK Cancel Fig 73 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt WDS Links gt New The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt WDS Links gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description WDS Description Enter a name for the WDS link If the Use default option is activated the automatically gen erated name of the interface is used If the option is not activated you can enter a suitable name in the input field Option Use default is active by default Fields in the WDS Security Settings menu Field Description Privacy Select whether an encryption method is to be used for this WDS link and if so which one Possible values None default value Data traffic on this WDS link is not en crypted WEP 40 Data traffic on this WDS link is encrypted with WEP 40 In WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4 enter the keys for this WDS Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description link and in Transmit Key select the default key WEP 104 Data traffic on this WDS link is encrypted with WEP140 In WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4 enter the keys for this WDS link and in Transmit Key select the default key e wpa Data traffic on this WDS link is encrypted with WPA Enter the key for this WDS link in Preshared Key e wp
370. lis active by default Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and NAT method symmetric Enter the source IP address to which the original source IP ad dress is to be translated with corresponding netmask as the case arises Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT NAT method symmetrical Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Leave the source port as it appears or enter a new source port to which the original source port is to be translated 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description Original leaves the original source port If you disable Ori ginal an input field appears in which you can enter a new source port Original is active by default 12 3 Load Balancing The increasing amount of data traffic over the Internet means it is necessary to send data over different interfaces to increase the total bandwidth available IP load balancing en ables the distribution of data traffic within a certain group of interfaces to be controlled 12 3 1 Load Balancing Groups If interfaces are combined to form groups the data traffic within a group is divided accord ing to the following principles e In contrast to Multilink PPP based solutions load balancing also functions with accounts with different providers e Session based load balancing is achieved e Related dependent sessions are always routed over the same interface e A decision on distribution is only made for outgoin
371. llows Fig 6 LEDs of bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n In operation mode the LEDs display the following status information for your device LED status display 1 D Status Information Status green off The power supply is not connected If other LEDs are on also Error on static Error on flashing Ready WLAN 1 2 gr n off Radio or all assigned VSS inactive on slowly flashing VSS is active no client connected on fast flashing VSS is active at least one client con nected on flickering VSS is active at least one client con nected active data traffic You can choose from three different operation modes of the LEDs in the Global Settings menu as well as with the WLAN Controller Teldat GmbH Note 3 Installation If you change the LED behavior through the GUI or the WLAN Controller this setting is preserved if you reset the device to the ex works state State Flashing Off Only the status LED flashes once per second All LEDs show their standard behavior All LEDs are deactivated 3 1 4 Scope of supply Your device comes with the following accessories Cable sets mains unit other Software Documentation bintec W1003n Companion Ethernet cable RJ 45 STP DVD Quick Install Guide printed Self adhesive feet R amp TTE Compliance Informa tion printed Wall or ceiling mounting User s Guide on DVD Safety notices bintec W2003n Companion Ethern
372. lso use any other terminal program that can be set to the corresponding parameters see below Proceed as follows to access your device via the serial interface 1 Click on Programs gt Accessories gt HyperTerminal in the Windows Start menu 2 Press Return at least once after the HyperTerminal window opens A window with the login prompt appears You are now in the SNMP shell of your device You can now log in on your device and start the configuration Check If the login prompt does not appear after you press Return several times the connection to your device has not been set up successfully Therefore check the COM1 or COM2 settings on your PC 1 Click on File gt Properties 2 Click Configure in the Connect to tab The following settings are necessary Bits per second 9600 Data bits 8 Parity open Stopbits 1 Flow control open 3 Enter the values and click OK 4 Make the following settings in the Settings tab Emulation V7100 5 Click OK The changes to the terminal program settings do not take effect until you disconnect the connection to your device and then make the connection again If you use HyperTerminal there may be problems with displaying umlauts and other special characters If necessary therefore set HyperTerminal to Autodetection instead of VT 100 Unix You will require a terminal program such as cu on System V tip on BSD or minicom on Linux The settings fo
373. lt 11 1 3 Wireless Network All of the configured wireless networks VSS are displayed in the list At least one wireless network VSS is set up This entry cannot be deleted Click on H to edit an existing entry You can also delete entries using the f icon With Add you can create new entries You can create up to eight wireless networks VSS for a wireless module Note If you wish to use the default wireless network that is set up you must at least change the Preshared Key parameters Otherwise you will be prompted 11 1 3 1 Change or add wireless networks Click on poto edit an existing entry With Add you can create new entries The following parameters are available Network Name SSID Enter the name of the wireless network SSID bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Enter an ASCII string with a maximum of 32 characters Also select whether the Network Name SSID visible is to be transmitted Security Mode Select the security mode encryption and authentication for the wireless network Please note WPA Enterprise means 802 11x WPA Mode Select for Security Mode wPA PSK or WPA Enterprise whether you wish to use WPA oder WPA 2 or both Preshared Key Enter the WPA password for Security Mode WPA PSK Enter an ASCII string with 8 63 characters Important Change the default Preshared Key If the key has not been changed your device will not be
374. lt Group Description Define a new RADIUS group description or assign the new RA DIUS entry to a predefined group The configured RADIUS servers for a group are queried according to Priority and the Policy Possible values New default value Enter a new group description in the text field e Default Group 0 Select this entry for special applications such as Hotspot Server configuration e lt Group Name gt Select a predefined group from the list The Advanced Settings menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Value Policy Select how your device is to react if a negative response to a re quest is received Possible values e Authoritative default value A negative response to a request is accepted e Non authoritative A negative response to a request is not accepted A request is sent to the next RADIUS server un til your device receives a response from a server configured as authoritative UDP Port Enter the UDP port to be used for RADIUS data RFC 2138 defines the default ports 1812 for authentication 1645 in older RFCs and 1813 for accounting 1646 in older RFCs You can obtain the port to be used from the documenta tion for your RADIUS server The default value is 1812 Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field VENTO Server Timeout Enter the maximum wait time between ACCESS_REQUEST and response in milliseconds After timeout the request is repeated a
375. m e 11 dBm e 14 dBm e 16 dBm Assigned Wireless Displays the wireless networks that are currently assigned Network VSS 11 3 2 Radio Profiles Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS Radio Profiles Configured Radio Modules Operation Band Wireless Mode 2 4 GHz Radio Profile 0 2 4 GHz In Outdoor 802 1 Abigin pl 5 GHz Radio Profile oO 5GHzindoor 802 11a n im pl Fig 88 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Radio Profiles An overview of all created wireless module profiles is displayed in the Wireless LAN Con troller gt Slave AP configuration gt Radio Profiles menu A profile with 2 4 GHz and a pro file with 5 GHz are created by default the 2 4 GHz profile cannot be deleted For each wireless module profile you will see an entry with a parameter set Radio Profiles Configured Radio Modules Operation Band Wireless Mode 11 3 2 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Select the New button in order to create new wireless module profiles bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS Radio Profile Definition Description a Operation Mode Access Point v Operation Band 2 4 GHz IniOutdoor Y Number of Spatial Streams ha Performance Settings Wireless Mode feo2ttbign F Max Transmission Rate to m Burst Mode DEnabled Airtime faimess MEnabled Advanced Settings C
376. marks and the Teldat logo bintec trademarks and the bintec logo elmeg trademarks and the elmeg logo are registered trademarks of Teldat GmbH Company and product names mentioned are usually trademarks of the companies or manufacturers concerned Copyright All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or further processed in any way without the written consent of Teldat GmbH The documentation may not be processed and in particular translated without the consent of Teldat GmbH You will find information on guidelines and standards in the declarations of conformity under www teldat de How to reach Teldat GmbH Teldat GmbH S dwestpark 94 D 90449 Nuremberg Germany Phone 49 911 9673 0 Fax 49 911 688 07 25 Teldat France S A S 6 8 Avenue de la Grande Lande F 33174 Gradignan France Phone 33 5 57 35 63 00 Fax 33 5 56 89 14 05 Internet www teldat de Table of Contents Chapter 1 INtrOGUCHION wae eae a a a ee 1 Chapter 2 About this guide 0 o e 3 Chapter 3 Installation o o o ee 6 3 1 bintec W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n 6 3 1 1 Setting Up andconnecting 2 o 6 3 1 2 Connectors 2 a a 9 3 1 3 LEDS e Ga oh hee eis do See Ge ao id eae ete ees 10 3 1 4 Scope of supply 2 2 a 11 3 1 5 General Product Features 2 2 a o 12 3 1 6 Reset a opo cr Rw EE ee Es 13 3 2 Dintec Wil002N 2 2c ra ww a A n
377. matic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Select all Description IP Address Response TTL Reference Counter Deselect all Make static uj Page 1 OK Cancel Fig 165 Local Services gt DNS gt Cache You can select individual entries using the checkbox in the corresponding line or select them all using the Select all button A dynamic entry can be converted to a static entry by marking the entry and confirming with Make static This corresponding entry disappears from the list and is displayed in the list in the Static Hosts menu The TTL is transferred Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services 18 1 6 Statistics Global Settings DNS Servers Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Automatic Refresh Interval jo Seconds Apply DNS Statistics Received DNS Packets 0 Invalid DNS Packets 0 DNS Requests 0 Cache Hits 0 Forwarded Requests 0 Cache Hitrate 9 0 Successfully Answered Queries 0 Server Failures 0 Fig 166 Local Services gt DNS gt Statistics In the Local Services gt DNS gt Statisticsmenu the following statistical values are dis played Fields in the DNS Statistics menu Field Description Received DNS Packets Shows the number of received DNS packets addressed direct to your device including the response packets for forwarded re quests Invalid DNS Packets Shows the number of invalid DNS packets received and ad dressed direct to your device
378. mbH stored in the working memory RAM The contents of the RAM are lost if the device is switched off So if you modify your configuration and want to keep these changes for the next time you start your device you must save the modified configuration in the flash memory before switching off The Save configuration button over the navigation area of the GUI This configuration is then saved in the flash in a file with the name boot When you start your device the boot configuration file is used by default Actions The files in the flash memory can be copied moved erased and newly created It is also possible to transfer configuration files between your device and a host via HTTP Configuration file format The file format of the configuration file allows encryption and ensures compatibility when restoring the configuration on the gateway in various system software versions This is a CSV format which can be read and modified easily In addition you can view the corres ponding file clearly using Microsoft Excel for example The administrator can store encryp ted backup files for the configuration When the configuration is sent by e mail e g for sup port purposes confidential configuration data can be protected fully if required You can save or import files with the actions Export configuration Export configuration with status information and Load configuration If you want to save a configuration file with the action Export co
379. me of the filter Service Select one of the preconfigured services The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following O AEN VILE e apple qt O auth e charge o elieaes d e daytime e dhep ORGS Cara The default value is User defined Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches any protocol Type Only for Protocol TCMP bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description Select the type Possible values Any Echo reply Destination unreach able Source quench Redirect Echo Time exceeded Timestamp Timestamp reply See RFC 792 The default value is Any Connection State With Protocol TCP you can define a filter that takes the status of the TCP connections into account Possible values e Established All TCP packets that would not open any new TCP connection on routing over the gateway match the filter e Any default value All TCP packets match the filter Destination IP Ad Enter the destination IP address of the data packets and the dress Netmask corresponding netmask Destination Port Range Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Enter a destination port number or a range of destination port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range Source IP Address Enter the
380. melpunt worden ingeleverd O s mbolo com um caixote de lixo riscado que se encontra no aparelho significa que o aparelho no fim da sua vida til deve ser eliminado separadamente do lixo dom stico nos centros de recol ha adequados D4 be be Ba bebe Ba De Be De Da Da rial WLAN Chapter 4 Basic configuration You can use the Dime Manager IP address assignment and the GUI other configuration steps for the basic configuration of your device The basic configuration is explained below step by step A detailed online help system gives you extra support This user s guide assumes you have the following basic knowledge e Basic knowledge of network structure e Knowledge of basic network terminology such as server client and IP address e Basic knowledge of using Microsoft Windows operating systems The Companion DVD also supplied includes all the tools that you need for the configura tion and management of your device You can find other useful applications on the Internet at www teldat de 4 1 Presettings 4 1 1 Preconfigured data You have three ways of accessing your device in your network to perform configuration tasks a Dynamic IP address In ex works state your device is set to DHCP client mode which means that when it is connected to the network it is automatically assigned an IP address if a DHCP server is run You can then access your device for configuration purposes using the IP ad dress assigned by t
381. mp Accounting default value e System e Accounting 20 2 IP Accounting In modern networks information about the type and number of data packets sent and re ceived over the network connections is often collected for commercial reasons This inform ation is extremely important for Internet Service Providers that bill their customers by data volume However there are also non commercial reasons for detailed network accounting If for example you manage a server that provides different kinds of network services it is useful for you to know how much data is generated by the individual services Your device contains the IP Accounting function which enables you to collect a lot of useful information about the IP network traffic each individual IP session 20 2 1 Interfaces In this menu you can configure the IP Accounting function individually for each interface Interfaces Options View 20 per page Filter in None v equal j Go IP Accounting terface Select all Deselect all 1 eni 0 O 2 eni 4 F Page 1 items 1 2 C oK Cancel _ Fig 193 External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Interfaces In the External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Interfaces menu a list of all interfaces con figured on your device is shown For each entry you can activate IP Accounting by setting the checkmark In the IP Accounting column you do not need to click each entry individu ally Usi
382. n R A name used in IP networks instead of the corresponding address A host name consists of an ASCII string that uniquely identifies the Glossary HTTP Hub IAE ICMP ICV Identify malicious callers intercept IEEE IETF Index Infrastructure mode Inquiry Internal call tone Teldat GmbH host computer HyperText Transfer Protocol Network component used to connect several network components together to form a local network star shaped ISDN connection unit ISDN connection socket Internet Control Message Protocol Integrity Check Value You have to request this performance feature from T Com The company will provide you with further information on the procedure If you enter code 77 during a call or after the caller has ended a call you hear the engaged tone from the exchange the caller s tele phone number is stored in the exchange ISDN telephones can also use separate functions for this performance feature For more in formation on this function please see your user s guide The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE A large global association of engineers which continuously works on stand ards in order to ensure different devices can work together Internet Engineering Task Force The index from 0 9 is fixed Every external multiple subscriber number entered is assigned to an index You need this index when configuring performance features using the telephone s codes e
383. n edit the existing client links in the Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Client Link gt g menu The Client Mode can be operated in infrastructure mode or in ad hoc mode In a network in infrastructure mode all clients communicate with each other via access points only There is no direct communication between the individual clients In ad hoc mode an access client can be used as central interface between a number of terminals In this way devices such as computers and printers can be wirelessly intercon nected 10 1 4 1 Edit Choose the pl icon to edit existing entries Radio Settings Client Link Basic Parameters Network Name SSID Security Settings Security Mode Inactive OK Cancel Fig 74 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Client Link gt The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Client Link gt g menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Network Name SSID Enter the name of the wireless network SSID Enter an ASCII string with a maximum of 32 characters Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Fields in the Security Settings menu Field Description Security Mode Select the security mode encryption and authentication for the wireless network Possible values e Inactive default value Neither encryption nor authentica tion e WEP 40 WEP 40 bits e WEP 104 WEP 104 bits e WPA None Only for Client Mode Ad Hoc WPA None e Only for WPA PSK Client Mode Inf
384. n only 2 antenna are used for each of the 2 wireless mod ules These are both sending and receiving antenna There is no third receiving an tenna this is MIMO 2T2R operating mode However gross rates of 300 Mbps are possible The receiving sensitivity decreases slightly Only 2 antenna connections are required to operate bridgelink with dual polar isation antenna Antenna should be Lambda 2 or a multiple of this In bintec WIx065n the antenna are 55 mm apart 2 4 GHz Lambda 2 corresponds to 6 15 cm 5 GHz Lambda 2 corresponds to 2 72 cm Devices with 802 11n support can use up to 3 antenna per wireless module The assign ment of the existing 4 antenna connectors is shown in the following graphic 3 Installation Teldat GmbH Ant 1 Ant 2 WLAN 2 Ant 2 Ant 1 y WLAN 1 S Ops i ari gran Opie Fig 21 Antenna configuration for bintec WIx065n devices 3 4 4 LEDs The LEDs show the radio status radio activity Ethernet activity and LED states of your device The LED states are indicated by combinations of the LEDs which are explained in detail in this chapter During the heating phase the red Failure LED flashes The other LEDs then come on dur ing booting if the units are initialised Note Note that the number of active WLAN LEDs depends on the number of existing wire less modules The LEDs on bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n are arranged as follows Failure Status WLAN 1 lt WLAN 2 lt WLAN
385. nable VLAN Enable or disable the specified bridge group for VLAN The function is enabled with Enabled The function is not activated by default Management VID Select the VLAN ID of the VLAN in which your device is to oper ate bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Chapter 10 Wireless LAN In the case of wireless LAN or Wireless LAN WLAN Wireless Local Area Network this relates to the creation of a network using wireless technology Network functions Like a wired network a WLAN offers all the main network functions Access to servers files printers and the e mail system is just as reliable as company wide Internet access Because the devices do not require any cables the great advantage of WLAN is that there are no building related restrictions i e the device location does not depend on the position and number of connections Currently applicable standard IEEE 802 11 In the case of 802 11 WLANs all the functions of a wired network are possible WLAN transmits inside and outside buildings with a maximum of 100 mW IEEE 802 11g is currently the most widespread standard for wireless LANs and offers a maximum data transmission rate of 54 mbps This procedure operates in the radio fre quency range of 2 4 GHz which ensures that parts of the building are penetrated as effect ively as possible with a low transmission power that poses no health risks A 802 11g compatible standard is 802 11b
386. nal Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description SNMP Trap Broadcast Select whether the transfer of SNMP traps is to be activated Teldat GmbH 20 External Reporting Field Description ing Your device then sends SNMP traps to the LAN s broadcast ad dress The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default SNMP Trap UDP Port Only if SNMP Trap Broadcasting is enabled Enter the number of the UDP port to which your device is to send SNMP traps Any whole number is possible The default value is 162 SNMP Trap Com Only if SNMP Trap Broadcasting is enabled munity Enter a new SNMP code This must be sent by the SNMP Man ager with every SNMP request so that this is accepted by your device A character string of between 0 and 255 characters is possible The default value is SNMP Trap 20 4 2 SNMP Trap Hosts In this menu you specify the IP addresses to which your device is to send the SNMP traps In the External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Hosts menu a list of all configured SN MP trap hosts is displayed 20 4 2 1 New Select the Newbutton to create additional SNMP trap hosts 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH SNMP Trap Options SNMP Trap Hosts Basic Parameters IP Address OK Cancel Fig 198 External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Hosts gt New The menu External Repor
387. naviga tion Configuring the WLAN Adapter under Windows XP After installing the drivers for your WLAN card Windows XP set up a new connection in the network environment Proceed as follows to configure the Wireless LAN connection 1 Click on Start gt Settings and double click on Network Connections gt Wireless Network Connection Teldat GmbH 4 Basic configuration 2 On the left hand side select Change Advanced Settings 3 Go to the Wireless networks tab 4 Click Add Proceed as follows 1 Enter a Network Name e g Client 1 2 Set Network Authentication to WPA2 PSK 3 Set Data Encryption to AES 4 Under Network Key and Confirm Network Key enter the configured preshared key 5 Exit each menu with OK Note Windows XP allows several menus to be modified Depending on the configuration the path to the wireless network connection you want to configure may be different to that described above Configuring the WLAN Adapter under Windows 7 A popup window informs you about all wireless networks within reach All you have to do is to configure your connection 1 First click the WLAN icon in the system tray of the task bar Now Windows 7 displays you all wireless networkswithin your reach 2 Select the VSS of your device and click Connect 3 In the opening window enter the preshared key you have configured for your VSS and click OK 4 7 Setting up a bridge link If you run your
388. ncing Groups gt Advanced Settings menu The interface s load bal ancing status now varies according to the status of the assigned host surveillance entry Select the IP address for the route to be monitored You can choose from the IP addresses you have entered in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts gt New menu under Monitored IP Address and which are monitored with the aid of the Action to be executed field Action Monitor 12 3 2 Special Session Handling Special Session Handling enables you to route part of the data traffic to your device via a particular interface This data traffic is excluded from the Load Balancing function You can use the Special Session Handling function with online banking for example to ensure that the HTTPS data traffic is sent to a particular link Since a check is run in online banking to see whether all the data traffic comes from the same source data transmission using Load Balancing might be terminated at times without Special Session Handling The Networking gt Load Balancing gt Special Session Handling menu displays a list of entries If you have not configured any entries the list is empty Every entry contains parameters which describe the properties of a data packet in more or less detail The first data packet which the properties configured here match specifies the route for particular subsequent data packets Which data packets are subsequently routed via this route is confi
389. nction the person you are calling can see the telephone number of the connection you are calling from on their telephone display This telephone number transmitted during an external call is called the outgoing telephone number Packet switching Password Authentication Protocol The call is held temporarily in the exchange The main difference to on hold The call is interrupted the receiver can be replaced Can be used for brokering Possible in T Net T ISDN and PBXs The ter minal must have MFC and the R key Private Branch Exchange The features offered by a PBX are manufacturer specific and enable operation of exchanges free internal calls callback on busy and conference calls among other things PBXs are used e g for office communication voice text and data transfer Private Branch Exchange PBX Private Automatic Branch Exchange A point to point ISDN access includes a PBX number and an exten sion numbers range The PBX number is used to reach the PBX A certain terminal of the PBX is then dialled via one of the extension numbers of the extension numbers range The PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Asso ciation is an industry association founded in 1989 that represents credit card sized I O cards such as WLAN cards Abbreviation for pulse dialling method Conventional dialling proced ure in the telephone network Dialled numbers are represented by a defined number of dc impulses The pulse dialling
390. nd Version 273 Send Certificate Chains 345 Send Certificate Request Payloads 345 Send CRLs 345 Send information to 455 Send Initial Contact Message 344 Send Key Hash Payloads 345 Index Serial Number 81 Serial Port 131 131 Server 390 Server Address 405 Server Timeout 110 Server URL 405 Server Failures 385 Server IP Address 108 113 Service 234 244 247 262 362 Set status 405 Set Time 89 Set COS value 802 1p Layer 2 250 Set Date 89 Set DSCP TOS value Layer 3 250 Set interface status 405 Severity 447 Short Guard Interval 156 159 204 Short Retry Limit 156 159 204 Shortest Path Tree 482 Show passwords and keys in clear text 87 Signal 177 SignaldBm 185 Signal dBm 218 466 468 469 471 472 473 474 475 Silent Deny 267 Silent Deny 231 Slave Access Points 196 Slave AP location 193 Slave AP configuration 195 SMS Device 451 SMTP Authentication 450 SMTP Server 450 SNMP 99 105 452 SNMP Version 105 SNMP Listen UDP Port 105 SNMP Read Community 87 SNMP Trap Broadcasting 452 SNMP Trap Community 452 SNMP Trap Hosts 453 SNMP Trap Options 452 SNMP Trap UDP Port 452 SNMP Write Community 87 SNRdB 468 475 Index Software 8 Configuration 435 Source 362 Source Interface 226 244 287 Source Location 405 Source Port 226 234 319 Source Port Range 234 244 247 262 Source Location 220 437 Source File Name 437 Source IP Address 400 4
391. nd propagates its present IP address 18 3 1 DynDNS Update In the Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Update menu a list of all configured DynDNS registrations for updating is displayed 18 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up further DynDNS registrations to be updated 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH DynDNS Update DynDNs Provider Basic Parameters Host Name E Interface Selectone User Name ES Password eseossso Provider dyndns v Enable update DEnabled Advanced Settings Mail Exchanger Mx Wildcard DEnabled oK Cancel Fig 168 Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Update gt New The menu Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Update gt New consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Host Name Enter the complete host name as registered with the DynDNS provider Interface Select the WAN interface whose IP address is to be propagated over the DynDNS service e g the interface of the Internet Ser vice Provider User Name Enter the user name as registered with the DynDNS provider Password Enter the password as registered with the DynDNS provider Provider Select the DynDNS provider with which the above data is re gistered A choice of DynDNS providers is already available in the uncon figured state and their protocols are supported Other DynDNS providers can be configured in the Local Ser vices gt DynDNS Client gt DynDN
392. ndard PoE injector part number 5530000082 Note bintec WIx040n series products are supplied without a mains unit All devices must be earthed Note To restrict power in the event of a fault the 24 V DC electric circuit is to be protected with an external 2 A fuse on the installation side for bintec WIx040n The relay contact must also be protected externally with a 1 A fuse AC or 2 A fuse DC You can set up further connections as required e Serial connection For alternative configuration possibilities connect the serial interface of your PC COM1 or COM2 to the serial interface of the gateway console However configuration via the serial interface is not provided by default Installation The access points can be either be used as tabletop units or can be wall mounted with hangers integrated into the housing Optionally they can be mounted with a top hat rail Use as a table top device Attach the four self adhesive feet on the bottom of the device Place your device on a solid level base Wallmounting To attach the bintec WIx040n series devices to the wall use the brackets on the back of the housing Optional wall mounting with theft protection part number 5020590400 and DIN rail part number 5000592600 is available Teldat GmbH 3 Installation Warning Before drilling make sure that there are no building installations where you are drilling If gas electricity water or waste water lines are dam
393. net port to which the modem is connected 15 WAN Teldat GmbH Field Description When using the internal DSL modem select here the EthoA in terface configured in Physical Interfaces gt ATM gt Profiles gt New e g ethoa50 0 User Name Enter the user name Password Enter the password Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Only activate this option if you have Internet access with a flat rate charge Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle interval in seconds This determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data pack et and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the timeout The default value is 300 Example 10 for FTP transmission 20 for LAN to LAN transmis sion 90 for Internet connections Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP address or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Get IP Address default value Your device is automatic ally assigned a temporarily valid IP address from the provider e Static You enter a static IP address Default Route Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be Teldat GmbH 15 WAN Field Description defined as the default
394. network also partially occupies the adjacent chan nels In the case of manual channel selection please make sure first that the APs actually sup port these channels Transmit Power Displays the transmission power in dBm You can select another transmission power With OK you apply the settings Select the access points that your WLAN controller shall manage In the Manage column click on the desired entries or click on Select all in order to select all entries Click the Deselect all button to disable all entries and to then select individual entries if required e g for large lists Click on Start in order to install the WLAN and automatically assign the frequencies Note If there are not enough licences available the message The maximum number of slave access points that can be supported has been exceeded Please check your li cences If this message is displayed then you should obtain additional licences if ap propriate During the installation of the WLAN and the allocation of frequencies on the messages dis played you will see how far the installation has progressed The display is continuously up dated Provided that non overlapping wireless channels are located for all access points the con figuration that is set in the Wizard is transferred to the access points When the installation is complete you will see a list of the Managed access points Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Under Configure th
395. nfiguration or Export configuration with status information you can choose whether the configuration file is saved encrypted or without encryption A Caution If you have saved a configuration file in an old format via the SNMP shell with the put command there is no guarantee that it can be reloaded to the device As a result the old format is no longer recommended Options Currently Installed Software Boss V 9 1 Rev 1 IPSec from 2012 06 29 00 00 00 System Logic 1 1 Software and Configuration Options Action No Action v Go Fig 190 Maintenance gt Software amp Configuration gt Options Teldat GmbH 19 Maintenance The Maintenance gt Software Configuration gt Optionsmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Currently Installed Software menu Field Description BOSS Shows the current software version loaded on your device Shows the current system logic loaded on your device System Logic ADSL Logic Shows the current version of the ADSL logic loaded on your device Fields in the Software and Configuration Options menu Field Description Action Select the action you wish to execute After each task a window is displayed showing the other steps that are required Possible values e No Action default value e Export configuration The configuration file Current File Name in Flash is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is displayed in which you c
396. nfigure an automatic availability check for hosts or interfaces and automatic ping tests You can monitor temperature with devices from the bintec WI series Note This function cannot be configured on your device for connections that are authentic ated via a RADIUS server 18 6 1 Hosts A list of all monitored hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts menu 18 6 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional monitoring tasks bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Hosts Interfaces Temperature Ping Generator Host Parameters Group 1D New ID Y Trigger Monitored IP Address Default Gateway Y Source IP Address Automatic Y Interval fo Seconds Successful Trials EA Unsuccessful Trials ET Action Interface Action to be performed Disable v Select one v Add OK Cancel Fig 177 Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts gt New The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Host Parameters menu Field Description Group ID If the availability of a group of hosts or the default gateway is to be monitored by your device select an ID for the group or the default gateway The group IDs are automatically created from 0 to 255 lf an entry has not yet been created a new group is created using the New ID option If entries have been created you can sele
397. ng the options Select all or Deselect all you can enable or disable the IP account ing function for all interfaces simultaneously 20 2 2 Options In this menu you configure general settings for IP Accounting bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH Interfaces Options Log Format INET d t a c i r t ANARAR p 0 P O s oK Cancel Fig 194 External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Options In the External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Options menu you can define the Log Format of the IP accounting messages The messages can contain character strings in any order sequences separated by a slash e g t or n or defined tags Possible format tags Format tags for IP Accounting messages Field Description d Date of the session start in the format DD MM YY t Time of the session start in the format HH MM SS a Duration of the session in seconds cC Protocol i Source IP Address r Source Port Sot Source interface index l Destination IP Address R Destination Port oF Destination interface index p Packets sent 0 Octets sent P Packets received O Octets received S Serial number for accounting message A By default the following format instructions are entered in the Log Format field INET sdsttatcti r tf gt 31 5R 3F3p303P30 s 20 3 Alert Service It was previously possible to send syslog messages from the router to any syslog host De pendin
398. nly for Operation Mode Access Point or Access Cli ent with Client Mode Ad Hoc Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Enter the interval for the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM The DTIM field is a data field in transmitted beacons that in forms clients about the window to the next broadcast or multic ast transmission lf clients operate in power save mode they come alive at the right time and receive the data Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 2 RTS Threshold Here you select how the RTS CTS mechanism is to be switched on off If you choose User defined you can specify in the input field the data packet length threshold in bytes 1 2346 as of which the RTS CTS mechanism is to be used This makes sense if several clients that are not in each other s wireless range are run in one access point The mechanism can also be switched on off independently of the data packet length by selecting the 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description value Always onor Always off default value Short Guard Interval Enable this function to reduce the guard interval time between transmission of two data symbols from 800 ns to 400 ns Short Retry Limit Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Enter the maximum number of attempts to send a frame This value must be less than or equal to the value specified in R
399. nly for Security Mode wPA Enterprise ds Select whether the EAP preauthentification function is to be ac tivated This function tells your device that WLAN clients which are already connected to another access point can first carry out 802 1x authentication as soon as they are within range Such WLAN clients can then simply connect over the existing network connection with your device The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the menu Client load balancing for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Field Description Max number of clients hard limit Enter the maximum number of clients that can be connected to this wireless network SSID Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description The maximum number of clients that can register with a wire less module depends on the specifications of the respective WLAN module This maximum is distrubuted across all wireless networks configured for this radio module No more new wire less networks can be created and a warning message will ap pear if the maximum number of clients is reached Possible values are whole numbers between 1 and 254 The default value is 32 Max number of clients soft limit Not all devices support this function To avoid a radio module being fully utilised you can set a soft restriction on the number of connected clients If this number is reached new connection q
400. nnected with the caller as soon as they have used the telephone again and replaced the receiver This function can only be used on telephones that permit suffix dial ling An automatic callback from an inquiry connection is not pos sible bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Glossary Automatic callback on busy CCBS Automatic callback on no reply CCBS Automatic clearing of Internet connec tion ShortHold Automatic outside line Automatic redialling B channel B channel BACP BAP Teldat GmbH You urgently need to contact a business partner or internal sub scriber However when you call you always hear the engaged tone If you were to receive notification that the subscriber had ended the call your chance of reaching them would be very good With Call back on Busy you can reach the engaged subscriber once they have replaced the receiver at the end of the call Your telephone rings When you lift the receiver a connection to the required sub scriber is set up automatically An internal Callback on Busy is de leted automatically after 30 minutes The external Callback on Busy is deleted after a period specified by the exchange approx 45 minutes Manual deletion before this period has elapsed is also possible You urgently need to contact a business partner or internal sub scriber When you call them you always hear the ringing tone but your business partner is not close to the telephone and does n
401. nnection of an analogue terminal In the case of an ISDN ter minal terminal adapter with a b interface the connected analogue terminal is able to use the supported T ISDN performance features Authentication Authorisation Accounting PIN or password A rule that defines a set of packets that should or should not be transmitted by the device An active component of a network consisting of wireless parts and optionally also of wired parts Several WLAN clients terminals can log in to an access point AP and communicate via the AP data If Glossary Access protection Accounting Active probing Ad hoc network ADSL AH Alphanumeric dis play Analogue connec tions Analogue terminals Analogue voice transmission Announcement Teldat GmbH the optional wired Ethernet is connected the signals between the two physical media the wireless interface and wired interface are bridged bridging Filters can be used to prevent external persons from accessing the data on the computers in your LAN These filters are a basic func tion of a firewall Recording of connection data e g date time connection duration charging information and number of data packets transferred Active probing takes advantage of the fact that as standard access points are to respond to client requests Clients therefore send probe requests on all channels and wait for responses from an ac cess point in the vicinity The response pa
402. no authentication In this case se lect this option DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server from the connection partner or sends these to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This makes it possible to switch to a backup connection more quickly in the event of line faults The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Field Description MTU Enter the maximum packet size Maximum Transfer Unit MTU in bytes that is allowed for the connection With default value Automatic the value is specified by link control at connection setup If you disable Automatic you can enter a value Possible values are 1 to 8192 The default value is 0 15 1 2 PPTP A list of all PPTP interfaces is displayed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPTP menu In this menu you configure an Internet connection that uses the Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP to set up a connection This is require
403. none of the events occurs e One not The operation is initiated if one of the events does not occur Reboot device after Only if Command Type Reboot Enter the timespan in seconds that must elapse after occur rence of the event until the device is restarted The default value is 60 seconds MIB SNMP Variable to add edit Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select the MIB table in which the MIB variable whose value shall be changed is saved First select the System then the MIB Table Only the MIB tables present in the respective area are displayed Command Mode Only if Command Type M7B SNMP Select how the MIB entry is to be manipulated Possible settings e Change existing entry default value An existing entry shall be modified e Create new MIB entry Anew entry shall be created Index Variables Only if Command Type M7B SNMP Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Where required select MIB variables to uniquely identify a spe cific data set in MIB Table e g ConnIfIndex The unique identification of a particular table entry is derived from the com bination of Index Variable usually an index variable which is flagged with and Index Value Use Index Variables to create more entries with Add Trigger Status Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select what status the event must have in order to modify the MIB variable as defined Possible values e Active default value The value of the MIB varia
404. not cause a peer to set up an Internet connection to enable an IPSec tunnel over the Internet This pos sibility is created with IPSec callback Using a direct ISDN call to a peer you can signal that you are online and waiting for the peer to set up an IPSec tunnel over the Internet If the called peer currently has no connection to the Internet the ISDN call causes a connec tion to be set up This ISDN call costs nothing depending on country as it does not have Teldat GmbH 16 VPN to be accepted by your device The identification of the caller from his or her ISDN number is enough information to initiate setting up a tunnel To set up this service you must first configure a call number for IPSec callback on the passive side in the Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt MSN Configuration gt New menu The value Service is available for this purpose in the IPSec field This entry ensures that incoming calls for this number are routed to the IPSec service If callback is active the peer is caused to initiate setting up an IPSec tunnel by an ISDN call as soon as this tunnel is required If callback is set to passive setting up a tunnel to the peer is always initiated if an ISDN call is received on the relevant number MSN in menu Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt MSN Configuration gt New for Service IPSec This ensures that both peers are reachable and that the connection can be set up over the Inter net The only case in which callb
405. ns empty authentication data in the tunnel setup messages are not sent and are ignored Fields in the LAC Mode Parameters menu Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Remote IP Address Enter the fixed IP address of the LNS used as the destination address for connections based on this profile The destination must be a device that can behave like an LNS UDP Source Port Enter how the port number to be used as the source port for all outgoing L2TP connections based on this profile is to be de termined By default the Fixed option is disabled which means that ports are dynamically assigned to the connections that use this pro file If you want to enter a fixed port enable the Fixed option Se lect this option if you encounter problems with the firewall or NAT The available values are 0 to 65535 UDP Destination Port Enter the destination port number to be used for all calls based on this profile The remote LNS that receives the call must mon itor this port on L2TP connections Possible values are 0 to 65535 The default value is 1701 RFC 2661 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Local IP Address Enter the IP address to be used as the source address for all L2TP connections based on this profile If this field is left empty your device uses the IP address of the interface used to reach the remote IP Address by the L2TP tun nel
406. ns for available wireless networks in the background The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 70 dBm Scan Interval Indicates the interval in milliseconds after which the system scans for available wireless networks The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 5000 ms Channel Sweep Indicates how many frequencies are scanned in the back ground The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 2 The value 0 disables the scan in the background The value 1 enables the scan of all avail able frequencies Min Period Active Scan Displays the minimum active scanning time for a frequency in milliseconds The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 10 ms Max Period Active Scan Displays the maximum active scanning time for a frequency in milliseconds The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 40 ms Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description Min Period Passive Scan Displays the minimum passive scanning time for a frequency in milliseconds The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile Custom Roaming The default value is 20 ms Max Period Passive Displays the maximum passive scanning time for a frequency in Scan milliseconds The value can only be modified for Roaming Profile
407. ns of dynamic keys based on the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP and offers PSK preshared keys or Extens ible Authentication Protocol EAP via 802 1x e g RADIUS for user authentication Authentication using EAP is usually used in large wireless LAN installations as an authen tication instance in the form of a server e g a RADIUS server is used in these cases PSK preshared keys are usually used in smaller networks such as those seen in SoHo Small office Home office Therefore all the wireless LAN subscribers must know the PSK be cause it is used to generate the session key WPA 2 The enhancement of WPA is WPA 2 In WPA 2 the 802 11i standard is not only imple mented for the first time in full but another encryption algorithm AES Advanced Encryption Standard is also used Access control 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH You can control which clients can access your wireless LAN via your device by creating an Access Control List Access Control oder MAC Filter In the Access Control List you enter the MAC addresses of the clients that may access your wireless LAN All other clients have no access Security measures To protect the data transferred over the WLAN the following configuration steps should be carried out in the Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Wireless Networks VSS gt New menu where necessary Change the access passwords for your device Change the default SSID Network Name SSID default of
408. nsists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu for operating mode Access Point Field Description Channel Plan Only for Operation Mode Access Point and Channel Auto Select the desired channel plan The channel plan makes a preselection when a channel is se lected This ensures that no channels overlap i e a distance of four channels is maintained between the channels used This is useful if more access points are used with overlapping radio cells Possible values e A11 All channels can be dialled when a channel is selected e Auto Depending on the region operation band wireless mode and bandwidth the channels that have a distance of 4 channels are provided e User defined Select the desired channels Selected Channels Only for Channel Plan User defined The currently selected channels are displayed here With Add you can add channels If all available channels are displayed you cannot add any more entries Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description You can delete entries with the icon Beacon Period Only for Operation Mode Access Point or Access Cli ent with Client Mode Ad Hoc Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Enter the time in milliseconds between the sending of two beacons This value is transmitted in Beacon and Probe Response Frames Possible values are 1to 65535 The default value is 100 ms DTIM Period O
409. nsures that large data packets are fragmented according to the available upload bandwidth Real Time Jitter Control is useful for small upload bandwidths lt 800 kbps Activate or deactivate Real Time Jitter Control The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Control Mode Only for Real Time Jitter Control enabled Select the mode for optimising voice transmission Possible values 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description e A11 RTP Streams All RTP streams are optimised The function activates the RTP stream detection mechanism for the automatic detection of RTP streams In this mode the Real Time Jitter Control is activated as soon as an RTP stream has been detected e Inactive Voice data transmission is not optimised e Controlled RTP Streams only This mode is used if either the VoIP Application Layer Gateway ALG or the VoIP Media Gateway MGW is active Real Time Jitter Control is activated by the control instances ALG or MGW e Always Real Time Jitter Control is always active even if no real time data is routed Queues Policies Configure the desired QoS queues For each class created from the class plan which is associated with the selected interface a queue is generated automatically and displayed here only for data traffic classified as outgoing and for data traffic classified as moving in both directions Add new entries with Add The Edit Queue Policy menu o
410. nter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative Field Description DNS server 16 1 6 Options IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Global Options Enable IPSec DEnabled Delete complete IPSec configuration fm IPSec Debug Level Debus Y Advanced Settings IPSec over TCP CONCP Path Finder Technology Send Initial Contact Message MEnabled Sync SAs with ISP interface state Denabled Use Zero Cookies MEnabled Zero Cookie Size laz Bit Dynamic RADIUS Authentication Denabled PKI Handling Options Ignore Certificate Request Payloads DEnabled Send Certificate Request Payloads Enabled Send Certificate Chains Enabled Send CRLs DEnabted Send Key Hash Payloads Enabled OK Cancel Fig 147 VPN gt IPSec gt Options The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Options menu Field Description Enable IPSec Select whether you want to activate IPSec The function is enabled with Enabled The function is active as soon as an IPSec Peer is configured Delete complete IPSec If you click the icon delete the complete IPSec configuration configuration of your device bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description This cancels all settings made during the IPSec configurati
411. nterface 100 mbps LWL Single Mode LC or LWL Multimode LC 1x 100 Base FX SX with SFP module Available sockets Serial interface V 24 9 pin Sub D connector Relay switching contact N O 42 V AC 1 A 30 V DC 2A potential free software con figurable switchable Ethernet interface RJ45 socket 3 Installation Teldat GmbH Property Value Antennas Antenna connection RTNC socket Transmit Power WLAN max 100 mW 20 dBm EIRP Standards amp Guidelines R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EN 60950 1 IEC60950 EN 60950 22 EN 301489 1 EN301489 17 EN 55022 EN 300328 1 EN 301893 EN 302502 EN 50371 Buttons Reset and reset to ex work settings possible with two but tons 1x config reset 1x HW reset To ensure safe operation the WI series devices have a connection to earth The minimum cross section of the earth lead should be 1 5 mmX The distance between the device and the connection to earth should be as short as possible For the bintec WIx065n devices the connection to earth is under the cover 3 4 7 Reset If the configuration is incorrect or if your device cannot be accessed you can reset the device to the ex works standard settings using the Reset button on the bottom of the device Practically al existing configuration data will then be ignored only the current user pass words are retained Configurations stored in the device are not deleted and can if required be reloaded
412. nterface Select the interface for which a configured rule chain is to be as signed Rule Chain Select a rule chain Silent Deny Define whether the sender is to be informed if an IP packet is denied e Enabled default value The sender is not informed bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description e Disabled The sender receives an ICMP message Reporting Method Define whether a syslog message is to be generated if a packet is denied Possible values e No report No syslog message e Info default value A syslog message is generated with the protocol number source IP address and source port number e Dump A syslog message is generated with the contents of the first 64 bytes of the denied packet 12 6 Drop In Drop in mode allows you to split a network into smaller segments without having to divide the IP network into subnets Several interfaces can be combined in a drop in group and as signed to a network to do this All of the interfaces are then configured with the same IP ad dress Within a segment network components which are connected to a connection can then be grouped and for example be protected by firewall Data traffic from network components between individual segments which are assigned to different ports are then controlled ac cording to the configured firewall rules 12 6 1 Drop In Groups The Networking gt Drop In gt Drop In Groups menu displays a
413. nts gt New The Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Rendezvous Points gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the PIM Rendezvous Point Settings menu Field Description Multicast Group Range Select the Multicast group for the PIM Rendezvouz point You can enter 411 Groups default value or specify a multicast network segment by selecting Specific Range Multicast Group Ad dress Only if Multicast Group Range Specific Range bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 14 Multicast Field Description Here you enter the IP address of the multicast network seg ment Multicast Group Prefix Length Only if Multicast Group Range Specific Range Here you enter the network mask length of the multicast net work segment 224 0 0 0 4 indicates the entire multicast class D segment Possible values 4 default value to 32 Rendezvous Point IP Address Enter the IP address or the hostname of the rendezvous points Precedence Enter the value for pimGroupMappingPrecedence to be used for static RP configurations This allows precise control over which configuration is to be replaced by this static configuration When the function is activated pimStaticRPOverrideDynamic is ignored The absolute values of this object are only significant on the local router and need not be synchronised with other routers The function is deactivated with the default value 0 If the func tion is not activated by setting a valu
414. nu Field Description DHCP MAC Address DHCP Hostname DHCP Broadcast Flag Proxy ARP Only for Address Mode DHCP If Use built in is activated default setting the hardware MAC address of the Ethernet interface is used In the case of physical interfaces the current MAC address is entered by default If you disable Use built in you enter an MAC address for the virtual interface e g 00 e1 f 9 06 bf 03 Some providers use hardware independent MAC addresses to allocate their clients IP addresses dynamically If your provider has assigned you a MAC address enter this here Only for Address Mode DHCP Enter the host name requested by the provider The maximum length of the entry is 45 characters Only for Address Mode DHCP Choose whether or not the BROADCAST bit is set in the DHCP requests for your device Some DHCP servers that assign IP addresses by UNICAST do not respond to DHCP requests with the set BROADCAST bit In this case it is necessary to send DHCP requests in which this bit is not set In this case disable this option The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of defined remote terminals The function is activated by selecting Enabled Field Description The function is disabled by default TCP MSS Clamping Select whether your device is to apply MSS Clamping To pr
415. of channels you can select depends on the country setting Please consult the data sheet for your device Access Point mode Configuring the network name SSID in Access Point mode means that wireless networks can be logically separated from each other but they can still physically interfere with each other if they are operating on the same or closely adjacent wireless channels So if you are operating two or more radio networks close to each other it is advisable to allocate the networks to Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description different channels Each of these should be spaced at least four channels apart as a network also partially occupies the adja cent channels In the case of manual channel selection please make sure first that the APs actually support these channels Possible values according to the selected wireless module pro file e For Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Possible values are 1 to 13 and Auto default value e For Operation Band 5 GHz Indoor Possible values are 36 40 44 48 and Auto default value e For Operation Band 5 GHz In Outdoor and 5 GHz Outdoor Only the Auto option is possible here Used Channel Only for managed APs Displays the channel that is currently in use Transmit Power Displays the transmission power You can select another trans mission power Possible values e Max default value The maximum antenna power is used OD els e 8 dB
416. of the file or select the file with 19 Maintenance Teldat GmbH Field Description Browse via the explorer finder Source Location Only for Action Update system software Select the source of the update Possible values e Local File default value The system software file is stored locally on your PC e HTTP Server The file is stored on a remote server specified in the URL e Current Software from Teldat Server The file is on the official Teldat update server URL Only for Source Location HTTP Server Enter the URL of the update server from which the system soft ware file is loaded Current File Name in Flash For Action Export configuration Select the configuration file to be exported Include certificates and keys For Action Export configuration Export configur ation with state information Define whether the selected Action should also be applied for certificates and keys The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Source File Name Only for Action Copy configuration Select the source file to be copied Destination File Name Only for Action Copy configuration Enter the name of the copy Select file Only for Action Rename configuration Delete con figurationor Delete software firmware Select the file or configuration to be renamed or deleted Field Description New File Name Only for Action Rename configuration Enter the ne
417. ogin Grace Time 600 Seconds Compression DEnabled TCP Keepalives MEnabled Logging Level information Y OK Cancel Fig 49 System Management gt Administrative Access gt SSH You need an SSH client application e g PUTTY to be able to reach the SSH Daemon If you wish to use SSH Login together with the PuTTY client you may need to comply with some special configuration requirements for which we have prepared FAQs You will find these in the Service Support section at www teldat de bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 7 System Management Teldat GmbH To be able to reach the shell of your device via an SSH client make sure the settings for the SSH Daemon and SSH client are the same Note If configuration of an SSH connection is not possible restart the device to initialise the SSH Daemon correctly The System Management gt Administrative Access gt SSHmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu SSH Secure Shell Parameters Field Value SSH service active Select whether the SSH Daemon is to be enabled for the inter face The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default SSH Port Here you can enter the port via which the SSH connection is to be established The default value is 22 Maximum number of concurrent connec tions Enter the maximum number of simultaneously active SSH con nections The default value is 1 Fields in the menu Aut
418. om the Teldat server e HTTP Server The latest software will be downloaded from an HTTP server that you define in Server URL e HTTPS Server The latest software will be downloaded from an HTTPS server that you define in Server URL e TFTP Server The latest software will be downloaded from an TFTP server that you define in Server URL Server URL For Command Type Software Update if Source Location not Current Software from Teldat Server Enter the URL of the server from which the desired software version is to be retrieved For Command Type Configuration Management with Action Import configurationor Export configura tion Enter the URL of the server from which a configuration file is to be retrieved or on which the configuration file is to be backed up File Name For Command Type Software Update Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Enter the file name of the software version For Command Type Certificate Management with Ac tion Import certificate Enter the file name of the certificate file Action For Command Type Configuration Management Select which operation is to be performed on a configuration file Possible values Import configuration default value e Export configuration e Rename configuration e Delete configuration e Copy configuration For Command Type Certificate Management Select which operation you wish to perform on a certificate file Possible values
419. on Glossary Teldat GmbH Spoofing Technique for reducing data traffic and thus saving costs espe cially in WANs SSID The Service Set Identifier SSID or Network Name refers to the wireless network code based on IEEE 802 11 SSL Secure Sockets Layer A technology now standard developed by Netscape which is generally used to secure HTTP traffic between a web browser and a web server STAC Data compression procedure Standard connection T ISDN Basic Rate Interface with the performance features Inquiry Brokering and Telephone Number Transmission The standard con nection contains three multiple subscriber numbers Static IP address A fixed IP address in contrast to a dynamic IP address Station guarding Deactivation of acoustic call signalling do not disturb Subaddressing In addition to the transmission of ISDN telephone numbers addition al information in the form of a subaddress can be transmitted from the caller to the called party over the D channel when the connec tion is set up Addressing that goes beyond the pure MSN which can be used e g specifically to locate several ISDN terminals that can be reached on one telephone number for a particular service In the called terminal e g a PC various applications can also be ad dressed and in some cases executed Costs are charged for the performance feature and it must be requested separately from the network operator Subnet A network scheme that divides individu
420. on Session Initiation Protocol Short Message Service If you have connected an SMS enabled terminal you can decide whether SMS receipt is to be permitted for the connection The ex works setting is no SMS receipt To receive an SMS with your SMS enabled terminal you must register once with the T Com SMS Ser vice One time registration is free You simply send an SMS contain ing ANMELD to the destination call number 8888 You then receive a free of charge confirmation of registration from the T Com SMS Service You can deregister your device or telephone number by sending an SMS containing ABMELD to the destination number 8888 Incoming SMS are then read out Information on which tele phones are SMS enabled can be obtained from T Punkt our cus tomer hotline 0800 330 1000 or on the Internet at ht tp www t com de You can connect SMS enabled telephones to your PBX and thus use the SMS performance feature in the T Com fixed network SMSs are forwarded to the recipient via the T Com SMS server To send an SMS with an SMS enabled terminal the telephone number 0193010 of the SMS server must be prefixed to the recipient num ber This telephone number is already stored in your PBX so manu al input of the server telephone is not necessary and does not need to be sent from the telephone To receive an SMS with your SMS enabled fixed network telephone you must register once with the Deutsche Telekom SMS Service Charges are made for sending
421. on Once the configuration is deleted you can start with a com pletely new IPSec configuration You can only delete the configuration if Enable IPSec not ac tivated IPSec Debug Level Select the priority of the syslog messages of the IPSec subsys tem to be recorded internally Possible values e Emergency highest priority e Alert O Cres jen cel e RETOR e Warning e Notice e Information Debug default value lowest priority Syslog messages are only recorded internally if they have a higher or identical priority to that indicated i e all messages generated are recorded at syslog level debug The Advanced Settings menu is for adapting certain functions and features to the special requirements of your environment i e mostly interoperability flags are set The default val ues are globally valid and enable your system to work correctly to other Teldat devices so that you only need to change these values if the remote terminal is a third party product or you know special settings are necessary These may be needed for example if the remote end operates with older IPSec implementations The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description IPSec over TCP Determine whether IPSec over TOP is to be used IPSec over TCP is based on NCP pathfinder technology This technology insures that data traffic IKE ESP AH between peers is integrated into a
422. on and message hash algorithms for IKE phase 2 on your default The combination of six encryption algorithms and two message hash algorithms gives 12 possible values in this field Encryption algorithms Encryption e 3DES default value 3DES is an extension of the DES al gorithm with an effective key length of 112 bits which is rated as secure It is the slowest algorithm currently supported e ALL All options can be used e AES Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of security against attacks and general speed The partner s AES key length is used here If this has also selected the parameter Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description AES a key length of 128 bits is used e AES 128 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 128 bits e AES 192 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 192 bits e AES 256 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of secur ity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 256 bits e Twofish Twofish was a final candidate for the AES Advanced Encryption Standa
423. on the configuration before the call is accepted Your device needs the necessary data for this which you should enter here First establish the type of authentication process that should be performed then enter a common password and two codes You get this informa tion for example from your Internet Service Provider ISP or the system administrator at your head office If the data you entered on your device is the same as the caller s data the call is accepted The call is rejected if the data is not the same Default Route With a default route all data is automatically forwarded to one connection if no other suit able route is available If you set up access to the Internet you must configure the route to your Internet Service Provider ISP as a default route If for example you configure a cor porate network connection only enter the route to the head office or branch office as a de fault route if you do not configure Internet access over your device If for example you configure both Internet access and a corporate network connection enter a default route to the ISP and a network route to the head office You can enter several default routes on your device but only one default route can be active at any one time If you enter several default routes be aware of differing values for Metric Activating NAT With Network Address Translation NAT you conceal your whole network to the outside world behind one IP address You shou
424. on to an internal host 12 2 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up NAT NAT Interfaces NAT Configuration Basic Parameters Description Interface Any v Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Specify original traffic Service User defined Protocol any y Source IP Address Netmask Tany S Original Destination IP Address Netmask Tany Y Replacement Values New Destination IP Address Netmask Host w 0 0 0 0 OK Cancel Fig 105 Networking gt NAT gt NAT Configuration gt New The menu Networking gt NAT gt NAT Configuration gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the NAT configuration Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Interface Select the interface for which NAT is to be configured Possible values e Any default value NAT is configured for all interfaces e lt Interface name gt Select one of the interfaces from the list Type of traffic Select the type of data traffic for which NAT is to be configured Possible values e incoming Destination NAT default value The data traffic that comes from outside e outgoing Source NAT Outgoing data traffic e excluding Without NAT Data traffic excluded from NAT NAT method Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT Select the NAT method for outgoing data traffic The starting point for choosing the NAT method is a NAT scen
425. onfiguration e Down The peer is initially not available after the configuration has been saved Description Enter a description of the peer that identifies it The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters Peer Address Enter the official IP address of the peer or its resolvable host name The entry can be omitted in certain configurations whereby your device then cannot initiate an IPSec connection Peer ID Select the ID type and enter the peer ID This entry is not necessary in certain configurations The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters Possible ID types e Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN e E mail Address e IPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name e Key ID Any string On the peer device this ID corresponds to the Local ID Value Internet Key Exchange Not available to devices in the WIxxxxn series These devices only support IKEv1 Select the version of the Internet Exchange Protocol to be used Possible values e TKEv1 default value Internet Key Exchange Protocol Ver sion 1 e IKEv2 Internet Kex Exchange Protocol Version 2 Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Authentication Method Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Select the authentication method Possible values e Preshared Keys default value If you do not use certific ates for the authentication you can select Preshared Keys These are configured during peer configuration in the IPSec Peers The presha
426. onfiguration of the interfaces or create virtual interfaces for special applica tions Here is a list of all of the interfaces logical Ethernet interfaces and others created in the subsystems configured in the System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces menu Use the eo to edit the settings of an existing interface bridge groups Ethernet interfaces in routing mode You can use the New button to create virtual interfaces However this is only needed in special applications e g BRRP Depending on the option selected different fields and options are available All the config uration options are listed below Note Please note If your device has obtained an IP address dynamically from a DHCP server operated in your network for the basic configuration the fallback IP address is deleted automat ically and your device will no longer function over this address However if you have set up a connection to the device over the fallback IP address or have assigned an IP address with the Dime Manager in the basic configuration you will only be able to access your device over this IP address The device will no longer obtain an IP configuration dynamically over DHCP Example of subnets If your device is connected to a LAN that consists of two subnets you should enter a second IP Address Netmask The first subnet has two hosts with the IP addresses 192 168 42 1 and 192 168 42 2 for example and the second s
427. onnection Indicates Down status for an interface or connection Indicates Blocked status for an interface or connection Indicates Going up status for an interface or connection Indicates that data traffic is encrypted Pompeo O a e lb o e Triggers a WLAN bandscan Displays the next page in a list ha a Displays the previous page in a list a oh You can select the following operating functions in the list view 5 Access and configuration Teldat GmbH GUI list options Update Interval Here you can set the interval in which the view is to be updated To do this enter a period in seconds in the input field and con Filter You can have the list entries filtered and displayed according to certain criteria You can determine the number of entries displayed per page by entering the required number in View x per page Use the and buttons to scroll one page forward and one page back You can filter according to certain keywords within the configur ation parameters by selecting the filter rule you want under Fil ter in x lt Option gt y and entering the search word in the input field Gq launches filter operation Configuration elements Some lists contain configuration elements You can therefore change the configuration of the correspond ing list entry directly in the list Autometic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply Fig 36 Configuration of the update interval View 20 per page Fi
428. oor reception and in the event of radio interference Possible values are 256 to 2346 The default value is 2346 bytes 10 1 2 Wireless Networks VSS If you are operating your device in Access Point Mode Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings gt gt Operation Mode Access Point in the menu Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Wireless Networks VSS gt New you can edit the wireless networks required or set new ones up Note The preset wireless network default has the following security settings in the ex works state e Security Mode WPA PSK WPA Mode WPA and WPA 2 WPA Cipher as well as WPA2 Cipher AES and TKIP e The Preshared Key is filled with an internal system value which you must change during configuration Setting network names In contrast to a LAN set up over Ethernet a wireless LAN does not have any cables for set ting up a permanent connection between the server and clients Access violations or faults may therefore occur with directly adjacent radio networks To prevent this every radio net work has a parameter that uniquely identifies the network and is comparable with a domain name Only clients with a network configuration that matches that of your device can com municate in this WLAN The corresponding parameter is called the network name In the network environment it is sometimes also referred to as the SSID Protection of wireless networks As data can be transmitted over the air
429. or this interface and is copied to the routing table in parallel with them e Host Route Template per DHCP The settings received by DHCP are supplemented by routing information about a particular host e Network Route Template per DHCP The settings re ceived by DHCP are supplemented by routing information about a particular network Note gt When the DHCP lease expires or when the device is re started the routes that consist from the combination of DH CP settings and those made here are initially deleted once more from the active routing If the DHCP is reconfigured they are re generated and re activated Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Route Class Select the type of Route Class Possible values e Standard Defines a route with the default parameters e Extended Select whether the route is to be defined with ex tended parameters If the function is active a route is created with extended routing parameters such as source interface and source IP address as well as protocol source and des tination port type of service TOS and the status of the device interface Fields in the menu Route Parameters Field Description Local IP Address Destination IP Ad dress Netmask Gateway IP Address Metric Only for Route Type Default Route via Interface Host Route via Interface or Network Route via Interface Enter the IP address of the host to which your device is to for ward the IP
430. ork Management Station During a telephone call a telephone number can be entered in the telephone s buffer so that it can be dialled at a later point in time Network Termination Network Termination for Basic Access Network Time Protocol Operation and Maintenance Without connection Connectionless operating state e g of the PCs With connection For example the state of a connection between a PC and data network or for data exchange between two PCs Term for electronic banking e g using T Online Part of the T Com certification services for the Internet Digital pass for the Internet With the Online Pass an Internet user can be au thenticated as a customer in a company Services available around the clock via communication services such as T Online and the Internet OSI Open Systems Interconnection Glossary OSPF Outgoing extension number signal Outgoing telephone number Packet switching PAP Parking PBX PBX PBX PBX PBX number PCMCIA PDM Teldat GmbH Open Shortest Path First The outgoing extension number signal is intended for internal con nections on the point to point to which an explicit extension number was not assigned When an external call is made the extension number entered under Outgoing Extension Number Signal is also transmitted If you have not suppressed transmission of your telephone number and the telephone of the person you are calling supports the CLIP fu
431. orres ponds to the status of the Per Interface G Assert State Ma chinen in the PIM SM specification If pimStarGPimMode is bid ir this object must nolnfo be Assert Winner IP Ad Indicates the address of Assert Winner if pimStarGlAssertState dress runs AmAssertLoser InetAddressType is defined through the object pimStarGlAssertWinnerAddress Type Values in the S G States list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast IP address InetAddressType is defined dress through the object pimSGAddressType Source IP Address Displays the source IP address InetAddressType is defined through the object pimSGAddressType Interface Displays the name of the interface Join Prune State Indicates the status that results from the S G Join Prune mes sages received on this interface This corresponds to the status of the Downstream Per Interface S G State Machine in the PIM SM and PIM DM Uptime Indicates the time remaining before the local router reacts to an S G Prune message received on this interface The router waits this period to check whether another downstream router corrects the Prune message In the PIM SM specification this timer is named S G Prune Pending Timer If the timer is deac tivated it has the value 0 Expiry Timer Displays the remaining time until the S G Join State becomes invalid for this interface In the PIM SM specification this timer is named S G Join Expiry Timer I
432. orted metric if the interface status is dormant Possible values are 16 to 16 The default value is 0 Teldat GmbH 13 Routing Protocols 13 1 3 RIP Options Global RIP Parameters RIP UDP Port Default Route Distribution Poisoned Reverse RFC 2453 Variable Timer RFC 2091 Variable Timer Timer for RIP V2 RFC 2453 Update Timer Route Timeout Garbage Collection Timer RIP Interfaces RIP Filter RIP Options 520 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 30 Seconds 180 Seconds 120 Seconds OK Cancel Fig 123 Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Options The menu Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global RIP Parameters menu Field Description RIP UDP Port Default Route Distribu tion Poisoned Reverse The setting option UDP Port which is used for sending and re ceiving RIP updates is only for test purposes If the setting is changed this can mean that your device sends and listens at a port that no other devices use The default value 520 should be retained Select whether the default route of your device is to be propag ated via RIP updates The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Select the procedure for preventing routing loops With standard RIP the routes learnt are propagated over all in terfaces with RIP SEND activated With Poisoned Reverse however y
433. ot pick up With Callback on no reply you can reach the subscriber as soon as they have completed a call or lifted and replaced the re ceiver of their telephone Your telephone rings When you lift the re ceiver a connection to the required subscriber is established auto matically You can activate ShortHold When you do so you define the time after which an existing connection is cleared if data transfer is no longer taking place If you enter a time of 0 ShortHold is deactiv ated After the receiver of a telephone is lifted the telephone number of the external subscriber can be dialled immediately Performance feature of a terminal If the line is busy several redial attempts are made Corresponds to a telephone line in T Net In T ISDN the basic con nection contains two B channels each with a data transmission rate of 64 kbps Bearer channel of an ISDN Basic Rate Interface or a Primary Rate Interface for the transmission of traffic voice data An ISDN Basic Rate Interface consists of two B channels and one D channel AB channel has a data transmission rate of 64 kbps The data transmis sion rate of an ISDN Basic Rate Interface with your gateway can be increased to up to 128 kbps using channel bundling Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocols BACP BAP in accordance with RFC 2125 Teldat GmbH Base station Basic Rate Interface Bit Blacklist dialling ranges Block Cipher Modes Blowfish Bluetooth
434. ote termin al Security Algorithm Displays the encryption algorithm of the IPSec tunnel Status Displays the operating status of the IPSec tunnel Action Enables you to change the status of the IPSec tunnel as dis played Details Opens a detailed statistics window You change the status of the IPSec tunnel by clicking the e button or the button in the Action column By clicking the 0 button you display detailed statistics on the IPSec connection Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring IPSec Tunnels IPSec Statistics Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply General Description Peer 1 Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Local ID Remote ID Negotiation Type Authentication Method MTU 1418 Alive Check Statistics In Out Packets 0 0 Bytes 0 0 Errors a D Messages 0 Fig 202 Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Tunnels gt Values in the IPSec Tunnels list Field Description Description Shows the description of the peer Local IP Address Shows the WAN IP address of your device Remote IP Address Shows the WAN IP address of the connection partner Local ID Shows the ID of your device for this IPSec tunnel Remote ID Shows the ID of the peer Negotiation Type Shows the exchange type Authentication Method Shows the authentication method MTU Shows the current MTU Maximum Transfer Unit Alive Check Shows the method for checking that the peer is reachable NAT Detection Displays the NAT dete
435. otocols Field Description Garbage Collection Only for RFC 2453 Variable Timer Enabled Timer The Garbage Collection Timer is started as soon as the route timeout has expired After this timeout the invalid route is deleted from the IPROUTETABLE if no update is carried out for the route The default value is 120 seconds Fields in the Timer for Triggered RIP RFC 2091 menu Field Description Hold Down Timer Only for RFC 2091 Variable Timer Enabled The hold down timer is activated as soon as your device re ceives an unreachable route metric 16 The route may deleted once this period has elapsed The default value is 120 seconds Retransmission Timer Only for RFC 2091 Variable Timer Enabled After this timeout update request or update response packets are sent again until an update flush or update acknowledge packet arrives The default value is 5 seconds 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH Chapter 14 Multicast What is multicasting Many new communication technologies are based on communication from one sender to several recipients Therefore modern telecommunication systems such as voice over IP or video and audio streaming e g IPTV or Webradio focus on reducing data traffic e g by offering TriplePlay voice video data Multicast is a cost effective solution for effective use of bandwidth because the sender of the data packet which can be received by several re cipients only needs to send the pa
436. our device e WLAN 802 1x The RADIUS server is used for controlling access to a wireless network e XAUTH The RADIUS server is used for authenticating IPSec peers via XAuth Vendor Mode Only for Authentication Type Accounting In hotspot applications select the mode define by the provider In standard applications leave the value set to Default Possible values for hotspot applications e France Telecom For France Telecom hotspot applications e bintec HotSpot Server For Teldat hotspot applications Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server RADIUS Secret Enter the shared password used for communication between the RADIUS server and your device Default User Password Some Radius servers require a user password for each RADI US request Enter the password that your device sends as the default user password in the prompt for the dialout routes on the RADIUS server Priority If a number of RADIUS server entries were created the server with the highest priority is used first If this server does not an swer the server with the next highest priority is used Possible values from 0 highest priority to 7 lowest priority The default value is 0 See also Policy in the Advanced Settings Entry active Select whether the RADIUS server configured in this entry is to 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Field VENTO be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by defau
437. our device This makes it easier to configure fire wall rules 17 2 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new interface groups Groups Basic Parameters Description Members 4 OK C cancel Fig 156 Firewall gt Interfaces gt Groups gt New The menu Firewall gt Interfaces gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 17 Firewall Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the interface group Members Select the members of the group from the available interfaces To do this activate the field in the Selection column 17 3 Addresses 17 3 1 Address List A list of all configured addresses is displayed in the Firewall gt Addresses gt Address List menu 17 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional addresses Address List Groups Basic Parameters Description Address Type Address Subnet Address Range Address Subnet y oK Cancel Fig 157 Firewall gt Addresses gt Address List gt New The menu Firewall gt Addresses gt Address List gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the address Address Type Select the type of address you want to specify Possible values e Address Subnet default value Enter an IP address with subnet mask 17 Firewal
438. our device propagates over the interface via which it learnt the routes with the metric Next Hop Count 16 13 Routing Protocols Teldat GmbH Field Description Network is not reachable The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default RFC 2453 Variable For the timers described in RFC 2453 select whether the same Timer values that you can configure in the Timer for RIP V2 RFC 2453 menu should be used The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default If you deactivate the function the times defined in RFC are re tained for the timeouts RFC 2091 Variable For the timers described in RFC 2091 select whether the same Timer values that you can configure in the Timer for Triggered RIP RFC 2091 menu should be used The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default If the function is not activated the times defined in RFC are re tained for the timeouts Fields in the Timer for RIP V2 RFC 2453 menu Field Description Update Timer Only for RFC 2453 Variable Timer Enabled An RIP update is sent on expiry of this period of time The default value is 30 seconds Route Timeout Only for RFC 2453 Variable Timer Enabled After the last update of a route the route time is active After timeout the route is deactivated and the Garbage Collec tion Timer is started The default value is 180 seconds Teldat GmbH 13 Routing Pr
439. ous Point IP Address Page 1 Fig 220 Monitoring PIM Global Status Values in the Global Status list Field Description View Select the desired view from the dropdown menu Are available A11 PIM Interfaces PIM Neighbors and Multicast Group RP Mappings Values in the PIM Interfaces list Field Description Interface Displays the name of the PIM interface IP Address Displays the primary IP address of the PIM interface Designated Router Displays the primary IP address of the designated router on this PIM interface Values in the PIM Neighbors list 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Field Description Interface Displays the interface via which the PIM Neighbor is reached Generation ID Displays the ID of the neighbor gateway IP Address Displays the primary IP address of the PIM Neighbor Uptime Indicates how long the last PIM Neighbor is a neighbor of the local router Expiry Timer Indicates when the PIM Neighbor is no longer entered as neigh bor If the value 0 is displayed the PIM Neighbor always re mains entered as neighbor Values in the Multicast Group RP Mappings list Field Description Multicast Group Ad Displays the multicast group address dress Multicast Group Prefix Displays the related network mask Length Rendevous Point IP Displays the IP address of the Rendezvous point Address 21 8 2 Not Interface Specific Status The menu Monitoring PIM Not Interface Specific Status includes sta
440. oute via a specific in terface which is to be used if no other suitable route is avail able e Default Route via Gateway Route via a specific gate way which is to be used if no other suitable route is available bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 12 Networking Teldat GmbH Field Description e Host Route via Interface Route to an individual host via a specific interface e Host Route via Gateway Route to an individual host via a specific gateway e Network Route via Interface default value Route to a network via a specific interface e Network Route via Gateway Route to a network via a specific gateway Only for interfaces that are operated in DHCP client mode Even if an interface is configured for DHCP client mode routes can still be configured for data traffic via that interface The set tings received from the DHCP server are then copied along with those configured here to the active routing table This en ables e g in the case of dynamically changing gateway ad dresses particular routes to be maintained or routes with differ ent metrics i e of differing priority to be specified However if the DHCP server sends static routes the settings configured here are not copied to the routing e Default Route Template per DHCP The routing in formation is taken entirely from the DHCP server Only ad vanced parameters can be additionally configured This route remains unchanged by other routes created f
441. outing based method offers various advantages over the policy based method e g NAT PAT within a tunnel IPSec in combination with routing protocols and the creation of VPN backup scenarios With the routing based method the configured or dynamically learned routes are used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs While it is true that this meth od simplifies many configurations at the same time there can be problems due to compet ing routes or the coarser filtering of the data traffic The Additional Traffic Filter parameter fixes this problem You can filter more finely i e you can e g specify the source IP address or the source port If there is a Additional Traffic Filter configured it is used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs the route only de termines which data traffic is to be routed If an IP packet does not match the defined Additional Traffic Filter it is discarded If an IP packet meets the requirements in an Additional Traffic Filter IPSec phase 2 ne gotiation begins and data traffic is transferred over the tunnel Note The Additional Traffic Filter parameter is only relevant to the initiator of the IPSec connection it only applies to outgoing data traffic Note Please note that the phase 2 policies must be configured identically on both of the IPSec tunnel endpoints Add new entries with Add IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Peer Parameters Administrati
442. ows the respective port The numbering corresponds to the Switch Port numbering of the Ethernet ports on the back of the device Interface Displays the interface assigned to the Ethernet port here Configured Speed Select the mode in which the interface is to run Mode Possible values e Full Autonegotiation default value e Auto 100 mbps only e Auto 10 mbps only e Auto 100 mbps Full Duplex e Auto 100 mbps Half Duplex e Auto 10 mbps Full Duplex e Auto 10 mbps Half Duplex e Fixed 1000 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 100 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 100 mbps Half Duplex e Fixed 10 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 10 mbps Half Duplex e None The interface is created but remains inactive Current Speed Mode Shows the actual mode and actual speed of the interface Possible values o 100 mbps Full Duplex e 100 mbps Half Duplex e 10 mbps Full Duplex e 10 mbps Half Duplex e Down 8 2 Serial Port The serial interface can be operated as a console or as a data interface In data interface mode the data for the serial interface can be transmitted over an IP infrastructure Serial over IP 8 2 1 Serial Port In the Physical Interfaces gt Serial Port gt Serial Port menu you can perform settings for the serial interface Serial Port General Port Mode Configuration Data Port f oK U Cancel Fig 60 Physical Interfaces gt Serial Port gt Serial Port The Physical Interfaces gt Serial
443. ox telephone number here if it differs from the 08003302424 entered ex works As soon as your T NetBox re ceives a voice or fax message notification is sent to your PBX Umbrella term the T Com online platform Offers services such as e mail and Internet access T Com software decoder for all conventional computer systems that enables access to T Online Supports all functions such as KIT e mail and the Internet with a browser T Online users receive this software free of charge T Service carries out all installation work and configurations for the PBX at the customer s request The service ensures optimum voice and data transmission at all times thanks to maintenance work T Service access enables you to have your PBX configured by T Service Give T Service a call Get advice and provide information on your configuration requirements T Service will then configure your PBX remotely without you having to do anything Terminal Adapter TAPI TAPI configuration TCP TCP IP TCU TE TEI Telefax Telematics Telnet Terminal adapter TFTP Three party confer ence Tiger 192 TLS Tone dialling Transfer internal code Telephony Application Program Interface You can use the TAPI configuration to modify the TAPI driver in line with the program that uses this driver You can check which MSN is to be assigned to a terminal define a line name and configure the dialling parameters First configure your PBX You mus
444. pens By creating a QoS policy a DEFAULT entry with the lowest pri ority 255 is automatically created The menu Edit Queue Policy consists of the following fields Fields in the Edit Queue Policy menu Field Description Description Enter the name of the queue policy Outbound Interface Shows the interface for which the QoS queues are being con figured Prioritisation queue Select the queue priority type Possible values e Class Based default value Queue for data classified as normal e High Priority Queue for data classified as high priority Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description e Default Queue for data that has not been classified or data of a class for which no queue has been configured Class ID Only for Prioritisation queue Class Based Select the QoS packet class to which this queue is to apply To do this at least one class ID must be given in the Network ing gt 00S gt 00S Classification menu Priority Only for Prioritisation queue Class Based Choose the priority of the queue Possible values are 1 high priority to 254 low priority The default value is 1 Weight Only for Prioritisation Algorithm Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Fair Queueing Choose the priority of the queue Possible values are 1 to 254 The default value is 1 RTT Mode Realtime Active or deactivate the real time transmission of the data Traffic Mode The function is enabled with Enabled T
445. plied with the OK or Apply button of the menu and you do not have to restart the device If you finish the configuration and want to save your settings so that they are loaded as the boot configuration when you reboot your device save these by clicking the Save configur ation button You can also use the GUI to monitor the most important function parameters of your device Automatic Refresh interval 50 Seconds O Warning System Password not changed System Information Uptime 0 Day s 5 Hour s 3 Minute s System Date Thursday 2004 Mar 25 15 49 26 Serial Number WN2DJC010290024 BOSS Version V 9 1 Rev 1 IPSec from 2012 04 19 00 00 00 Last configuration stored Thursday 1970 Jan 01 00 00 00 Resource Information CPU Usage 0 E Memory Usage F 20 3 31 9 MByte 64 Temperature Current 43 C Min 38 C Max 43 C Active Sessions SIF RTP etc 0 Active IPSec Tunnels 0 0 Physical Interfaces a Interface Connection Information Link ent 0 bro 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 e ent 1 brO 192 168 0 252 255 255 255 0 o WLAN1 Bridge Channelin Use 1 1 BR Link FW 2 0 0 0 Jo WLAN2 of o Relay Mode Inaktive o WAN Interfaces Description Connection Information Link Fig 31 GUI home page 5 3 1 1 Calling up GUI 1 2 3 4 5 Check whether the device is connected and s
446. protected against unauthorised access Radius Server You can control access to a wireless network via a RADIUS server With Add you can create new entries Enter the IP address and the password of the desired RADIUS server EAP Preauthentification For Security Mode WPA Enterprise select whether the EAP preauthentification func tion is to be Enabled This function tells your device that WLAN clients which are already connected to another access point can first carry out 802 1x authentication as soon as they are within range Such WLAN clients can then simply connect over the existing net work connection with your device VLAN Select whether the VLAN segmentation is to be used for this wireless network If you wish to use VLAN segmentation enter a value between 2 and 4094 in the input field in order to identify the VLAN VLAN ID 1 is not possible Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Note Before you continue please ensure that all access points that the WLAN controller shall manage are correctly wired and switched on 11 1 4 Start automatic installation You will see a list of all detected access points If you wish to change the settings of a detected AP click on 3 in the corresponding entry You will see the settings for all selected access points You can change these settings The following parameters are available in the Access Point Settings menu Location Displays the stated locality of the AP You
447. providers have been set up via different interfaces and load balancing is be ing used 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Global Settings DNS Servers Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Basic Parameters Admin Status Description Priority Interface Mode Interface i Enabled 5 v O static Dynamic None v oK Cancel Fig 162 Local Services gt DNS gt DNS Servers gt New The Local Services gt DNS gt DNS Servers gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Admin Status Description Priority Interface Mode Select whether the DNS server should be enabled The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Enter a description for DNS server Assign a priority to the DNS server You can assign more than one pair of DNS servers Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server to an interface i e for example to an Ethernet port or a PPPoE WAN partner The pair with the highest priority is used if the interface is up Possible values from 0 highest priority to 9 lowest priority The default value is 5 Select whether the IP addresses of name servers for resolving the names of Internet addresses are to be obtained automatic ally or whether up to two fixed DNS server addresses are to be entered depending on the priority Possible values oS CAET Field Description e D
448. ps gt New The menu Firewall gt Services gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the service group Members Select the members of the group from the available service ali ases To do this activate the Fields in the Selection column bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Chapter 18 Local Services This menu offers services for the following application areas e Name resolution DNS e Configuration via web browser HTTPS e Locating of dynamic IP addresses using a DynDNS provider e Configuration of gateway as a DHCP server assignment of IP addresses e Automation of tasks according to schedule scheduling e Alive checks for hosts or interfaces ping tests e Automatic detection and configuration of Teldat devices e Provision of public Internet accesses hotspot 18 1 DNS Each device in a TCP IP network is usually located by its IP address Because host names are often used in networks to reach different devices it is necessary for the associated IP address to be known This task can be performed by a DNS server which resolves the host names into IP addresses Alternatively name resolution can also take place over the HOSTS file which is available on all PCs Your device offers the following options for name resolution DNS Proxy for forwarding DNS requests sent to your d
449. pseudo HTTPS session Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Send Initial Contact Select whether IKE Initial Contact messages are to be sent dur Message ing IKE phase 1 if no SAs with a peer exist The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Sync SAs with ISP in Select whether all SAs are to be deleted whose data traffic was terface state routed via an interface on which the status has changed from Up to Down Dormant or Blocked The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Use Zero Cookies Select whether zeroed ISAKMP Cookies are to be sent These are equivalent to the SPI Security Parameter Index in IKE proposals as they are redundant they are normally set to the value of the negotiation currently in progress Alternatively your device can use zeroes for all values of the cookie In this case select Enabled Zero Cookie Size Only for Use Zero Cookies enabled Enter the length in bytes of the zeroed SPI used in IKE propos als The default value is 32 Dynamic RADIUS Au Select whether RADIUS authentication is to be activated via thentication IPSec The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the PKI Handling Options menu Field Description Ignore Certificate Re Select whether certificate requests received from the remote
450. put display 21 Monitoring Teldat GmbH Statistics Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply View 20 per page Filter in None equal v Go No Description Type Tx Packets TxBytes TxErrors RxPackets RxBytes RxErrors Status Unchanged for Action 1 en1 0 Ethernet 6 69K 5 21M 0 14 23K 1 40M D o 2d 2h 2m 59s t 9 2 ent 4 Ethernet 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 2d 2h 3m 2s t 0 3 Peer 1 Tunnel 0 0 0 0 0 0 e Dd Oh 5m 27s t 9 Page 1 Items 1 3 Fig 204 Monitoring gt Interfaces gt Statistics Change the status of the interface by clicking the t or the button in the Action column Values in the Statistics list Field Description No Shows the serial number of the interface Description Displays the name of the interface Type Displays the interface text Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Tx Bytes Displays the total number of octets sent Tx Errors Shows the total number of errors sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Rx Bytes Displays the total number of bytes received Rx Errors Shows the total number of errors received Status Shows the operating status of the selected interface Unchanged for Shows the length of time for which the operating status of the interface has not changed Action Enables you to change the status of the interface as displayed Press the P button to display the statistical data for the individual interfaces in detail
451. qual v Go SSID MAC Address Signal dBm Channel Security Last seen Strongest signal received by Total detections Page 1 Actions New Neighborscan START Fig 95 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Neighbor APs In the Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Neighbor APs menu the adjacent AP s found during the scan are displayed Rogue APs i e APs which are not managed by the WLAN controller but are using an SSID managed by the WLAN controller are highlighted in red Note Check the rogue APs shown carefully as an attacker could attempt to spy on data in your network using a rogue AP Although each AP is found more than once it is only displayed once with the strongest sig nal You see the following parameters for each AP SSID MAC Address Signal dBm Channel Security Last seen Strongest signal received by Total detections The entries are displayed in alphabetical order by SSID Security shows the security set tings of the AP Under Strongest signal received by you will see the parameters Loca tion and Name of the APs in which the displayed AP was found Total detections shows how often the corresponding AP was found during the scan Click under New Neighborscan on Start to rescan adjacent AP s You will receive a warn ing that the wireless modules of the access points must also be disabled for a certain peri od of time When you start the process with OK a progress bar is displayed The located AP display
452. r 2 1 a 391 IP Pool Configuration 2 o 391 DHCP Configuration 2 o 392 IPIMAG Binding eere e A De a 396 DHCP Relay Settings aoa o o 397 Scheduling 0 e so sas nce won a ew a we e 398 Tigger t oa e da Sd boa bom ee Yd ae aus 399 ACHONS ot erate sa BS othe eat a le de os hod 404 Options Lt Wnt ta ta e e O Y els Fase te 415 SuPVeIIANCE ss do a A ee o RA We Ee 416 OS A ar Be AS AAA e Pe See 416 Interfaces 3 2 i lr a ke ele tas Bethe dy RO GP ty Be 419 Temperature 6 ww e o 420 Ping Generator e 422 Teldat Discovery s s cs a n ice e w a e ee ER oa 423 Device Discovery 2 2 423 OPHONS few eee a A a eee RA A 426 HotSpot Gateway ooo aa a eo 426 HotSpot Gateway a ooo a a 428 OPTIONS fares FE O A Ende nbc er he i A cg E a oat 432 Maintenance o e a 433 Diagnostics e sogin koe Vo A ee ke es 433 Ping Test id ee ee A 433 DNS Test 2 2 a a 433 19 1 3 19 2 19 2 1 19 3 19 3 1 Chapter 20 20 1 20 1 1 20 2 20 2 1 20 2 2 20 3 20 3 1 20 3 2 20 4 20 4 1 20 4 2 20 5 20 5 1 Chapter 21 21 1 21 1 1 21 2 21 2 1 21 2 2 21 3 21 3 1 Traceroute Test 2 2 1 ao aoa oaa aa ee 434 Software amp Configuration o en 435 Opt ti AE E DEERE a o E E ah a 435 RODOOt ce a e E a A a A E 4 441 System Reboot ooa a 441 Extern
453. r set up new ones in the menu Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt WDS Links gt New Important The WDS link can only be configured in the 2 4 GHz band and in the 5 GHz band in doors if the channel is NOT Auto The number of channels you can select depends on the country setting Please consult the data sheet for your device WDS links WDS Wireless Distribution System are static links between access points AP which are generally used to connect clients with networks that are not directly ac cessible to them e g because the distance is too great The access point sends from one client to another access point which then forwards the data to another client Important Note that the data is transferred between the access points in unencrypted form over the WDS link in the default configuration You are therefore urgently advised to apply one of the available security methods WEP 40 or WEP 104 to protect data on WDS links WDS links are configured as interfaces with the prefix wos They behave like VSS interface and only differ from these with respect to the predefined routing A WDS link is defined as a transit network this relates to a point to point connection or point to multipoint connection between two access points that are included in different networks 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH 10 1 3 1 Edit or New Choose the o icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure additional WDS
454. r Information to Debug In addition to the data logged internally on your device all information can and should be transmitted to one or more external PCs for storage and processing e g to the system ad ministrator s PC The syslog messages saved internally on your device are lost when you reboot Warning Make sure you only pass syslog messages to a safe computer Check the data regu larly and ensure that there is always enough spare capacity available on the hard disk of your PC Syslog Daemon All Unix operating systems support the recording of syslog messages For Windows PCs the Syslog Demon included in the DIME Tools can record the data and distribute to various files depending on the contents can be called in the download area at www teldat de 20 1 1 Syslog Servers Configure your device as a syslog server so that defined system messages can be sent to suitable hosts in the LAN In this menu you define which messages are sent to which hosts and with which condi tions A list of all configured system log servers displayed in the External Reporting gt Syslog gt Syslog Servers menu 20 1 1 1 New Select the New button to set up additional syslog servers Syslog Servers Basic Parameters IP Address Level Information Facility locald Timestamp Onone O Time Date amp Time Protocol upp Otcp Type of Messages Osystem Accounting system amp Accounting oK C cancel
455. r of clients soft limit must be the same as or less than that of the Max number of clients hard limit The default value is 28 You can disable this function if you set Max number of clients soft limit and Max number of clients hard limit to identical values Client Band select Not all devices support this function This function requires a dual radio setup where the same wire less networkis configured on both radio modules but in different frequency bands The Client Band select option enables clients to be moved from the frequency band originally selected to a less busy one providing the client supports this To achieve a changeover the connection attempt of a client is initially refused so that the cli ent repeats the attempt in a different frequency band Possible values e Disabled optimized for fast roaming default value The function is not used for this VSS This is useful if clients are to switch between different radio cells with as little delay as possible e g with Voice over WLAN e 2 4 GHz band preferred Preference is given to accept ing clients in the 2 4 GHz band Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Field Description e 5 GHz band preferred Preference is given to accepting clients in the 5 GHz band Fields in the menu MAC Filter Field Description Access Control l Select whether only certain clients are to be permitted for this wireless network The function is activated
456. r the subnet Special mechanisms ensure that the requirements of the individual clients are taken into consideration At the moment there are three versions of IGMP V1 V3 most current sys tems use V3 and less often V2 Two packet types play a central role in IGMP queries and reports Queries are only transmitted from a router If several IGMP routers exist in a network the router with the lowest IP address is the querier We differentiate here between a general query sent to 224 0 0 1 a group specific query Sent to a group address and the group and source specific query sent to a specific group address Reports are only sent by hosts to respond to queries 14 2 1 IGMP In this menu you configure the interfaces on which IGMP is to be enabled 14 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure IGMP on other interfaces IGMP Options IGMP Settings Interface None v Query Interval 125 Seconds Maximum Response Time fi 0 0 Seconds Robustness 28 Last Member Query Interval fi 0 Seconds IGMP State Limit lo Messages per Second Mode O host O Routing Advanced Settings IGMP Proxy DEnabled 7 4 oK Cancel Fig 125 Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP gt New The Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the IGMP Settings menu Field Description Interface Select the interface on which IGMP is to be enabled i e qu
457. r these programs correspond to those listed above Example of a command line for using cu cu s 9600 c dev ttySl Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration Example of a command line for using tip tip 9600 dev ttyS1 5 2 Login With the help of certain access data you can log in on your device and carry out different actions The extent of the actions available depend on the authorisations of the user con cerned A login prompt appears first regardless of how you access your device You cannot view any information on the device or change the configuration without authentication 5 2 1 User names and passwords in ex works state In its ex works state your device is provided with the following user names and passwords User names and passwords in ex works state Login Password Authorisations name admin admin Read and change system variables save configurations use GUI write public Read and write system variables except passwords changes are lost when you switch off your device read public Read system variables except passwords It is only possible to change and save configurations if you log in with the user name ad min Access information user names and passwords can also only be changed if you log in with the user name admin For security reasons passwords are normally shown on the Setup Tool screen not in plain text but only as asterisks The user names on the other hand are displayed as plain text T
458. r time starts on the last Sunday in October by switching from 3 a m to 2 a m The calendar related or schedule related switches that are scheduled for the additional hour are then carried out If a value other than Universal Time Coordinated UTC option UTC x has been chosen for the Time Zone the switch from summer to winter time must be carried out manually when required Time server You can obtain the system time automatically e g using various time servers To ensure bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 7 System Management that the device uses the desired current time you should configure one or more time serv ers Switching from summer time to winter time and back must be carried out manually if the time is derived using this method by changing the value in the Time Zone field with an option UTC or UTC Note If a method for automatically deriving the time is defined on the device the values ob tained in this way automatically have higher priority A manually entered system time is therefore overwritten The menu System Management gt Global Settings gt Date and Time consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Time Zone Select the time zone in which your device is installed You can select Universal Time Coordinated UTC plus or minus the deviation in hours or a predefined location e g Europe Berlin Current Local Time The current date and current
459. r use a dry cloth the electrostatic charge could cause electronic faults Make sure that no moisture can enter the device and cause damage 3 6 Pin Assignments 3 6 1 Ethernet interface The devices bintec W1002n bintec WI1040n bintec WI2040n bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n have two 10 100 Ethernet interfaces These are used to connect individual PCs or other switches The Ethernet 10 100 BASE T interface does not have an Auto MDI X function in bintec W1002n The connection is made via an RJ45 socket Fig 23 Ethernet 10 100 BASE T interface RJ45 socket The pin assignment for the Ethernet 10 100 Base T interface RJ45 socket is as follows 3 Installation Teldat GmbH RJ45 socet for LAN connection 1 Tx input 2 Tx input 3 Rx output 4 2 5 6 Rx output 7 8 5 The devices bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n have two 10 100 1000 Ethernet interfaces bintec W1003n has one 10 100 1000 Ethernet interface The connection is made via an RJ45 socket Fig 24 Ethernet 10 100 1000 BASE T interface RJ45 socket The pin assignment for the Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base T interface RJ45 socket is as fol lows RJ45 socet for LAN connection 1 Pair O Pair 0 Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 2 Pair 1 Pair 3 Pair 3 0 JA DO oa fF 0 DY Teldat GmbH 3 Installation 3 6 2 Serial interface Your devices bintec W1002n bintec WI1040n bintec WI2040n bintec WI1065n and bintec
460. ral rules which you arrange in the form of a chain to obtain a certain sequence There are various approaches for the definition of rules and rule chains Allow all packets that are not explicitly denied i e Deny all packets that match Filter 1 e Deny all packets that match Filter 2 e Allow the rest or Allow all packets that are explicitly allowed i e e Allow all packets that match Filter 1 e Allow all packets that match Filter 2 Deny the rest or Combination of the two possibilities described above A number of separate rule chains can be created The same filter can also be used in dif ferent rule chains You can also assign a rule chain individually to each interface N Caution Make sure you don t lock yourself out when configuring filters If possible access your gateway for filter configuration over the serial console interface or ISDN Login 12 5 1 Access Filter This menu is for configuration of access filter Each filter describes a certain part of the IP traffic and defines for example the IP addresses the protocol the source port or the des tination port A list of all access filters is displayed in the Networking gt Access Rules gt Access Filter menu Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment view 20 per page LIL Fiter in None equal Index Description Source Destination TOS Decimal Value Page 1 Fig 112 Networking gt Acce
461. rastructure WPA Preshared Key Transmit Key Only for Security Mode WEP 104 Select one of the keys configured in WEP Key lt 1 4 gt as a de fault key The default value is Key 1 WEP Key 1 4 Only for Security Mode WEP 40 WEP 104 Enter the WEP key Enter a character string with the right number of characters for the selected WEP mode For WEP 40 you need a character string with 5 characters for WEP 104 with 13 characters e g hellofor WEP 40 teldat wep1 for WEP 104 WPA Mode Only for Security Mode WPA PSK Select whether you want to use WPA or WPA 2 Possible values e WPA default value Only WPA is used e WPA 2 Only WPA2 is used Preshared Key Only for Security Mode WPA PSK Enter the WPA password 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description Enter an ASCII string with 8 63 characters WPA Cipher Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Mode WPA Select which encryption method should be used Possible values e TKIP default value Temporal Key Integrity Protocol e AES Advanced Encryption Standard Both encryption methods are rated as secure with AES offering better performance WPA2 Cipher Only for Security Mode wPA PSK and WPA Mode WPA 2 Select which encryption method is to be used Possible values e AES default value Advanced Encryption Standard e TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol Both encryption methods are rated as secure with AES offering better perfo
462. rates a syslog message The values are updated every 10 seconds The temperature limits are configured in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Temperature menu You can link the overstepping of a limit value with an action 18 6 3 1 Edit or New Choose the s icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure new limits and actions Hosts Interfaces Temperature Ping Generator Basic Parameters Trigger Temperature above w C Action Enable v Interface Relay v oK Cancel Fig 179 Local Services gt Surveillance gt Temperature gt New Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Trigger Enter here the temperature limit value min max Possible values e Temperature above e Temperature below Action Select the desired action Possible values e Enable default value e Disable Interface Select the interface to be used to perform the action Possible values e Relay default value The overstepping of the limit is coupled with the relay see Physical Interfaces gt Relay gt Relay Con figuration menu e lt Interface gt The selected interface is turned off if the temper ature limit is exceeded bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH 18 6 4 Ping Generator In the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Ping Generator menu a list of all configured auto matically generated pings is displayed 18 6 4 1 Edit or New Choo
463. rd It is rated as just as secure as Rijndael AES but is slower e Blowfish Blowfish is a very secure and fast algorithm Twofish can be regarded as the successor to Blowfish e CAST CAST is also a very secure algorithm marginally slower than Blowfish but faster than 3DES e DES DES is an older encryption algorithm which is rated as weak due to its small effective length of 56 bits Hash algorithms Authentication e MD5 default value MD5 Message Digest 5 is an older hash algorithm It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e ALL All options can be used e SHA1 SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm 1 is a hash algorithm developed by NSA United States National Security Associ ation It is rated as secure but is slower than MDS It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec Note that RipeMD 160 and Tiger 192 are not available for mes sage hashing in phase 2 Use PFS Group As PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy requires another Diffie Hellman key calculation to create new encryption material you must select the exponentiation features If you enable PFS Enabled the options are the same as for the configuration of DH Group in the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles menu PFS is 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description used to protect the keys of a renewed phase 2 SA even if the keys of the phase 1 SA have become known The field has the following options e 1 768 Bit During the Diffie Hellman
464. rding rules for new multicast groups Forwarding Basic Parameters All Multicast Groups Enabled Multicast Group Address Source Interface None Destination Interface None v OK Cancel Fig 128 Multicast gt Forwarding gt Forwarding gt New The Multicast gt Forwarding gt Forwarding gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description All Multicast Groups Select whether all multicast groups e the complete multicast address range 224 0 0 0 4 are to be forwarded from the defined Source Interface to the defined Destination Interface To do this check Enabled Disable the option if you only want to forward one defined mul ticast group to a particular interface 14 Multicast Teldat GmbH Field Description The option is deactivated by default Multicast Group Ad Only for All Multicast Groups not active dress Enter here the address of the multicast group you want to for ward from a defined Source Interface to a defined Destination Interface Source Interface Select the interface on your device to which the selected multic ast group is sent Destination Interface Select the interface on your device to which the selected multic ast group is to be forwarded 14 4 PIM Protocol Independent Multicast PIM is a multicast routing process that makes possible dynamic routing from multicast packets With PIM the distribution of information is regu lated v
465. re initiated when the defined period of validity is reached Monitored Variable Only for Event Type MIB SNMP Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Select the MIB variable whose defined value is to be configured as initiator First select the System in which the MIB variable is saved then the MIB Table and finally the MIB Variable itself Only the MIB tables and MIB variables present in the respective area are displayed Compare Condition Only for Event Type MIB SNMP Select whether the MIB variable Greater default value Equal Less Not Equal must have the value given in Com pare Value or must lie within Range to initiate the operation Compare Value Only for Event Type MIB SNMP Enter the value of the MIB variable Index Variables Only for Event Type MIB SNMP Where required select MIB variables to uniquely identify a spe cific data set in the MIB Table e g ConnTf Index The unique identification of a particular table entry is derived from the com bination of Index Variable usually an index variable which is flagged with and Index Value Use Index Variables to create more entries with Add Monitored Interface Only for Event Type Interface Status and Interface Traffic Select the interface whose defined status shall trigger an opera tion Interface Status Only for Event Type Interface Status Select the status that the interface must have in order to initiate the intended operation Possi
466. re not addressed The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Please note that ARP Processing cannot be applied in con junction with the MAC bridge function WMM Select whether voice or video prioritisation via WMM Wireless Multimedia is to be activated for the wireless network so that optimum transmission quality is always achieved for time critical applications Data prioritisation is supported in accordance with DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point or IEEE802 1d The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default U APSD Only for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Select whether the Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Deliv ery U APSD mode is to be enabled The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the menu Security Settings Field Description Security Mode Select the Security Mode encryption and authentication for the wireless network Possible values e Inactive default value Neither encryption nor authentica Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description tion e WEP 40 WEP 40 bits e WEP 104 WEP 104 bits WPA PSK WPA Preshared Key e WPA Enterprise 802 11i TKIP Transmit Key Only for Security Mode WEP 40 or WEP 104 Select one of the keys configured in WEP Key lt 1 4 gt as a de fault key The default value is Key 1 WE
467. red key is the shared password e RSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authenticated using the RSA algorithm Local ID Type Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Select the local ID type Possible ID types e Fully Qualified Domain Name FODN e E mail Address e IPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name e Key ID Any string Local ID Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Enter the ID of your device For Authentication Method DSA Signature or RSA Sig nature the Use Subject Name from certificate option is dis played When you enable the Use Subject Name from certificate op tion the first alternative subject name indicated in the certificate is used or if none is specified the subject name of the certific ate is used Note If you use certificates for authentication and your certific ate contains alternative subject names see Certificates on page 116 you must make sure your device selects the first al ternative subject name by default Make sure you and your peer both use the same name i e that your local ID and the peer ID your partner configures for you are identical 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description Preshared Key Enter the password agreed with the peer The maximum length of the entry is 50 characters All charac ters are possible except for 0x at the start of the entry Fields in the menu Interface Routes Field Description IP Address Assign ment Select the configuration
468. refer to your gateway s data sheet to find out the number of APs that you can man age with your gateway s wireless LAN controller and details of the licenses required 11 1 Wizard The Wizard menu offers step by step instructions for the set up of a WLAN infrastructure The Wizard guides you through the configuration When you select the Wizard you will receive instructions and explanations on the separate pages of the Wizard Note We highly recommended that you use the Wizard when initially configuring your WLAN infrastructure 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH 11 1 1 Basic Settings Here you can configure all of the various settings that you require for the actual wireless LAN controller The wireless LAN controller uses the following settings Region Select the country in which the wireless controller is to be operated Please note The range of channels that can be used varies depending on the country set ting Interface Select the interface to be used for the wireless controller DHCP Server Select whether an external DHCP server shall assign IP addresses to the APs or if you wish to assign fixed IP addresses yourself Alternatively you can use your device as a DH CP server For this internal DHCP server CAPWAP option 138 is active in order to allow communication between the master and slaves If you use static IP addresses in your network you must enter these to all APs manually The IP addresses of the wi
469. reless LAN controller must be entered for each AP in the Sys tem Management gt Global Settings gt System menu in the Manual WLAN Controller IP Address field Please note Make sure that option 138 is active when using an external DHCP server If you wish to use a Teldat Gateway for example as a DHCP server click on the GUI menu for this device under Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool gt New gt Advanced Settings in the DHCP Options field on the Add button Select as Option CAPWAP Con troller and in the Value field enter the IP address of the WLAN cortroller IP Address Range If the IP addresses are to be assigned internally you must enter the start and end IP ad dress of the desired range Please note If you click on Next a warning appears which informs you that continuing will overwrite the wireless LAN controller configuration By clicking on OK you signal that you agree with this and wish to continue with the configuration 11 1 2 Radio Profile Select which frequency band your WLAN controller shall use Ifthe 2 4 GHz Radio Profile is set then the 2 4 GHz frequency band is used Ifthe 5 GHz Radio Profile is set then the 5 GHz frequency band is used If the corresponding device contains two wireless modules you can Use two independent radio profiles This assigns 2 4 GHz Radio Profile to module 1 and 5 GHz Radio Profile to module 2 The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by defau
470. reless module 1 are displayed The menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Access Point Settings menu Field Description Device Displays the type of device for the AP Location Displays the locality of the AP The locations are given numbers if no location has been entered You can enter another locality bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 11 Wireless LAN Controller Teldat GmbH Field Description Name Displays the name of the AP You can change the name Description Enter a unique description for the AP CAPWAP Encryption Select whether communication between the master and slaves is to be encrypted The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default You can override the encryption in order to view the communic ation for debugging purposes Fields in the Wireless module1 or in the Wireless module 2 menu Field Description Operation Mode Displays the mode in which the wireless module is to be oper ated You can change the mode Possible values e On default value The wireless module is used as an access point in your network e off The wireless module is not active Active Radio Profile Displays the wireless module profile that is currently selected You can select another wireless module profile from the list if more than one wireless module profile are being set up Channel Displays the channel that is assigned You can select another channel The number
471. ridge Security Settings Privacy TKIP Preshared Key F Automatic Remote Partner Remote MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 C OK C Cancel Fig 82 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt g gt New The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Bridge Links gt gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Bridge Link Descrip Enter a name for the bridge link tion If the Use default option is activated the automatically gen erated name of the interface is used If the option is not activated you can enter a suitable name in bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description the input field Option Use default is active by default Remote Configuration Select whether setup of a bridge link from a remote bridge is to be permitted Possible values e Allowed default value It is possible to set up a bridge link from a remote bridge e Denied It is not possible to set up a bridge link from a re mote bridge Fields in the Bridge Security Settings menu Field Description Privacy Select whether an encryption method is to be used for this bridge link and if so which one Possible values e TKIP default value Temporal Key Integrity Protocol e AES Advanced Encryption Standard Both encryption methods are rated as secure with AES offering better performance Preshared Key Enter the password for this bridge link
472. ritisation of data Note Data can only be prioritized in the outgoing direction Packets in the high priority class always take priority over data with class IDs 1 254 It is possible to assign or guarantee each queue and thus each data class a certain part of the total bandwidth of the interface In addition you can optimise the transmission of voice data real time data Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Depending on the respective interface a queue is created automatically for each class but only for data traffic classified as outgoing and for data traffic classified in both directions A priority is assigned to these automatic queues The value of the priority is equal to the value of the class ID You can change the default priority of a queue If you add new queues you can also use classes in other class plans via the class ID 12 4 3 1 New Choose the New button to create additional prioritisations QoS Filter QoS Classification QoS Interfaces Policies Basic Parameters Interface eni 0 Prioritisation Algorithm Priority Queueing v Traffic shaping Enabled By creating a QoS policy a default entry with the lowest priority will be automatically generated Description Type Class ID Priority Bandwidth for Traffic Shaping Add Queues Policies oK Cancel Fig 111 Networking gt QoS gt QoS Interfaces Policies gt New The Networking gt 00S gt 00S Interfaces Policies gt New menu consists of the followin
473. rmance 10 1 4 2 Client Link Scan After the desired Client Links have been configured the an icon is shown in the list You use this icon to open the Scan menu Radio Settings Client Link Scan Client Link Description sta1 0 Action Scan AP MAC Address Network Name SSID Channel Mode Signal Connected Action 00 a0 f9 0c 4e 47 waltix_791p2 6 Access Point WPA PSK 94 dem Select 02 6f 83 3a ab 50 bla2 3 Access Point WPA and WPA 2 PSK 94 dBm Select 02 67 83 3a c5 b8 bla1 2 Access Point WPA and WPA 2 PSK 30 dim Select Back Fig 75 Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Client Link gt Scan Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN After successful scanning a selection of potential scan partners is displayed in the scan list In the Action column click Select to connect the local clients with this client If the partners are connected with one another the y icon appears in the Connected column The icon appears in the Connected column if the connection is active The Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Client Link gt Scan menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Scan menu Field Description Client Link Description Displays the name of the client link you configured Action Start the scan by clicking on Scan If the antennas are installed correctly on both sides and LOS is free the client finds available clients and displays them in the following list If the partner client cannot be found check the line of
474. rotocol Data Unit every information packet exchanged on the wireless medium includes management frames and fragmented MSDUs MPPC MPPE MSDU MSN MSSID MTU Multicast Multiple subscriber number Multiprotocol gate way Microsoft Point to Point Compression Microsoft Point to Point Encryption MAC Service Data Unit a data packet that ignores fragmentation in the WLAN Multiple subscriber number See SSID Maximum Transmission Unit A specific form of broadcast in which a message is simultaneously transmitted to a defined user group Multiple subscriber number A gateway that can route several protocols e g IP X 25 etc Music on hold MoH Your PBX has two internal music on hold melodies On delivery in ternal melody 1 is active You can choose between melody 1 or 2 or deactivate the music on hold Music on hold MoH Performance feature of a PBX During an inquiry or call forwarding MWI NAT NDIS WAN Net surfing a melody is played that the waiting subscriber hears On your PBX you can choose between two internal melodies Transmission of a voice message from a mailbox e g T NetBox or MailBox to a terminal The receipt of the message on the terminal is signalled e g by a LED Network Address Translation NDIS WAN is a Microsoft enhancement of this standards in relation to wide area networking WAN The NDIS WAN CAPI driver per mits the use of the ISDN controller as a WAN card The NDI
475. rrent web browser you can use the HTML interfaces to configure your device The configuration can be set up using the GUI To do this enter the IP address of your device in the address field of your Web browser With DHCP server e the IP address that your DHCP server assigned to your device Without DHCP server e With direct connection to the configuration PC the fallback IP address 192 168 0 252 e The fixed IP address assigned via the Dime Manager Press the Enter Return key bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 5 1 1 2 Telnet Apart from configuration using a web browser with a Telnet connection you can also ac cess the SNMP shell and use other configuration options You do not need any additional software on your PC to set up a Telnet connection to your device Telnet is available on all operating systems Proceed as follows Windows 1 Click Run in the Windows Start menu 2 Entertelnet lt IP address of your device gt 3 Click OK A window with the login prompt appears You are now in the SNMP shell of your device 4 Continue with Logging in for Configuration on page 66 Unix You can also set up a Telnet connection on UNIX and Linux without any problem 1 Entertelnet lt IP address of your device gt in a terminal A window with the login prompt appears You are now in the SNMP shell of your device 2 Continue with Logging in for Configuration on page 66 5 1 1 3 SSH In addition to the
476. rs Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Basic Parameters Domain Name Primary o 0 0 0 WINS Server Secondary o 0 0 0 Advanced Settings Positive Cache Enabled Negative Cache Enabled Cache Size 100 Entries Maximurn TTL for Positive Cache Entries e6400 Seconds Maximum TTL for Negative Cache Entries 300 Seconds Fallback interface to get DNS server automatic v IP address to use for DNSAMNS server assignment As DHCP Server Onone Own IP Address DNS Setting As IPCP Server O None ownIP Address DNS Setting OK Cancel Fig 161 Local Services gt DNS gt Global Settings The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Global Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Domain Name Enter the standard domain name of your device WINS Server Enter the IP address of the first and if necessary alternative l global Windows Internet Name Server WINS or NetBIOS Primary Name Server NBNS Secondary The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Positive Cache Select whether the positive dynamic cache is to be activated bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description i e successfully resolved names and IP addresses are to be stored in the cache The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by defa
477. s Basic Parameters Description Protocol Any v OK Cancel Fig 159 Firewall gt Services gt Service List gt New The menu Firewall gt Services gt Service List gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter an alias for the service you want to configure Protocol Select the protocol on which the service is to be based The most important protocols are available for selection Destination Port Range Only for Protocol TCP UDP TCP or UDP In the first field enter the destination port via which the service is to run If a port number range is specified in the second field enter the last port of the port range By default the field does not contain an entry If a value is displayed this means that the previously 17 Firewall Teldat GmbH Field Description specified port number is verified If a port range is to be checked enter the upper limit here Possible values are 1 to 65535 Source Port Range Only for Protocol TCP UDP TCP or UDP In the first field enter the source port to be checked if applic able If a port number range is specified in the second field enter the last port of the port range By default the field does not contain an entry If a value is displayed this means that the previously specified port number is verified If a port range is to be checked enter the upper limit here Possible values are 1to 65535 Type Only
478. s Slave Access Points Radio Profiles Wireless Networks VSS Automatic Refresh Interval 60 Seconds Apply View 20 per page Fitter in None v equal v Go Location lt Name IP Address LAN MAC Address Channel Search Channel Status Action 1 wi2040n 10 0 0 232 00 01 cd 06 76 fa auto Ch 100 Omtanages HH E e Page 1 Items 1 1 Fig 86 Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Slave Access Points In the Wireless LAN Controller gt Slave AP configuration gt Slave Access Points menu a list of all APs found with the wizard is displayed You will see an entry with a parameter set for each access point Location Name IP Ad dress LAN MAC Address Channel Search Channel Status Action Choose whether the selected Access Pont is to be managed by the WLAN Controller by clicking the e but ton or the button in the Action column You can disconnect the Access Point from the WLAN Controller and therefore remove it from your WLAN infrastructure by click on the button The Access Point then receives the Discovered status but is no longer Managed Click on the START button under Channel reallocation in order to reassign any assigned channels e g when a new access point has been added Possible values for Status Status Meaning Discovered The AP has registered at the wireless LAN controller The con troller has prompted the required parameters from the AP Initialising The WLAN controller and t
479. s Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 18 4 2 DHCP Configuration To activate your device as a DHCP server you must first define IP address pools from which the IP addresses are distributed to the requesting clients A list of all configured IP address pools is displayed in the Local Services gt DHCP Server DHCP Configuration menu In the list for each entry you have the possibility under Status of enabling or disabling the configured DHCP pools Note In the ex works state the DHCP pool is preconfigured with the IP addresses 192 168 0 10 to 192 168 0 49 and is used if there is no other DHCP server available in the network 18 4 2 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the icon to edit exist ing entries IP Pool Configuration DHCP Configuration IP MAC Binding DHCP Relay Settings Basic Parameters Interface Select one v IP Pool Name Notyet defined v Pool Usage Local v Advanced Settings Gateway Use router as gateway v Lease Time 120 Minutes Option Value DHCP Options q Add oK Cancel Fig 171 Local Services gt DHCP Server DHCP Configuration gt New The Local Services gt DHCP Server DHCP Configura
480. s a relatively new and very fast al gorithm Please note that the description of the encryption and authentic 16 VPN 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description ation or the hash algorithms is based on the author s knowledge and opinion at the time of creating this User Guide In particular the quality of the algorithms is subject to relative aspects and may change due to mathematical or cryptographic develop ments DH Group Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters The Diffie Hellman group defines the parameter set used as the basis for the key calculation during phase 1 MODP as sup ported by Teldat devices stands for modular exponentiation Possible values e 1 768 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation mod ular exponentiation at 768 bits is used to create the encryption material e 2 1024 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1024 bits is used to create the en cryption material e 5 1536 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1536 bits is used to create the en cryption material Lifetime Create a lifetime for phase 1 keys As for RFC 2407 the default value is eight hours which means the key must be renewed once eight hours have elapsed The following options are available for defining the Lifetime e Input in Seconds Enter the lifetime for phase 1 key in seconds The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default
481. s in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Monitored Interface Select the interface on your device that is to be monitored 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Trigger Select the state or state transition of Monitored Interface that is to trigger a particular Interface Action Possible values e Interface goes up default value e Interface goes down Interface Action Select the action that is to follow the state or state transition defined in Trigger The action is applied to the Interface s selected in Interface Possible values e Enable default value Activation of interface s e Disable Deactivation of interface s Interface Select the interface s for which the action defined in Interface is to be performed You can choose all physical and virtual interfaces as well as op tions All PPP Interfaces and All IPSec Interfaces 18 6 3 Temperature Devices from the WI series are fitted with a temperature sensor This is located on the main board under the first WLAN card The sensor measures the current temperature Its measurement range is from 55 to 125 C with an accuracy of less than 1 C In addition the minimum and maximum temperatures reached are shown together with the times at which they were reached These values are cleared and refilled upon rebooting the device Lower and upper limits are set for the temperature by default overstepping these sets an alert variable and gene
482. s protection mechanisms such as NAT CLID PAP CHAP access lists etc Software code containing all a device s functions This code is writ ten to a PROM programmable read only memory and is retained there even after the device is switched off Firmware can be up dated by the user when a new software version is available firmware upgrade Describes the last part of a name on the Internet For www t com de the first level domain is de and in this case stands for Germany The flash key on a telephone is the R button R stands for Ruckfrage inquiry The key interrupts the line briefly to start certain functions such as inquiries via the PBX Performance feature of a PBX for diverting calls on the destination telephone Fragmentation Frame Frame relay Freecall FTP Full duplex Function keys G 991 1 G 991 2 G 992 1 G 992 1 Annex A G 992 1 Annex B G SHDSL Gateway Half duplex Handheld unit Hands free Process by which an IP datagram is divided into small parts in order to meet the requirements of a physical network The reverse pro cess is known as reassembly Unit of information sent via a data connection A packet switching method that contains smaller packets and fewer error checks than traditional packet switching methods such as X 25 Because of its properties frame relay is used for fast WAN connections with a high density of traffic Telephone number Previous service 0130 These
483. s the requirements in an Additional Traffic Filter IPSec phase 2 ne gotiation begins and data traffic is transferred over the tunnel Note The parameter Additional Traffic Filter is exclusively relevant for the initiator of the IPSec connection it is only used for outgoing traffic Note Please note that the phase 2 policies must be configured identically on both of the IPSec tunnel endpoints 16 1 1 IPSec Peers An endpoint of a communication is defined as peer in a computer network Each peer of fers its services and uses the services of other peers A list of all configured IPSec Peers is displayed in the VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers menu IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase 2 Profiles XAUTH Profiles IP Pools Options Internet Key Exchange Version 1 IKEv1 CC oa Prio Description Peer Address PeeriD Phase iProfle Phase 2Profle Status Action Internet Key Exchange Version 2 IKEv2 view 20 pero rnern None equal YP Prio Description Peer Address PeeriD_ PhaseProfle Phase 2Profe Status Action EXA AI EAT IA SE A Page 1 Fig 138 VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers Peer Monitoring The menu for monitoring a peer is called by selecting the A button for the peer in the peer list See Values in the IPSec Tunnels list on page 459 16 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up more IPSec peers LAN and Industrial WLAN IPSec Peers Phase 1 Profiles Phase
484. se the Fay icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional pings Hosts Interfaces Temperature Ping Generator Basic Parameters Destination IP Address Source IP Address Specific v Interval 10 Seconds Trials 3 oK Cancel Fig 180 Local Services gt Surveillance gt Ping Generator gt New The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Ping Generator gt New consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Destination IP Address Enter the IP address to which the ping is automatically sent Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP echo request packets Possible values e Automatic The IP address is determined automatically e Specific default value Enter the IP address in the adja cent input field e g to test a particular extended route Interval Enter the interval in seconds during which the ping is sent to the address specified in Remote IP Address Possible values are 1 to 65536 Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description The default value is 10 Trials Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address as Unreacheable applies The default value is 3 18 7 Teldat Discovery 18 7 1 Device Discovery The Teldat Discovery protocol is used to identify and configure Teldat access points that are in the same wired network as your device Once an access point has been
485. sed for data traffic to the connection partner If encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it otherwise a connection cannot be set up Possible values e None default value Encryption is not used O SIAC PUSES TAC e MPPC Microsoft Point to Point Compression LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This is re commended for leased lines PPTP and L2TP connections The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the IP Options menu Field Description OSPF Mode Select whether and how routes are propagated via the interface and or OSPF protocol packets are sent Possible values e passive default value OSPF is not activated for this inter face i e no routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this interface Networks reachable over this inter face are however included when calculating the routing in formation and propagated over active interfaces e Active OSPF is activated for this interface i e routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this interface 16 VPN Teldat GmbH
486. sentation Telephone number display of calling party Abbreviation for Calling Line Identification Restriction Temporary suppression of the transmission of the calling party s telephone number Connected Line Identification Restriction suppress B telephone number This performance feature permits or suppresses the dis play of the called subscriber s telephone number If display of the B telephone number is suppressed your telephone number is not transmitted to the caller when you take a call Example You have set up call diversion to another terminal If this terminal has activ ated suppression of the B telephone number the calling party does not see a telephone number on the terminal display Glossary Combination device Conference call Configuration Man ager Configuration of the PBX with the PC Configuration of the PBX with the tele phone Connection of ana logue terminals Connection of ISDN terminals CRC CTI D channel Teldat GmbH If an analogue terminal connection of the PBX is set up as a multi functional port for combination devices all calls are received re gardless of the service In the case of trunk prefixes using codes the service ID Analogue Telephony or Telefax Group 3 can also be transmitted regardless of the configuration of the analogue con nection If O is dialled the service ID Analogue Telephony is also transmitted Performance feature of a PBX Several internal su
487. sful You are now in the SNMP shell To leave the SNMP shell after completing the configuration enter exit and press Return 5 3 Configuration options This chapter first offers an overview of the various tools you can use for configuration of your device You can configure your device in the following ways e GUI e Assistant SNMP shell commands The configuration options available to you depend on the type of connection to your device bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration Types of connections and configurations Type of connection Possible types of configuration LAN Assistant GUI shell command Serial connection Shell command Therefore several types of configuration are available for each type of connection Note To change the device configuration you must log in with the user name admin If you do not know the password you cannot make any configuration settings This applies to all types of configuration 5 3 1 GUI for advanced users GUI is a web based graphic user surface that you can use from any PC with an up to date Web browser via an HTTP or HTTPS connection With the GUI you can perform all the configuration tasks easily and conveniently It is integ rated in your device and is available in English If required other languages can be down loaded from the download area of www teldat de and installed on your device The settings you make with the GUI are ap
488. ss Enter the mail address to be entered in the sender field of the E mail SMTP Server Enter the address IP address or valid DNS name of the mail server to be used for sending the mails The entry is limited to 40 characters SMTP Authentication Authentication expected by the SMTP server Teldat GmbH 20 External Reporting Field Description Possible values None default value The server accepts and send emails without further authentication e ESMTP The server only accepts e mails if the router logs in with the correct user name and password e SMTP after POP The server requires that e mails are called via POP3 by the sending IP with the correct POP3 user name and password before sending an e mail User Name Only if SMTP Authentication ESMTP or SMTP after POP Enter the user name for the POP3 or SMTP server Password Only if SMTP Authentication ESMTP or SMTP after POP Enter the password of this user POP3 Server Only if SMTP Authentication SMTP after POP Enter the address of the server from which the e mails are to be retrieved POP3 Timeout Only if SMTP Authentication SMTP after POP Enter how long the router must wait after the POP3 call before it is forced to send the alert mail The default value is 600 seconds Fields in the SMS Parameters menu only for RS120wu RS230au and RS230bu Field Description SMS Device You can receive notification of system alerts in text messages Se
489. ss Rules gt Access Filter 12 5 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries To configure access fitters select the New but ton bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment Basic Parameters Description Service User defined v Protocol Any v Destination IP Address Netmask Any v Any v Source IP Address Netmask DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 ignore y COS Filter 802 1 piLayer 2 ignore Y oK Cancel _ Fig 113 Networking gt Access Rules gt Access Filter gt New The Networking gt Access Rules gt Access Filter gt Newmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the filter Service Select one of the preconfigured services The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following O Cctv apple gt auth e charge o elleme d e daytime e dhcp e discard The default value is User defined Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches any protocol Type Only if Protocol TCMP bintec WLAN Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description Possible values e Any e Echo reply e Destination unreachable e Source quench e Redirect e Echo e Time exceeded e Timestamp e Timestamp reply The default value is Any See RFC 792 Connection State Only if Protocol TCP You can def
490. start of the connection and a message at the end of the connection These start and end messages also contain statistical information about the connection IP address user name throughput costs Teldat GmbH 7 System Management RADIUS packets The following types of packets are sent between the RADIUS server and your device client Packet types Field Value ACCESS_REQUEST Client gt Server If an access request is received by your device a request is sent to the RADIUS server if no corresponding connection part ner has been found on your device ACCESS_ACCEPT Server gt Client If the RADIUS server has authenticated the information con tained in the ACCESS_REQUEST it sends an AC CESS_ACCEPT to your device together with the parameters used for setting up the connection ACCESS_REJECT Server gt Client If the information contained in the ACCESS_REQUEST does not correspond to the information in the user database of the RADIUS server it sends an ACCESS_REJECT to reject the connection ACCOUNTING_START Client gt Server If a RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message to the RADIUS server at the start of each connection ACCOUNTING_STOP Client gt Server If a RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message to the RADIUS server at the end of each connection A list of all entered RADIUS servers is displayed in the System Management gt R
491. start the configuration you should gather the data for the following purposes e IP configuration obligatory if your device is in the ex works state Note bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n do not sup port WDS Bridge Links or Client Mode e Optional Configuration of a wireless network connection in Access Point mode e Optional Configuration of client links in Client Links mode e Optional Configuration of bridge links in Bridge mode The following table shows examples of possible values for the necessary data You can enter your personal data in the Your values column so that you can refer to these values bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 4 Basic configuration later when needed If you configure a new network you can use the given example values for IP addresses and netmasks In cases of doubt ask your system administrator Basic configuration For a basic configuration of your gateway you need information that relates to your net work environment IP configuration of the access point Access data Example value Your values IP address of your access point 192 168 0 252 Netmask of your access point 255 255 255 50 Access Point mode If you run your device in Access Point mode you can set up the required wireless net works To do this you need the following data Configuration of a wireless network Access data Example value Your values Network Name SSID d
492. ste water lines are damaged you may endanger your life or damage property e Screw the mount to the wall with the 2 screws e Hang the device in the mount with the screw nut but do not tighten it Make sure the device connections are accessible e Protect the device against theft with the lock supplied Fig 19 Wall mounting of the bintec WIx065n standard design and with theft protection 3 4 2 Connectors All the connections are located on the underside of the device bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n have two Ethernet ports and a serial interface The connections are arranged as follows bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 3 Installation cia CJ ff 1 2 34 5 6 7 Fig 20 Underside bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n Underside of bintec WI1065n and bintec WI2065n 1 Power 24 V DC Socket for power supply 2 Eth1 PoE Eth2 10 100 Base T Ethernet interfaces 3 HW Reset button performs restart 4 Cfg Deletes the configuration 5 SFP SFP slot for 100 Mbit s fibre module optional 6 Serial Serial interface RS232 7 Relay N O Alarm relay contact 3 4 3 Antenna connectors Note The three antenna for devices bintec WI1065n have 2 Transmit and 3 Receive func tions in n operating mode MIMO 2T3R WLAN 1 Ant 1 and WLAN 1 Ant send and re ceive Ant 3 only receives For devices bintec WI2065
493. system telephone enable call requests to be stored during absence Calling party number Number of the calling terminal CAPI CAST Common ISDN Application Programming Interface A 128 bit encryption algorithm with similar functionality to DES See Teldat GmbH CBC CCITT CD Call Deflection Central speeddial memory Certificate Channel Bundling CHAP Checksum field CLID Client CLIP CLIR COLR Glossary Block Cipher Modes Cipher Block Chaining Consultative Committee for International Telegraphy and Telephony The forwarding of calls This performance feature enables you to forward a call without having to take it yourself If you forward a call to an external subscriber you bear any connection costs from your connection to the destination of the forwarded call This feature can therefore be used by system telephones and ISDN telephones that support this function see user s guide for terminals For more in formation on using this performance feature with the telephone please see the user s guide Performance feature of a PBX Telephone numbers are stored ina PBX and can be called from every connected telephone using a key combination Certificate Channel bundling Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Frame Check Sequence FCS Calling Line Identification A client uses the services provided by a server Clients are usually workstations Abbreviation for Calling Line Identification Pre
494. t The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Policy Select the interpretation of the TACACS response Possible values e Non authoritative default value The TACACS serv ers are queried in order of their priority see Priority until a positive response is received or a negative response has been received from an authoritative server e Authoritative A negative response to a request is accep ted i e a request is not sent to another TACACS server The device s internal user administration is not turned off by TACACS It is checked after all TACACS servers have been queried TCP Port Shows the default TCP port 49 used for the TACACS pro tocol The value cannot be changed Timeout Enter time in seconds for which the NAS is to wait for a re sponse from TACACS If a response is not received during the wait time the next con figured TACACS server is queried only if Policy Non authoritative and the status of the current server is set to Blocked The possible values are 1 to 60 the default value is 3 Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description Block Time Enter the time in seconds for which the status of the current server shall remain blocked When the block has ended the server is set to the status spe cified in the Entry active field The possible values are 0 to 3600 the default value is 60 The value 0 means
495. t ted temporarily when the data rate permitted for this queue has been reached Possible values are 0 to 64000 The default value is 0 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Dropping Algorithm Choose the procedure for rejecting packets in the QoS queue if the maximum size of the queue is exceeded Possible values Teldat GmbH 12 Networking Field Description e Tail Drop default value The newest packet received is dropped e Head Drop The oldest packet in the queue is dropped e Random Drop A randomly selected packet is dropped from the queue Congestion Avoidance Enable or disable preventative deletion of data packets RED Packets which have a data size of between Min queue size and Max queue size are preventively dropped to prevent queue overflow RED Random Early Detection This proced ure ensures a smaller long term queue size for TCP based data traffic so that traffic bursts can also usually be transmitted without large packet losses The function is activated with Enabled The function is disabled by default Min queue size Enter the lower threshold value for the process prevention of data congestion RED in bytes Possible values are 0 to 262143 The default value is 0 Max queue size Enter the upper threshold value for the process prevention of data congestion RED in bytes Possible values are 0 to 262143 The d
496. t no address is specified The entry can also start with the wildcard e g teldat de If a name is entered without a dot this is completed with OK lt Name gt after confirmation Entries with spaces are not allowed In this entry select the type of response to DNS requests Possible values e Negative A DNS request for DNS Hostname gets a negat ive response e Positive default value A DNS request for DNS Host name is answered with the related IP Address e None A DNS request is ignored no answer is given Only if Response Positive Enter the IP address assigned to DNS Hostname Enter the validity period of the assignment from DNS Hostname to IP Address in seconds only relevant for Response Pos itive transmitted to requesting hosts The default value is 86400 24 h 18 1 4 Domain Forwarding In the Local Services gt DNS gt Domain Forwardingmenu a list of all configured forward ings for defined domains is displayed Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services 18 1 4 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional forwardings Global Settings DNS Servers Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Forwarding Parameters Forward Host O Domain Host Forward to O Interface DNS Server Interface Automatic v oK Cancel Fig 164 Local Services gt DNS gt Domain Forwarding gt New The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Domain Forwarding gt New consists of the following fields
497. t then config ure the TAPI interface Use the TAPI Configuration program Transmission Control Protocol Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Telecommunication connection unit Terminal equipment Terminal Endpoint Identifier Term that describes the remote copying for transmitting texts graphics and documents true to the original over the telephone net work Telematics is a combination of telecommunication and computer technology and describes data communication between systems and devices Protocol from the TCP IP protocol family Telnet enables communic ation with a remote device in the network Device for interface adaptation It enables different equipment to be connected to T ISDN The terminal adapter a b is used to connect analogue terminals to the So interface of the ISDN Basic Rate Inter face Existing analogue terminals can still be operated with tone di alling Trivial File Transfer Protocol A three way telephone call Performance feature in T Net T ISDN and your PBX Tiger 192 is a relatively new and very fast hash algorithm Transport Layer Security Multifrequency code method MFC If you receive an internal call e g from the subscriber with internal telephone number 22 while you are away this subscriber s internal bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Glossary Transmission speed TSD TTL Twofish U ADSL UDP Update Upload UPnP Upstream URL USB User guidance UU
498. t value The type of service is ignored e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit e DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decimal format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F Field Description COS Filter 802 1p Layer 2 Enter the service class of the IP packets Class of Service CoS Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 The default value is Ignore 12 5 2 Rule Chains Rules for IP filters are configured in the Rule Chains menu These can be created separ ately or incorporated in rule chains In the Networking gt Access Rules Rule Chains menu all created filter rules are listed Access Filter Rule Chains Interface Assignment View 20 per page Fitter in None v equal v Go Description Filter Action Page 1 New Fig 114 Networking gt Access Rules Rule Chains 12 5 2 1 Edit or New Choose the
499. ted via RIP and if so se lect the RIP version for receiving RIP packets over the interface in receive direction Possible values 13 Routing Protocols Teldat GmbH Field Description e None default value RIP is not enabled e RIP V1 Enables sending and receiving of version 1 RIP packets e RIP V2 Enables sending and receiving of version 2 RIP packets e RIP V1 V2 Enables sending and receiving RIP packets of both version 1 and 2 e RIP V1 Triggered RIP V1 messages are sent received and processed as per RFC 2091 triggered RIP e RIP V2 Triggered RIP V2 messages are sent received and processed as per RFC 2091 triggered RIP Route Announce Select this option if you want to set the time at which any activ ated routing protocols e g RIP are to propagate the IP routes defined for this interface Note This setting does not affect the interface specific RIP con figuration mentioned above Possible values e Up or Dormant not for LAN interfaces interfaces in Bridge mode and interfaces for leased lines Routes are propagated if the interface status is up or ready e Up only default value Routes are only propagated if the interface status is up e Always Routes are always propagated independently of op erational status 13 1 2 RIP Filter In this menu you can specify exactly which routes are to be exported or imported You can use the following strategies for this e You explicitly deactivate
500. telephone num bers have been switched to freecall 0800 since January 1 1998 File Transfer Protocol Operating mode in which both communication partners can commu nicate bidirectionally at the same time Keys on the telephone that can be assigned telephone numbers or network functions Data transmission recommendation for HDSL Data transmission recommendation for SHDSL Data transmission recommendation for ADSL See also G 992 1 An nex A and G 992 1 Annex B Data transmission recommendation for ADSL ITU T G 992 1 Annex A Data transmission recommendation for ADSL ITU T G 992 1 Annex B See G 991 2 Entrance and exit transition point Bidirectional communication method in which it is only possible to either send or receive at a particular point in time Also known as Simplex Mobile component of wireless telephone units In the event of digital transmission it is also possible to make telephone calls between the handheld units DECT If the telephone has a microphone and speaker installed you can bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH Hashing HDLC HDSL HDSL2 Headset HMAC HMAC MD5 HMAC SHA1 Holding a call Holding in the PBX Hook flash Host name Glossary conduct a call without using your hands As a result other people in the room can also participate in the call The process of deriving a number hash from a character string A hash is generally far shorter than the text
501. ter Resetting the device enables you to return your system to a pre defined initial state This may be necessary if you have made incor rect configuration settings or the device is to be reprogrammed Specifications proposals ideas and guidelines relating to the Inter net are published in the form of RFCs request for comments Rijndael AES was selected as AES due to its fast key generation low memory requirements and high level of security against attacks For more information on AES see ht tp csrc nist gov encryption aes Routing Information Protocol RipeMD 160 is a cryptographic hash function with 160 bits It is re garded as a secure replacement for MD5 and RipeMD Plug or socket for maximum eight wires Connection for digital ter minals In a multicell WLAN clients can move freely and log off from one ac cess point and log on to another when moving through cells without the user noticing this This is known as roaming To use the Room Monitoring performance feature the telephone must be activated in the room to be monitored by means of a code Glossary Room monitoring from external tele phones Room monitoring from internal tele phones Router RSA RTSP S2M interface SAD SDSL Server ServerPass Service 0190 Teldat GmbH and the receiver must be lifted or Hands free switched on If you replace the telephone receiver or turn off Hands free room mon itored ends and the
502. ter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Original Destination Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Port Range Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the destination port or the destination port range of the original data packets The default setting 411 means that the port is not specified Original Source IP Ad Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT dress Netmask Enter the source IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Original Source Port Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT NAT method symmetric Service user defined and Pro tocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the source port of the original data packets The default setting A11 means that the port remains unspecified Source Port Range Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Ser vice user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the source port or the source port range of the original data packets The default setting A11 means that the port re mains unspecified Destination IP Ad Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT or dress Netmask outgoing Source NAT and NAT method symmetric Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Destination Port Range Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NA
503. terface or Primary Rate Interface The D channel has a data transmission rate of 16 kbps In addition to the D channel each ISDN BRI has two B channels Teldat GmbH Data compression Data Link Layer Data packet Data transmission rate Datagram Datex J Day Night option Day Night Calendar DCE DCN DECT Default gateway Glossary A process for reducing the amount of data transmitted This enables higher throughput to be achieved in the same transmission time Ex amples of this technique include STAC VJHC and MPPC DLL A data packet is used for information transfer Each data packet contains a prescribed number of characters information and control characters The data transmission rate specifies the number of information units for each time interval transferred between sender and recipient A self contained data packet that is forwarded in the network with minimum protocol overhead and without an acknowledgement mechanism Abbreviation for Data Exchange Jedermann the T Online access platform Local dial in node in every local network Some German cities offer additional high speed access over T Net T Net ISDN If you want to transfer important calls made after office hours to your home office to an answering machine so that you are not disturbed you can use call assignment You can allocate each subscriber two different call allocations call assignment Day and call assignment Night With call assi
504. that the server is never set to Blocked status and thus no other servers are queried Encryption Select whether data exchange between the TACACS server and the NAS is to be encrypted with MD5 The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default If the function is not enabled the packets and all related inform ation are transferred unencrypted Unencrypted transfer is not recommended as a default setting and should only be used for debugging 7 5 3 Options This setting possible here causes your device to carry out authentication negotiation for in coming calls if it cannot identify the calling party number e g because the remote terminal does not signal the calling party number If the data password partner PPP ID obtained by executing the authentication protocol is the same as the data of a listed remote terminal or RADIUS user your device accepts the incoming call RADIUS TACACS Options Global RADIUS Options Y Inband Authentication for PPP Dialin aS l Outband CLID OK Cancel Fig 53 System Management gt Remote Authentication gt Options The menu System Management gt Remote Authentication gt Options consists of the fol lowing fields 7 System Management Teldat GmbH Fields in the Global RADIUS Options menu Field Description Authentication for PPP By default the following authentication sequence is used for in Dialin coming calls with RADIUS First CLID then PP
505. the Password field bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 4 Basic configuration Teldat GmbH 4 5 Modify system password All Teldat devices are delivered with the same username and password As long as the password remains unchanged they are therefore not protected against unauthorised use Make sure you change the passwords to prevent unauthorised access to your device Proceed as follows a Go to the System Management gt Global Settings gt Passwords menu b Enter a new password for System Admin Password Enter the new password again under Confirm Admin Password c d Click OK e Store the configuration using the Save configuration button above the menu naviga tion Note the following rules on password use e The password must not be easy to guess Names car registration numbers dates of birth etc should not be chosen as passwords e The password should contain at least one character that is not a letter special character or number e The password should be at least 8 characters long e Change your password regularly e g every 90 days 4 6 Setting up a wireless network Proceed as follows to use your device as an access point 1 In GUI select the Assistants gt Wireless LAN menu 2 Follow the steps shown by the wizard The wizard has its own online help which of fers all of the information you may require 3 Store the configuration using the Save configuration button above the menu
506. the access point is to be run Possible values are all the countries configured on the device s wireless module The range of channels available for selection Channel in the Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Settings menu changes de pending on the country setting The default value is Germany Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Chapter 11 Wireless LAN Controller By using the wireless LAN controller you can set up and manage a WLAN infrastructure with multiple access points APs The WLAN controller has a Wizard which assists you in the configuration of your access points The system uses the CAPWAP protocol Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol for any communication between mas ters and slaves In smaller WLAN infrastructures with up to six APs one of the AP s assumes the master function and manages the other AP s as well as itself In larger WLAN networks a gateway e g such as a R1202 assumes the master function and manages the AP s Provided the controller has located all of the APs in its system each of these shall re ceive a new passport and configuration in succession e they are managed via the WLAN controller and can no longer be amended externally With the WLAN controller you can e automatically detect individual access points APs and connect to a WLAN network e Load the system software into the APs e Load the configuration into the APs e Monitor and manage APs Please
507. the certificate key or request Certificate is CA Certi Mark the certificate as a certificate from a trustworthy certifica ficate tion authority CA bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field Description Certificates issued by this CA are accepted during authentica tion The function is enabled with True The function is disabled by default Certificate Revocation Only for Certificate is CA Certificate True List CRL Checking Define the extent to which certificate revocation lists CRLs are to be included in the validation of certificates issued by the own er of this certificate Possible settings e Disabled No CRLs check e Always CRLs are always checked O Cally iif 2 CRE Digtrilouciem Roine is present default value A check is only carried out if a CRL Distribution Point entry is included in the certificate This can be determined under View Details in the certificate content e Use settings from superior certificate The set tings of the higher level certificate are used if one exists It is does not the same procedure is used as that described under Only if a CRL Distribution Point is present Force certificate to be Define that this certificate is to be accepted as the user certific trusted ate without further checks during authentication The function is enabled with True The function is disabled by default 1 Caution It is extremely important for
508. the import or export of certain routes The import or export of all other routes that are not listed is still allowed e You explicitly activate the import or export of certain routes In this case you must also explicitly deactivate the import or export of all other routes This is achieved using a filter for IP Address Netmask no entry this corresponds to IP address 0 0 0 0 with net mask 0 0 0 0 To make sure this filter is used last it must be placed at the lowest posi tion You configure a filter for a default route with the following values e IP Address Netmask no entry for IP address this corresponds to IP address 0 0 0 0 for netmask 255 255 255 255 A list of all RIP filters is displayed in the Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Filter menu RIP Interfaces RIP Filter RIP Options No terface Drectin Adress Nemes Sas OO O New C Ok C cancel _ Fig 121 Routing Protocols gt RIP gt RIP Filter You can use the button to insert another filter above the list entry The configuration menu for creating a new window opens You can use the button to move the list entry A dialog box opens in which you can se lect the position to which the filter is to be moved 13 1 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up more RIP filters RIP Interfaces IP Options Basic Parameters Interface None Y
509. ting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Hosts gt New consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description IP Address Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap host 20 5 Activity Monitor This menu contains the settings needed to monitor your device with the Windows tool Activity Monitor part of BRICKware for Windows Purpose The Activity Monitor enables Windows users to monitor the activities of your device Im portant information about the status of physical interfaces e g ISDN line and virtual inter faces is easily obtained with a single tool A permanent overview of the utilisation of your device is possible Method of operation A Status Daemon collects information about your device and transfers it as UDP packets to the broadcast address of the first LAN interface default setting or to an explicitly entered IP address One packet is sent per time interval which can be adjusted individually to val ues from 1 60 seconds Up to 100 physical and virtual interfaces can be monitored provided the packet size of 4096 bytes is not exceeded The Activity Monitor on your PC receives the packets and can display the information contained in them in various ways ac cording to the configuration Activate the Activity Monitor as follows e configure the relevant device s to be monitored Teldat GmbH 20 External Reporting e Start and configure the Windows application on your PC you can download B
510. tion 2 en 193 11 2 1 General esit fa te dl ft ata ete de Ub ote tt ints ate Bg E 193 11 3 Slave AP configuration 2 a a a es 195 11 3 1 Slave Access Points 2 2 ee o 196 11 3 2 Radio Profiles a 2 ee boada 200 11 3 3 Wireless Networks VSS 2 2 ee 207 11 4 MONRONING tcs ast ete o y a ria ee de A eg 214 11 4 1 Active Clients 000 a Ae ke a Bp dee A A e AO 214 11 4 2 Wireless Networks VSS 2 2 ee 215 11 4 3 Load Balancing 2 2 20 pon 2 4 215 11 4 4 Neighbor ARS doi ic Sete ab A Gok se eat 216 11 4 5 ROJUSAPS msa as es E Ae Le ee ee te 217 11 4 6 Rogue Clients gt l o 0 218 115 Maintenance AA ey kb atin Be ee fa 219 11 5 1 Firmware Maintenance 5 505585 219 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN V Chapter 12 Networking o o e 222 12 1 QUES hk end Ei e e e Gaal 222 12 1 1 IPV ROUTES S a A as ohn tl o eh eae ea on wate ee 222 12 1 2 IPv4 Routing Table poz 44 A a nh aed BO teed ah a a S 228 12 1 3 Options 2 Senne wed oe sh de he hc Sy a hid oh He ee He ich Se an 229 12 2 INA Adee LA A Sb hal bad T da Bo oe ele 230 12 2 1 NAT Interfaces 2 o eo 230 12 2 2 NAT Configuration o eo eo o o 232 12 3 Load Balancing s r ce ce aa a Ee He a 238 12 3 1 Load Balancing Groups 2 a a ee 238 12 3 2 Special Session Handling 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0008 2
511. tion gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Interface Select the interface over which the addresses defined in IP Ad dress Range are to be assigned to DHCP clients When a DHCP request is received over this Interface one of the addresses from the address pool is assigned IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH Field Description Pool Usage Specify whether the IP pool is used for DHCP requests in the same subnet or for DHCP requests that have been forwarded to your device from another subnet In this case it is possible to define IP addresses from another network Possible values e Local default value The DHCP pool is only used for DHCP requests in the same subnet e Relay The DHCP pool is only used for DHCP requests for warded from other subnets e Local Relay The DHCP pool is used for DHCP requests in the same subnet and from other subnets The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Gateway Select which IP address is to be transferred to the DHCP client as gateway Possible values e Use router as gateway default value Here the IP ad dress defined for the Interface is transferred e No gateway No IP address is sent e Specify Enter the corresponding IP address
512. tions where you are drilling If gas electricity water or waste water lines are damaged you may endanger your life or damage property e Screw the mount to the wall or ceiling Hang the device in the mount with the screw nut but do not tighten it Make sure the device connections are accessible e If desired protect the device against theft with a Kensington lock 8 bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Fig 4 Ceiling of bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n 3 1 2 Connectors All the connections are located on the underside of the device bintec W1003n has an Ethernet port bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n have two Ethernet ports The connections are arranged as follows Fig 5 Underside bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Underside of bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Reset button performs restart base plate of the device 1 RESET 2 ETH1 PoE und ETH2 10 100 1000 Base T Ethernet interfaces In bintec W1003n only ETH1 is available bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN fe 3 Installation Teldat GmbH 3 POWER Socket for power supply 3 1 3 LEDs The LEDs show the radio status and radio activity of your device Note Note that the number of active WLAN LEDs depends on the number of existing wire less modules The LEDs on bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n are arranged as fo
513. tivated it has the value 0 The value FFFFFFFF h stands for infinite In the PIM DM specification this timer is named S G Prune Timer Teldat GmbH Glossary 10 Base 2 100Base T 10Base T 1TR6 3DES Triple DES 802 11a g 802 11b g A subscriber a b interface AAA Access code Access list Access point Glossary Thin Ethernet connection Network connection for 10 mbps net works with BNC connector T connectors are used for the connec tion of equipment with BNC sockets Twisted pair connection Fast Ethernet Network connection for 100 mbps networks Twisted pair connection Network connection for 10 mbps networks with RJ45 connector D channel protocol used in the German ISDN Today the more com mon protocol is DSS1 See DES Specified data rates of 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 and 6 mbps anda working frequency in the range of 5 GHz for IEEE802 11a or 2 4 GHz for IEEE802 11g IEEE802 11 g can be configured to run in compliance with 11b or 11b and 11 as well One of the IEEE standards for wireless network hardware Products that meet the same IEEE standard can communicate with each oth er even if they come from different hardware manufacturers The IEEE802 11b standard specifies the data rates of 1 2 5 5 and 11 mbps a working frequency in the range of 2 4 to 2 4835 GHz and WEP encryption IEEE802 11 wireless networks are also known as Wi Fi networks The A subscriber is the caller For co
514. tive 231 MAC Address 138 397 424 MAC Address 463 466 476 477 Mail Exchanger MX 389 Maintenance 219 433 Management VID 145 Manual WLAN Controller IP Address 84 Matching String 447 Max Link Distance 149 Max number of clients hard limit 168 211 Max number of clients soft limit 168 211 Max Period Passive Scan 159 Max Period Active Scan 159 Max queue size 258 Max Scan Duration 185 Max Transmission Rate 154 203 Maximum Number of Dialup Retries 300 305 Maximum Retries 349 Maximum Groups 286 Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries 84 Maximum Number of Accounting Log Entries 84 Maximum Sources 286 Maximum E mails per Minute 450 Maximum Number of Syslog Entries 84 Maximum number of concurrent connec tions 102 Maximum Response Time 283 Maximum Time between Retries 349 Index Maximum TTL for Negative Cache Entries 377 Maximum TTL for Positive Cache Entries 377 Maximum Upload Speed 253 256 309 mbps 464 Members 368 374 Memory Usage 81 Message 457 Message Compression 447 Message Timeout 447 Messages 459 Metric 225 228 316 Metric Offset for Inactive Interfaces 275 Metric Offset for Active Interfaces 275 MIB Variables 405 MIB SNMP Variable to add edit 405 Min Period Passive Scan 159 Min Period Active Scan 159 Min queue size 258 Minimum Time between Retries 349 MobIKE 321 Mode 121 134 177 226 230 269 283 286 325 328 341 Mode
515. to be used for this wireless network The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default VLAN ID Enter the number that identifies the VLAN Possible values are 2 to 4094 VLAN ID 1 is not possible as it is already in use 11 4 Monitoring This menu is used to monitor your WLAN infrastructure 11 4 1 Active Clients Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Rogue Clients Automatic Refresh Interval bo Seconds Apply View 20 per page Fitter in None wv equal v Go Location Slave AP Name SS Client MAC Client IP Address Signal Noise dBm Status Uptime Page 1 Fig 92 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Active Clients In the Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring gt Active Clients menu current values of all active clients are displayed For each client you will see an entry with the following parameter set Location Name VSS Client MAC Client IP Address Signal Noise dBm Status Uptime Possible values for Status Status Meaning None The client is no longer in a valid status Logon The client is currently logging on with the WLAN Associated The client is logged on with the WLAN Authenticate The client is in the process of being authenticated Status Meaning Authenticated The client is authenticated 11 4 2 Wireless Networks VSS Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs
516. to the client technology and operates according to either 802 11b or 802 119 e 802 11 mixed long b g Your device adapts to the cli ent technology and operates according to either 802 11b or 802 11g Only a data rate of 1 and 2 mbps needs to be sup ported by all clients basic rates This mode is also needed for Centrino clients if connection problems occur e 802 11 mixed short b g Your device adapts to the client technology and operates according to either 802 11b or 802 11g The following applies for mixed short The data rates 5 5 and 11 mbps must be supported by all clients basic rates e 802 11b g n Your device operates according to either 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n e 802 11g n Your device operates according to either 802 11g or 802 11n e 802 11n Your device operates only according to 802 11n Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description In Operation Mode Access Client with Client Mode Ad Hoc additional options are available for Operation Band 5 GHz Indoor 5 GHz Outdoor 5 GHz In Outdoor 5 8 GHz Outdoor Possible values e 802 11a The device operates only in accordance with 802 11a e 802 11n Your device operates only according to 802 11n e 802 11a n Your device operates according to either 802 11a or 802 11n e 802 11a b g n display only Only in Operation Mode Ac cess Client with Client Mode Infrastructure Max Transmission Not available for bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec Rate
517. trustworthy by selecting the checkbox in the Static Blacklist column The block on the client does not then end automatically rather you need to lift it manually Delete You can delete entries with the symbol 11 4 6 1 New Choose the Newbutton to configure additional blacklist entries Active Clients Wireless Networks VSS Client Management Neighbor APs Rogue APs Rogue Clients New Blacklist Entry Rogue Client MAC Address ae Network Name SSID Select one e OK Cancel Fig 98 Wireless LAN Controller gt Monitoring Rogue Clients New The menu consists of the following fields Fields in the New Blacklist Entry menu Field Description Rogue Client MAC Ad Enter the MAC address of the client you intend to include in the dress static blacklist Network Name SSID Pick the wireless network you want to exclude the rogue client from 11 5 Maintenance This menu is used for the maintenance of your managed APs 11 5 1 Firmware Maintenance Firmware Maintenance Managed Access Points Update firmware Select all Location Device IP Address LAN MAC Address Firmware Version Status Deselect all Action Update system software v Source Location HTTP server v URL OK UC Cancel __ Fig 99 Wireless LAN Controller gt Maintenance gt Firmware Maintenance In the Wireless LAN Controller gt Maintenance gt Firmware Maintenance menu a list of bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 11 Wireless
518. tter in None equal Y Go Fig 37 Filter list Structure of the GUI configuration menu The menus of the GUI contain the following basic structures GUI Menu architecture Basic configuration When you select a menu from the navigation bar the menu of menu list basic parameters is displayed first In a sub menu containing several pages the menu containing the basic parameters is dis Teldat GmbH 5 Access and configuration played on the first page The menu contains either a list of all the configured entries or the basic settings for the function concerned Sub menu The New button is available in each menu in which a list of all New the configured entries is displayed Click the button to display the configuration menu for creating a new list entry Sub menu Click this button to process the existing list entry You go to the ra configuration menu Menu Click this tab to display extended configuration options Advanced Settings The following options are available for the configuration GUI configuration elements Input fields e g empty text field Text field with hidden input e Enter the data Radio buttons e g Address Mode static DHCP Select the corresponding option Checkboxes e g activation by selecting checkbox C Enabled Selection of several possible options Encryption Algorithms El 3pes MBlowtish Y AES 128 C AES 256 Hashing Algorithms IMDS VI SHA 1 IVI RipeMD160
519. ttings in the Day and Night team call assignment Reject Call Through is a dial in via an external connection to the PBX with the call put through from the PBX via another external connection Busy on busy The Call Waiting performance feature means that other people can contact you during a telephone call If another subscriber calls while you are on the telephone you hear your telephone s call waiting tone You can then decide whether to continue with your first call or speak to the person whose call is waiting If you do not want to use the call waiting feature you switch on call waiting protection If you are taking a call a second caller hears the engaged tone Performance feature in T ISDN PBXs and T Net A connection is set up automatically as soon as the Busy status on the destination connection ends When the connection is free this is signalled to the caller As soon as the caller lifts the receiver the connection is set up automatically However Callback must first be activated by the caller on his or her terminal You call a subscriber who does not pick up With Callback on no reply this is not a problem for you because with this special fea ture you can set up the connection without having to redial If you are not on the telephone yourself a new connection with the sub scriber is set up for a maximum of 180 minutes Number of the terminal called Special feature telephones such as the T Concept PX722
520. tus information for all PIM interfaces Teldat GmbH 21 Monitoring Global Status Not Interface Specific Status Interface Specific States View All v 4 RP States View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Rendevous Point IP Address Upstream Join State Upstream Neighbor IP Address Uptime Upstream Join Timer Page 1 6 States View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Multicast Group Address Upstream Neighbor IP Address Reverse Path Forwarding RPF Upstream Join State Uptime Upstream Join Timer Page 1 5 6 States view 20 per page Filter in None equal v Go Multicast Group Address Source IP Address Upstream Neighbor IP Address Upstream Join State Uptime Upstream Join Timer Shortest Path Tree Page 1 S G RPT States View 20 per page Filter in None v equal v Go Multicast Group Address Source IP Address Reverse Path Forwarding RPF Uptime Upstream Override Timer Page 1 Fig 221 Monitoring PIM Not Interface Specific Status Values in the Not Interface Specific Status list Field Description View Select the desired view from the dropdown menu Are available A11 RP States G States S G States and S G RPT States Values in the RP States list Field Description Rendevous Point IP Displays the IP address of the Rendezvous Point RP for the Address group Upstream Join State The Upstream RP Join Prune Status indicates the status of the Upstream RP State
521. u can also optimise voice transmission here for telephone calls over the Inter net 15 1 Internet Dialup In this menu you can set up Internet access or dialup connections To enable your device to set up connections to networks or hosts outside your LAN you must configure the partners you want to connect to on your device This applies to outgoing connections your device dials its WAN partner and incoming connections a remote part ner dials the number of your device If you want to set up Internet access you must set up a connection to your Internet Service Provider ISP For broadband Internet access your device provides the PPP over Ethernet PPPoE and PPP over PPTP protocols Note Note your provider s instructions All the entered connections are displayed in a list which contains the Description the User Name the Authentication and the current Status The Status field can have the following values Possible values for Status Field Description connected a not connected dialup connection connection setup possible a not connected e g because of an error during setup of an out going connection a renewed attempt is only possible after a specified number of seconds o administratively set to down deactivated connection setup not possible for leased lines 15 WAN Teldat GmbH Authentication If a call is received PPP authentication is carried out with the connection partner depend ing
522. ubnet has two hosts with the IP addresses 192 168 46 1 and 192 168 46 2 To be able to exchange data packets with the first subnet your device uses the IP address 192 168 42 3 for example and 192 168 46 3 for the second subnet The netmasks for both subnets must also be indicated 9 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create virtual inter faces Interfaces Basic Parameters Based on Ethernet Interface Selectone Address Mode static O DHCP IP Address Netmask IP Address Netmask PA A k Add Interface Made Ountagged Y Tagged VLAN MAC Address 00 30 13 Muse built in VLAN ID f Advanced Settings Proy ARP DEnabled TCP MSS Clamping DEnabled OK Cancel Fig 63 LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces gt j New The LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Based on Ethernet In This field is only displayed if you are editing a virtual routing in terface terface bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH 9 LAN Field Description Select the Ethernet interface for which the virtual interface is to be configured Address Mode Select how an IP address is assigned to the interface Possible values e Static default value The interface is assigned a static IP address in IP Address Netmask DHCP An IP address is assigned to the interfa
523. ue System Name Location Contact Maximum Number of Syslog Entries Enter the system name of your device This is also used as the PPP host name A character string with a maximum of 255 characters is pos sible The device type is entered as the default value Enter the location of your device Enter the relevant contact person Here you can enter the e mail address of the system administrator for example A character string with a maximum of 255 characters is pos sible The default value is TELDAT Enter the maximum number of syslog messages that are stored internally in the device Possible values are 0 to 1000 Teldat GmbH 7 System Management Field VENTO The default value is 50 You can display the stored messages in Monitoring gt Internal Log Maximum Message Select the priority of system messages above which a log Level of Syslog Entries should be created System messages are only recorded internally if they have a higher or identical priority to that indicated e all messages generated are recorded at Debug syslog level Possible values e Emergency Only messages with emergency priority are re corded e Alert Messages with emergency and alert priority are recor ded e Critical Messages with emergency alert and critical prior ity are recorded e Error Messages with emergency alert critical and error pri ority are recorded e Warning Messages with emergency alert critic
524. ueries are initially rejected If the cli ent cannot find another wireless network and therefore repeats its query the connection is accepted Queries are only definit ively rejected when the Max number of clients hard limit is reached The value of the Max number of clients soft limit must be the same as or less than that of the Max number of clients hard limit The default value is 28 You can disable this function if you set Max number of clients soft limit and Max number of clients hard limit to identical values Client Band select Not all devices support this function This function requires a dual radio setup where the same wire less networkis configured on both radio modules but in different frequency bands The Client Band select option enables clients to be moved from the frequency band originally selected to a less busy one providing the client supports this To achieve a changeover the connection attempt of a client is initially refused so that the cli ent repeats the attempt in a different frequency band Possible values 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description e Disabled optimized for fast roaming default value The function is not used for this VSS This is useful if clients are to switch between different radio cells with as little delay as possible e g with Voice over WLAN e 2 4 GHz band preferred Preference is given to accept ing clients in the 2 4 GHz band e 5 GH
525. uiry brokering and three party conference Remote Authentication Dial In User Service Rate Adaptive Digital Subscriber Line Remote access service Hardware clock with buffer battery Function for controlling the volume in the telephone receiver Reconnection on the For a point to multipoint connection enables the terminal connec bus parking tion to be reconnected to another ISDN socket during the telephone call bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN Teldat GmbH Glossary Recording telephone Performance feature of an answering machine Enables a conversa calls Remote Remote access Remote CAPI tion to be recorded during the telephone call Remote as opposed to local Opposite to local access see Remote bintec s own interface for CAPI Remote diagnosis re Some terminals and PBXs are supported and maintained by T mote maintenance Remote query Repeater Reset RFC Rijndael AES RIP RipeMD 160 RJ45 Roaming Room monitoring acoustic Service support offices over the telephone line which often means a service engineer does not have to visit the site Answering machine function Involves listening to messages re motely usually in connection with other options such as deleting messages or changing recorded messages A device that transmits electrical signals from one cable connection to another without making routing decisions or carrying out packet filtering See Bridge and Rou
526. ule 3 external antenna WLAN 1 Ant 1 WLAN 1 Ant 2 WLAN 1 Ant 3 Two internal wireless modules 4 external antenna WLAN 1 Ant 1 WLAN 1 Ant 2 WLAN 2 Ant 1 WLAN 2 Ant 2 Dimensions and weights Equipment dimensions without cable 220 mm x 185 mm x 42 mm without feet bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 3 Installation Property WxLxH Weight LEDs Power consumption of the device Voltage supply Protection against theft Temperature sensor Environmental requirements Storage temperature Operating temperature Relative atmospheric humidity Room classification Available interfaces Serial interface V 24 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LAN Relay Optical interface Teldat GmbH Value approx 1 200 g with WLAN modules bintec WI1040n 6 1x Failure 1x Status 3x WLAN 2x Ethernet 1x SFP bintec WI2040n 7 1x Failure 1x Status 3x WLAN 2x Ethernet 1x SFP 5 24 Watt depending on extensions Earth conductor connection to earth 5 20W All devices must be earthed 24 V 30 DC 1 1 A with reverse voltage protec tion insulated 3 pole PoE on Ethernet 1 Class 0 insulated with max two WLAN modules Theft protection is available as an option Temperature monitoring and software controlled actions possible 40 C to 85 C 25 C to 70 C 10 to 95 non condensing Operate only in dry rooms Permanently installed supports Baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600
527. ult Negative Cache Select whether the negative dynamic cache is to be activated i e whether queried names for which a DNS server has sent a negative response are stored as negative entries in the cache The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Cache Size Enter the maximum total number of static and dynamic entries Once this value is reached the dynamic entry not requested for the longest period of time is deleted when a new entry is added Cache Size is reduced by the user dynamic entries are deleted if necessary Statistical entries are not deleted Cache Size cannot be set to lower than the current number of static entries Possible values 0 1000 The default value is 100 Maximum TTL for Pos Enter the value to which the TTL is to be set for a positive dy itive Cache Entries namic DNS entry in the cache if its TTL is 0 or its TTL exceeds the value for Maximum TTL for Positive Cache Entries The default value is 86400 Maximum TTL for Neg Enter the value set to which the TTL is to be set in the case of a ative Cache Entries negative dynamic entry in the cache The default value is 86400 Fallback interface to Select the interface to which a connection is set up for name get DNS server server negotiation if other name resolution attempts were not successful The default value is Automatic i e a one time connection is set up to the first suitable connection partner con
528. umber 11 ry SubjectName lt CN r1200_aw OU Support O Teldat GmBH ST Bavaria C DE amp gt IssuerName lt CN linuxCA OU Support O Teldat GmBH ST Bavaria C DE gt Validity NotBefore 2006 Sep 15th 07 07 49 GMT Notifter 2008 Sep 14th 07 07 49 GMT PublicKeyInfo Algorithm name X 509 rsaEncryption Modulus n 1024 bits 16574300073 530619299711756289853 6583 6058592284552111716307381855989730994 424195975049742 634337589053 64905029295484509982 43 448632595011570952551767 7011616656908963216398179133323977323 1877712746643 12501085550617414306630 041183 48507669050906895786617697212081811410853590733 69329733126120426693 32010609789043 4357773 Exponent e 17 bits 65537 Extensions Available key usage basic constraints KeyUsage DigitalSignature NonRepudiation KeyEncipherment BasicConstraints ci FALSE v MD5 Fingerprint EE AB 21 CB 4A 82 02 44 6C A2 F6 5E 0D 0C 65 34 SHA1 Fingerprint 77 5A 14 BC 60 17 66 56 8C F7 CC 90 C0 4E 25 19 3B D3 7B F7 Used OK CU Cancel __ Fig 54 System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt g The certificates and keys themselves cannot be changed but a few external attributes can be changed depending on the type of the selected entry The System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt 2 menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Edit parameters menu Field Description Description Shows the name of
529. unanswered for the host to be regarded as inaccessible You can use this setting to specify for example when a host is deemed to be inaccessible and that a backup device should be used Possible values are 1 to 65536 The default value is 3 Teldat GmbH 18 Local Services Field Description Action to be performed Select which Action should be run For most actions you select an Interface to which the Action relates All physical and virtual interfaces can be selected For each interface select whether it is to be enabled Enable disabled Disable default value reset Reset or the con nection restablished Redia1 With Action Monitor you can monitor the IP address that is specified under Monitored IP Address This information can be used for other functions such as the Tracking IP Address 18 6 2 Interfaces A list of all monitored hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Interfaces menu 18 6 2 1 Edit or New Choose the H icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to set up monitoring for other interfaces Hosts Interfaces Temperature Ping Generator Basic Parameters Monitored Interface Select one y Trigger Interface goes up v Interface Action Enable v Interface Select one v oK Cancel Fig 178 Local Services gt Surveillance gt Interfaces gt New The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Interfaces gt New consists of the following fields Field
530. unencrypted and potentially viewable Telnet session you can also con nect to your device via an SSH connection This is encrypted so all the remote mainten ance options can be carried out securely The following preconditions must be met in order to connect to the device via SSH e The encryption keys needed for the process must be available on the device e An SSH client must be installed on your PC Encryption keys First of all make sure that the keys for encrypting the connection are available on your device 1 Log in to one of the types already available on your device e g via Telnet for login bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 5 Access and configuration 2 3 Teldat GmbH see Login on page 65 Enter update i for the input prompt You are now in the Flash Management shell Call up a list of all the files saved on the device 1s al If you see a display like the one below the keys needed are already there and you can connect to the device via SSH Flash Sh gt 1s al Flags Version Length Date Name Vr xpbc B 7 1 04 2994754 2004 09 02 14 11 48 box150 srel ppc860 Vrw pl f 0 0 350 2004 09 07 10 44 14 sshd host _rsa key pub Vrw pl f 0 0 1011 2004 09 07 10 44 12 sshd host_rsa_key Vrw p1 f 0 0 01 730 2004 09 07 10 42 17 sshd host _dsa key pub Vrw pl f 0 0 01 796 2004 09 07 10 42 16 sshd host_dsa key Flash Sh gt Note The device generates a key pair for each of the algorithms RSA an
531. uns in 2 4 GHz Mode 802 11b and Mode 802 11g Usage Area Only for Operation Mode Access Client Client Mode Infrastructure and Operation Band 2 4 and 5 GHz or 5 Gz Possible values e Indoor Outdoor default value O ICOC e Outdoor IEEE 802 11d Compli Only for Operation Mode Access Client ance Select how the country information is determined Possible values e Flexible default value The system attempts to determine the country information of the access point otherwise the sys tem s own country information is used e None The system s own country information is used e Strict The country information of the access point is used Channel The number of channels you can select depends on the country setting Please consult the data sheet for your device Access Point Mode Bridge Mode Configuring the network name SSID in Access Point mode means that wireless networks can be logically separated from each other but they can still physically interfere with each other if they are operating on the same or closely adjacent wireless channels So if you are operating two or more radio networks close to each other it is advisable to allocate the networks to different channels Each of these should be spaced at least four 10 Wireless LAN Teldat GmbH Field Description channels apart as a network also partially occupies the adja cent channels In the case of manual channel selection please make sure f
532. urope based on signalling protocol DSS1 the introduction of which network operators in over 20 European countries have committed to Euro ISDN has been in troduced in Germany replacing the previous national system 1 TR6 Communication protocol for the exchange of files between two PCs over ISDN using an ISDN card file transfer or telephones or PBXs configured for this Node in the public telecommunication network We differentiate between local exchanges and remote exchanges PBXs differentiate between the following exchange access rights These can be set up differently for each subscriber in the configura tion A selected telephone number is parked in the telephone s memory It can be redialled later even if you have called other numbers in the meantime For PBXs describes the terminal e g telephone connected to the exchange Each extension can access PBX services and commu nicate with other extensions An extension is an internal number for a terminal or subsystem In point to point ISDN accesses the extension is usually a number from the extension numbers range assigned by the telephone pro vider In point to multipoint connections it can be the MSN or a part of the MSN direct dialling range The priority of the Internet provider entries is defined by the se quence in which they are entered in the list The first entry of a DSL connection is the standard access If a connection cannot be set up Teldat Gmb
533. ustomer Service The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Restore Default Set Only when you make changes to the administrative access con tings figuration are relevant access rules set up and activated You can restore the default settings with the icon 7 4 1 1 Add Select the Add button to configure administrative access for additional interfaces Access SSH SNMP Interface oK Cancel Fig 48 System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access gt Add The System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access gt Add menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Access Field Description Interface Select the interface for which administrative access is to be con figured 7 4 2 SSH Your devices offers encrypted access to the shell You can enable or disable this access in the System Management gt Administrative Access gt SSH Enabled menu standard value You can also access the options for configuring the SSH login Access SSH SNMP SSH Secure Shell Parameters SSH service active Enabled SSH Port pa Maximurn number of concurrent connections Authentication and Encryption Parameters Encryption Algorithms Mispes YU Blowfish Y AES 128 C AES 256 Hashing Algorithms imps Y sHA 1 MRipemp 160 Key Status RSA Key Status Generated DSA Key Status Not generated Generate Advanced Settings L
534. value is 14400 e Input in kBytes Enter the lifetime for phase 1 keys as amount of data processed in kBytes The value can be a whole num ber from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 The default value as per RFC is used 0 seconds and 0 Kbytes are entered Authentication Method Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the authentication method Teldat GmbH 16 VPN Field Description Possible values e Preshared Keys default value If you do not use certific ates for the authentication you can select Preshared Keys These are configured during peer configuration in the VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers The preshared key is the shared password e DSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authenticated using the DSA algorithm e RSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authenticated using the RSA algorithm e RSA Encryption In RSA encryption the ID payload is also encrypted for additional security Local Certificate Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Only for Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Signature Of RSA Encryption This field enables you to select one of your own certificates for authentication It shows the index number of this certificate and the name under which it is saved This field is only shown for authentication settings based on certificates and indicates that a certificate is essential Mode Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the phase 1 mode Possible values e Aggressive de
535. ve Status Sup O Down Description Peer 1 Peer Addre Basic Parameters Peer ID Description l Protocol Any v Internet Ke Interface Ro Source IP AddressiNetmask Network v IP Address Destination IP Address Netmask Network v Default Ro a C Apply Di Cancel Local IP AGurews rr Metric 1 amp Additional Traffic Fitter Description Protocol Src IP Mask Port Dest IP Mask Port Add Additional Traffic Filter Advanced Settings OK Cancel Fig 140 VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers gt New gt Add Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Description Enter a description for the filter Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches any protocol Source IP Address Enter if required the source IP address and netmask of the Netmask data packets Possible values e Any e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network default value Enter the network address and the related netmask Source Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the source port of the data packets The default setting bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 16 VPN Teldat GmbH Field Description A11 1 means that the port is not specified Destination IP Ad Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of dress Netmask the data packets Destination Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the destination port of the data packets The default set ting Al1 1 means
536. ve access to such a VPN which is seemingly also referred to as a VPN tunnel Normally the data transported over a VPN is encrypted A VPN allows field staff or staff working from home offices to access data on the company s network Subsidiaries can also connect to head office over VPN Various protocols are available for creating a VPN tunnel e g IPSec or PPTP The connection partner is authenticated with a password using preshared keys or certific ates With IPSec the data is encrypted using AES or 3DES for example with PPTP you can use MPPE 16 1 IPSec IPSec enables secure connections to be set up between two locations VPN This enables sensitive business data to be transferred via an unsecure medium such as the Internet The devices used function here as the endpoints of the VPN tunnel IPSec involves a num ber of Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standards which specify mechanisms for the protection and authentication of IP packets IPSec offers mechanisms for encrypting and decrypting the data transferred in the IP packets The IPSec implementation can also be smoothly integrated in a Public Key Infrastructure PKI see Certificates on page 116 IPSec implementation achieves this firstly by using the Authentication Header AH protocol and Encapsulated Security Payload ESP protocol and secondly through the use of crypto graphic key administration mechanisms like the Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol Additional
537. w name of the configuration file 19 3 Reboot 19 3 1 System Reboot In this menu you can trigger an immediate reboot of your device Once your system has restarted you must call the GUI again and log in Pay attention to the LEDs on your device For information on the meaning of the LEDs see the Technical Data chapter of the manual Note Before a reboot make sure you confirm your configuration changes by clicking the Save configuration button so that these are not lost when you reboot System Reboot Do you really wantto rebootthe system now OK p Fig 191 Maintenance gt Reboot gt System Reboot If you wish to restart your device click the OK button The device will reboot bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 20 External Reporting Teldat GmbH Chapter 20 External Reporting In this system menu you define what system protocol messages are saved on which com puters and whether the system administrator should receive an e mail for certain events Information on IP data traffic can also be saved depending on the individual interfaces In addition SNMP traps can be sent to specific hosts in case of error Moreover you can pre pare your device for monitoring with the activity monitor 20 1 Syslog Events in various subsystems of your device e g PPP are logged in the form of syslog messages system logging messages The number of messages visible depends on the level set eight steps from Emergency ove
538. witched on and that all the necessary cables are correctly connected Check the settings of the PC from which you want to configure your device see Con figuring a PC on page 52 Open a Web browser Enter http 192 168 0 252 or the IP address dynamically assigned by your DHCP server or the address statically assigned by you with the Dime Manager in the web browser s address field Enter admin in the User field and enter admin in the Password field and click LO GIN You are not in the status menu of your device s GUI see Status on page 80 5 3 1 2 Operating elements GUI window The GUI window is divided into three areas e The header e The navigation bar e The main configuration window Header Language Stendard Online Help System Passwords Date and Time System Licences Navigation bar Basic Parameters System Name wil040n Interface Mode Bridge Groups Location Administrative Access 7 Contact Maximum Number of Syslog Entries Main configuration window Maximurn Message Level of Syslog Entries Information Maximum Number of Accounting Log Entries 20 OK Cancel Fig 32 Areas of the GUI Header or X amp O hetoyi192 168 0 252 we WI2040n Fig 33 GUI header GUI header Language English y Language In the dropdown menu choose the language in which you want to display theGUI Here you can choose the lan gua
539. yer 3 network layer of the OSI model and information is routed from one network to the other Conventions for port interface names If your device has a radio port it receives the interface name WLAN If there are several ra dio modules the names of wireless ports in the user interface of your device are made up of the following parts Teldat GmbH 7 System Management a WLAN b Number of the physical port 1 or 2 Example WLAN1 The name of the Ethernet port is made up of the following parts a ETH b Number of the port Example ETH1 The name of the interface connected to an Ethernet port is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type whereby en stands for internet b Number of the Ethernet port c Number of the interface Example en 1 0 first interface on the first Ethernet port The name of the bridge group is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type whereby br stands for bridge group b Number of the bridge group Example bro first bridge group The name of the wireless network VSS is made up of the following parts Abbreviation for interface type whereby vss stands for wireless network a Number of the wireless module b Number of the interface Example vss1 0 first wireless network on the first wireless module The name of the WDS link or bridge link is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type b Number of t
540. ynamic default value Interface Select the interface to which the DNS server pair is to be as signed For Interface Mode Dynamic A global DNS server is created with the setting None For Interface Mode Static A DNS server is configured for all interfaces with the Any setting Primary DNS Server Only if Interface Mode Manual Enter the IP address of the first name server for Internet ad dress name resolution Secondary DNS Server Only if Interface Mode Manual Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative name server 18 1 3 Static Hosts A list of all configured static hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt DNS gt Static Hosts menu 18 1 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up new static hosts Global Settings DNS Servers Static Hosts Domain Forwarding Cache Statistics Basic Parameters DNS Hostname Response Positive v IP Address ooo TTL emo Seconds OK Cancel Fig 163 Local Services gt DNS gt Static Hosts gt New bintec WLAN and Industrial WLAN 18 Local Services Teldat GmbH The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Static Hosts gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description DNS Hostname Response IP Address TTL Enter the host name to which the IP Address defined in this menu is to be assigned if a positive response is received to a DNS request If a negative response is received to a DNS re ques
541. your device Checking the Windows TCP IP protocol Proceed as follows to check whether you have installed the protocol 1 Click the Windows Start button and then Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Con nections Windows XP or Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Change Adapter Settings Windows 7 2 Click on LAN Connection 3 Click on Properties in the status window 4 Look for the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry in the list of network components Installing the Windows TCP IP protocol If you cannot find the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry install the TCP IP protocol as fol lows 1 First click Properties then Install in the status window of the LAN Connection 2 Select the Protocol entry 3 Click Add 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click on OK Teldat GmbH 4 Basic configuration 5 Follow the on screen instructions and restart your PC when you have finished Allocating PC IP address Allocate an IP address to your PC as follows 1 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click Properties 2 Choose Use following IP address and enter a suitable IP address the matching net mask your default gateway and your preferred DNS server If you run a DHCP server in your network you can apply the default Windows setting Ob tain IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically Your PC should now meet all the prerequisites for configuring your device
542. your device cannot be accessed you can reset the device to the ex works standard settings using the Reset button on the bottom of the device Practically al existing configuration data will then be ignored only the current user pass words are retained Configurations stored in the device are not deleted and can if required be reloaded when the device is rebooted For bintec WI1040n and bintec WI2040n proceed as follows 1 Switch off your device 2 Press the Cfg button on your device 3 Keep the Cfg button on your device pressed down and switch the device back on 4 Look at the LEDs Initially Failure LED flashes first Hold the Cfg button until the red LED goes out and the green Status LED starts to flash Proceed as follows if you also want to reset all the user passwords to the ex works state and delete stored configurations when resetting the device 1 Set up a serial connection to your device Reboot your device and monitor the boot sequence Start the BOOTmonitor and choose the 4 Delete Configuration and fol low the instructions or 2 Set up a serial connection to your device First carry out the reset procedure de scribed and enter erase bootconfig as Login at the login prompt in the command line Leave the password empty and press the Return key The device runs through the boot sequence again You can now configure your device again as described from Basic configuration on page 48 Note If you d
543. z mode 802 11a h and mode 802 11n inside or outside build ings e 5 8 GHz Outdoor Only for so called Broadband Fixed Wireless Access BFWA applications The frequencies in the frequency range from 5755 MHz to 5875 MHz may only be used in conjunction with commercial offers for public network accesses and requires registration with the Federal Network Agency Bandwidth Not for Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Select how many channels are to be used Possible values e 20 MHz default value One channel with 20 MHz bandwidth is used e 40 MHz Two channels each with 20 MHz bandwidth are used In the case one channel acts as a control channel and the other as an expansion channel Number of Spatial Streams Select how many traffic flows are to be used in parallel Possible values e 3 Three traffic flows are used e 2 Two traffic flows are used e 1 One traffic flow is used Teldat GmbH 11 Wireless LAN Controller Fields in the menu Performance Settings Field Description Wireless Mode Select the wireless technology that the access point is to use For Operation Band 2 4 GHz In Outdoor Possible values e 802 11g The device operates only in accordance with 802 11g 802 11b clients have no access e 802 11b Your device operates only in accordance with 802 11b and forces all clients to adapt to it e 802 11 mixed b g Your device adapts to the client technology and operates according to either 802 11b
544. z band preferred Preference is given to accepting clients in the 5 GHz band Fields in the menu MAC Filter Field Description Access Control Select whether only certain clients are to be permitted for this wireless network The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Allowed Addresses Use Add to make entries and enter the MAC addresses MAC Address of the clients to be permitted Fields in the menu Advanced Settingsfor bintec W1003n bintec W2003n bintec W2003n ext and bintec W2004n Field Description Beacon Period Enter the time in milliseconds between the sending of two beacons This value is transmitted in Beacon and Probe Response Frames Possible values are 1to 65535 The default value is 100 ms DTIM Period Enter the interval for the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM The DTIM field is a data field in transmitted beacons that in forms clients about the window to the next broadcast or multic ast transmission lf clients operate in power save mode they come alive at the right time and receive the data Teldat GmbH 10 Wireless LAN Field Description Possible values are 1 to 255 The default value is 2 10 1 3 WDS Links Not available with W1003n W2003n W2003n ext and W2004n If you re operating your device in Access Point mode Wireless LAN gt WLAN gt Radio Set tings gt g gt Operation Mode Access Point you can edit the desired WDS Links o
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES para las prensas transfer Secabo Sea Gull Lighting 15163B-191 Installation Guide Cowon Systems A3 MP3 Player User Manual RÉFRIGÉRATEUR/DISTRIBUTEUR DE BIÈRE Bedienungsanleitung Data2CRM User Manual COUCHE INTERMÉDIAIRE À FAIBLES COV CHROMASYSTEMmc Adjustable Frequency AC Drive Grundfos CIU 150 Fitness Quest 284 Exercise Bike User Manual Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file